Owner’s manual

Owner’s manual MODENA 41121 - I

·

2 2 3

COM , . I T NOTTI E M MASERA RO . I C

WWW VIALE

·

A P S TI A MASER

*910042176* *910042176*

California Proposition 65 WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle

Levante

Owner's Manual Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage of its full potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle. The updated version of the onboard documentation can be consulted by accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website www.maserati.com or by using the specific apps developed for the more common Tablet and Smartphone. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving. Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operation, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: you can trust our trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all service operations are performed properly and reliably. The Quick guide and other documents contained in onboard documentation kit are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touchscreen display at your dealer of your Authorized Maserati Dealer.

2 WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.

3 4 Introduction 1

Before Starting 2

Understanding the Vehicle 3

Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4

Driving 5

In an Emergency 6

Maintenance and Care 7

Features and Specifications 8

Index 9

5 6 1 – Introduction

Consulting the Manual ...... 8 Abbreviations ...... 8 Updating ...... 9 Service and Warranty ...... 10 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle ...... 10 If You Need Assistance ...... 11 Warranty Information ...... 12 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 12 Parts Service ...... 13 Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement ...... 13 Symbols ...... 14 Warnings when Driving ...... 15 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program (available for USA and Canada only) ...... 17 Vehicle Identification Data ...... 19

7 Introduction Consulting the Manual Abbreviations 1 For an easy identification of the topics, WARNING! Some descriptions and terms with this Manual is divided into sections Failure to comply with the instructions particular meanings are found in this and chapters: each chapter can have could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS manual in abbreviated form. involving personal and vehicle safety. more paragraphs. A/C Air-Conditioning system. Within the text, important warnings and notes are also easily identifiable ABA Advanced Brake Assist. through icons. ENVIRONMENTAL! ABS Anti-Lock Braking System. This note indicates the correct ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist. behavior when using the vehicle to ACC Adaptive Cruise Control. WARNING! protect the environment. ADAS Advanced Driver Assistance California Proposition 65 Systems. Operating, servicing and maintaining AFS Advanced Frontlighting a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle CAUTION! System. can expose you to chemicals including Aimed at preventing any damage to such as, engine exhaust, carbon the vehicle and thus hazards involving ALR Automatic Locking Retractor. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that the safety of persons. AQS Air Quality Sensor. which are know to the State of ATC Automatic Temperature California to cause cancer and birth NOTE: Control. defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing Additional information regarding the AWD All-Wheel Drive. exhaust, do not idle the engine except subject and/or the operation BAS Brake Assist System. described. as necessary, service your vehicle in a BSA Blind Spot Assist. well-ventilated area and wear gloves • “Left” and “right” in this manual, BTO Brake Throttle Override. or wash your hands frequently when always refer to the driving direction. servicing your vehicle. For more CAN Controller Area Network. information go to: • All indications and images in this CC Cruise Control. Manual refer to a vehicle with www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- CRS Child Restraint System. vehicle left-hand drive. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are ordered DRL Daytime Running Lights. differently than shown in the illustrations.

8 Introduction

EBD Electronic Brake-force RKE Remote Keyless Entry. Updating Distribution. ROM Roll-Over Mitigation. Constant improvements are being 1 ECU Electronic Control Unit. SAB Side Air Bag. performed to maintain this vehicle's high level of quality. Therefore, there EDR Event Data Recorder. SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag may be differences between this EPB Electric Parking Brake. Inflatable Curtains. manual and your vehicle. ESC Electronic Stability Control. SBR Seat Belt Reminder. Maserati reserves the right to carry ETC Electronic Throttle Control. SRS Supplemental Restraint out design and functional changes FCW Forward Collision Warning. System. and to provide updates or improvements. HAS Highway Assist. TCS Traction Control System. This Owner's Manual illustrates and TFT Thin Film Transistor. HDC Hill Descent Control. describes all versions of the current HSA Hill Start Assist. TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring vehicle model. Therefore, some of the System. HBA Hydraulic Brake Assistance. equipment and accessories in this TSA Traffic Sign Assist. publication may not appear on your I.C.E. Increased Control and TSM Trailer Sway Mitigation. vehicle; please only consider the Efficiency. information related to your vehicle. LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether VIN Vehicle Identification All specifications and illustrations for CHildren. Number. contained in this manual are as of the LDW Lane Departure Warning Manual publishing date. (LaneSense). NOTE: LKA Lane Keeping Assist. The updated version of the on-board MIL Malfunction Indicator Light. documentation can be consulted by MTC+ Maserati Touch Control Plus. accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website www.maserati.com or by OBD On Board Diagnostics. using the specific apps developed for ORC Occupant Restraint the more common Tablet and Controller. Smartphone. RAB Ready Alert Braking. RCP Rear Cross Path.

9 Introduction Service and Warranty that do not comply with Maserati’s Suggestions for Obtaining 1 specifications. The information provided in this An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at Service for Your Vehicle manual is limited to instructions and your complete disposal for any indications that are strictly required information and questions you may Prepare for the Appointment for vehicle use and proper have. If warranty work is required, be sure to maintenance. have the right papers with you and By following these instructions take your warranty folder. Not all work carefully, the vehicle will meet the being performed may be covered by owner's satisfaction and best results. the warranty: therefore discuss We advise to have all service and additional charges with the service inspections completed only by an manager. It is advisable to keep a Authorized Maserati Dealer, where maintenance log of your vehicle’s you will find a specially trained staff service history, as this can often and the proper equipment to repair provide a clue to the current problem. your vehicle. Please visit the www.maserati.com to Prepare a List find the nearest Authorized Maserati Make a written list of your vehicle’s Dealer. problems or the specific work you wish All features and accessories installed to be performed. If the vehicle has had on the vehicle have been designed by an accident or work done that is not Maserati engineers and have indicated on the maintenance log, successfully passed rigorous tests, please communicate this to the service submitted in all conditions of use. advisor. Installing aftermarket components or accessories not approved by Maserati Optimize the Requests may interfere with the vehicle If there are a number of items needing electronics and compromise driving attention, it is advisable to discuss this safety and possibly voiding the with your service advisor to agree on warranty coverage. the order of priorities. Nor do the warranties cover the costs At many Authorized Dealers/Service of repairing damage or conditions Centers, it is possible to obtain a caused by any changes to your vehicle loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a

10 Introduction minimal daily charge. If you need a If You Need Assistance Contact: rental vehicle, it is advisable to make MASERATI North America, Inc. 1 these arrangements prior to the visit, The manufacturer/Maserati and its 250 Sylvan Avenue for example when you call to set the Authorized Dealers/Service Network Englewood Cliffs appointment. set highest priority to the client’s NJ 07632 satisfaction with the products and Phone: services. Maserati Customer Care Warranty service must be performed 1–877–MY-MASERATI (877–696–2737) by an Authorized Maserati or 1–201–510–2369 Dealer/Service Center. Should there be any issues, please keep in mind that most matters can be resolved with the following process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, please contact the general manager or owner of the Service Center, it is their responsibility to assist you. • If a Service Center is unable to resolve the issue, you may contact Maserati Customer Center. Any communication to the Maserati Consumer Affairs should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office). • Maserati Service Center name. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). • Vehicle delivery date and mileage.

11 Introduction Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects in addition to notifying Maserati North 1 America, Inc. Please refer to the Warranty booklet, NHTSA’s Toll-free Auto Safety Transport Canada can be contacted at: included in the Owner’s Hotline 1-800-333-0510 documentation kit, for the terms and If you believe that your vehicle has a Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 provisions of Maserati warranties Fax: 1-819-994-3372 applicable to this vehicle and market. defect which could cause a crash, injury or death, immediately inform Mailing Address: Transport Canada - the National Highway Traffic Safety Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, Administration (NHTSA) in addition to (Quebec) J8Z 0A1. notifying Maserati North America, Inc. In Canada If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it If you believe that your vehicle has a finds that a safety defect exists in a safety defect, contact the Customer group of vehicles, it may order a recall Service Department immediately. and remedy campaign. However, Canadian customers who wish to NHTSA cannot become involved in report a safety defect to the Canadian individual problems between you, your government should contact Transport dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect To contact NHTSA, you may call the Investigations and Recalls at Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-333-0510 or go to 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada

12 Introduction Parts Service Aftermarket Parts & distributed by Maserati North America, Inc. Genuine parts keep the reliability, Accessories Statement 1 comfort and performance of your new Modification of the vehicle or car unchanged throughout its life. installation of any accessory or For service and scheduled components attached to the vehicle maintenance Maserati suggests you to which alters the original engineering ask for genuine parts since they are and/or vehicle operating the result of constant research and specifications, or which result in development, reliability test and new damage to the other original technologies, as well as they are components, electrical interference, specifically designed for this vehicle. electrical short(s), radio static, water leaks and wind noise may result in damage to genuine components, compromise the safety of the vehicle and may affect the validity of the new car warranty on the vehicle. Non-genuine Maserati Parts Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while you may elect to use non-genuine Maserati parts for maintenance or repair services), Maserati North America, Inc. is not obligated to pay for repairs that include non-genuine Maserati parts or for any damage resulting from the use of non-genuine parts. Maserati will not accept any liability for any parts and accessories not approved by Maserati, including Dealer-installed accessories not

13 Introduction

Symbols Coolant expansion Battery - jack 1 There are specific colored plates on or reservoir Refer to the owner manual. near some of the components on your Do not open cap with Maserati designed to attract user’s engine warm. attention. Important warnings Coil - headlights High voltage. concerning all specific devices that the WARNING! user must consider, are reported on California Proposition 65 the internal hood cover central label Belts and pulleys Operating, servicing and maintaining (see “Vehicle Identification Data” in Moving parts, keep body a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle this section). and clothing clear. can expose you to chemicals including All symbols reported on the plate and Air-conditioning lines such as, engine exhaust, carbon inside the vehicle, as well as the High pressure gas, do not monoxide, phthalates and lead, that component for which the symbols open. which are know to the State of stand, are summarized in the California to cause cancer and birth following list. These symbols are Symbols of Prohibitions and defects or other reproductive harm. To divided into categories according to minimize exposure, avoid breathing their meaning. Compulsory Measures exhaust, do not idle the engine except Danger Symbols Battery as necessary, service your vehicle in a Keep away from flames. well-ventilated area and wear gloves Battery or wash your hands frequently when Corrosive liquid. Battery servicing your vehicle. For more Keep out of children’s information go to: Battery reach. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Explosion. Heat guards - belts - vehicle pulleys - fans Blower Do not touch. May start automatically Battery even with engine off. Wear eye protection.

14 Introduction

Warning Symbols Windshield washer fluid Warnings when Driving Engine - Engine Oil Filler reservoir Your driving skills will improve with 1 Cap Windshield washer. We experience, but be especially careful at Engine oil. We recommend recommend using a liquid the beginning. Always comply with using an oil with the with the characteristics local traffic regulations wherever you characteristics indicated in indicated in chapter drive. chapter “Refillings” in “Refillings” in section This vehicle is also suitable for off-road section “Features and “Features and use, using the dedicated controls and Specifications”. Specifications”. functions to obtain the optimum Brake fluid reservoir balance to safely face the situations Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do that this kind of route may pose. not exceed max. level. We We recommend you to start gradually WARNING! recommend using a fluid in order to acquire the necessary with the characteristics California Proposition 65 expertise and the perfect control of indicated in chapter Operating, servicing and maintaining the vehicle. Follow the indications “Refillings” in section a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle contained in chapter "Off-road Drive" “Features and can expose you to chemicals including in section “Driving” for information Specifications”. such as, engine exhaust, carbon concerning the off-road use of the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Radiator coolant expansion vehicle. which are know to the State of Failure to operate this vehicle correctly reservoir California to cause cancer and birth Use antifreeze liquid for may result in loss of control or a defects or other reproductive harm. To collision. radiators. We recommend minimize exposure, avoid breathing using a liquid with the Operating this vehicle at excessive exhaust, do not idle the engine except speed or in an altered state or while characteristics indicated in as necessary, service your vehicle in a chapter “Refillings” in intoxicated may result in loss of well-ventilated area and wear gloves control, going off the road, or section “Features and or wash your hands frequently when Specifications”. overturning. In all these situations a servicing your vehicle. For more collision with other vehicles or objects information go to: is more likely to happen with the risk www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- to cause an accident that may lead to vehicle serious injury.

15 Introduction

In case of an accident, failure to use while the vehicle is moving can be essential in any driving situation. In 1 seat belts causes the driver and very dangerous and can cause case of roll-over, the driver and the passengers a greater risk of injury or serious accidents, and in some states passengers that do not wear the death. is against the law. seat belts are more likely to be This Owner's Manual contains • It is very dangerous to send text injured than those who wear them warnings against operating procedures messages while driving, do so only correctly. that could result in a collision or injury when the vehicle is not moving. or damage to the environment. It also • In some Countries/States the use of contains cautions against procedures mobile phones when driving is CAUTION! that could damage the vehicle. If you forbidden: it is the driver’s sole If battery charge is too low, proper do not read this manual in its entirety, responsibility to respect local function of some electric/electronic you may miss important information. regulations. components may not be guaranteed. It Consider carefully all warnings and is necessary to recharge the battery in • ROLL-OVER WARNING In normal cautions. order to allow all vehicle’s components conditions, this vehicle is Important information may be missed and systems to function correctly. for not reading this manual in its characterized by a greater ground entirely. Consider carefully all clearance than the vehicles designed warnings and cautions. for road use only. This characteristic allows to deal with off-road routes as well, by maintaining all the driveability features and the WARNING! performance of a sports car, but it • It is the driver’s responsibility to makes it more prone to roll-over in operate the vehicle in a safe way: if case of loss of control. It is you are distracted while driving you important, for the safety of the can lose control and cause serious occupants and the integrity of the accidents. vehicle, to face driving situations on • Maserati strongly recommends you road and off-road avoiding severe use particular care when operating turns or leaning over and abrupt the features and tools that may maneuvers carried out at high speed distract you. that might cause the loss of control • Mobile phones, PC, portable audio of the vehicle and the possible device or other features operated roll-over. The use of seat belts is

16 Introduction Maserati Roadside Summary of Program Benefits days of the rental car transaction to and Services the address listed below; the original 1 Assistance Program pre-printed rental car receipt, which • Towing of a disabled registered (available for USA and must include your name, address, Maserati vehicle. In the event a telephone number, VIN, rental dates Canada only) registered vehicle becomes disabled and the corresponding warranty in connection to a warranty related Welcome to Maserati and the benefits repair order. concern it will be transported to the and security of the Maserati Roadside nearest Authorized Maserati Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Assistance Program. Please take a Dealership. You may request that Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. moment to review the benefits listed the vehicle be taken to a different P.O. Box 8140 Ft. below and available to you through Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long Washington, PA 19034 the Maserati Roadside Assistance as it is no more than 50 miles further Program. NOTE: away from the nearest authorized Emergency Roadside Services dealer (one tow per disablement). An authorized licensed driver must be driving at the time of the disablement. In the event you require Roadside • Battery jump start. Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802, • Flat tire change providing the Items excluded from coverage: 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. • Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of will be connected with a Roadside • Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons). towing equipment, storage fees, or Assistance representative who will • Lockout Services. any labor performed at the service dispatch a local towing vendor. • Service Loaner Vehicle: For warranty facility. Information needed for when repairs, your dealer may provide you • Any form of impound towing, or you call with a Maserati Service Loaner towing by someone other than a Vehicle (if available) or provide you licensed service station or garage. When you call, please be prepared to with Rental Car allowance: in the • Assistance from a private citizen. provide the following information: event your vehicle is disabled due to • Your Name. a warranty related concern, we will • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). reimburse you up to $50 per day. A • Location of your vehicle. five (5) day or $250 maximum applies. In order to receive • Nature of your call (for example; you reimbursement, you must supply the require a tow, vehicle will not start, following information within 20 out of gas, tire service, etc.).

17 Introduction

NOTE: • NEW VEHICLES: Your membership Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: 1 Membership is intended to cover begins on the date the Registered Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. emergencies and is not intended to be Vehicle was originally sold (in service P.O. Box 8140 a substitute for proper vehicle date) and continues until the Ft. Washington, PA 19034 maintenance or repair. Repeated calls expiration date of the New Car which are considered by Maserati Limited Warranty or unless North America, Inc. Signature Motor terminated by Maserati North Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of America, Inc. for cause. California, Inc. to be excessive may, at • PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your our discretion, result in cancellation of membership begins on the date the the membership. registered vehicle was sold (in service date) and continues until the Emergency road service providers are expiration date of the Maserati independent contractors and are not Certified Pre-Owned Limited employees, agents or representatives Warranty or unless terminated by of Maserati North America, Inc. Maserati North America, Inc for Signature Motor Club, Inc. or cause. Signature Motor Club of California, Inc. Address Inquiries to Under this Agreement General Inquiries: Maserati Roadside Assistance • You will not be required to pay any P.O. Box 968008 sum for services up to the mileage Schaumburg, IL 60173 limit on towing. Rental Car Reimbursements: • Your registered Maserati vehicle is Within 20 days of your rental car the vehicle covered. The Vehicle transaction, the original pre-printed Identification Number (VIN) that rental car receipt, which must include appears on the vehicle represents your name, address, telephone your identification number with number, VIN, rental dates and the Signature Motor Club, Inc. or corresponding warranty repair order Signature Motor Club of California, should be submitted to: Inc.

18 Introduction Vehicle Identification Data The VIN Number is also visible from the outside through the windshield on 1 Vehicle Identification Number the front left corner of the dashboard. The vehicle's identification number (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, in front of the right passenger rear seat.

Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) Label The label is applied on the lower right NOTE: side of the hood. When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, always quote the vehicle identification number. To read the number, lift the mat and rotate the guard. Warning and Identification Labels Overview label with cautions and warning notes The centrally attached label placed inside the engine hood cover displays California Preposition 65 Warning cautions, warnings, and symbols. Labels For further information refer to The label is applied on the upper left “Symbols” in this section. corner of the windshield.

19 Introduction

1

Passenger Air bag Labels Another label is applied on the Loading Information Label The labels are applied on the external dashboard indicate that air bag system This label is applied on the driver's side side of sun visors and behind it, on the is installed to. rear door pillar. dome.

Danger Restart Engine with Hood Tire Information Label Open Label This paper label is applied on the The label is applied on the upper right driver's side rear door pillar. side of the hood.

20 Introduction

1

NOTE: NOTE: For further informations see “Tire To ensure optimum performance and Safety Information” in section fuel economy, please ensure to refill "Driving". your vehicle using Premium Unleaded Fuel ONLY, with a minimum of 91 AKI. Paint Identification Label The label is applied on the lower left side of the hood.

Fuel Warning Label The label is applied inside the fuel filler door.

21 Introduction

22 2 – Before Starting

Keys ...... 24 Sentry Key Immobilizer System ...... 26 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 27 Illuminated Entry/Exit ...... 30 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob ...... 33 Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs ...... 34 Remote Start System ...... 37 Doors Locking ...... 39 Passive Entry System ...... 42 Power Windows ...... 46 Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 48 Power Liftgate Operation ...... 50 Hood Operation ...... 56 Occupants Restraint Systems ...... 57 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags ...... 65 Child Restraint Systems ...... 73 Transporting Pets ...... 78 Park Assist ...... 79 Rear Parking Camera ...... 84 Surround View Camera System (optional) ...... 86 Safety Tips ...... 89

23 Before Starting Keys Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is inside the vehicle. The vehicle is equipped with a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node, to enter, start and 2 protect the vehicle.

In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing a button, the RKE The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has transmitter (key fob) may have a low three operating setups indicated on or discharged battery. If this occurs it is the outer ring. Pressing and releasing necessary to replace the battery in the middle button, you can switch order to operate the ignition switch from one setup to the next without (see “Requiring and Setting Additional starting the engine, the switched on Key fobs” in this section). indication will turn amber. It is still possible to operate the The engine will start by pushing the ignition device using the key fob RKE center button START/STOP with the transmitter with discharged battery by brake pedal pressed and the device set pressing the nose side (side opposite of in any of the three operating setups. the emergency key) of the key fob on the START/STOP button.

Keyless Ignition Device This device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the

24 Before Starting

You can keep the emergency key with In addition to the acoustic signal a you when using valet parking. dedicated message is displayed on the To remove the emergency key: instrument cluster. • hold the mechanical latch on the If the ignition device is left in the ACC back of the key fob sideways; or RUN position, when vehicle is locked the system will turn off the • simultaneously remove the 2 instrument cluster and automatically emergency key by sliding laterally set ignition device to OFF. towards the end of the key fob. With the MTC+ System, the power window switches, radio, power Key fob sunroof (optional), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes This vehicle is provided with two after the ignition switch is cycled to programmed key fobs. the OFF position. Opening either front The key fob contains a Remote Keyless door will cancel this feature, it is Entry (RKE) transmitter and an possible to set the timing of this emergency key. feature. The emergency key allows you to open the vehicle by inserting into the NOTE: lock of the opening handle on the NOTE: Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in Section driver's door, in case the battery of the “Dashboard Instruments and vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can insert either side of the Controls” for further information. emergency key into the lock cylinder.

Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert WARNING! Opening the driver's door to exit the • When leaving the vehicle, always vehicle when the ignition device is set remove the key fob and lock your in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a vehicle. beep will remind you to cycle the • Do not allow children to be in a ignition to OFF. vehicle unattended or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child or (Continued)

25 Before Starting (Continued) Sentry Key® Immobilizer If the light remains on after the bulb others could be seriously or fatally check, it indicates that there is a injured. Children should be warned System problem with the electronics: this not to touch the parking brake The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System condition will result in the engine trigger, brake pedal or the shift prevents unauthorized vehicle being shut off after two seconds. lever. 2 operation by disabling the engine. The If the Vehicle Security Light turns on • Do not leave the key fob in or near system does not need to be armed or during normal vehicle operation the vehicle, and do not leave the activated. Operation is automatic, (engine running for longer than 10 ignition switch in the ACC or RUN regardless of whether the vehicle is seconds), an electronic fault is mode. A child could operate power locked or unlocked. detected. Should this occur, contact windows, other controls, or move The system uses a key fob with Remote the Authorized Maserati Dealer as the vehicle. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an soon as possible for assistance. • Do not leave children or animals ignition switch and a RF (Radio Frequency) receiver to prevent inside parked vehicles in hot CAUTION! weather. Interior heat build-up may unauthorized vehicle operation. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is cause serious injury or death. Therefore, only key fobs expressly not compatible with some remote programmed can be used to start and • An unlocked car is an invitation to starting systems that can be installed operate the vehicle. thieves. Always remove the key fob in after-market. from vehicle, cycle the ignition After placing the ignition in the RUN Use of these systems may result in switch to OFF and lock all doors position, the Vehicle Security Light (see vehicle starting problems and loss of when leaving the vehicle picture) will light up for a three security protection. unattended. seconds bulb check. All key fobs provided with the new vehicle have been updated with the vehicle electronics and are therefore able to guarantee correct functioning and protection.

26 Before Starting Radio Frequency RKE NOTE: Vehicle Security Alarm Transmitter - Regulatory • When having the Sentry Key® Information Immobilizer System serviced, bring The vehicle security alarm monitors all key fobs provided with the the vehicle doors and liftgate for The “Regulatory Information” for all unauthorized entry and the the radio frequency and radar devices vehicle with you to the Authorized Maserati Dealer. START/STOP button for unauthorized 2 can be consulted by accessing the operations. • When selling the vehicle, it is "SERVICES" section on the website The system includes a dual function necessary to provide the new owner www.maserati.com or by using the anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle with all key fobs. specific tablet or smartphone apps. anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion Replacement Key fobs sensor monitors the vehicle interior for motion. NOTE: The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle for any lifting or tilting the vehicle electronics can be used to actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry start and operate the vehicle. transport, etc). A siren with battery backup which senses interruptions of power and communications is also included. WARNING! While the vehicle security alarm is • Always remove the key fobs from enabled, interior door locks switches, the vehicle and lock all doors when power liftgate and fuel filler door leaving the vehicle unattended. release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security • Always remember to cycle the alarm will provide the following ignition switch to OFF. audible and visible signals: Duplication of key fobs may be intermittent buzzer, position lights performed by an Authorized Maserati and/or turn signals and the vehicle Dealer only. security light on the dashboard will This procedure consists of flash. programming a key fob that has never This light will fast flash for been programmed to the vehicle’s approximately 15 seconds, when the electronics. vehicle security alarm is being armed,

27 Before Starting

and will then flash slowly until the located on the driver door trim vehicle is disarmed. panel with the driver and/or passenger door open.

2

• Press the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. Rearming the System If something triggers the security alarm, and no quick action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the beeper after 29 seconds, and turn off all of the visual signals after 31 more seconds; the vehicle security alarm will then rearm itself.

Arming the System • If any door is open, close it. Follow these steps to arm the vehicle In any of these situations, if one or • Press the button on the exterior security alarm. more windows are open, they will “Passive Entry” door handle having remain open. • Make sure the vehicle ignition switch a valid key fob RKE transmitter in When arming the alarm system in any is OFF. the same exterior zone (see of the described ways, the power “Passive Entry System” in this • Perform one of the following liftgate will remain open if it was left section for further information). methods to lock the vehicle: open. In this condition, it will be • Press the lock button on the necessary to first close the power interior power door lock switch liftgate as described under "Power

28 Before Starting

Liftgate Operation" in this section, To disarm the System The vehicle security alarm is designed and repeat the arming operation, to to protect your vehicle; however, you Use any of the following steps to be able to arm the alarm system. can create conditions where the disarm the vehicle security alarm. The buttons - located on the outer system will give you a false alarm. If edge of the left trunk compartment • Press the button on key fob RKE one of the previously described lining and indicated in the figure - can transmitter. arming sequences has occurred, the 2 be used to completely close and lock • Grasp the “Passive Entry” unlock vehicle security alarm will arm the power liftgate and arm the alarm door handle (see “Passive Entry regardless of whether you are in the system if all the doors are closed. System” in this section for further vehicle or not. If you remain in the See chapter “ Power Liftgate information). vehicle and open a door, the alarm Operation” in this section for further • Press the START/STOP button so as will activate. If this occurs, disarm the information. to release the OFF position. vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed NOTE: and the battery becomes • When the vehicle security alarm is disconnected, the vehicle security armed, the interior power door lock alarm will remain armed when the switch will not allow unlocking of battery is reconnected; the exterior the doors. lights will flash, the buzzer will • The use of the emergency key into activate. If this occurs, disarm the the driver door lock and the use of vehicle security alarm. the button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the security Using the Panic Alarm (if alarm of the vehicle. equipped) Each time the vehicle security alarm is • The vehicle security alarm remains armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift NOTE: engaged while accessing the power sensors actively monitor the vehicle. On the key fob RKE transmitter of liftgate. Pressing the button When arming the security alarm, it is vehicles with this feature, the remote between the license plate lights will possible to disable these sensors by start button is replaced by the not disarm the vehicle security pressing the button on the key fob button. alarm. If anyone enters the vehicle three times within 5 seconds from the through the liftgate and opens a moment the system has been armed To turn the panic alarm feature on or door, the alarm will trigger. (meanwhile the security alarm light off, press and hold the button flashes rapidly). on the key fob RKE transmitter for at

29 Before Starting least one second and release. When Tamper Alert Illuminated Entry/Exit the panic alarm is on, the headlights If something has triggered the vehicle will turn on, the position lights will Lights will turn on and off when you security alarm in your absence, the flash, the horn will pulse on and off, enter/exit the vehicle and operate the horn will sound three times when you and the courtesy & dimmable lights buttons on the key fob RKE disarm the vehicle security alarm. will turn on. transmitter and/or on the “Passive 2 Check the vehicle for tampering. The panic alarm will remain activated Entry” system as follows: for three minutes unless you turn it off • If the unlock command is enabled by by either: pressing the specific button on the • pressing the button a second key fob RKE transmitter or by the time; “Passive Entry” system, the • or drive the vehicle at a speed of “illuminated entry” mode will 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster. activate. Courtesy & dimmable In both situations the panic alarm will internal lighting, night front seats immediately turn off. lighting, and approach lighting will stay on for 27 seconds.

30 Before Starting

• If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the “Passive Entry” system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is moved out of range, 2 all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on.

• After activating the power liftgate opening command in the possible modes (see “Power Liftgate Operation” in this section), the inner trunk and liftgate lights will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. The lights will immediately turn off if you lock the power liftgate before 10 minutes.

31 Before Starting

exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlight, which will turn off after 27 seconds. Use of Light Switch for Vehicle 2 Lighting Vehicle lighting can be operated from the key fob RKE transmitter, the “Passive Entry” system and from the light switch on the left side of the Vehicle Lighting with dashboard (refer to “Lights” in section Open/Closed Doors “Understanding the Vehicle” for further information). • If one or more doors are open, the central light, front/rear domelights (main and spot light), the instrument cluster, the MTC+ display, the night front seats lighting and the ignition switch backlight will turn on and will light up for 27 seconds. • If the doors are closed, all lights will • On the vehicles equipped with this turn off (within 3 seconds) with the feature, if the button is pressed on the key fob RKE transmitter, the headlights, position lights and the courtesy & dimmable lights will turn on. Refer to “Using the Panic Alarm” in this section for further information.

32 Before Starting buttons on the right side of the Unlock the Vehicle with steering wheel, entering the menu “Vehicle Settings” and skip to Key fob “Interior Lighting”. If the interior The RKE system allows you to unlock lighting is in "0" (OFF) position, the the doors and the fuel filler door, night lighting will turn off. open the power liftgate and turn the 2 • If the light switch is turned to approach and courtesy lights on from “AUTO” position (on/off AUTO a distance up to approximately 33 ft mode) and the ignition is switched (10 m). The key fob RKE transmitter to RUN position, as in “low beam does not need to be pointed at the • If the light switch is in the “0” (OFF) mode” all lights turn on either in vehicle to activate the system. See mode all switch backlights and the “DAY” or “NIGHT” mode according “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in this section front seats lighting will turn off. to the twilight sensor. In “DAY” for further information. • If the light switch is in the mode the switches backlighting will position and the ignition switch be at 100% intensity, in “NIGHT” is in OFF or ACC position, the front mode they will be as set by the low intensity LEDs of the external buttons on the right side of the headlight and rear position light steering wheel. guide LED will turn on. NOTE: • If the light switch is in position In “DAY” mode, the switches are not and the ignition switch is in RUN backlit, except the windows and position, no lighting feature will be steering switches. available. • If the light switch is in position NOTE: (Low beam mode) the front Driving at speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) domelight LED (if enabled), the and above disables the system from switches backlighting, the responding to all key fobs RKE instrument cluster’s display, the night transmitter buttons. front seats lighting will turn on. The front domelight LED and the night lighting of the front seats will light up with the intensity set by the

33 Before Starting Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler section “Dashboard Instruments and Requiring and Setting Door and Liftgate Controls”. Additional Key fobs Press and release the unlock button Turn Headlights On with Key fob on the key fob RKE transmitter once This feature activates the headlights Provide your Authorized Maserati to unlock the driver's door or twice for up to 90 seconds when the doors Dealer the following when ordering 2 within five seconds to unlock all doors, are unlocked with the key fob RKE additional key fob RKE transmitters: the fuel filler door and the power transmitter. The duration can be set as • all key fobs RKE transmitters in your liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash desired. To change the current setting, possession; for the unlock signal recognition. The see “MTC+ Settings” in section • a personal ID; illuminated entry/exit system will also “Dashboard Instruments and • the identification and registration turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in Controls”. documents proving ownership of the this section for further information. Locking Doors Sound Alarm vehicle. Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Key Setting new key fobs or re-setting the st fob 1 Press This feature will cause the alarm to original ones can only be performed at activate when the doors are locked This feature allows you to program the an Authorized Maserati Dealer. with the key fob RKE transmitter. This system to unlock either the driver's feature can be enabled or disabled. To NOTE: door or all doors, the fuel filler door change the current setting, see “MTC+ and the power liftgate, by the first Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters Settings” in section “Dashboard press of the unlock button on the that are not present when the new Instruments and Controls”. key fob RKE transmitter. To change the setting procedure is done will be current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in Unlatch the Liftgate deleted from the memory to prevent section “Dashboard Instruments and lost or stolen key fobs transmitters Press the button on the key fob Controls”. being used to disarm the electronic RKE transmitter two times within five alarm system. Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights seconds to unlatch and fully open the This feature will cause the flash of the power liftgate. turn signal lights when the doors are See chapters “Passive Entry System” locked or unlocked with the key fob and “Power Liftgate Operation” in this RKE transmitter. This feature can be section for further information. turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in

34 Before Starting

Key fob Battery Replacement minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except NOTE: as necessary, service your vehicle in a A low charge level of the key fob well-ventilated area and wear gloves battery will be indicated on the or wash your hands frequently when instrument cluster display. servicing your vehicle. For more 2 information go to: The recommended replacement www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- battery type is: CR2032. vehicle To replace the battery proceed as follows: • Separate both parts of the key fob • Remove the emergency key as case. indicated in “Keys” chapter of the current section. • Loosen the lateral screw that connects the two side covers with a torx T6 screwdriver.

WARNING! • Remove the card with PCB (Printed California Proposition 65 Circuit Board). Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including • Separate the two lateral covers from such as, engine exhaust, carbon the key fob case. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To

35 Before Starting

• Replace the printed circuit board by using the indicated pin for the WARNING! sealing of the two covers. California Proposition 65 • Assemble the key fob case and Operating, servicing and maintaining reassemble the two lateral covers: a 2 a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle click will indicate successful sealing. can expose you to chemicals including • Combine the disassembled parts with such as, engine exhaust, carbon clamping screw and reassemble the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that emergency key. which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth • Remove the battery from its seat and Radio Frequency RKE defects or other reproductive harm. To replace with a new recommended Transmitter - Regulatory minimize exposure, avoid breathing type of battery. Information exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a The “Regulatory Information” for all well-ventilated area and wear gloves the radio frequency and radar devices or wash your hands frequently when can be consulted by accessing the servicing your vehicle. For more "SERVICES" section on the website information go to: www.maserati.com or by using the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- specific tablet or smartphone apps. vehicle

NOTE: Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a ENVIRONMENTAL! battery, clean with alcohol. Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. • Match the + sign on the battery to Please dispose of them according to the + sign on the inside of the local regulations or at an Authorized battery clip, located on the back Maserati Dealer. cover.

36 Before Starting Remote Start System How to use Remote Start All of the following conditions must On the vehicles that are equipped WARNING! be met before the engine will remote with this system, the key fob RKE • Do not start or run an engine in a start: transmitter enables to start the engine closed garage or confined area. conveniently from outside the vehicle • System not disabled from previous Exhaust gas contains Carbon 2 while still maintaining security. The remote start event. Monoxide (CO) which is odorless system has a range of approximately • Vehicle theft alarm not active. and colorless 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between • Vehicle Panic mode not active. • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away the vehicle and the key fob may • Doors closed. from children. Operation of the reduce this range. Remote Start System, windows, • Hood closed. NOTE: door locks or other controls could • Power liftgate closed. cause serious injury or death. Changes or modifications not • Hazard lights switched off. expressly approved by the party • Brake pedal not pressed. responsible for compliance could void Engine Remote Start Abort • Battery at an acceptable charge the user's authority to operate the Message on Instrument Cluster level. equipment. The following messages will display on • The shift lever is in P (Park) position. the instrument cluster if the vehicle If your RKE transmitter fails to operate • The vehicle transmission is in fails to remote start or exits remote from a normal distance, check for automatic mode. start prematurely: these conditions: • The remote start has not been • “Remote Start Canceled Door • A weak battery in the RKE activated yet two consecutive times. Open”. transmitter. The expected life of the If EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is not • “Remote Start Canceled Liftgate battery is a minimum of three years. selected, at key-off in some conditions Open”. • Closeness to a radio transmitter such the remote start system may not allow as a radio station tower, airport engine to start. We suggest to set • “Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low”. transmitter, and some mobile or CB “Auto Apply On” function through • “Remote Start Canceled Time radio. the switch on the right-side of the Expired”. • Obstructions between the vehicle steering wheel (refer to “Instrument • “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle and the Key Fob. Cluster” in section “Dashboard to Reset”. Instrument and Controls”).

37 Before Starting

The message on the instrument cluster which are know to the State of equipped) are disabled when the stays active as long as the ignition California to cause cancer and birth vehicle is in the “Remote Start” switch is in RUN position. defects or other reproductive harm. To mode. minimize exposure, avoid breathing To enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two exhaust, do not idle the engine except consecutive times (two 15-minute 2 NOTE: as necessary, service your vehicle in a cycles) with the key fob RKE well-ventilated area and wear gloves On some versions, the remote start transmitter. However, the ignition or wash your hands frequently when button on the key fob RKE must be cycled to the RUN position servicing your vehicle. For more transmitter is replaced by the before you can repeat the start information go to: button. sequence for a third cycle. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Press and release the button on the vehicle To exit Remote Start Mode key fob RKE transmitter twice within without Driving the Vehicle five seconds. The vehicle doors will Press and release the button one lock, position lights will flash and the time or allow the engine to run for the horn will ring twice (if this function is entire 15-minute cycle. set using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section NOTE: “Dashboard Instruments and To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the Controls”). Then, the engine will start system will disable the one time press and the vehicle will remain in the of the button for two seconds after “Remote Start” mode for a 15-minute receiving a valid “Remote Start” cycle. request. NOTE: • In case of an engine fault or low fuel To exit Remote Start Mode and WARNING! level, the vehicle will start and then Drive the Vehicle California Proposition 65 shut down in 10 seconds. Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, Operating, servicing and maintaining • The position lights will turn on and press and release the button on the a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle remain lighted up during “Remote key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the can expose you to chemicals including Start” mode. doors and disarm the vehicle security such as, engine exhaust, carbon • For security reasons, power window alarm. Then, prior to the end of the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that and power sunroof operation (if

38 Before Starting 15-minute cycle, press and release the Doors Locking START/STOP button. NOTE: The message “Remote Start Active WARNING! Push Start Button” will display in the • For personal security and safety lock 2 instrument cluster until you push the the vehicle doors before you drive START/STOP button. as well as when parking and leaving the vehicle unattended. Auto-On Comfort with Remote • When leaving the vehicle, always Start remove the key fob RKE transmitter To unlock the front doors, pull the The driver's heated and ventilated and lock your vehicle. inside door handle to the first detent. seat and the heated steering wheel (if • Never leave children alone in a equipped) can be programmed to vehicle, or with access to an come on during a remote start. Refer unlocked vehicle. to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” • Do not allow children to be in a function in chapter “MTC+ Settings”, vehicle unattended. A child or section “Dashboard Instruments and others could be seriously or fatally Controls”, for further information. injured. Children must not touch the Radio Frequency RKE parking brake trigger, brake pedal or Transmitter - Regulatory the shift lever. Information • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave To unlock the rear doors, pull the door The “Regulatory Information” for all ignition switch in the ACC or RUN lock knob on the door trim panel the radio frequency and radar devices mode. upward. can be consulted by accessing the If the door lock knob is down when "SERVICES" section on the website Doors Manual Lock you shut the door, the door will lock. www.maserati.com or by using the Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE specific tablet or smartphone apps. To lock each door, push the door lock transmitter is not inside the vehicle knob on each door trim panel before closing the door. downward.

39 Before Starting

Power Doors Locking/ If power liftgate has been left open, it an Authorized Maserati Dealer only Unlocking will stay open when you press lock which can also service the vehicle. button , and the locking feature will Automatic Door Unlock on Exit A power door lock switch and a only occur after the closing of the power door unlock switch are power liftgate. The doors will unlock automatically on 2 positioned on the front door trim The doors can also be locked and vehicles with power door locks if: panel. Use this switches to lock or unlocked with the “Passive Entry” • The automatic unlock doors on exit unlock the doors. system. For further information, see feature is enabled. “Passive Entry System” in this section. • The transmission is in gear and the If you press the power door lock switch vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). while the ignition switch is in the ACC • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or P or RUN position, and any front door is (Park). open, the power locks will not • The driver door is open. operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob RKE • The doors were not previously transmitter in the vehicle. unlocked. Cycling the ignition to the OFF • The vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). position or closing the door will allow Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit the locks of the doors and fuel filler To change the current setting, see door to operate. If a door is open with “MTC+ Settings” in section the key fob RKE transmitter inside the “Dashboard Instruments and cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or Controls”. RUN position, a beep will draw the driver’s attention. NOTE: Automatic Locking Doors Use the automatic door unlock on exit The auto door lock feature default feature in accordance with local condition is disabled. When enabled, regulations. the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds Child-Protection Door Lock If the vehicle has been locked from 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock System — Rear Doors inside with the above-figured switches, feature can be enabled or disabled by the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. To provide a safer environment for small children sitting in the rear seats,

40 Before Starting the rear doors are equipped with a NOTE: If you are pushing the door hard child-protection door lock system. For emergency exit from the rear seats enough to close just like a regular Engage or Disengage the when the child-protection door lock one, the system still works, but only to Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, manually raise the check whether the door is properly closed. • Open the rear door. door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and 2 • Insert the tip of the emergency key open the door using the outside door into the lock and rotate to the lock handle. WARNING! or unlock position. The system works properly if the ajar • Repeat the first two steps on the door has a gap , between exterior opposite rear door. Soft Door Close System (if equipped) door panel surface and exterior bodyshell surface in the latch area , of This system makes doors easier to shut max 0.23 in (6 mm). In the presence of without having to slam if you do not higher gap, the system is not able to get it closed the first time. It increases close the door with the risk of the vehicle's safety and comfort, in travelling with the door not particular for children in the back seat, completely closed. it is not necessary to slam the door and it also prevents the risk of traveling with the door ajar. The system uses a sensor to detect the door ajar and an electric actuator to close it. The sensor detects your attempt to close the door and once WARNING! the latch catches the handle the Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in electric actuator pulls the door firmly a collision. Remember that the rear bringing the door to the fully closed doors can only be opened from the position. outside when the child-protection During the soft closing phase locks are engaged (locked). operated by the system, it is possible to intervene manually by opening or closing the door.

41 Before Starting Passive Entry System and immediately but with a slight delay (about 2 seconds). The “Passive Entry” system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Unlock Door from the Driver Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This Side 2 feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid key fob RKE transmitter press the key fob RKE transmitter lock within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the driver's door or unlock buttons. handle, grip the driver’s door outside handle to unlock the door NOTE: automatically. The interior door panel • “Passive Entry” may be programmed lock knob will rise when the door is NOTE: to on/off; see “MTC+ Settings” in unlocked. If “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks” is section “Dashboard Instruments and programmed on all doors will unlock Controls” for further information. when you grip the front driver’s door • If wearing gloves, or if it has been handle. To select between “Driver raining on the “Passive Entry” door Door” and “All Doors”, see “MTC+ handle, the unlock sensitivity can be Settings” in section “Dashboard affected, resulting in a slower Instruments and Controls”. response time. • Access to the vehicle using “Passive Unlock Door from the Entry” system may not work properly Passenger Side in case of interference caused by With a valid key fob RKE transmitter external sources such as metal within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the passenger objects, mobile phones, overhead door handle, grip the front passenger power lines, antennas, etc. In these outside door handle to unlock all four cases, use the buttons of the key fob doors automatically. RKE transmitter to open and close The interior door panel lock knob will the vehicle or the emergency key, rise when the door is unlocked. inserting it into the driver side door lock. • The “Passive Entry” system does not lock and unlock the doors directly

42 Before Starting

Preventing Inadvertent Locking NOTE: of the Key fob RKE Transmitter The vehicle unlocks the doors under inside the Vehicle any of the following conditions: To minimize the possibility of • the doors are manually locked using the door lock knob positioned on unintentionally locking a key fob RKE 2 transmitter inside your vehicle, the the door panel; “Passive Entry” system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed, the system checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitters is detected inside the transmitter inside the vehicle; vehicle, and no other valid key fobs RKE transmitters are detected outside • there is not a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle. NOTE: the vehicle, the “Passive Entry” system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors All doors will unlock when you grip and chirps the horn fourteen times (on NOTE: the front passenger door handle the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will The vehicle will not unlock the doors regardless of the driver’s door unlock lock and the key fob RKE transmitter under any of the following conditions: preference setting (“Driver Door” or will be locked in the vehicle). This will “All Doors”). • the doors are locked using the key happen even when pressing the lower fob RKE transmitter; button on the outer edge of the • the doors are locked using the left trunk compartment lining to close button on the “Passive Entry” door and lock the power liftgate. handles; (Continued)

43 Before Starting

If the key fob RKE transmitter is inside lights to open the power liftgate the passenger compartment and one automatically. of the doors locked only to the first detent of lock pawl (hence it is not Manual Door Lock from fully closed), when the vehicle lock Outside 2 function with alarm system for trunk With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE lid and doors is being activated by transmitters within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the means of RH button at the bottom driver or passenger front door handles, of the trunk lid, said function will be press the external door handle button activated all the same. to lock all four doors. In this condition, any attempt to duly close the door that is partially open NOTE: will cancel vehicle lock and alarm • After pressing the outside door system arming thus leaving vehicle handle button, you must wait two unlocked. seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using this door Release the Liftgate and Enter handle. By pulling the external door the Trunk handle, you can check if the car With the key fob within 3.3 ft (1 m) of remains locked, without “Passive the power liftgate, press the button Entry” system reacting and unlocking located between the license plate the doors. (Continued) lights, the power liftgate will • The “Passive Entry” system will not • there is a valid key fob RKE automatically open until it has reached operate if the key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and its maximum height; if the same transmitter battery is dead. within 3.3 ft (1 m) of either “Passive button is not pressed again to stop it • If power liftgate has been left open, Entry” door handle; (for more information, see chapter it will stay open when you press the • fifteen attempts are made to lock “Power Liftgate Operation” in this button on door external handle, and the doors using the door panel section). the locking feature will only occur switch and/or the lower button If the vehicle had already been after the closing of the power (on the outer edge of the left trunk unlocked through key fob or “Passive liftgate. compartment) and then close the Entry”, the presence of the key fob is doors. not required; simply use the button located between the license plate

44 Before Starting

Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the 2 "SERVICES" section on the website www.maserati.com or by using the specific tablet or smartphone apps.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s inner door panel.

45 Before Starting Power Windows NOTE: prevent the windows being • The power window switches will accidentally activated, posing a risk to The window controls on the driver's remain active for up to 10 minutes passengers remaining onboard. door panel govern all the door after the ignition switch is turned to windows. the OFF position. Opening either Auto-Down Feature 2 front door will cancel this feature. The driver door power window switch The time lapse can be set. See “MTC+ and some model passenger door Settings” in section “Dashboard power window switches have an Instruments and Controls” for auto-down feature. further information. Press the window switch to the second • Frequent activations of the power detent, release, and the window will windows could result in a temporary go completely down automatically. lock out of the motors. In this case, To open the window part way, press wait a moment before a new the window switch to the first detent activation. and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down WARNING! operation, pull up on the switch Improper use of the power windows briefly. and the sunroof (if equipped) can however be dangerous, even with the Auto-Up Feature with anti-pinch prevention system. Before Anti-Pinch Protection and during activation of the power Lift the window switch to the second window, always check that the detent, release, and the window will passengers are not exposed to the risk go all the way up automatically. of injury both by the moving window There are single window controls on To stop the window from going all the and by personal objects that could be each passenger door trim panel, which way up during the auto-up operation, dragged or hit by it. Do not leave operate the corresponding window. push down on the switch briefly. unattended children in a vehicle with The window controls will operate only To close the window part way, lift the a key fob RKE transmitter inside. when the ignition switch is in the ACC window switch to the first detent and or RUN position. When getting out the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter to

46 Before Starting release it when you want the window Reset Auto-Up/Down to stop. Should the auto-up/down feature stop NOTE: working, the window probably needs • If the window runs into any obstacle to be reset. To reset auto-up/down, pull the during auto-closure, it will reverse 2 direction and then go back down. window switch up to close the Remove the obstacle and use the window completely and push the window switch again to close the window switch down to open the window. window completely. • Any impact due to rough road Open the Windows with RKE To enable the controls previously conditions may trigger the auto Transmitter and Ignition Off described, press the window lockout reverse function unexpectedly button again (setting it in the up When the ignition switch is in OFF during auto-closure. If this happens, position). pull the switch lightly to the first position, windows can be opened by detent and hold to close the window pressing the button on the RKE Wind Buffeting transmitter. manually. Wind buffeting can be described as • Frequent activations of the • Press the button and release it; the perception of pressure or a anti-pinch function could disable the • Press a second time the button helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle auto-down and auto-up function of and keep it pressed until complete may exhibit wind buffeting with the the windows. In order to re-activate opening of the windows, if they windows down, or the sunroof (if this function proceed with a reset were closed. equipped) in open or partially open cycle as described in the next positions. This is a normal occurrence paragraph. Rear Window and Sunshade and can be minimized. If the buffeting Lockout Button occurs with the rear windows open, The window lockout button on the open the front and rear windows driver's door trim panel allows to together to minimize the buffeting. If WARNING! disable the window and sunshade the buffeting occurs with the sunroof There is no anti-pinch protection control on the rear doors by pressing open, then adjust the sunroof opening when the window is almost closed. Be the window lockout button (setting it to minimize the buffeting. sure to clear all objects from the area in the down position). before closing the window.

47 Before Starting Power Sunshades on Rear to the second detent to move the between the top edge of the window all the way up or down. sunshade and the door panel, during Door Windows (for lowering. versions/markets, where provided) 2 CAUTION! NOTE: Before activating the sunshade, make • On vehicles provided with power sure that no objects can interfere with sunshades on the rear windows, the its travel. window switches also operate the sunshades. The following images and the • The rear windows lock button subsequent text show the possible operates the rear power sunshades starting positions (“A”, “B”, “C” and as well. “UP”, “DOWN”) and function of the window and the sunshade, to be • The window and sunshades controls independently activated by pressing or will operate only if the ignition lifting the control switch to the first switch is in ACC or RUN position. (1) or second (2) detent. Operation of the rear windows and related sunshades is done by pressing or pulling the window switch and depends on the position of the windows prior to the command operation. Operations As described for the opening and closing functions of the power windows (see chapter “Power WARNING! Windows” in this section), the Rear seat passengers must be careful windows switch has two functioning when operating the sunshades, since modes: press and release the switch to there is the risk of being pinched the first detent to partially move the between the top of the sunshade and window; press and release the switch the head lining, during raising, and

48 Before Starting

A. Sunshade fully unrolled (“UP” position) and Window closed (“UP” 1.2 Pressing the control again to 1 2.1 Pressing the control to 2 detent: position) detent: the window opens the sunshade rolls down partially until the control is completely while the window • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 released and the sunshade stays stays closed. detent: no action (“NOP”). down (pressing the control to 2 2.2 Pressing the control again to 2 2 1.1 Pressing the control to 1 detent: detent: the window opens detent: the window opens the sunshade rolls down completely). completely. completely and the window stays closed. B. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window closed (“UP” position) • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: the sunshade unrolls completely and the window stays closed. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window opens partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. C. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window completely open (“DOWN” position) • Pulling the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window closes partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: no action (“NOP”).

49 Before Starting Teaching Cycle limit stop is reached, the sunshade Power Liftgate Operation After battery disconnection, the will move downwards for approx. following teaching cycle is required to 2-3 millimetres and the control unit The power liftgate can be operated store the limit positions the sunshades. will store this height as the upper from inside the vehicle by pressing the Use the controls on the rear doors to limit. Now the teaching of the button on the front dome console. 2 move the sunshades. driver side rear sunshade is This command will fully open or fully complete. close the power liftgate. Pressing this • With glass closed, lift rear sunshade • Repeat the same operations for the button in sequence, if the power control on driver side for a few passenger side rear sunshade to liftgate stops in intermediate position, seconds. It is not necessary that the complete the teaching procedure. it resumes and reverses the stroke sunshade reaches its upper limit. direction. • Reverse the sunshade movement by pressing the control downwards. NOTE: Once the lower limit is reached, press The shift lever must be in P (Park) and hold the control for at least 10 before the button can operate. seconds. This action allows setting the control unit in initialisation status. • Release the movement command. • Within maximum 15 seconds: • Press once the control downwards (first or second detent). In this way the control unit stores the lower limit position. During this operation a slight click of the sunshade motor that switches to mechanical lock condition can be The power liftgate can be fully opened heard. from outside the vehicle by pressing • Lift the control and hold it up until the button on the key fob with the sunshade completes its RKE transmitter twice within five upstroke and reaches the car body seconds or by using the external pillar, fully home. Once the upper button located on the lower side of the liftgate ledge, between the license

50 Before Starting plate lights, when the vehicle has “Dashboard Instruments and Automatic Opening and been unlocked using the key fob or Controls”). Closing Movement of the the “Passive Entry” system. With the ignition switch in RUN Power Liftgate position, the red symbol will be displayed on the instrument cluster. If Automatic opening and closing the vehicle is in motion, in addition to movement of the liftgate is driven by 2 the symbol will also appear a electric actuators and a motorized message indicating that the power latch ensuring lid locking upon liftgate is open. Once the power closing. liftgate is closed the symbol or the The button on key fob and button symbol and message will disappear on front dome console not only allow from the display. user to completely open the power liftgate, but also to stop it at any intermediate position by pressing the button again whenever you wish to stop and resume the opening process. In addition to these commands, it is possible to open and close the power liftgate, or stop its movement, by simply moving your foot under the rear bumper, if the vehicle is so equipped with the kick sensor option. In this latter case, the power liftgate With the ignition device in the OFF will be opened and closed only if the position, only the power liftgate open “Passive Entry” system acknowledges When the button on the key fob is symbol will display until closure. the presence of the key fob RKE pressed twice within five seconds, the See “Passive Entry System” in this transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the direction indicators flash twice to section for more information on power liftgate. indicate the opening or closing of the power liftgate operation with the Power liftgate uses the button power liftgate, if the light flashing “Passive Entry” feature. in-between the license plate lights, function at closing is activated on indicated in figure, to activate the MTC+ (for more information, see the opening once the car has been chapter "MTC+ Settings" in section

51 Before Starting

unlocked by the key fob or by the , the power liftgate will be “Passive Entry” function. completely closed unless it is stopped; By pressing this button when the • if instead the power liftgate is in an power liftgate is closed, you can open intermediate position and you press it completely, or by pressing the and release the lower button 2 button again stop the opening during the closing or opening process, or by pressing the button stroke, it will be stopped; again invert the movement and close it • if instead the power liftgate is completely. stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the lower When the liftgate is completely open if button , it will reverse its previous you press and release the upper movement and it will be completely button , the power liftgate will be opened or closed unless it is stopped completely closed unless it is stopped; again. • if instead the power liftgate is in an In any case, when you press the lower intermediate position and you press button , the doors will not be and release the upper button locked and the alarm system will not during the closing or opening be armed immediately, but only when stroke, it will be stopped; the liftgate will have reached the When the power liftgate is open, to • if instead the power liftgate is totally closed position as effect of move it there are two buttons stopped in an intermediate position every movement commands received positioned on the outer edge of the and you press and release the upper from every other available inputs. left trunk compartment lining as button , it will reverse its previous NOTE: indicated in figure. movement and it will be completely • The order of the functions shown opened or closed unless it is stopped does not represent the sequence in again. which they can be performed. In any case, when you press the upper button , the doors will not be • The buttons of the power liftgate do locked and the alarm system will not not work if a gear is engaged or if be armed. the vehicle speed is higher than When the liftgate is completely open if 0 mph (0 km/h). you press and release the lower button

52 Before Starting

• The power liftgate does not work blower of the air conditioning control Power Liftgate Automatic Safe with temperatures lower than −22 °F at the maximum speed. Do not Movement (−30 °C) or higher than 150 °F (65 activate recirculation. Power liftgate safe opening and °C). closing is ensured by a protection • If the opening buttons or the Set the Position of Maximum Power system able to stop its movement handles are operated while the Liftgate Opening when an obstacle is detected along 2 power liftgate is closing, the stroke The maximum opening position of the the path: when opening or closing, it of liftgate stops. Pressing another liftgate can be modified using the stops automatically and then slightly time the same command it reverses previously described buttons on the moves back. movement and fully open. outer left edge of the trunk Along the upper outer edges, the • If the opening buttons or the compartment. vehicle is equipped with anti-pinch handles are operated while the 1. Activate the liftgate and stop it in protection sensors. These sensors stop power liftgate is opening, the motor the new maximum opening the automatic closing stroke and of the liftgate is disabled to allow position to be set, by pressing the partly open the power liftgate when a manual operation. upper button. pressure is carried out, also slight, within their range shown in the • If the power liftgate finds several 2. Press the upper or lower figure. obstacles during the same operating buttons and keep it pressed for 3 cycle, it will stop automatically and seconds. must be opened or closed manually. 3. Release the button (pressed in the • If the power liftgate is closing and a previous point). Upon the following gear is engaged, the liftgate will opening controls, the liftgate will continue closing. In this condition, it stop in the stored position. is possible that, during the closing If you want to reset the maximum stroke, it may find an obstacle and possible opening position of the stop. liftgate, proceed as described below starting from the previously set opening position. After the closing command, when WARNING! 1. Manually push the liftgate to the maximum possible opening power liftgate starts closing, all the If, for any reason, the power liftgate position. indicators will blink to warn anyone must remain open while driving, close within range. all the windows and activate the 2. Repeat the previously performed steps 2 and 3.

53 Before Starting

Apart from activating indicators NOTE: • Before opening power liftgate, make blinking when power liftgate is Frequent activations of the anti-pinch sure that no objects or snow are set operated, it is also possible to activate protection function may disable the on liftgate or might jam or prevent a sound warning by selecting the automatic movement of the power its opening. relevant function within MTC+ user liftgate. To reactivate this function, 2 settings (see “MTC+ Settings” in perform a reset cycle by carrying out a Hands Free Power Liftgate Release and Closing section “Dashboard Instruments and complete opening/closing sequence, Controls”). after manually closing the power This mode is controlled by the “Passive When power liftgate edge reaches the liftgate. Entry” system (see paragraph “Passive car body, the motor locking the latch is Entry System” in this section), which activated automatically. automatically releases and closes the If necessary, the power liftgate can power liftgate when you place your also be opened or closed manually WARNING! foot in the area under the rear using the handles indicated in the • Activate power liftgate only when bumper. picture. This operation could be vehicle is at a standstill. The system will only operate if the required when the liftgate remains • Always pay utmost attention when system acknowledges the presence of open for a long period of time. opening and closing the tailgate. If the key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 for any reason the protection system ft (1 m) of the power liftgate. might fail to respond, it could cause The range of the sensors that detect injury to anyone within the your foot movement extends along operating area. and underneath the central portion of the rear bumper. • After the closing command, always To activate the power liftgate, stand make sure that power liftgate is behind the vehicle, near the liftgate, completely closed. and move your foot under the bumper as if to kick something. Do not place your foot too close to the bumper or CAUTION! touch the underbody. • Under extreme weather conditions, liftgate seal could freeze and compromise power liftgate WARNING! automatic opening and closing. • Pay careful attention to the exhaust

54 Before Starting

tailpipes as they can reach high • after another kick, will reverse its Controls”). A key fob RKE temperatures and, in case of contact, movement and completely close transmitter located in the front seat they can cause severe burns. unless stopped again. passenger area is considered out of • When it is not necessary to open the If open, with the foot movement the range of the Hands free liftgate power liftgate with the Hands free power liftgate will: release sensor. mode, make sure the key fob is • completely close but not lock; • If somebody or something knocks 2 outside the range of use (3.3 ft/1 m). • another kick before the completed against the power liftgate while it is Otherwise, the power liftgate can closing can stop the movement; moving, the safety system might be opened accidentally by an stop lid opening or closing • if the movement was stopped unintentional movement of the movement. another kick operation will invert a foot. complete opening. Power Liftgate Emergency NOTE: Release • If your foot movement fails to If the power release control operated activate the power liftgate by pressing the button on the dome movement, wiggling your foot console fails, the battery could be in a under the bumper will not help. low condition. In this case, it is Repeat the whole kick movement. possible to temporarily power the • In particular situations, external system by using the battery remote factors affecting the sensor area may poles located inside the engine trigger the Hands free power compartment (see “Auxiliary liftgate release feature. For example, Jump-Start Procedure” in section “In In order for the sensors to detect your when washing the vehicle, a water an Emergency”). Then it is possible to foot movement, move your foot jet aimed at the sensor area may normally open the power liftgate by towards the vehicle rather than trigger the Hands free power using the key fob RKE transmitter. sideways and immediately pull it back: liftgate release feature. Keep the Have the vehicle serviced by an from this moment, the power liftgate key fob RKE transmitter away from Authorized Maserati Dealer. will activate within two seconds. the sensing range of the sensors (10 If closed, with the foot movement the ft/3 m) or disable the Hands free power liftgate will: feature from the MTC+ menu (see • unlock and completely open; “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and • after another kick, will stop;

55 Before Starting Hood Operation • Slightly lift the hood and push the safety catch as indicated by the Opening arrow. The safety catch is located in CAUTION! the center of the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not Two latches must be released to open slam the hood to close it. the hood. 2 • From inside the vehicle, pull the hood release lever located under the left lower side of the dashboard. WARNING! • Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the lid is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious • Lift the hood completely: this injury or death. operation is facilitated by two gas • Gear shifting is always active and struts keeping the hood in the fully may be performed even when one open position. or more doors, the hood or the With the ignition switch in RUN liftgate are open. Therefore, in these • Move to the outside and stand in position, the red symbol will display conditions, take great care to avoid front of the vehicle front grille. on the instrument cluster with the moving the transmission shift lever message indicating that the hood is and so accidentally engage gears. open. Closing Lower the hood, and then gently drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches.

56 Before Starting Occupants Restraint Please pay close attention to the accident, the lower section of the belt information in this section. It tells you could press against the upper part of Systems how to use your restraint system your stomach rather than the pelvic The listed occupants restraint systems properly, to keep you and your area, causing serious internal injuries. are some of the most important safety passengers as safe as possible. features in your vehicle: If you are carrying children too small NOTE: 2 for adult-sized seat belts, the seat • Three-point seat belts (also called lap The advanced air bags have a multi belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether stage inflator. This allows the air bag and shoulder belts) for the driver for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can and all passengers. to have different stages of inflation be used to hold infant and child based on the severity and type of • Advanced front air bags for driver restraint systems. For more collision. and passenger. information on LATCH, refer to • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable “Lower Anchors and Tether for Here are some simple steps you can Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. take to minimize the risk of harm passengers seated next to a window. from a deploying air bag: • Supplemental seat-mounted side air • Children 12 years old and under bags. WARNING! should always ride buckled up in a • An energy-absorbing steering To help provide maximum protection, rear seat. column and steering wheel. you are advised to keep the seatback • Front seat belts incorporate dual in the most upright position possible pretensioners that may enhance and the seat belt close to your chest WARNING! occupant protection by managing and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in Infants in rear facing child restraints the energy created during an the event of an accident you could should never ride in the front seat of impact. move too far forward and could be a vehicle with a passenger Advanced • All seat belt systems (except the injured. Travelling with the seatback Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment driver’s) include Automatic Locking too far reclined could also be can cause severe or fatal injury to Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat dangerous: even if the seat belts are infants in that position. belt webbing into position by fastened, they may not work Do not use child seats or child booster extending the belt all the way out correctly. In fact, the belt itself may cushions/backrests in the front and then adjusting the belt to the not be close enough to your body passenger seat. Occupants in the front desired length to restrain a child seat and, if it is in front of you, it could passenger seat must never sit on the cause neck wounds or other injuries in or secure a large item in a seat. (Continued) an accident. Additionally, in an

57 Before Starting

(Continued) • All occupants should always wear Someone on the road may be a poor edge of the seat, leaning toward the their lap and shoulder belts properly. driver and cause an accident that dashboard or otherwise sit out of • The driver and front passenger seats includes you. This can happen far position. The occupants’ back must be should be moved back as far as away from home or on your own as upright as comfort allows, and possible to allow the Advanced street. 2 must rest against the seatback with Front Air Bags room to inflate. the seat belt properly fastened. Feet Statistics report that seat belts save • Do not lean against the door or must be on the floor (i.e. not on the lives and help reduce the seriousness window. Your vehicle has dashboard, seat or out of the of injuries in an accident. Some of the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable window). worst injuries happen when people are Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts Children that are not big enough to Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), reduce the possibility of ejection and wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see and if deployment occurs, the SABIC the risk of injury caused by striking the “Child Restraints System” in this and SAB air bags will inflate inside of the vehicle. section) should be secured in the rear forcefully into the space between Everyone in a motor vehicle should be seat in child restraints seats or you and the door. belted at all times. belt-positioning booster seats. Older • If the air bag system in this vehicle children who do not use child needs to be modified to Three-Point Seat Belts restraints seats or belt-positioning accommodate a disabled person, All seating positions in your vehicle are booster seats should ride properly contact an Authorized Maserati equipped with combination lap and buckled up in the rear seat. Never Dealer. shoulder belts. allow children to slide the shoulder The belt retractor is designed to lock belt behind them or under their arm. during very sudden stops or impacts. The safest place for a child that has WARNING! This feature allows the shoulder part outgrown the child safety seat is in the In an accident, all occupants can suffer of the belt to move freely with you rear seat using the standard seat belt much greater injuries if not properly under normal conditions, conforming in combination with a suitable booster buckled up. You can strike the interior to the body of the occupants. seat if needed so the seat belt is of your vehicle or other occupants or However, in an accident, the belt will properly located on the child. you can be thrown out of the vehicle. lock and reduce your risk of striking You should read the instructions Always be sure you and others in your the inside of the vehicle or being provided with your child restraint vehicle are buckled up properly. thrown out. system to make sure that you are using Buckle up even though you are an The driver is responsible for respecting, it properly. excellent driver, even on short trips. and ensuring that all the other

58 Before Starting occupants of the car also observe the • Wearing your belt improperly could into the buckle until you hear a local regulations concerning the use of make your injuries in an accident “click.” seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts much worse. You might suffer before starting the vehicle. internal injuries, or you could even Seat belts are designed to be used by slide out of part of the belt. Follow persons whose physical characteristics these instructions to wear your seat 2 (age, height, weight) are provided for belt properly and to keep your by established legislation in each passengers safe, too. country. Anyone who does comply • Two people should never be belted with these provisions may not travel in into a single seat belt. People belted the front passenger seat. This also together can crash into one another applies to children. Their heads are in an accident, hurting one another proportionally heavier and larger than severely. Never use a lap/shoulder those of adults, while their bones and belt for more than one person. muscles are relatively undeveloped. To • Remember that, in the event of an help protect them in case of a WARNING! accident, the rear seat passengers collision, they must use special • The seat belts height must be not wearing the seat belts are not restraint or safety systems, even in the adjusted only with the vehicle only subject to personal injuries but rear seat area. stationary. also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. • Do not bring sharp edges in contact with a seat belt. This could reduce WARNING! Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions their initial strength and cause them • It is forbidden and dangerous to ride to tear in the event of a crash. • Enter the vehicle and close the door. in a cargo area. In an accident, Sit back and adjust the seat. • If a seat belt has been brought in people riding in these areas are contact with a sharp edge, or has • The seat belt latch plate is on the more likely to be seriously injured or been used to pin something to it, rear door pillar, above the seat on killed. have it immediately replaced by our the external side. • Do not allow any person to ride in Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt any area of your vehicle that is not • A belt that is latched into the wrong across you, make the belt go around equipped with seats and seat belts. buckle will not protect you properly. your body and when the belt is long The lap portion of the belt could • Be sure all passengers are in a seat enough to fit, insert the latch plate and using a seat belt properly. (Continued)

59 Before Starting

(Continued) an accident. The belt forces won't ride too high on your body, possibly impact on the strong hip and pelvic causing internal injuries. Always bones, but across your abdomen. WARNING! latch your belt into the Always wear the lap belt as low as A frayed or torn belt could break in an corresponding buckle. possible and keep it comfortable. accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system 2 • A belt that is too loose will not • A twisted belt will not protect you periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or protect you properly. In a sudden properly. In a collision, it could even loose parts. Damaged parts must be stop, you could move too far cut into you. Be sure the belt is replaced immediately. forward, increasing the possibility of straight. If you can't straighten a Do not disassemble or modify the injury. Wear your seat belt belt in your vehicle, take it to a system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies comfortably. Service Center immediately. must be replaced by an Authorized • A belt that is worn under your arm is • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings Maserati Dealer after an accident if dangerous. Your body could strike etc.) that prevent the seat belts from they have been damaged (bent the inside surfaces of the vehicle in laying close to the occupants bodies. retractor, torn belt, etc.). an accident, increasing head and • Never carry children on a passenger’s neck injury. A belt worn under the lap. Three-Point Seat Belt Height arm can also cause internal injuries. Adjustment • Position the shoulder belt on your • The lower part must adhere to the chest so that it is comfortable and pelvis rather than the abdomen of not resting on your neck. The the occupant. To fasten the lap belt WARNING! retractor will withdraw any slack in pull slightly up the diagonal portion The seat belts height must only be the belt. of the shoulder belt. To loosen the adjusted when the vehicle is lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch • To release the belt, push the red stationary. plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug button on the buckle. The belt will belt reduces the risk of sliding under automatically retract to its stowed The vehicle has a shoulder belt height the belt in an accident. position. If necessary, guide the seat adjuster for the driver and front belt with your hand while it is passenger seating positions. rewinding, to prevent it from Adjust the guide so that the shoulder twisting. portion of the belt is on the shoulder WARNING! and not falling off of it. The belt • A lap belt worn too high can should be close to, but not contacting, increase the risk of internal injury in the neck.

60 Before Starting

Push downward the upper part of the Three-Point Seat Belt far enough to comfortably wrap indicated slider above the shoulder Untwisting Procedure around the occupant so as to not belt guide to release the anchorage, activate the ALR. If the ALR is then move the belt slider up or down Use the following procedure to activated, you will hear a ratcheting to the fixed position that fits you best. untwist a twisted three point belt. sound as the belt retracts. In this case, • Position the latch plate as close as allow the belt to retract completely 2 possible to the anchor point. and then carefully pull out only the WARNING! • At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) amount of belt necessary to After the adjustment, always check above the latch plate, grasp and comfortably wrap around the seat that the slider to which the oscillating twist the belt 180 degrees to create occupant. ring is fixed, is locked into one of the a fold that begins immediately Slide the latch plate into the buckle positions provided. With the handgrip above the latch plate. until you hear a "click". released, push again downward to • Slide the latch plate upward over the allow the anchoring device to click folded belt. The folded belt must into place, in the event that it has not enter the slot at the top of the latch WARNING! been released in one of the positions plate. • Remember that, in the event of a provided. • Continue to slide the latch plate up violent impact, the passengers in the until it clears the folded belt. rear seats who are not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to Passengers Seat Belts personal injury but also represent a All passengers seat belts are equipped danger for passengers sitting in the with Automatic Locking Retractors front seats. (ALR) and can be used to secure a • Always fasten the seat belts. child restraint system. For additional • Traveling without the seat belts information, see “Installing Child fastened significantly increases the Restraint Systems using the Vehicle risk of serious injury in the event of Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under a collision, even with the air bags. “Child Restraint Systems” in this • In the event of a collision, the seat section. When you release the anchorage try belts help reduce the possibility of If the passenger seat position should to move the belt slider up and down the vehicle’s occupants being not be used to accommodate a child to make sure that it is locked in thrown against the structures of the position. restraint system, only pull the belt out (Continued) 61 Before Starting

(Continued) passenger compartment or out of the vehicle. • The air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts, not to 2 substitute them. The front air bags only deploy in the event of certain head-on collisions of sufficient intensity. They may not be activated if the vehicle rolls over, or in the event of rear bumps or minor frontal • Allow the belt to retract completely • Pull out completely the tape part collisions, or non-frontal collisions. into the retractor seat behind the with the right buckle (C); seatback. Seat Belt for Rear Central Seat To buckle the seat belt proceed as Unlike all other seat belts, this one has follows: two buckles and two metal latch • Take place in the central seat and plates; in this way it is possible to pull out the belt (A) from the upper release it from the seat. retractor in a normal manner, • Press the red button located on the without twisting it; front of the buckle using the free • Insert the first latch plate located at latch plate (step 1) and unlatch the the end of the shoulder portion of plate from the left-side buckle (step the belt (A) inside the left buckle (B); 2). • Insert the latch plate located at the end of the lap portion of the belt (A) inside the right buckle (C).

WARNING! The restraining action of the central belt is only possible with the tape part

62 Before Starting with the left and right buckle extracted from the seat cushion. WARNING! To unlatch the seat belt, release the • The belt and retractor assembly right plate of the lap portion by must be checked by an Authorized clicking on the red button. Maserati Dealer and must be 2 Using Seat Belt in Automatic replaced if the Automatic Locking Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working Use the seat belt automatic locking properly. mode anytime a child safety seat is • Failure to replace the belt and Pretensioners work for all size installed in a seating position that has retractor assembly could increase occupant restraint systems, including a belt with this feature. the risk of injury in collisions. the child restraint systems. Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, should be properly buckled up in a Seat Belt Pretensioners NOTE: child restraint system. To obtain the highest degree of Automatic Locking Mode Setting The car is equipped with front seat protection from the action of the belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in • Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. pretensioning device, wear the seat the belts in the event of a severe belt tight to the chest and pelvis. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull frontal impact. This guarantees the downward until the entire belt is perfect adherence of the seat belts to Pretensioners are triggered by the extracted. the occupants bodies before the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt restraining action begins. pretensioner may be used only once retracts, you will hear a clicking This car is also equipped with a second because it is a pyrotechnic device. sound. This indicates the safety belt pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its Pretensioners do not require any is now in the automatic locking activation is signalled by the maintenance or lubrication: any mode. shortening of the metal cable and changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting curling of its protective sheath. unusual natural events (floods, sea Unbuckle the three point seat belt and storms, etc.), the device has been allow it to retract completely to affected by water and mud, it must be disengage the automatic locking replaced. mode and activate the vehicle emergency locking mode.

63 Before Starting

passenger is unbelted, the seat belt present to occupant present the reminder light and the related system will repeat the warning WARNING! message will turn on in the instrument sequence. It is strictly forbidden to remove or cluster. Message remains on for 5 The driver should instruct all other tamper with the pretensioner seconds. occupants to fasten their seat belts. 2 components. Any service intervention If a front seat belt is unbuckled while must be carried out only by qualified traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph and authorized personnel. Always (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both contact an Authorized Maserati audio and visual notification on the Dealer. instrument cluster. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger CAUTION! seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may be Operations which lead to impacts, triggered when an animal or heavy vibrations or localized heating (over object is on the front passenger seat. It 212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours is recommended to restrain pets in the The BeltAlert® warning sequence max.) in the area around the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 pretensioners may damage or deploy carriers that are secured by seat belts, mph (8 km/h) for more than 19 them erroneously. These devices are and properly stow cargo. seconds, by blinking the seat belt not affected by vibrations caused by reminder light and message and by Seat Belts and Pregnant uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. sounding an intermittent chime. Contact the Authorized Maserati Women Once the sequence starts, it will Dealer for any intervention that may Seat belts should be worn by pregnant continue for the entire duration. After be required. women: the risk of injury in the event the sequence completes, the seat belt of an accident is greatly reduced for reminder light remains illuminated them and the unborn child if they are Enhanced Seat Belt Use until the respective seat belts are ® wearing a seat belt. The best way to Reminder System (BeltAlert ) fastened and the message remains on protect the fetus is to protect the ® for 5 seconds. BeltAlert is a feature intended to mother. If the opened front door on the driver remind the driver and front passenger Pregnant women must position the or passenger side is closed and the to fasten their seat belts. lower part of the belt below the belly occupant presence sensor detects a The feature activates with engine so that it passes over the pelvis and status change from occupant not running. If the driver or front seat under the abdomen (see figure).

64 Before Starting Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle has advanced front air bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat 2 belt restraint systems. The driver's advanced front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel in the area shown in the When a safety belt is worn properly, it is picture. On this area is embossed the The advanced front air bags have a more likely that the baby will not be word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier multistage inflator design. This allows hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as recognition. the air bag to have different rates of for anyone, the key to making safety The passenger's advanced front air inflation based on the severity and belts effective is wearing them properly. bag is mounted in the dashboard, type of collision. above the glove compartment in the This vehicle is equipped with driver area shown in the picture. On this and front passenger seat track WARNING! area is embossed the word “AIRBAG” position sensors that may adjust the Pregnant women must carefully for easier recognition. inflation level of the advanced front air bags based upon seat position. observe the above indications, as well NOTE: as local regulation concerning the use This vehicle is also equipped with a These air bags are designed to the of seat belts. front passenger seat belt buckle advanced air bag regulatory sensor that detects whether the front requirements. passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the inflation rate of the advanced front air bag. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The SABIC air bags are located above the

65 Before Starting

side windows and their covers are also • Front and side impact sensors; inflation rate is used in less severe labeled “AIR bag”. • Front seat belt pretensioners; collisions. A higher energy output, This vehicle is also equipped with • Seat belt buckle switch and seat track inflation rate, is used for more severe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air position sensors; collisions. Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during 2 from the battery; it is located on the a side impact. The Supplemental CAUTION! positive battery terminal. Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are • The electronic control unit provides mounted on front seats and are for the activation of the located in the outboard side of the pretensioners, front air bags or side front seats. WARNING! air bags (front and rear) based on The air bag is not a substitute for the NOTE: different criteria, according to the seat belts. Correct use of the seat type of impact. Failure of one or After any accident, the vehicle should belts, in combination with the air bag, more systems to activate is not be taken to the Authorized Maserati will offer protection for the driver and indicative of a system malfunction. Dealer immediately. passenger in the front seat in the • The front and/or lateral air bags may event of a head-on collision. inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent Air Bag System Components impact involving the underbody Your vehicle may be equipped with the Advanced Front Air Bags area, for example in case of violent following air bag system components: Properties impacts against steps, sidewalks, speed bumps, or when the vehicle • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); The advanced front air bag system has falls into potholes, or similar. • Air bag warning light on the multistage driver and front passenger instrument cluster; air bags. This system provides air bag inflation rates which are appropriate • Steering wheel and column; to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! • Instrument cluster; determined by the Occupant Restraint • Driver advanced front air bag; Controller (ORC), which may receive • Never place objects (e.g. mobile phones, toys, folders, tablets, ecc..) • Passenger advanced front air bag; information from the front impact sensors. on the passenger side of the • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air dashboard since they could interfere Bags (SAB); The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that with correct inflation of the • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable requires air bag deployment. This passenger air bag and also cause Curtains (SABIC);

66 Before Starting

serious injury to the occupants. dashboard and above and behind • Do not place anything on or around the sun visors). Deployment of the the air bag covers or attempt to air bag in an accident could cause open them manually. You may fatal injuries to the baby regardless damage the air bags and you could of the severity of the collision. be injured because the air bags may 2 no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Always drive with your hands on Supplemental Air bags the steering wheel rim, so that the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air air bag can inflate freely if required. Bags (SAB) During the drive your back must be Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air as upright as comfort allows and be Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest against the seat back with the seat and shoulder area of the occupants in belt properly fastened. the event of a side impact of • Do not apply stickers or other medium/high severity. The SAB is objects on the steering wheel, on marked with “AIRBAG” label sewn the dashboard in the passenger’s into the outboard side of the front side air bag area, on roof side trims seats. or on the seats. • Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or especially with a pipe, pencil or other objects in your mouth. In the event of a collision, the intervention of the air bag could result in serious injury. • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a rearward-facing infant seat onto the front seat (see warning plate on the

67 Before Starting

When the air bag deploys, it opens the the area in which the window bag is On top of what previously described, seam between the front and side of located to avoid possible injury the characteristics of the collision the seat's trim cover. Each air bag during air bag inflation. Sit upright registered by the sensors and sent to deploys independently; a left side in the center of the seating area. the control unit of the ORC can also impact deploys the left air bag only • Do not cover the front seatbacks cause a sudden cut of the power from 2 and a right side impact deploys the with clothes or covers. Do not use the battery, “blowing” the right air bag only. accessory seat covers or place pyrotechnical charge located on the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable objects between you and the side air positive battery terminal. Curtain (SABIC) bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects SABIC air bags are designed to protect CAUTION! could cause serious injury. the head of front and rear occupants After a collision that has caused the in the event of a side impact, thanks to • Do not add roof racks that require ignition of the pyrotechnical charge, the wide cushion inflation surface. permanent attachments (bolts or this must be replaced at an Authorized Each air bag features inflated screws) for installation on the Maserati Dealer. chambers placed adjacent to the head vehicle roof. Do not drill into the of each outboard occupant that roof of the vehicle for any reason. Advanced front air bags are designed reduce the potential for side-impact to provide additional protection by head injuries. The SABICs deploy Air Bag Deployment Sensors supplementing the seat belts in certain downward, covering both windows on and Controls frontal collisions depending on the the impact side. severity and type of collision. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Advanced front air bags are not partial or complete ejection of vehicle The Occupant Restraint Controller expected to reduce the risk of injury in occupants through side windows in (ORC) determines if deployment of the rear, side, or rollover collisions. certain rollover (because equipped front air bags and/or side air bags in a The advanced front air bags will not with rollover sensing) or side impact frontal or side collision or rollover deploy in all frontal collisions, events. event is required. Based on the impact including those that may produce sensor's signals, a central electronic substantial vehicle damage, for ORC deploys the advanced front air example, some pole collisions, truck under rides, and corner impacts. On WARNING! bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as the other hand, depending on the • Side air bags also need room to type and location of impact, advanced inflate. Do not rest your head, arms required, depending on the severity and type of impact. front air bags may deploy in crashes or elbows on the door, windows or with little vehicle front-end damage

68 Before Starting but that produce a severe initial After the test, the air bag warning collision. For this reason, children deceleration. light will turn off. If the ORC, during must never occupy the front seat in The side air bags will not deploy in all the diagnosis phase detects a a rearward facing seat even if the side collisions. Side air bag malfunction that could affect the air car is not moving. Deployment of deployment will depend on the bag system, it turns on the air bag the air bag following an impact severity and type of collision. Because warning light and the “Service Airbag could cause fatal injuries to the 2 air bag sensors measure vehicle System” message either momentarily child. Please note that when the deceleration over time, vehicle speed or continuously. The diagnostics also ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC and damage merely are not good record the nature of the malfunction. position or is turned off, the air bag indicators of whether or not an air A beep will sound if the light will not deploy in case of collision. bag should have deployed. illuminates again after initial startup. Therefore, in these cases, lack of air Seat belts are necessary for your bag deployment is not an indication protection in all accidents, and also of a system malfunction. are needed to help keep you in • Ignoring the air bag warning light position, away from an inflating air and message in your instrument bag. The ORC monitors the readiness cluster could mean you won't have of the electronic parts of the air bag the air bags to protect you in the system whenever the ignition switch is event of a collision. If the light does in the RUN position. If the ignition not come on as a bulb check when switch is in the OFF position, in the the ignition is first turned on, stays ACC position, or not active, the air bag on after you start the engine, or if it system is not activated and the air comes on as you drive, have an bags will not inflate. The air bag warning light monitors the internal circuits and Authorized Maserati Dealer service The ORC contains a backup power the air bag system immediately. supply system that may deploy the air interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. bags even if the battery has low Front Air Bag Inflator Units power or it becomes disconnected When the ORC detects a collision prior to deployment. When starting requiring the advanced front air bags, the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag WARNING! it signals the inflator units. A large warning light on the instrument • If the ignition switch is in RUN quantity of nontoxic gas is generated cluster for approximately 4 to 8 position, the engine is off and the to inflate the advanced front air bags. seconds for a test. vehicle is in complete stop, the air bags can be deployed in case of

69 Before Starting

The steering wheel hub trim cover and Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Front and Side Impact Sensors the upper right side of the dashboard Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units In front and side impacts, impact separate and fold out of the way as During collisions where the impact is sensors can aid the ORC in determining the air bags inflate to their full size. confined to a particular area of the appropriate response to impact events. The air bags then quickly deflate while side of the vehicle, the ORC may Enhanced Accident Response System 2 helping to restrain the driver and front deploy the SABIC air bags, depending passenger. The advanced front air bag on the severity and type of collision. In In the event of an impact causing air gas is vented through the vent holes in these events, the ORC will deploy the bag deployment, if the communication the sides of the air bag. In this way, SABIC only on the impact side of the network and the power remains intact, the air bags do not interfere with your vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is depending on the nature of the control of the vehicle. generated to inflate the side curtain accident, the ORC will determine whether the enhanced accident Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air air bag. Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The inflating side curtain air bag response system will have to perform the following functions: The ORC unit determines if a side pushes the head/s of the occupant/s collision requires the side air bags to seating in the outside seats from the • cut off fuel to the engine; inflate, based on the severity and type edge of the headliner out of the way • turn hazard lights and interior lights of collision. Based on the severity and and covers the window. The air bag on as long as the battery has power type of collision, the side air bag inflates with enough force to possibly or until the ignition switch is turned inflator on the crash side of the vehicle injure you if you are not belted and off; may be triggered, releasing a quantity seated properly, or if items are • unlock the doors automatically; positioned in the area where the side of nontoxic gas. • disconnect the battery with a curtain air bag inflates. This especially The inflating SAB exits through the pyrotechnic charge. seat seam into the space between the applies to children. Air Bag Deployment Result occupant and the door. The side air The SABICs may also help reduce the bag moves at a very high speed and risk of partial or complete ejection of The advanced front air bags are with such a high force that it could vehicle occupants through side designed to deflate immediately after injure you if you are not seated windows in certain rollover events deployment. properly, or if items are positioned in (because equipped with rollover If you do have a collision which the area where the side air bag sensing). deploys the air bags, any or all of the inflates. This especially applies to following may occur: children. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or

70 Before Starting

skin reddening to the driver and monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Air Bag System Maintenance front passenger as the air bags which are know to the State of deploy and unfold. California to cause cancer and birth • As the air bags deflate, you may see defects or other reproductive harm. To WARNING! some smoke-like particles. The minimize exposure, avoid breathing • Modifications to any part of the air particles are a normal by-product of exhaust, do not idle the engine except bag system could cause it to fail; 2 the process that generates the as necessary, service your vehicle in a thus you could be injured if the air non-toxic gas used for air bag well-ventilated area and wear gloves bag system is not there to protect inflation. These airborne particles or wash your hands frequently when you. Do not modify the components may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or servicing your vehicle. For more or wiring. Do not modify the front throat. If these particles settle on information go to: bumper, vehicle body structure, or your clothing, follow the garment www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- add aftermarket side steps or manufacturer's instructions for vehicle running boards. cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle • It is dangerous to try to repair any after an air bag has deployed. If you part of the air bag system without are involved in another collision, the the necessary know-how. air bags will not be in place to WARNING! protect you. • Deployed air bags and seat belt • Do not attempt to modify any part pretensioners cannot protect you in of your air bag system. The air bag another collision. Have the air bags, may inflate accidentally or may not ENVIRONMENTAL! seat belt pretensioners, and the function properly if modifications Air bag inflation releases a small front seat belt retractor assemblies are made. Take your vehicle to an amount of powder. This powder is not replaced by an Authorized Maserati Authorized Maserati Dealer for any harmful to the environment. Dealer. Also, have the Occupant air bag system service. If your seat Restraint Controller (ORC) system including your trim cover and serviced as well. cushion needs to be serviced in any • Have the air bag checked, serviced way (including removal or WARNING! and replaced only by an Authorized loosening/tightening of seat California Proposition 65 Maserati Dealer. attachment bolts), take the vehicle Operating, servicing and maintaining to an Authorized Maserati Dealer. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • Only Maserati manufacturer can expose you to chemicals including approved seat accessories may be such as, engine exhaust, carbon (Continued) 71 Before Starting

(Continued) driver air bag. • whether or not the driver and used. If it is necessary to modify the • If you or another occupant is an passenger safety belts were air bag system for persons with adult with a medical condition that buckled/fastened; disabilities, contact an Authorized requires air bag deactivation, please • how far (if at all) the driver was Maserati Dealer. contact an Authorized Maserati depressing the accelerator and/or 2 • If the speedometer, tachometer, or Dealer. For further information on brake pedal; and any engine related gauges are not disabled driver or passengers see • how fast the vehicle was traveling. working, the Occupant Restraint http://www.safercar.gov. These data can help provide a better Controller (ORC) may also be • Persons with disabilities are advised understanding of the circumstances in disabled. The air bags may not be not to travel in the front seat in which crashes and injuries occur. ready to inflate for your protection. order to avoid the risk of serious Promptly check the fuse block for NOTE: injuries or death, even in minor blown fuses. To identify the air bag crashes. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in if a crash situation occurs; no data are section "Maintenance and Care". See recorded by the EDR under normal an Authorized Maserati Dealer if the Event Data Recorder (EDR) driving conditions and no personal fuse does not fix the problem. This vehicle is equipped with an event data (e.g., name, gender, age, and data recorder (EDR). The main purpose crash location) are recorded. However, Transport of persons with of an EDR is to record, in certain crash other parties, such as law disability or near crash-like situations, such as an enforcement, could combine the EDR air bag deployment or hitting a road data with the type of personally If it is necessary to modify the obstacle, data that will assist in identifying data routinely acquired advanced air bag system of your understanding how a vehicle’s systems during a crash investigation. vehicle to accommodate a person with have performed. To read data recorded by an EDR, disabilities, contact an Authorized The EDR is designed to record data special equipment is required, and Maserati Dealer. related to vehicle dynamics and safety access to the vehicle or the EDR is systems for a short period of time, needed. typically 30 seconds or less. In addition to the vehicle WARNING! The EDR in this vehicle is designed to manufacturer, other parties, such as • The advanced air bag system of your record such data as: law enforcement, that have the special vehicle is not designed to protect • how various systems in your vehicle equipment, can read the information adults with disabilities that require were operating; deactivation of the passenger or

72 Before Starting if they have access to vehicle or the Child Restraint Systems not hold the child, no matter how EDR. strong you are. The child and others NOTE: could be badly injured. Any child A child restraint system can help riding in your vehicle should always protect a child in a vehicle so ensure be in a proper restraint system that the child restraint selected has a suitable for the child’s size. 2 certification label applicable to FMVSS There are different sizes and types of 213 in the U.S., or CMVSS 213 in restraint systems for children from Canada. newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Everyone in your vehicle must be Always refer to the manual provided buckled up all the time, including with child seat to ensure it is the babies and children. Every state in the proper type according the travelling United States and all Canadian child. Use the restraint system that is provinces require that small children correct for your child. ride in proper restraint systems. Please be reminded that you can be Infants and Child Restraints prosecuted for ignoring this law. Safety experts recommend that Children 12 years or younger should children ride rearwardfacing in the ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, vehicle until they are two years old or if available. According to crash until they reach either the height or statistics, children are safer when weight limit of their rear facing child properly restrained in the rear seats seat. rather than in the front. Two types of child restraint systems can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. WARNING! The infant carrier is only used In a collision, an unrestrained child, rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is even a baby, can become a projectile recommended for children from birth inside the vehicle. The force required until they reach the weight or height to hold even an infant on your lap limit of the infant carrier. could become so great that you could

73 Before Starting

Convertible child seats can be used either Older Children and Child seatback, they should use a rearward-facing or forward-facing in the Restraints belt-positioning booster seat. rear seat of the vehicle. Convertible child The child and belt-positioning booster seats often have a higher weight limit in Children who are two years old or who seat are fixed to the car by the the rearward-facing direction than infant have outgrown their rear-facing child lap/shoulder belt. 2 carriers do, so they can be used seat can ride forward facing in the rear rearward-facing by children who have seat of the vehicle in a proper child Children Too Large for Booster outgrown their infant carrier but are still restraint. Forward-facing child seats Seats and convertible child seats used in the younger than at least two years old. Children who are large enough to forward-facing direction are for Children should remain rearward- wear the shoulder belt comfortably children who are over two years old or facing until they reach the highest and whose legs are long enough to who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height allowed by their child bend over the front of the seat when weight or height limit of their seat. Both types of child restraint their back is against the seatback rear-facing child seat. systems are fixed to the car in the rear should use the lap/shoulder belt in a Children should remain in a seat area by the lap/shoulder belt or rear seat. the LATCH child restraint anchor forward-facing child seat with a • Make sure that the child is upright in system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and harness for as long as possible, up to the seat. Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this the highest weight or height allowed section. by the child seat. These child seats are • The lap portion should be low on the also fixed to the car by the hips and as snug as possible. lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s restraint anchorage system located in WARNING! squirming or slouching can move the the rear seat area. Refer to “Lower belt out of position. • Never place a rear facing infant seat Anchors and Tether for CHildren • If the shoulder belt contacts the face in front of an air bag. A deploying (LATCH)” in this section. or neck, move the child closer to the air bag can cause death or serious All children whose weight or height is center of the vehicle. Never allow a injury to a child 12 years or younger, above the forward-facing limit for the child to put the shoulder belt under including a child in a rearward facing child seat should use a belt-positioning an arm or behind their back. infant seat. booster seat until the vehicle’s seat • Only use a rearward-facing child belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the back is against the

74 Before Starting

NOTE: Here are some tips on getting it could strike the occupants or For additional information, refer to the most out of your child seatbacks and cause serious personal www.seatcheck.org or call restraint injury. 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents • Before buying any restraint system, should refer to Transport Canada’s Installing Child Restraint make sure that it has a label website for additional information: 2 certifying that it meets all applicable Systems using the Vehicle Seat www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ Safety Standards. Maserati also Belt equipped with ALR safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm recommends that you make sure All the passenger seat belts are that you can install the child equipped with an Automatic Locking restraint in the vehicle where you Retractor (ALR) to secure child WARNING! will use it before you buy it. protection through a Child Restraint • Improper installation can lead to • The restraint system must be System (CRS). These types of seat belts failure of an infant or child restraint. appropriate for your child’s weight are designed to keep the lap portion It could come loose in a collision. and height. of the seat belt tight around the child The child could be badly injured or • Check the label on the restraint restraint seat avoiding to use a locking killed. Follow the restraint system for weight and height limits. clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise manufacturer’s directions exactly • Carefully follow the instructions that if the entire belt is pulled out of the when installing an infant or child come with the restraint system. restraint. retractor in order to enable the belt to • If installed improperly, it may not retract subsequently. For additional • A rearward-facing child restraint work when needed. information on ALR, see “Using Seat should only be used in a rear seat. A • Fit the child into the seat according Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor rearward-facing child restraint in the to the child restraint manufacturer’s (ALR) Mode” in “Occupants Restraint front seat may be struck by a directions. Systems” in this section. deploying passenger air bag, which To install a Child Restraint System with may cause severe or fatal injury to ALR, pull enough of the belt out of the infant. WARNING! the retractor leading it through the When your child restraint system is belt path of the protection device. not in use, secure it in the vehicle with Slide the latch into the buckle until it the seat belt or remove it from the clicks, then remove the entire safety vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the belt from the retractor in order to vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, rewound. While rewinding a click will

75 Before Starting

indicate the safety belt is now in LATCH-Compatible child restraint NOTE: Automatic Locking mode. systems are now available. You should • To correctly install a child restraint Exert then a traction on the exceeded never install LATCH child seats so that system on the rear seats, position the lap section of the belt in order to two seats share a common lower seat back in the less tilted position tighten it around the child restraint anchorage. (see chapter "Rear seats" in section 2 seat. All seat belts will loosen over If your child restraints are not “Understanding the Vehicle”). time, it is therefore necessary to check LATCH-Compatible, install the • The top tether strap anchorage them periodically and set them restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. behind the central rear seat should properly. Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child be used to secure a child restraint Lower Anchors and Tether for Restraint System system with the vehicle's seat belts. Children (LATCH) The lower LATCH anchorages are “U-shaped” metal rings located on the Your vehicle's rear outboard seats are rear seat where the cushion meets the all equipped with the child restraint seatback just below the symbol shown anchorage system called LATCH. in the picture, but are not visible. You The LATCH system allows the child will find them if you run your finger restraint systems to be fixed without along the intersection of the seatback using the vehicle's seat belts, instead and seat cushion surfaces. fixing the child restraint system to the vehicle structure, using lower anchorages A and upper tether strap B. Such anchorages can be reached pushing down or lifting the foldable end of the trunk compartment cover.

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seat.

76 Before Starting

and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

NOTE: 2 • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. To install a LATCH-Compatible child • Tighten upper strap until you reach • When using a LATCH-Compatible restraint seat proceed as follows. the tension level recommended by child restraint system, please ensure the restraint system manufacturer. • Secure the child seat to the that all seat belts not being used for “U-shaped” lower metal rings • Fully lower the headrest. occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. positioned on the rear seat. NOTE: • Fix the top tether strap (provided For any further details on installation with the child seat), to the anchor and/or use of child restraint system, located in the rear part of the refer to the instructions provided with WARNING! backrest. the child seat. • Improper installation of a child • Lift the headrest. restraint system to the LATCH • Route the top tether to provide the anchorages can lead to failure of an most direct path between the infant or child restraint. The child anchorage behind the backrest and WARNING! could be badly injured or killed. the child restraint system passing it • A child seat should be fitted only Follow the child restraint between the slide rods of the when the car is stationary. Follow manufacturer's directions exactly headrest. the instructions for assembly, when installing an infant or child disassembly and positioning that restraint system. the manufacturer must supply with • Child restraint anchorages are the child restraint system. designed to withstand only those • An incorrectly anchored tether strap loads imposed by correctly fitted could lead to increased head motion (Continued)

77 Before Starting (Continued) • Never carry children on your lap, not Transporting Pets child restraints. Under no even newborns. No one can restrain circumstances are they to be used for a child in the event of an accident. Air bags deploying in the front seat adult seat belts, harnesses, or for • In case of accident, replace the child could harm your pet. An unrestrained attaching other items or equipment seat with a new one. pet will be thrown about and possibly 2 to the vehicle. injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident. Important Safety Notice for Pets should be restrained in the rear Transporting Children seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by vehicle seat belts. • Install the child seat on the rear seat as this is the safest position in case of collisions. • Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner’s manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not contain instructions for use. • Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat. • If using the vehicle seat belt, always check that the belt does not restrain the child's throat. • Firmly pull the seat belt to check that it is correctly buckled. • Never allow a child to seat improperly or to unbuckle the seat belt while driving. • Never allow a child to wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arms or behind the back.

78 Before Starting Park Assist speed is increased to approximately The sensors can detect obstacles up to 7.5 mph (12 km/h) or above. The a distance of approximately 50 in (120 The Park Assist (also called system will become active again if the cm) from the front bumper in the “ParkSense”) system provides visual vehicle speed is decreased to speeds horizontal direction, depending on and audible indications of the distance less than approximately 6.2 mph the location, type and orientation of between the rear and/or front bumper (10 km/h). the obstacle. 2 and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a Park Assist Sensors parking maneuver. The four Park Assist sensors, located in Besides the use of the sensors the rear bumper, monitor the area available on the bumpers and of the behind the vehicle that is within the rear parking camera, the vehicle may sensors' field of view. The sensors can be equipped with surround view detect obstacles up to approximately cameras (optional) to assist the driver 78 in (200 cm) from the rear bumper during maneuvers on dead-ends/roads in the horizontal direction, depending and on intersections. For more details on the location, type and orientation on this option, see chapter "Surround of the obstacle. View Camera System (optional)" in Park Assist Warning Messages this section. Display Refer to “Park Assist System Usage The Park Assist Warning screen will Precautions” for limitations of this only be displayed if “Sound + Display” system and recommendations. is selected from the MTC+ System. Park Assist system will retain the last Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section system state (enabled or disabled) “Dashboard Instruments and from the last ignition cycle when the Controls” for further information. ignition is changed to the RUN The Park Assist Warning screen is position. located on the instrument cluster Park Assist system can be active only display. The six Park Assist sensors, located in when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or It provides visual warnings to indicate the front bumper, monitor the area in D (Drive). the distance between the rear bumper front of the vehicle that is within the If Park Assist is enabled at one of and/or front bumper and the detected sensors' field of view. these shift lever positions, the system obstacle. will remain active until the vehicle

79 Before Starting

The warning display will turn on The following charts show the warning indicating the system status (ready or alert visualization when the system is off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) detecting an obstacle. or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has been detected. 2 The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two parts with four arcs while the two detection areas behind the car into five arcs. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed or flashing light and a characteristic sound according to the obstacle distance. The color indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The green color of the outer arc indicates the maximum distance, the amber color of the middle arcs indicates the medium distance, while the red color of the nearest arc indicates the minimum distance. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from single to slow, to fast and to continuous. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster displays one flashing red arc only, combined with a continuous sound.

80 Before Starting

Front Sensors - Warning Alerts More than 50 in 50-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in Front distance (120 cm) (120-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm) Audible Alert None None Slow Fast Continuous Arc in left and 2 None 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) right areas Light type None Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc color - Green Amber Amber Red Radio sound Active Active Mute Mute Mute

Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts Rear More than 78 in 78-59.4 in 60-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in distance (200 cm) (200-151 cm) (150-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm) Audible None Single Slow Slow Fast Continuous Alert Arc in left and right None 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) areas Light type None Solid Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc color – Green Amber Amber Amber Red Radio sound Active Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute

NOTE: • Maserati reserves the right to change specifications without prior notification. • Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

81 Before Starting

Enabling and Disabling Park the system requires service, the LED (11 km/h). Under this condition Park Assist will blink momentarily, and then the Assist will not operate. See LED will be on. “Instrument Cluster” in section By accessing the submenu “Safety & When the shift lever is moved to R “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” Driving Assistant” from MTC+ System, (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of for further information. 2 the “Park Assist” can be disabled 7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the If the instrument cluster displays a (option “Off”). The available options system is disabled, the instrument message prompting you to clean the regarding the warning alerts are: cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST sensors, make sure the outer surface “Sound” or “Sound + Display”. Refer Off” message for 5 seconds until the and the underside of the rear bumper to “MTC+ Settings” in section shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or and/or front bumper is clean and clear “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” when the shift lever is moved in D of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other for further information. (Drive). obstruction and then cycle the ignition The front sensors can be enabled or switch. If the message continues to disabled at any time by pressing the Service the Park Assist System appear contact the Authorized button on the front dome console. In case of malfunction of the Park Maserati Dealer. Assist system, the instrument cluster will actuate a single sound, once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service. After pressing the button the If a failure message is displayed on the instrument cluster will display the state When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system instrument cluster, contact the of front parking sensors for Authorized Maserati Dealer. approximately five seconds. The has detected a faulted condition, the button LED will be on when the front instrument cluster will display the sensors are disabled. The button LED corresponding message for the time will be off when the front sensors are lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D enabled. If the button is pressed and (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph

82 Before Starting

Cleaning the Park Assist the service Park Assist message to be responsible for safety and must Sensors displayed in the instrument cluster. continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can When cleaning the sensors, take result in serious injury or death. special care not to scratch or damage them; therefore, do not use dry, rough CAUTION! Park Assist Volume 2 or hard cloths. • Park Assist is only a parking aid and The sensors must be washed with it is unable to recognize every The volume of the acoustic signal clean water, possibly adding car obstacle, including small obstacles. emitted by the front and rear parking shampoo. Parking curbs might only be sensors is set to the medium level. Should you need to repaint the temporarily detected or not Three different levels of volume can bumper or in case of paint touch-ups detected at all. Obstacles located be selected via the submenu “Safety & in the sensor area, please contact above or below the sensors will not Driving Assistant” from the MTC+ exclusively the Authorized Maserati be detected when they are in close System. Dealer. Incorrect paint application proximity. Low level is useful in certain could affect the parking sensors • The vehicle must be driven slowly conditions when the parking sensor operation. when using Park Assist in order to be acoustic signal keeps coming on able to stop in time when an although there is no actual collision Park Assist System Usage hazard. This may typically occur when Precautions obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driving in a queue or when the vehicle NOTE: driver looks over his/her shoulder is overtaken by motorcycles or other vehicles on one or both sides in a • Jackhammers, large trucks, and when using Park Assist. queue of traffic. other vibrations could affect the When you set the volume, only the performance of Park Assist. parking sensor acoustic signal will be • Objects such as bicycle carriers, WARNING! affected. The radio or any other trailer hitches, etc., must not be Drivers must be careful when backing devices connected to the vehicle placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the up even when using the Park Assist sound system will not be affected. rear bumper while driving the system. Always check carefully behind Refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in vehicle. Failure to do so can result in your vehicle, look behind you, and be section “Dashboard Instruments and the system misinterpreting a close sure to check for pedestrians, animals, Controls” for further information. object as a sensor problem, causing other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are

83 Before Starting Operation with a Trailer Rear Parking Camera screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The operation of the rear sensors is Your vehicle is equipped with a rear The rear parking camera is located on automatically deactivated when the parking camera that allows you to see the rear of the vehicle above the rear trailer's electric plug is inserted in the an image on the MTC+ screen of the license plate. vehicle's tow hook socket, while the rear surroundings of your vehicle 2 front sensors stay active and can whenever the shift lever is put into R provide acoustic and visual warnings. (Reverse). The rear sensors are automatically When “Parkview Camera Off Delay” reactivated when the trailer's cable mode is enabled, the rear view image plug is removed. shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). When “Rearwiew Camera Delay” mode is enabled, the rear view image shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). To assist the driver during maneuvers When the shift lever is shifted out of R on dead-ends/roads and on (Reverse), the rear camera mode is intersections, the vehicle may be exited and the navigation or audio equipped with an optional surround screen appears again. view camera system. In this case, the When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if rear parking camera is integrated into the function is set to “MTC+ Settings”) the surround view camera system. In will illustrate the width of the vehicle both configurations (rear parking to assist with parking or aligning to a camera only or surround view camera hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines system), you can monitor the rear will show separate zones in different view. For more details on this option, color that will help indicate the see chapter "Surround View Camera distance to the rear of the vehicle. System (optional)" in this section. The image will be displayed along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the

84 Before Starting

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone and color: WARNING! Drivers must be careful when Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle reversing even when using the rear view camera. Always check carefully Red 11-12in(28-30cm) 2 behind your vehicle, and be sure to Yellow 12 - 78 in (30 cm-2m) check for pedestrians, animals, other Green 78-157 in (2–4 m) or greater vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before reversing. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to be careful while reversing. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the rear camera should only be used as a parking aid, as the rear camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the rear camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using the rear camera.

85 Before Starting NOTE: Surround View Camera If snow, ice, mud, or any other System (optional) substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, System components and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover 2 the lens. The system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle, placed on the front grid, under the side rearview mirrors and on the liftgate, between the number plate lights. When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse) position, the top view and the rear view of the surrounding area will be automatically displayed on MTC+ display. Instead, when the shift lever is shifted to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position, it is possible to activate/ deactivate the system by pressing “Surround Camera” softkey in “Controls” screen of MTC+ display.

86 Before Starting

Once the “Surround Camera” screen is possible when the transmission is in R possible to set the function that delays displayed, it is possible to choose (Reverse) position. the exit from this screen in special which images to display according to 4 Choose the most suitable setting for situations when the transmission lever possible settings. the situation and the maneuver you is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) and P (Park) Rear view and top view are performing or going to perform, position by using the surround view by touching the relevant button camera delay menu. For further 2 present under the images: the edges information, see “MTC+ Settings” in Rear cross path view of the pressed button will highlight. section “Dashboard Instruments and The button will highlight and the type Controls”. of setting will appear on each image. Front cross path view

Front view and top view

In any shift lever condition, when “Surround Camera” screen is displayed, a pop-up message will appear in the upper part for 5 seconds to advise the driver to check the In the top view, the vehicle is surrounding area before any represented as it is during the WARNING! manoeuvre. maneuver (see example in the figure), Failure to follow the precautions With transmission in P (Park), N therefore any open doors will be below might result in serious injury or (Neutral) or D (Drive), the upper right visible in the image. even death. corner of the screen will show the “X” To display also the dynamic lines of • Drivers must be careful during key: touch it to go back to the the area you are setting, it is necessary maneuvers also when using the previous screen of MTC+ display, to set this function by accessing the camera system with surround view. before entering in “Controls”. “Settings” menu on MTC+, at “Safety The deactivation of the rear & Driving Assistant” item, by using the (Continued) visualization via “X” soft-key is not dynamic gridlines action menu. Once this menu is displayed, it is also

87 Before Starting

(Continued) monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • Always check carefully the areas which are know to the State of around your vehicle, before CAUTION! California to cause cancer and birth proceeding forward or backward. • To avoid vehicle damage, the camera defects or other reproductive harm. To • Be sure to always check for any system with surround view should minimize exposure, avoid breathing 2 pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, only be used as a parking aid, as the exhaust, do not idle the engine except obstructions, or blind spots. cameras are unable to view every as necessary, service your vehicle in a • The driver must use the utmost obstacle or object in your drive path. well-ventilated area and wear gloves caution while using the system to • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle or wash your hands frequently when avoid damage to property or must be driven slowly when using servicing your vehicle. For more personal injury. the camera system with surround information go to: view, to be able to stop in time when www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- • The camera system with surround vehicle view is designed for use during the an obstacle is seen. It is day or under good lighting recommended that the driver looks conditions. Do not use and rely on frequently over his/her shoulder the system under poor lighting when using this system. conditions. NOTE: • Distance lines and directional lines must be used only as a reference and If snow, ice, mud, or any other only when vehicle is on a flat substance builds up on the camera ground. The distance shown on lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, MTC+ display must be interpreted as and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover a reference and might be different the lens. from the distance actually present between the vehicle and any displayed objects. WARNING! • Any obstacles present above the California Proposition 65 cameras cannot be detected. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon

88 Before Starting Safety Tips Exhaust Gas Whenever detecting a change in the sound of the exhaust system or Transporting Passengers eventual exhaust fumes inside the WARNING! vehicle have the Authorized Maserati Dealer inspect the complete exhaust Exhaust gases can injure. They contain system and adjacent body areas for WARNING! carbon monoxide (CO), which is 2 broken, damaged, deteriorated, or • Do not leave children or animals colorless and odorless. Breathing it mispositioned parts. inside parked vehicles in hot can make you unconscious and can Open seams or loose connections weather. Interior heat build-up may eventually poison you. To avoid could permit exhaust fumes to seep cause serious injury. breathing (CO), follow these safety into the passenger compartment. • Never ride in a cargo area, inside of tips: a vehicle. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any • Do not allow people to ride in any WARNING! area of your vehicle that is not longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. California Proposition 65 equipped with seats and seat belts. Operating, servicing and maintaining • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is • If it is necessary to sit in a parked a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle in a seat and using a seat belt vehicle with the engine running, can expose you to chemicals including properly. adjust your heating or cooling such as, engine exhaust, carbon controls to force outside air into the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that vehicle. Set the blower at high which are know to the State of speed. California to cause cancer and birth • If you are required to drive with the defects or other reproductive harm. To liftgate open, make sure that all minimize exposure, avoid breathing windows are closed and the climate exhaust, do not idle the engine except control blowers switch is set at high as necessary, service your vehicle in a speed. DO NOT use the recirculation well-ventilated area and wear gloves mode. or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more The best protection against carbon information go to: monoxide entry into the passenger www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- compartment is a properly maintained vehicle engine exhaust system.

89 Before Starting

Vehicle Safety Checks checked by the Authorized Maserati secured so that they cannot slip out of Dealer. position and interfere with the pedals Seat Belts or impair safe operation of your • Inspect the belt system periodically, vehicle. checking for cuts, frays, and loose WARNING! parts. Damaged parts must be NOTE: 2 Certain components of this vehicle replaced immediately. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can such as air bag modules, seat belt • Do not disassemble or modify the provide you with any information pretensioners, adaptive steering system. about the available Maserati floor columns, and button cell batteries may mats included in the “Genuine • If the belt has been sharply pulled, contain Perchlorate material. Special Accessories” range. for example as the result of an handling may apply for service or accident, the safety belt, together vehicle end of life disposal. See with the anchoring devices, the www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ anchoring device mounting screws perchlorate. WARNING! and the pretensioner must be Pedals that cannot move freely can completely replaced. Even if the belt Defroster does not present any exterior signs cause loss of vehicle control and Check operation by selecting the of wear or damage, it may have lost increase the risk of serious personal defrost mode and place the fan system its restraining properties. injury. on high speed (see “Air Conditioning • Always make sure that floor mats Air Bag Warning Light Controls” chapter in section are properly attached to the proper The light should illuminate and “Dashboard Instruments and fasteners. remain lit for a few seconds bulb Controls”). • Never place or install floor mats or checking when the ignition switch is You should be able to feel the air other floor coverings in the vehicle pushed in RUN position (see directed against the windshield and that cannot be properly secured to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) front side windows. Contact an prevent them from moving and — Air Bags” chapter in this section). Authorized Maserati Dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. interfering with the pedals. • If the light does not illuminate • Never put floor mats or other floor Floor Mat while starting, contact the coverings on top of already installed Authorized Maserati Dealer. Always use floor mats designed to fit floor mats. Additional floor mats and • If the light stays on, flickers, or comes the footwell of your vehicle. Use only other coverings will reduce the size on while driving, have the system floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly

90 Before Starting

of the pedal area and interfere with • Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation the pedals. Pressure” chapter in section WARNING! • Check mounting of mats on a “Features and Specifications”) for California Proposition 65 regular basis. Always properly proper cold inflation pressure. Operating, servicing and maintaining reinstall and secure floor mats that Lights and Indicator Lights a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle have been removed for cleaning. 2 • Have someone observe the can expose you to chemicals including • Always make sure that objects operation of exterior lights while such as, engine exhaust, carbon cannot fall into the driver footwell you operate the controls (see monoxide, phthalates and lead, that while the vehicle is moving. Objects “Lights” chapter in section which are know to the State of can become trapped under the “Understanding the Vehicle”). California to cause cancer and birth brake pedal and accelerator pedal • Check turn signal and high beam defects or other reproductive harm. To causing a loss of vehicle control. indicator lights on the instrument minimize exposure, avoid breathing • Mounting posts must be properly cluster (see “Instrument Cluster” exhaust, do not idle the engine except installed, if not equipped from the chapter in section “Dashboard as necessary, service your vehicle in a factory. Failure to properly follow Instruments and Controls”). well-ventilated area and wear gloves floor mat installation or mounting Door Latches or wash your hands frequently when can cause interference with the servicing your vehicle. For more brake pedal and accelerator pedal • Check for positive closing, latching, information go to: operation causing loss of control of and locking of doors and liftgate www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- the vehicle. (see “Unlock the Vehicle with Key vehicle fob” chapter in this section). Tires Fluid Leaks • Examine tires for excessive tread • Check area under vehicle after wear and uneven wear patterns. overnight parking for recent fluid • Check for stones, nails, glass, or leaks (oil, fuel, etc.). other objects lodged in the tread or • If gasoline fumes are detected or sidewall. fluid leaks are suspected, contact the • Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. • Check the wheel nuts for tightness.

91 Before Starting

92 3 – Understanding the Vehicle

Interior Components ...... 94 Front Power Seats ...... 97 Driver Memory Seat ...... 101 Rear Seats ...... 103 Steering Wheel Adjustment ...... 106 Adjustable Pedals (if equipped) ...... 107 Rearview Mirrors ...... 108 Lights ...... 111 Wipers and Washers ...... 124 Interior Features ...... 128 Cargo Area ...... 134 Front to Back Roof Rails (optional) ...... 142 Power Sunroof with Sunshade (optional) ...... 143 HomeLink (optional) ...... 145 Air Conditioning Distribution ...... 149

93 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components Dashboard Components

3

94 Understanding the Vehicle

1 Adjustable side air outlets. Central Console Components 5 Cover for cupholder and 2 Engine START/STOP button. cigarette lighter/power socket 1 Automatic transmission shift compartment. 3 Light switch. lever. 6 Rotary selectors and buttons for 4 Anti-theft system indicator. 2 Drive mode switches. the multimedia navigation. 5 Steering wheel controls. 3 Electric Parking Brake lever. 7 Hazard flashers switch. 6 Instrument cluster. 4 Cover for compartment with 8 Drive height selector. 7 Right shift paddle +. AUX, USB and SD memory card 3 8 Left shift paddle –. port. 9 Multifunction lever (windshield wipers, headlight washer and headlight selection, turn signals). 10 Adjustable central air outlets. 11 Analog clock. 12 MTC+ display. 13 Climate controls. 14 Dashboard glove box handle. 15 Dashboard glove box with two USB ports for charging of connected source. 16 Steering wheel adjustment control.

95 Understanding the Vehicle

9 Unlock button for central 5 HomeLink controls. console compartment with 6 Button to switch off passenger cupholder and power outlet. compartment lights. 10 Central console covers with 7 Button to open fully/partially armrest function. the power liftgate. 11 Adjustable air outlets. 8 Button to enable/disable front 12 Cover for power outlet and USB sensors of the Park Assist system. 3 slots compartment. 9 Sunroof controls (optional). 13 Four-zone climate controls for Passenger door rear passengers (optional). Front Doors Components 1 Inside door handle. Front Dome Console 2 Driver’s seat, steering wheel, Components adjustable pedals and rear mirrors memory switch (if equipped). 3 External rearview mirrors switches. 4 Power window switches. 5 Power door unlocks/locks. 6 Rear windows and sunshade lockout button. Driver door 7 Loudspeakers. 8 Storage compartment. 1 Reading lights control button. 9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 2 Central light control button. 10 Door panel grip. 3 Reading lights. 11 Reflex reflector. 4 Central light. 12 Outside door handle.

96 Understanding the Vehicle

13 Door lock button with “Passive 10 Outside door handle. Front Power Seats Entry” function. 11 Heated switch for right rear Seats and seat belts are part of the 14 Door outboard opening lock. seat (optional). The heated Occupant Restraint System of the switch for the left rear seat is vehicle. Rear Doors Components on the left rear door. For further information, see chapter 12 Door lock button with “Passive “Occupant Restraint System” in Entry” function (optional). Section “Before Starting”. Depending on the different markets and versions, the front seats may have 3 different controls for adjustment and optional features. The configurations shown below may differ from the ones in your vehicle.

WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in 1 Inside rear door handle. a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2 Grip. Front Power Seat Controls 3 Loudspeaker. 4 Door storage pockets. The power seats switches are located on the outboard side of the seat 5 Power window and sunshade cushion. (optional) button. Use the front switch 1 to move the 6 Power doors lock/unlock seat up or down, forward or rearward buttons. or to recline the seat cushion. 7 “Child protection” door lock Use the switch 2 to recline the system. seatback. Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the 8 Inside door lock/unlock knob. lumbar support. 9 Reflex reflector.

97 Understanding the Vehicle

Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired WARNING! position is reached. Remember that the headrests must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s CAUTION! head. If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) 3 is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse The angle of the seat cushion can be Replacement” in section “Maintenance adjusted in four directions. and Care”). Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1, to move the front cushion Head Restraints Adjustment (for seat in the direction of the switch. Comfort Seat only) Release the switch 1 when the desired To manually lift or lower the head position is reached. restraints on the Comfort Seat press Seat Back Tilt Control the indicated lateral button. The angle of the seatback can be NOTE: adjusted forward or rearward. The optional Sport Seat does not Push the seatback switch 2 forward or include the head restraint adjustment. rearward, the upper seatback will Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment move in the direction of the switch. The seat can be adjusted both forward Release the switch 2 when the desired and rearward. position is reached. Push the seat switch 1 forward or Power Lumbar rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Push the switch 3 forward or rearward Release the switch 1 when the desired to increase or decrease the lumbar position is reached. support. Push the switch 3 upward or Seat Up/Down Adjustment downward to raise or lower the The height of the seat can be adjusted lumbar support. up- or downward.

98 Understanding the Vehicle

The seats comfort commands are in • Starting from the state “OFF”, the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. indicated below the respective icon, WARNING! They are present in the "Climate" within 15 seconds touch the driver or • Never adjust the seat while driving. screen even when the A/C is off. See passenger seat soft-key once to You could lose control of the vehicle. “Air Conditioning Controls” in section select HI-level heating. Moving the seat could distract you “Dashboard Instruments and or make you press a pedal Controls” for further details. unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while WARNING! 3 the vehicle is parked. • Persons with low skin sensitivity • Do not ride with the seatback because of advanced age, chronic reclined so that the shoulder belt is illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, no longer resting against your chest. medication, alcohol use, exhaustion In a collision you could slide under or other physical conditions must be the seat belt, which could result in careful when using the seat heater. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver serious injury or death. It may cause irritation even at low or passenger seat soft-key a second temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. time to select LO-level heating. CAUTION! • Do not place anything on the seat Do not place any object under a that insulates against heat, such as a power seat or obstruct its movement blanket or cushion. This may cause as it may cause damage to the seat the seat heater to overheat. controls. Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the Front Seats Heat Function way. NOTE: The engine must be running for the Front Heated Seats heated seats to operate. The front seats are equipped with • Within 15 seconds, touch the same • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the heaters in both seat cushions and soft-key a third time to shut off the lower part of the MTC+ display. seatbacks. seat heating.

99 Understanding the Vehicle

NOTE: The seats comfort commands are in • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver Once a heat setting is selected, heat the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. or passenger seat soft-key a second will be felt within 2 to 5 minutes. They are present in the “Climate” time to select LO-level ventilation. screen even when the A/C is off. See When the HI-level setting is selected, “Air Conditioning Controls” in section the heater will provide a boosted heat “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” level during the first 4 minutes of for further details. operation. Front Ventilated Seats Function Then, the heat output will drop to the 3 normal HI-level. NOTE: If the HI-level setting is selected, the The engine must be running for the system will automatically switch to ventilated seats to operate. LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the At that time, the display will indicate lower part of the MTC+ display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the the change from HI to LO. • Starting from the state “OFF” , seat ventilation. The LO-level setting will turn OFF indicated below the respective icon, automatically after a maximum of within 15 seconds touch the driver or approximately 45 minutes. passenger seat soft-key once to select Front Ventilated Seats HI-level ventilation. (optional) To enhance occupants comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat cushion and seatback, they draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler when the temperature is high.

100 Understanding the Vehicle Driver Memory Seat • The “1” and “2” buttons which are • Check on the instrument cluster for used to recall either of two the positive response of the actions This feature allows the driver to store programmed memory profiles. “Memory 1 (or 2) profile set”. up to two different memory profiles After these steps, the profile set will for easy recall through a memory be memorized in the selected position. switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver NOTE: seat, external side mirrors, adjustable Memory profiles can be set without pedals (optional), and power tilt and the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle telescopic steering column and a set of must be in P (Park) to recall a memory 3 programmed radio stations. profile. Your key fob RKE transmitter can also be set to recall the same positions by Pairing Remote Keyless Entry pressing the button. Transmitter to Seats Memory Memory Profiles Setting NOTE: Your key fob with RKE transmitters NOTE: • Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be programmed to recall one of can be linked to each of the memory Saving a new memory profile will two programmed memory profiles by positions. erase an existing profile from memory. pressing the button on the RKE transmitter. • “Passive Entry” door handles cannot To create a new memory profile, be linked to the memory function. NOTE: perform the following: Use either the memory recall switch This feature can be enabled or • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or the key fob RKE transmitter (if disabled using the MTC+ System, refer or RUN position. linked to the memory feature) to to “MTC+ Settings” in section recall memory positions 1 or 2. • Adjust all memory profile settings to “Dashboard Instruments and desired preferences (i.e., seat, side The memory seat switch is located on Controls” for further information. mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), the driver's door trim panel. The power tilt and telescopic steering To program your key fobs RKE switch consists of three buttons: column, and radio station presets). transmitter, perform the following • The “S” (SET) button, which is used • Press and release the “S” button on actions: to activate the memory save the memory switch. • Cycle the ignition device to the RUN function. • Within 5 seconds, press and release position. the memory button “1” or “2”.

101 Understanding the Vehicle

• Move the seat and/or the other Memory Position Recall Easy Entry/Exit Driver Seat adjustable devices in the position This feature provides automatic driver that you wish to memorize, or recall NOTE: seat positioning to enhance driver a previously memorized profile, The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall mobility when entering and exiting pressing the corresponding memory memory positions. If a recall is the vehicle. button “1” or “2”. attempted when the vehicle is not in P The distance the driver seat moves • Cycle the ignition device to the OFF (Park), a message will display in the instrument cluster. depends on where you have the driver position. seat positioned when you place the • Press and release the “S” button. 3 To recall the memory settings for ignition device to the OFF position. • Within 5 seconds, press and release driver, press memory button number • When you cycle the ignition device the memory button “1” or “2”. “1” or “2” on the driver's door trim to the OFF position the driver seat: • Press and release the button on panel or the button on the RKE • will move about 2.36 in (60 mm) key fob RKE transmitter. transmitter linked to memory position rearward if the driver seat position “1” or “2” with ignition device in the • Within 3 seconds, press and release is greater than or equal to ca. 5.51 RUN position. the button on the key fob RKE in (140 mm) forward of the rear A recall can be canceled by pressing transmitter. stop; any of the buttons (“S”, “1”, or “2”) To check if the system has memorized • will move to a position of ca. 3.15 during a recall. When a recall is the correct profile, you can move the in (80 mm) rearward of the rear canceled, the driver seat, external side seat and press the button: the seat stop if the driver seat position is mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), will move to the memorized position. between 5.51 in (140 mm) and 3.15 and power tilt and telescopic steering in (80 mm) forward of the rear NOTE: column stop moving. stop. Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be A delay of at least one second will unlinked to your memory settings by occur before selecting a new recall. • The seat will return to its previously pressing the “S” button followed by set position when you place the the button on the key fob RKE ignition device into the ACC or RUN transmitter. position. • The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 3.15 in (80 mm) forward of the rear stop. In this position, there would be no benefit

102 Understanding the Vehicle to the driver by moving the seat for Rear Seats pushing the seatback to the back until Easy Exit or Easy Entry. reaching the required position. When Each stored memory setting will have Rear seats can fit three passengers. releasing the lever, the fixed positions an associated easy entry/exit position. Seats and seat belts are parts of the will be acknowledged by lever control occupant restraint system of the cable clicking in place to lock. NOTE: vehicle. Ensure that seatback is fastened to the The Easy Entry/Exit feature can be position by trying to move it back and enabled or disabled using the MTC+ forth. Lever control cable locks also System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in WARNING! when fully folding the seatback down section “Dashboard Instruments and Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in on the seat. 3 Controls” for further information. a seat and using a seat belt properly. To move the seatback in another position, lift lever in position 1 and NOTE: hold it up until bringing seatback to the new fixed position, which is See chapter “Occupants Restraint acknowledged by the cable locking in Systems” in section “Before Starting” place when releasing the lever. for seat belt positioning.

Rear Seat Folding Seatback The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides for a recliner feature with three available fixed positions that can be set using the lever on seat external side. The LH lever tilts the long part (60), while the RH lever tilts the shorter one (40). The less tilted position (90°) is the one most suitable when a child seat must be installed; the other positions tilt WARNING! the seatback toward the liftgate up to 23°. • Ensure the seatback is always locked To tilt the seatback, lift the lever from in one of the fixed positions before its rest position 0 to position 1 while (Continued)

103 Understanding the Vehicle

(Continued) fastening the rear seat belts. An unlocked seatback cannot ensure the necessary stability for passengers and/or for child seats. An unlocked seatback could cause severe injuries in case of accident. • When fastening a child seat on external rear seats, ensure that the 3 corresponding seatback is in the full upright position. • To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. NOTE: Rear seat backrest can be fully folded to increase luggage space. See “Cargo Area” in this section for further details.

Rear Head Restraints The seat head restraints are adjustable in height. Rear Armrest NOTE: • To lower the head restraint, press the The rear armrest is mobile and can be When there are no occupants in the push button, located at the foot of folded up into the seatback. seat, lower the head restraint in order the head restraint on the left side, • To lower it, pull the stripe as to provide the driver maximum and push downward on the head indicated. visibility. See label on the fixed side restraint. windows, shown in the picture.

104 Understanding the Vehicle

Rear Side Heated Seats • Push the switch once to select the (optional) highest heating level. The two upper LEDs on the switch will illuminate. The side rear seats can be equipped • Push the same switch a second time with heaters both in seat cushion and to select the lowest level. Only one seatback. LED will illuminate. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the trim • Push the same switch a third time to panel of each rear door. shut the heating elements off. The LED will turn off. 3 • To close it, pull it upwards then push it back into its seat. WARNING! On the front part of the armrest there • Persons with low skin sensitivity are two cupholders (see “Interior because of advanced age, chronic Features” in this section). illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be CAUTION! careful when using the seat heater. The armrest is not designed to support It may cause irritation even at low the weight of an adult or a child: temperatures, especially if used for please use it only to store beverages long periods of time. NOTE: or small objects. • Do not place anything on the seat • Once a heat setting is selected, heat that insulates against heat, such as a will be felt within two to five NOTE: blanket or cushion. This may cause minutes. Seatback panel behind armrest the seat heater to overheat. Sitting • The engine must be running for the features an opening allowing you to in a seat that has been overheated heated seats to operate. carry long objects or ski bags with no could cause irritation due to the By selecting the HI-level setting, the need to fold the seatback. See “Cargo increased surface temperature of the heater will provide a boosted heat Area” in this section for further seat. level during the first four minutes of details. The switch on the trim panel with the operation. Then, the heat output will resistance icon activates the heating drop to the normal HI-level. on the corresponding seat.

105 Understanding the Vehicle By setting the HI-level, the system will Steering Wheel NOTE: automatically switch to LO-level after a Adjustment You can use your key fob with RKE maximum of 60 minutes of continuous transmitter or the memory buttons on operation. The LO-level setting will This feature allows you to tilt the the driver's door trim panel to return turn off automatically after a steering column upward or downward the tilt/telescopic steering maximum of approximately 45 or to lengthen or shorten it in order to column/wheel to programmed minutes. adjust the steering wheel to an positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in optimized position. this section. 3 Power Adjustment The power tilt/telescoping steering column/wheel switch is located on the WARNING! lower left side of the steering column. Do not adjust the steering To adjust the tilt of the steering column/wheel while driving. column/wheel, move the switch up or Adjusting the steering column/wheel down as desired. while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column/wheel is adjusted before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Heated Steering Wheel (optional) The steering wheel contains a heating element inside the rim that helps To lengthen or shorten the steering warm driver’s hands by cold weather. column/wheel, pull the switch toward The heated steering wheel has only you or push the switch away from you one temperature setting. Once turned as desired. on, this function will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off.

106 Understanding the Vehicle The heated steering wheel can shut Adjustable Pedals off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. (if equipped) The heating steering wheel command The adjustable pedals system is is in the “Climate” screen of MTC+. designed to allow greater range of See “Air Conditioning Controls” in pedals positions enabling driver section “Dashboard Instruments and comfort with regard to the steering Controls” for further details. wheel tilt and the seat position. NOTE: This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or 3 The engine must be running for the • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated away from the driver’s feet. heated steering wheel to operate. steering wheel soft-key a second The switch is located on the front side time to turn it off. of the driver's seat cushion side shield. • Touch the “Climate” softkey located on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • When the heating function is in the WARNING! off state, soft-key is not highlighted. • Persons with low skin sensitivity because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause irritation even at low temperatures, especially if used for Press the switch downward to move long periods of time. the pedals forward (toward the front • Do not place anything on the of the vehicle). steering wheel that insulates Lift the switch upward to move the against heat, such as a blanket or pedals rearward (toward the driver). • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel covers of any type steering wheel soft-key to turn on and material. This may cause the the function. steering wheel heater to overheat.

107 Understanding the Vehicle movements as it may cause damage to Rearview Mirrors the pedal controls. Pedal movement WARNING! may become limited if there is an External Mirrors Do not adjust the pedals position obstruction in the adjustable pedal's. while the vehicle is moving. You could External mirrors can be adjusted lose control and have an accident. electrically and are equipped with Always adjust the pedals position anti-mist resistors operated by the air while the vehicle is parked. conditioning system (see “Air Conditioning Controls” in section 3 The following messages will be “Dashboard Instruments and displayed if the driver is attempting to Controls”). adjust the pedals when the system is The mirrors can be closed electrically locked out: and will yield in both directions in case • “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable of a collision. While Reversing”; The external mirrors are • or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable electrochromic, which means, they While Cruise Engaged”. automatically operate an anti-glare function by gradually shading as the NOTE: light hitting the mirrors increases. For vehicles equipped with driver The external rear-view electrochromic memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) mirrors work in conjunction with the transmitter or the memory buttons on internal rear-view electrochromic the driver's door trim panel to return mirror. the adjustable pedals to programmed NOTE: positions. See “Driver Memory Seat (for versions/markets, where • The mirrors can be adjusted provided)” in section “Understanding electrically only with the ignition the Vehicle” for further information. device in ACC and RUN position. • When the vehicle is started, the indicator light shown in the picture CAUTION! will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear-view mirrors to let the Do not place any object under the driver know that the optional Blind adjustable pedals or obstruct their

108 Understanding the Vehicle

Spot Assist (BSA) system is the adjacent lane and get a partial operational. For more details see overlap with the visible image on the chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in inside rearview mirror. section “Driving”. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the Memory Driver Seat device (if equipped). Check “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for further information. 3 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Use the inside mirror to The external of the rear-view mirror judge the size or distance of a vehicle support is equipped with LEDs, seen in the external side convex lighting up when the turn signals and mirror. vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. When the surround view camera Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse system is installed, at the external This feature provides automatic To adjust a rearview mirror, press bottom side of the rear-view mirror is external rearview mirrors positioning, either the L (left) or R (right) button to the side view camera (refer to allowing the driver to view the select the mirror that you want to “Surround View Camera System ground area behind the front doors. adjust. The spin button will illuminate (optional)” in section “Before The external mirrors will move slightly indicating the rearview mirror is Starting”). downward from the current position activated and can be adjusted. when the shift lever is shifted into Mirrors Positioning Press the mirror control switch reverse. The external mirrors will then The power mirror controls are located corresponding to the arrow indicating return to the original position when on the driver's door trim panel. the direction of the desired the lever is shifted out of the reverse The power mirror controls consist of movement. position. Each memory set of the mirror select buttons and a four-way For optimal vision orientate the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory mirror control switch. outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame

109 Understanding the Vehicle

Seat" chapter in section “Understanding the Vehicle”) corresponds to a mirror tilt position in CAUTION! reverse. Never retract or open the mirrors manually: it could damage the power NOTE: mechanism. The mirrors tilt in reverse can be turned on and off using the MTC+ Internal Rearview Mirror System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in 3 section “Dashboard Instruments and The position of internal rearview Controls”. mirror can be manually adjusted, and Press the switch once and the mirrors is endowed with an accident- Folding Mirrors will fold in; press the switch a second prevention release system operating in time to reset the mirrors to the the event of a collision. The switch for the power folding standard position. Internal rearview mirror is mirrors is located between the power There is a way to make external electrochromic: this glare function is mirror switches. mirrors automatically fold/unfold. automatically deactivated in reverse to • If the function is available, it needs ensure maximum visibility of obstacles. to be activated by MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). • If the mirrors are automatically folded after the last lock action, then they will automatically unfold when the ignition device is set on ACC or RUN position. • If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfolded to CAUTION! reactivate the automatic function. To avoid damage to the mirror during

110 Understanding the Vehicle cleaning, never spray any cleaning Lights NOTE: solution directly onto the mirror. If the headlights or position/DRL lights Apply the solution onto a clean cloth Light Switch are on after the ignition switch is and wipe the mirror clean. The headlight switch located on the placed in OFF position, a buzzer will alert the driver while opening the “Mirror Dimmer” Feature left side of the dashboard is used for the position/DRL lights, headlights, driver's door. The auto-dimming feature can be side marker, license plate lights, front disabled or re-enabled by pressing the and rear fog lights operation. on/off button on the mirror base. Disabling this feature will increase the 3 reflectance of the internal mirror, increasing visibility at night.

Rotate the light switch to the or to the position: the instrument cluster will display the related telltale.

111 Understanding the Vehicle

Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Lights Switch, and Ignition Device and according to the Engine Status and Twilight Sensor Mode

Ignition Engine Twilight Lights Switch Position Device Status Sensor Position Mode AUTO 0 All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and OFF –– license plate lights license plate lights on. 3 on. All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and ACC Off – license plate lights on license plate lights on (2). (2). All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position side marker and (1), side marker and RUN Off – license plate lights on license plate lights on (2). (2). DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position by MTC+). by MTC+). lights, side marker (1), side marker and RUN On DAY and license plate license plate lights on. lights on. Low beams, position DRL (1) on (if enable DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position (1), side marker and by MTC+). lights, side marker (1), side marker and RUN On NIGHT license plate lights and license plate license plate lights on. on. lights on. (1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.

112 Understanding the Vehicle

Automatic Headlights necessary, switch the lights including The delay interval begins when the the front and rear fog lights on and lights switch is turned off (position This system automatically turns the off manually. “0”). If you turn the headlights or headlights on or off according to position lights on, or place the ambient light intensity detected by ignition switch in RUN, the system will the twilight sensor. To turn the system Headlights On with Wipers cancel the delay. on, rotate the lights switch clockwise When this feature is active, the If you turn the headlights off (“0” to “AUTO” position. headlights will turn on approximately position) before the ignition, they will When the automatic system is 10 seconds after activation of the turn off in the normal mode. activated, the headlight time delay wipers, if the lights switch is placed in 3 feature is activated as well. This means the “AUTO” position. The headlights NOTE: the headlights will stay on for up to 90 will additionally turn off by • To activate this feature the lights seconds after you place the ignition deactivation of the wipers if must be turned off (“0” position) device into OFF position. previously activated with this function. within 45 seconds of placing the To turn the automatic system off, NOTE: ignition switch in the OFF or ACC move the lights switch out of “AUTO” position. position. The headlights with wipers feature may be turned on and off using the • The headlight delay time is NOTE: MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ programmable using the MTC+ The engine must be running and the Settings” in section “Dashboard System, see “MTC+ Settings” in twilight sensor in “NIGHT” mode Instruments and Controls”. section “Dashboard Instruments and before the headlights turn on in Controls”. automatic mode. Headlights Time Delay • If the low beam bulbs are active due to “Headlights with Wipers”, then This safety feature provides headlight the headlamps delay feature will not illumination for up to 90 seconds be activated when the ignition WARNING! (programmable) when leaving your switch is set in OFF position. The responsibility for turning on the vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the lights, depending on the daylight and delay feature, place the ignition SmartBeam™ System (for regulations in force in the country of switch in the OFF or ACC position versions/markets, where while the headlights are still on. Then use, always lies with the driver. The provided) automatic system for switching on turn off the headlights within 45 and off the external lights is to be seconds. The SmartBeam™ system provides considered as an aid for the driver. If increased forward lighting for a more

113 Understanding the Vehicle

comfortable and secure driving System Limitations DRL lights will turn on when the experience without resulting in glare There are some cases in which the twilight sensor is in “DAY” mode, the to other vehicles in certain traffic SmartBeamTM system may not function engine is running and the light switch situations. The SmartBeam™ system properly temporarily, and cause is in or “AUTO” position. uses a forward facing digital camera, glaring for other vehicles especially If a turn signal is activated, the DRL located on the windshield behind the with “Auto High Beam Assist” feature LED on the same side of the vehicle internal rear-view mirror, and an activated on MTC+ “Controls” page will turn off for the duration of the electronical headlights controller in (see “MTC+ “Controls” Screen” in turn signal activation. Once the turn order to dynamically adapt the front section "Dashboard Instruments and signal is deactivated, the DRL LED will 3 light distribution according to the Controls"). light up again. traffic scenario. These cases could be related to: NOTE: The digital camera works like a human eye, it is able to see which is the traffic • Vehicles headlight and/or rear light On Canadian vehicles DRL are always context while the headlight electronic (one or both of them) not visible in on. On USA vehicles the DRL lights can controller works like a human brain, the field of view of the camera. be turned on and off using the MTC+ using information from the camera to • Heavy rainy weather. System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section command an headlight reaction that • Heavy foggy weather. “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” gives to the driver the “best” light • Snowing weather. for further information. distribution (best is always in reference • Windshield dirt or impurities in to the specific traffic environment). camera lens zone. Bi-Xenon Headlight (for The camera gives information to the • Camera lens obstruction or logging. headlights without AFS) electronical headlight controller about In all these cases, it will be the driver’s The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights environmental brightness, traffic responsibility to avoid this glaring by operate with an electric arc saturated participants vehicle and obstacles acting manually on the system, with Xenon gas under pressure, lights, distances and velocities. Using a switching off the high beam by means instead of the incandescent filament. proper combination of all these data of steering wheel multifunction lever. The light produced is assuredly higher the smart beam system is able to compared to traditional light bulbs, in dynamically modify the light shape Daytime Running Lights (DRL) terms of quality (brighter light) as well produced by the dipped beam and by as of the span and positioning of the the full beam as well, to make the The lighting system uses the same high illuminated area. driver visibility as much comfortable as or low intensity headlamps LED, possible in every condition without respectively, for the DRL lights and glaring other traffic participants. front position lights.

114 Understanding the Vehicle

menu of MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard WARNING! Instruments and Controls”). If xenon headlamp replacement is The advantages offered by the AFS necessary, contact the Authorized system are perceived especially in case Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. road indications providing broader illumination of the side zones, which Headlight with AFS (for are normally left in the dark, and for versions/markets, where motorway driving (see comparison 3 provided) rendered below). This surely increases driving safety as it These headlamps combines the offers less eye strain and increased “xeno” technology to the AFS orientation for the driver and better (Advanced Frontlighting System) detection of other persons on the adaptive features, using a road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders forward-facing camera located on the and motorcycle drivers). windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror. The system is able to process signals of the forward-facing camera and other onboard systems and subsequently start up five strategic steps in the following situations: • “motorway beam”; • “country beam”; • “town beam”; • “adverse weather beam”; • “tourist beam” (for example in countries with circulation on the opposite side). In this case this function must be activated via the

115 Understanding the Vehicle

The table shows the light values (lux) Combining a bending mode and a The increased lateral illumination is and the light flux (lumen) of AFS vertical adjustment, the system assures gained through a fixed bending light headlights. better visibility of the road surface or a cornering light (depending on the when driving on a curve, steering, or market) elaborating information in the event of road deviations, about the steering angle, the vehicle optimizing vertical and horizontal speed and the turn indicator. light distribution according to the The improved vertical illumination, in current drive path. case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper 3 illuminated distance from the vehicle, through a dynamical adaptation of headlight vertical attitude. NOTE: • Each time the adaptive headlight Lighting Light flux system is turned on, the headlights (A) Low beam 75 lux 1200 lm will perform a self-regulation cycle. High beam 130 lux 1600 lm • All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward. (B) Motorway 120 lux (Driver Side) 1200 lm • “Steering Directed Headlights” 140 lux (Passenger Side) function can be turned on or off using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instrument and Controls” for further information.

Automatic High Beam (for versions/markets, where provided) The Automatic High Beam headlight control system provides increased forward lighting at night by

116 Understanding the Vehicle automating high beam control • Touch the "Controls" soft-key in the After these steps, the green indicator through the use of the forward-facing lower part of the MTC+ display. on the upper right side of the TFT digital camera located behind the • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto display comes on. rear-view mirror, which is the same High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn one used for example by the Lane on the feature. Keeping Assist - LKA system on vehicles with ADAS systems. This camera detects the environmental luminosity, the headlamps of oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps 3 of proceding vehicles in the front area. In these cases, the system automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE: Futhermore, the digital camera is able • The function is enabled only if the to detect the urban areas and the Without ADAS brightness sensor detects the right inhabited centers and to turn off the lighting conditions and them switch high beams when driving near of one to low beam on. of them. • Broken, muddy, or obstructed The properly working for this feature headlights and taillights of vehicles (if all the other conditions are met) is in the field of view will cause ensured between 21.7 mph (35 km/h) headlights to remain on longer and 155 mph (250 km/h). (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, Activation Mode film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause To activate Automatic High Beam the system to function improperly. feature: • Shift the multifunction lever onward With ADAS Automatic High Beam Failure • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto . In the event of an automatic high High Beam Assist" soft-key a second • Put the light switch in “AUTO” beam system failure, the related time to turn it off. position. amber warning light will light up on the TFT display.

117 Understanding the Vehicle

Take your vehicle to the nearest • from this condition, press the lights Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as switch again to turn off the rear fog possible avoiding to use this system. lights (front fog lights will stay on); • press the lights switch again to turn off the front fog lights.

3 The amber indicator light inside the tachometer of the instrument cluster illuminates when the rear fog Fog Lights lights are turned on. NOTE: Turning the lights switch off (position The front fog lights can only be “0”) will also deactivate the front and switched on if the position lights rear fog lights. are switched on. It is possible to turn on the rear fog lights only if the NOTE: low beam lights or the front fog You can also activate the front fog lights are on. lights by pressing the lights switch once when in position and The front and rear fog lights switch is ignition device in RUN position. built into the light switch. NOTE: The front and rear fog lights turn on The green indicator light in the and off in the following order: instrument cluster display illuminates After a key-off/key-on cycle, the front when the front fog lights are turned fog lights will activate automatically • press the lights switch once to turn on. when turning on the position lights on the front fog lights; . The rear fog lights will only turn • press the lights switch a second time on by operating as previously to turn on the rear fog lights (front described. fog lights will stay on);

118 Understanding the Vehicle

Multifunction Lever NOTE: The multifunction lever controls the • If either light remains on and does operation of the turn signals, not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, headlight beam selection and check for a defective outside light. If overtaking lights and wipers and an indicator on the instrument washers acting on the windshield and cluster fails while moving the lever, on the liftgate. then the turn indicator is probably The multifunction lever is fitted on the defective. left side of the steering column. • The message that a turn signal is on 3 will appear in the instrument cluster Turn Signals and a continuous chime will sound if Move the multifunction lever all the the vehicle is driven more than 1 way up or down until the stop mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal triggers. on.

High Beams and Flashing To switch on the high beams with the light switch in headlamp or “AUTO” position, shift the multifunction lever onward. To activate lane change function, tap The blue telltale will illuminate on the lever up or down once, without the tachometer. moving beyond the detent. The turn signals (right or left) will flash three The left or right arrow on the times then automatically turn off. speedometer and tachometer This function is useful when instrument cluster respectively, flashes overtaking or changing lanes. to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

119 Understanding the Vehicle

By pulling the lever backward (toward Flashing occurs also with lights off interior lights were turned on the steering wheel) you switch off the (lights switch in position “0”) if the manually or by opening a door. The high beams and switch on the low ignition switch is RUN position. glove box light, on the dashboard, beams. shares the same characteristics excepting the trunk and liftgate lights. CAUTION! The brightness of the interior lights The high beams can only be switched (ambient lighting and backlighting of on manually by pushing the controls and instruments) can be multifunction lever forward. adjusted by means of the buttons on 3 steering wheel right-hand side, enter “Vehicle settings” menu and select “Interior Lights” sub-menu. To adjust WARNING! the backlighting, the vehicle must be If the high beams are activated, they running and the light switch must be will turn on automatically every time in position. You can signal another vehicle with the low beams are switched on either Press and release the switch ( )to your headlights by lightly pulling the manually or automatically. We visualize the available parameters: multifunction lever toward you. This recommend therefore that you switch will turn on the high beams headlights them off when they are no longer • “Backlighting” (example shown in until the lever is released. necessary and every time the twilight figure). sensor deactivates the external lights. • “Ambient Lighting”.

Interior Lights The interior and external approach lights turn on and off when entering/exiting the vehicle (see “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section “Before Starting” for further information). To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch has Use arrow or to scroll the list of been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the parameters that can be adjusted and

120 Understanding the Vehicle confirm selection by pressing and The dimmable lights are the must be properly leveled, under any releasing switch ( ): available following: vehicle load condition. options will be shown on the display. • instrument cluster dials and display; The vehicle is equipped with a system A check mark will remain next to the that automatically adjusts headlight • dome light (front/rear); previously-selected item until a new leveling according to ground selection is made. • LED in correspondence of the clearance and vehicle load conditions. internal door handle; • doors and steering wheel backlight Dome Lights controls LED; The dome lights integrated into the • front footrest light; front dome console, include a central 3 • front seats night lighting. and two reading lights. The central light automatically turns Automatic Headlights Leveling on when one of the doors is opened A correct headlights leveling is crucial and turns off when the door is closed for the safety of the vehicle’s (timed switching off). The light may be occupants and of people in the street. switched on manually by pressing the central button. Press and release the switch ( )to Moreover it is included in the road The reading lights are controlled by select the option. A selection notice regulation law. the respective side buttons. pops up for 2 seconds and then the In order to obtain the best visibility If they are turned on by pressing the display reverts to the last modified conditions while driving with button, both central and reading parameter. headlights on, the headlight beam lights will stay on for about 10

121 Understanding the Vehicle

minutes after turning the engine off, NOTE: and will then turn off gradually. The dome lights will also turn on by When the exterior lights are switched pressing the or button for on, the two night LEDs fitted on the centralized doors unlock and lock on side of the power buttons on the the key fob RKE transmitter. See overhead console will light up to “Illuminated Entry/Exit” section facilitate the use of the transmission “Before Starting” for further lever and the central console. information. 3 In the event of a collision causing automatic interruption of fuel supply, Apart the lights on the front dome the dome lights switch on console, there is a light with relevant automatically and remain lit for on/off switch located next to the approx. 15 minutes. passenger handholds for the external NOTE: rear seats. These lights will operate The controls of the sunroof and the only when the ignition device is in the HomeLink and the button to switch off ACC or RUN position. Park Assist system can be found on the If one or more doors are opened, the front dome console. front and rear dome lights will turn on A light is available on the roof, under for 27 seconds. If the door is closed the sun visors; it turns on when user before this time, the lights will dim moves the courtesy mirror cover, which and subsequently switch off after is built in the back of sun visor. about 3 seconds.

Button to Switch off Passenger Compartment Lights In addition to specific switches to turn on and off the front and rear side dome lights as previously described, on

122 Understanding the Vehicle the front console there is a button that allows to turn off and on all these lights.

3 If liftgate is left open for a long time, NOTE: lights will turn off after 30 minutes to When the hazard warning lights are save battery charge. activated, the direction indicator Cargo Lights Hazard Warning Flashers controls are disabled. To illuminate the cargo area there are Press the indicated button on the two lights on liftgate and two more Integrated External Rearview center of the central console to turn Mirror Lights inside the trunk compartment. These on the hazard warning flashers. The lights turn on when liftgate is opened operation is independent of the External mirrors are supplied with LED and turn off when it is closed. ignition device position. turn signals integrated on the support. Press the button again to turn them The LED turn signal indicators flash off. simultaneously with the When these lights are on, the corresponding turn signal lights in the direction indicators, the related arrow front and rear of the vehicle. Turning indicator on the instrument cluster on the hazard warning flashers will and the button itself will flash. also activate these LEDs.

123 Understanding the Vehicle Wipers and Washers The multifunction lever operates the CAUTION! wipers and washers acting on the • Turn the washer acting on the windshield and on the window of the windshield and on the window of liftgate when the ignition switch is the liftgate wipers off when driving placed in RUN or ACC position. The through an automatic car wash. The multifunction lever is located on the windshield wipers may be damaged left side of the steering column. if the wiper control is left in any 3 The windshield washer and headlight position other than “OFF”. washer (if equipped) share the same The external mirrors can be equipped • In cold weather, always turn off the fluid reservoir, and a low fluid level is also with approach and courtesy LEDs, wiper switch and allow the wipers to indicated by the same indicator light lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit return to the park position before and by the message on the lights are activated. turning off the engine. If the wiper instrument cluster. switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield and/or to the window of the liftgate, the wiper motor may be damaged when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, the wiper motor may be To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance damaged. Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”. Windshield Wipers • Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four settings to activate the automatic intermittent

124 Understanding the Vehicle

setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers” Rain Sensing Windshield paragraph in this chapter). Wipers CAUTION! • For low speed wiper operation This feature detects moisture on the (stable position "LO"): rotate the • The rain sensing feature may not windshield through an internal end of the multifunction control function properly by ice or dried salt rearview mirror integrated sensor, lever forward to the first trigger water on the windshield. which automatically activates the after the intermittent setting. ® relative wipers. • Use on the windshield of RainX or • Rotate to the second trigger after Rotate forward the end of the products containing wax or silicone the intermittent setting for multifunction lever to one of four may reduce rain sensor performance. 3 high-speed (stable position HI) wiper settings to adjust the detection The rain sensing system has protective operation. system. features for the wiper blades and • Rotate the end of the lever First wiper delay position is the least arms. It will not operate under the backward to the “MIST” position to sensitive, and fourth wiper delay following conditions: activate a single wipe cycle. The position is the most sensitive. Third wipers will continue to operate until position should be used for normal • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the you release the multifunction lever. rain conditions. rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is in RUN position, • To turn the wipers off rotate the The rain sense wipers will the vehicle is stationary and the lever to “OFF”. automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a outside temperature is below 32°F fast wipe depending on the amount (0°C). To resume, set the automatic of detected moisture sensed by a feature on the multifunction lever, particular area of the windshield. start the engine and drive or wait Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” until the outside temperature rises position when you do not want to use above freezing. the automatic intermittent system. • Wipe Inhibit with Transmission in The rain sensing feature can be turned Neutral Position: the rain sensing on and off using the MTC+ System, see feature will not operate when the “MTC+ Settings” in section ignition is placed in the RUN “Dashboard Instruments and position, the transmission shift lever Controls” for further information. is in the N (Neutral) position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). To resume, set the

125 Understanding the Vehicle

multifunction lever to the automatic necessary to shift the multifunction (see paragraph “Wiper Maintenance function or move the shift lever out lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch and Blades Replacement” in chapter of N (Neutral). to OFF position. “Maintenance Procedures” of section Shift the control lever within 15 “Maintenance and Care”). Headlights On with Windshield seconds to the “MIST” position Wipers (forward rotation of the end of the When activating this function, the multifunction control lever) and WARNING! headlights will light up approximately release. The blades are brought in a Operate or service the windshield 10 seconds after the wipers acting on position enabling to open the wiper 3 wiper blades without deactivating the the windshield are turned on if the arms and change the blades. wipers (“OFF” position), leaving the light switch is placed in “AUTO” ignition switch in RUN can be position. In addition, the headlights dangerous for the operator since the switch off when the wipers are turned rain sensor may suddenly activate the off (position “OFF”) if they were wipers. Always use “Service” position previously turned by using this for any intervention on the windshield function. Powering on Headlights with wiper blades. wipers can be activated and deactivated with the MTC+ System, see Windshield Washers and “MTC+ Settings” in section Headlight Washers “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. To use the washer on the windshield, It is possible to use the “MIST” position push the end of the multifunction Wiper Blade Maintenance for a maximum of 3 times within two lever inward (toward the steering minutes, corresponding to different When the wiper arms acting on the column) and hold it as long as washer three blades positions on the windshield are in the rest position it is spray is desired. windshield. When completed, bring not possible to check or replace the If you activate the washer while the the ignition switch in RUN: the arms blades (Service position) as they are windshield wiper control is in the will reposition. If necessary move the folded under the hood. To service the automatic intermittent range, the multifunction lever to other required blades (see paragraph “Wiper wipers will operate for two wipe cycles operating positions. Maintenance and Blades after releasing the lever and then To change the wiper blade on rear Replacement” in chapter resume the previously-selected window of liftgate, simply lift the “Maintenance Procedures” of section intermittent interval. wiper arm to detach it from window “Maintenance and Care”) it is

126 Understanding the Vehicle

If you activate the washer while the Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles windshield wiper is turned off (“OFF” (optional) WARNING! position) the wipers will operate for To avoid fluid freezing inside at low three wipe cycles and then turn off. California Proposition 65 external temperatures, a fluid supply Operating, servicing and maintaining nozzles can be heated by internal a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle resistors. can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon Rear Window Wiper/Washer monoxide, phthalates and lead, that Use the switch on multifunction lever which are know to the State of as follows to turn on the rear window 3 California to cause cancer and birth wiper and/or washer: defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing • From the “OFF” position, turn exhaust, do not idle the engine except control forward to the first detent to as necessary, service your vehicle in a activate wiper intermittently; well-ventilated area and wear gloves • Turn control forward to the second or wash your hands frequently when detent to activate wiper continuous WARNING! servicing your vehicle. For more action; • Do not start the windshield washer information go to: • A further rotation forward (unstable during the cold months until the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- position) will trigger the rear windshield has warmed up. If it has vehicle window washer until control is not warmed up, the liquid could freeze released. After control release, the on the glass and block your view. Headlight Washers (if provided) rear window wiper will resume • Sudden loss of visibility through the The multifunction lever also operates continuous operation; windshield could lead to a collision. the headlight washers when the • From the “OFF” position, turn You might not see other vehicles or ignition switch is in RUN position and control backward (unstable position) other obstacles. To avoid sudden the headlights are turned on. to trigger rear window washer until icing of the windshield during The headlight washers will spray a control is released: the rear window freezing weather, warm the timed high-pressure spray of washer wiper will perform several cycles. windshield with the defroster fluid onto each headlight lens every Once released, control will go back before and during windshield 11 windshield wipers cycles. to “OFF” position. washer use.

127 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Features as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Damages caused by Electric Power Outlets improper use of the power outlet are not covered by the New Vehicle The vehicle is equipped with four 12 Limited Warranty. Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, two available for the front seat passengers, one for rear seat passengers and one fitted in the trunk WARNING! 3 compartment. To avoid serious injury or death: In vehicles equipped with “Smoking • Only devices designed for use in this As a precaution, rear window washer Kit” the electric power outlet inside type of outlet should be inserted pump stops if control is held in active the cupholder is replaced with a into any 12 Volt outlet. position for over 20 seconds. When cigarette lighter. control is released, pump will resume All power outlets are supplied only • Replacing the fuses that protect normal operation. when the engine is started or the power outlets with others of higher If rear window wiper is still on, the ignition device set to ACC or RUN. amperage, there is the risk of fire. wiper arm will automatically go back Power outlets are protected by a fuse. • Do not touch with wet hands. to rest position when the ignition Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug device is turned OFF. • Close the lids when the plug is not into the power outlets to ensure used and while driving the vehicle. proper operation. Otherwise, check the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse • If this outlet is mishandled, it may Replacement” in section “Maintenance cause an electric shock and failure. and Care” for further information. Power Outlet inside the Cupholder To access the power outlet inside the CAUTION! cupholder beside the shift lever, press • Do not plug in accessories that the cover as indicated to open it exceed the maximum power of 160 completely. Remove the cigarette Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. lighter and use its socket as power outlet. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets

128 Understanding the Vehicle

Power Outlets inside the Central Console WARNING! To access the power outlet located High power consumption items inside the glove box of the central plugged into this outlet for long console you need to open the half-lids periods may discharge the battery as indicated in the following and/or prevent the engine from paragraph. starting. 3

Rear Power Outlets A 12 V power outlet in the compartment at the rear end of the central console, is available upon Power Outlet inside the Trunk request for rear seat passengers. The power outlet is positioned on the To access the power outlet, push the right side of the trunk compartment. lid as indicated: it will open completely.

129 Understanding the Vehicle

3 Cupholders The storage and passenger compartment share the same air The vehicle is equipped with several conditioning even though you may cupholders. exclude the air conditioning of the cupholder compartment by moving CAUTION! the indicated button. • Use light and shatterproof containers. • Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cupholders to prevent damage to the containers. By pressing the indicated button on • Do not store hot drinks. the central console, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the Cuholders for Front Passengers inner compartment where the two cupholders are located. The front cupholders are located beside the transmission lever and To close one or both of the half-lids, within the central console. push them down to the locking To access the cupholder, push the cover position. as shown in the picture and it will open completely.

130 Understanding the Vehicle

Cupholders for Rear Passengers Two cupholders are available in the front side of the rear seats central armrest.

3 The AUX auxiliary port features: In the compartment of the central • typical input impedance between console there is also a SD memory card AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm; input. Once inserted into the slot, to extract it, press lightly on the card. • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at For rear seat passengers, there are two 1 kHz; AUX, USB and SD Memory Card USB ports inside the compartment Ports • input compatible only with 3.5 mm located on the rear end of the central jack connectors (not included). console, above the air vents. The inputs are located inside the Any player with these characteristics compartment at the front end of the To access the USB ports open the and analogue audio output (headset outside cover. central console. To access the inputs, output type) can be served by the push the lid as indicated: it will open MTC+ System. The system can completely. recognize the connection to a player outlet autonomously, by enabling access to the audio functions connected to this source. This USB input can be used for data exchange (refer to the MTC+ guide for further details). Two other USB ports for charging of connected source (CHARGE ONLY label) are present inside the glove box compartment of the dashboard.

131 Understanding the Vehicle

This USB ports allow charging for extended periods of time: extreme (CHARGE ONLY label) the connected temperatures and humidity can occur source. in the vehicle. Following conditions can create USB inputs damage or malfunction: Sun Visors • Usage of non-original lightning Sun visors can be folded to the front cables. and to the side of the vehicle. To move • Usage of defective rechargeable the visor laterally, lower and release it 3 devices (smartphone, tablet, mass from its catch as indicated. storage devices or other generic USB In this condition, the visor can be devices). extended by sliding the visor end By lowering the visor you can access • ONLY insert media (eg., USB or SD backward. the courtesy mirror and, by sliding the card), into your vehicle if it came mirror protective cover, the light on from a trusted source. the dome will automatically light up (with the ignition switch in RUN). • Usage of damaged or defective Before raising the visor, close the cables. mirror cover: the light will turn off. iPod® Connection A business card holder is fitted inside each sun visor. An iPod® can be connected to the system via USB and AUX ports by means of a special cable (optional). The MTC+ will then control the following functions: play, pause, fast forward, rewind, next track, previous track, random or repeat mode, selection and navigation of playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast.

CAUTION! Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or an external audio source in the vehicle

132 Understanding the Vehicle

Smoking Kit (optional) lighter can be inserted into the power outlet at the end of the central The kit includes a lighter and a console. removable ashtray with cover. Press the central button to activate The Smoking kit for front seats the cigarette lighter. After about 20 passengers is located inside the box seconds the button returns beside the transmission shift lever and automatically to the initial position can be accessed by pressing the cover and stops the heating: from this time as indicated. the cigarette lighter is ready for use. 3 Behind the rear handholds there is a CAUTION! light with relevant on/off switch (refer After use, always make sure that the to chapter “Lights” in this section). cigarette lighter is switched off. Cloth hooks are present on rear handholds and on pillars between doors. WARNING! • The cigarette lighter reaches high temperatures. Handle it carefully and do not allow children to use it so as to avoid risk of fire and injury! • The cigarette lighter may not be used as a power outlet.

Handholds and Cloth Hooks

Handholds are fitted above the On the side walls of the trunk passenger doors. Once grabbed, they compartment there is a shopping will lower until the block position. hook that can withhold a maximum The rear seat passengers can use the When released, a return spring will load of 22 lb (10 kg). removable ashtray by inserting it into bring them back to the original the rear doors pocket, while the position.

133 Understanding the Vehicle iPad Holder (Genuine Cargo Area Accessories) The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with all information about WARNING! the “Maserati iPad Holder” to be fixed To help protect against personal injury, to the slide rods of the front head passengers must not be seated in the restraints, available in the “Genuine rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is Accessories” range. intended for load carrying purposes 3 only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. Mesh Pockets Front seats are fitted with mesh Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, and accessible by rear passengers. The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle emission control label positioned on the rear driver door's ledge.

CAUTION! The information indicated on the label Do not put heavy or sharp objects in concerns passengers and luggage the mesh pockets. loading operations. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the

134 Understanding the Vehicle

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), distribute their weight as evenly as "Genuine Accessories" range, also both front and rear. possible. large and heavy objects can be The GVWR is the total allowable Stow all loose items securely before fastened to trunk floor. weight of your vehicle. This includes start driving as they could move Eyelets to secure the luggage net are driver, passengers, and cargo. during the trip. provided on the four corners of trunk The total load must be limited so that To separate trunk from passenger floor. you do not exceed the GVWR compartment, the vehicle is equipped For retaining luggage or the indicated on the label. with a rigid horizontal panel, fitted Emergency Kit / First-Aid Kit (if behind the rear seat backrest. When equipped) placed in compartments on vehicle is at a standstill, cargo area the trunk side walls there are special 3 WARNING! cover can withstand a maximum static elastic bands. • Improper weight distribution can load of 260 lb (120 kg). have an adverse effect on the way Apart from cargo area cover, the the vehicle steers, handles and the vehicle can be also equipped with a way the brakes operate. vertical rolling Cargo Net, to be used to separate the cargo area from the • Never drive with the liftgate open. passenger area. Exhaust gases can enter the The Authorized Maserati Dealer can passenger compartment. provide you with any information • Do not arrange any luggage on about the items dedicated to the cargo area cover. In said position usage of the trunk (luggage luggage could not only impair compartment mat, net, foldable driver's view but also, in case of box,...), available in the "Genuine Longitudinal rails on trunk floor collision or unexpected stop, it could Accessories" range. provide safe anchorage for luggage of cause injury to all occupants. different size, thanks to the special Luggage Fasteners and hooks with locking button. To position The trunk is the most suitable place to Retainers the hook, slide it along the rails until load bulky and heavy objects onboard reaching the required position, Vehicle can be equipped with fixed the vehicle. The maximum allowable holding down the central button. and mobile anchorages on trunk floor load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb Release the button and slightly move allowing to fasten and retain any (200 kg). the hook to secure its position in the luggage in a convenient and safe To load your vehicle properly, store notches of the guide. heavier items below and be sure you manner. Using a special and approved net with hooks available in the

135 Understanding the Vehicle

load floor able to accommodate bulky luggage, large-sized equipment and objects that may not fit with the normal dimensions of the trunk. NOTE: Both seat backs can be folded down independently. 3

WARNING! CAUTION! To prevent the other luggage in the trunk from getting into the passenger To avoid luggage inadvertent compartment and create a potential movement, in case of sudden braking danger for the passengers, keep trunk or collision, always check correct cover installed when folding down fastening of the retainers onto floor one of the two seatbacks. rails before anchoring any luggage. When the seatbacks are unfolded to NOTE: the upright position, make sure they The Authorized Maserati Dealer can are latched in one of the fixed By using the Railing Fastening Bar, provide you with information about positions (see “Rear Seats” in this available in the "Genuine Accessories" the available “Genuine Accessories” section). range, fastened by means of sliding for the trunk compartment. blocks along the floor rails, you can fasten heavy luggage in the innermost Loading with Rear Seatbacks WARNING! area of the trunk. Folded Down • Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the seatback is not securely locked into rear seat provides cargo-carrying position, the seat will not provide versatility. the proper stability for child seats The seatback folded down provides a and/or rear passengers. An continuous nearly-flat extension of the

136 Understanding the Vehicle

improperly latched seat could cause The Maserati approved Ski and serious injury. Snowboard Bag available in the • The cargo area in the rear of the "Genuine Accessories" range, can be vehicle with the rear seatbacks in fastened also by folding down the the folded down position should not seatback. be used as a play area by children Accessories Compartment when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a In order to hold any accessories to be collision. Children should be seated kept on the vehicle, the car is and use proper restraint systems. equipped with a storage box with 3 • Insert the bag end without anchor carrying handles, at the rear end of Ski and Snowboard Bag hook into seatback opening. the trunk compartment. Compartment • Fasten the hook to one of the To reach this box, lift or remove the eyelets available on trunk floor. trunk floor panel. To stow and safely fasten a ski and snowboard bag, with no need to fold • From the passenger compartment, NOTE: down the seatback, use the opening route bag strap under armrest and The Authorized Maserati Dealer can available at the back of the longer fasten it. provide you with information about seatback (60), at the level of the the available “Genuine Accessories” armrest between the rear seats. for the trunk compartment. To reach this compartment and properly arrange the bag, proceed as follows. • From inside the passenger compartment, lower the armrest between the rear seats. • From the trunk compartment, open the flap at the back of the long seatback. If you follow these instructions, the bag will be securely fastened to vehicle structure and will thus remain in place also in case of collision or unexpected braking.

137 Understanding the Vehicle

Trunk Compartment Cover Trunk compartment cover is made of WARNING! two parts, the most outward one lifts After refitting the trunk cover, make when liftgate is opened. sure that the lower ends of the inner The cover can be removed to obtain a part have properly engaged in their larger cargo area, as follows: guides. If cover is not properly • slide the top end of side linkages out positioned and fastened, in case of of the shafts on rear pillars; unexpected stop or collision it could 3 move and seriously injure the passengers in the rear seats. • remove trunk cover from the vehicle. The two parts of trunk cover can be folded one onto the other for a more Cargo Area Extension compact unit. The following procedure is aimed at obtaining the maximum possible extension of the cargo area, and it can WARNING! be only a partial extension if you carry Driving with no trunk cover could be out only a few of the listed operations. dangerous. Any unfastened luggage • Remove the trunk cover as indicated • lift the cover rear end and slide it or objects could move into the under “Trunk Compartment Cover” towards the liftgate: this will result passenger compartment in case of in this chapter. in sliding the four lower ends of the sudden stop or collision and seriously • Completely lower the headrests of cover inner part out of their guides injure the occupants. You can try to rear seats. on trunk panel; prevent this by using the Cargo Net in • Completely fold down the rear seats the trunk compartment. backrests by lifting the lever to When refitting the trunk cover, position 1 and hold it up. perform the same operations in reverse order.

138 Understanding the Vehicle

installed in a more forward position behind the front seats (position B). CAUTION! Seatback rear panel is not suitable to support heavy loads and metal objects with protruding elements that might scratch its surface. If necessary, protect the seatback rear panel surface using rigid panels. 3 • Release the lever when seatback is Installing the Cargo Net for against the seat. Cargo Area • In this position, push down on the The Cargo Net can be installed to two seatback of the long part (60): the positions depending on the current control cable will click into place and extension of the cargo area. When WARNING! lock. only the trunk cover is removed (see • Before install the Cargo Net in the previous paragraph), while backrests more forward position make sure are still vertical, the Cargo Net must that the backrests are locked in the be installed immediately behind them lowest position. (position A). • The Cargo Net must be properly installed following the instructions in this paragraph. • The Cargo Net will not properly hold objects in case of sudden vehicle braking or collision depending on cargo weight. Heavy loads not Now that seatbacks are folded down, sufficiently fastened could exceed trunk floor and the back panels of net capacity and hit the vehicle seatbacks will form a larger flat floor. occupants, with the ensuing risk of injury. While, in case also backrests were (Continued) folded down, the Cargo Net must be

139 Understanding the Vehicle

(Continued) The Cargo Net is housed in the • Before leaving for a trip, fasten all accessories compartment under the objects that might move to trunk trunk floor. floor, using the devices provided by The Cargo Net is supplied folded, Maserati for this purpose. inside a bag that is part of the net • When using the Cargo Net, do not itself. load any heavy object on top of the To install it, open the bag zip, unfold other objects which are laid on the the two parts until hearing the trunk floor (see example in the jointing elements clicking in place. 3 figures). To close it, press the button indicated in the figure, at the two jointing • Insert the net top ends in the slot on elements. roof brackets (position ) • Pull net down to ensure it is properly engaged (position ).

To install the Cargo Net in position A, proceed as follows. • Turn downwards the upper part of • Fully unfold Cargo Net down and the protection cover on roof engage the ends of side tethers, with brackets. hook, in the fixed or mobile retainers available on trunk floor. • Pull down the free ends of the tethers to tension the Cargo Net: once released, the tether will remain

140 Understanding the Vehicle

in taut position . To disengage and release tether from retainer position , lift the tether free end as indicated in the figure.

3 Should it be necessary to position the • Fasten the lower tethers of Cargo Cargo Net in position B - more Net to external retainers, also used forward, i.e., behind the front seats - to fasten the top safety belt for use the top retainers next to external children seat, available on rear seat • Freeing the net lower part from the rear passenger handholds. backrests (see chapter “Child Cargo Net structure. Restraint Systems” in section “Before Starting”). • Attach the Velcro appendices indicated in the figure, as described for the rear retainers.

• Lower the handhold and engage the • Attach the lower side ends of the net top ends in the slot on roof, as Cargo Net to the tethers, using the already described for the rear Velcro appendices indicated in the retainers. figure. When Cargo Net is no longer necessary, release the net lower part

141 Understanding the Vehicle from the fastening tethers, rewind it Front to Back Roof Rails Securely fasten load to rails using the on itself and fasten it to the Cargo Net suitable retainers that can hold the structure. Remove the Cargo Net from (optional) original anchorage points throughout its fastening points, fold it and close The front to back roof rails that can be the trip. the bag zip. installed to this vehicle have been When installing to rails any bicycle, Store bag under trunk floor, then designed to carry luggage or surfboard or other types of carriers restore vehicle original conditions by equipment suitable for transport requiring cross bars, please comply repositioning all moved or removed outside of the vehicle. with the equipment manufacturer's parts. instructions to ensure proper 3 installation. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved Carrying Items, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range.

WARNING! • During the trip, it is recommended to Weight of luggage/equipment carried periodically check the proper on the rails must not exceed 176 lb fastening of luggage or equipment (80 kg) and must be evenly distributed. carried on the roof rails. This is to This weight must be added to the load avoid that any parts that may have carried inside of the vehicle as well as accidentally unfastened could the passengers' weight, and total must damage vehicle bodywork and fall not exceed the maximum allowed out, thereby becoming a danger for weight (see “Features and all vehicles behind yours. Specifications” in section “Features and Specifications”). • When driving with a bulky load on When arranging load on rails, make roof rails, take additional sure that it will not interfere with precautions and drive at lower power liftgate and sunroof opening (if speed, keeping a wider safety equipped). distance from vehicles ahead.

142 Understanding the Vehicle Indeed, a bulky and/or heavy load Power Sunroof with carried on the roof will affect driving behavior and steering Sunshade (optional) response since it shifts the vehicle The sunroof and the sunshade are center of gravity to a higher power-controlled and can only be position compared to normal operated with the ignition switch in conditions. RUN position. • All objects/equipment carried on the The sunroof is made of two glass roof and protruding beyond the panels: the front one can be moved windshield, e.g. surfboard, must be whereas the rear one is fixed. The 3 fastened to both sides of the right switch controls the sunroof vehicle. Any wind blow might movement, whereas the left one suddenly increase load lift possibly controls the sunshade. WARNING! resulting in breakage and loss of Lifting of the sunroof front panel for • Improper use of the sunroof can be part of the carried equipment. venting is controlled by the button, dangerous, even if it features a behind the two switches. finger-trap prevention system. By opening the sunroof a front flap Before and during the sunroof rises automatically in order to deviate operation, always make sure that the air flow. passengers are not exposed to the risk of injuries caused by the moving sunroof or by personal objects dragged or hit by the moving sunroof. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from the vehicle if the sunroof is open. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly (Continued)

143 Understanding the Vehicle

(Continued) backward and onward the right switch obstruction of the sunroof front panel. secured too. again. If an obstruction is detected by the • Do not allow small children to safety system during the closing operate the sunroof. Never insert Venting Sunroof movement, the sunroof front panel fingers, other body parts, or any Press and release the rear button; the will automatically retract. If this occurs, object through the roof opening. sunroof front panel will open to the remove the obstruction then press vent position. Where this function is onwards and release the right switch available, this type of opening can be to reactivate the sunroof automatic CAUTION! activated regardless of the sunroof closure. 3 position. During this opening NOTE: • In the event of rain, always close the operation, any movement of the • If three consecutive attempts to close sunroof to prevent water infiltrations button will stop the sunroof. the sunroof result in pinch protect from staining the fabric/leather By pressing the rear button when the reversals, the fourth attempt will be upholstery. sunroof is completely closed, the latter manual, with pinch protect feature • Do not open the sunroof if there is will open to the venting position. disabled. ice on it: risk of damage. • Pinch protection is disabled while • Do not open the sunroof in case of Sunshade pressing the switch/es. presence of any object (bicycle, Press backward and release the left surfboard or other type of carriers switch: the sunshade will move to the fixed to cross bars) that might vehicle rear side until completely open. Initialization Procedure interfere with sunroof. From this position, press onward and In case of a fault in the automatic release the left switch to move the opening/closing movements or in case Slide Opening Sunroof sunshade to the vehicle front side until of battery removal, it is necessary to completely closed. initialize the automatic operation of Press backward and release the right During the opening and closing the sunroof. switch: the front panel will open operations, work on backward and completely. onward the left switch to interrupt the Proceed as follows: From the completely open position, sunshade movement in any position. • bring the sunroof in the completely press onward and release the right closed position; switch: the front panel will close Pinch Protect Feature • push the ignition switch to OFF completely. This feature will detect an obstruction position and keep this condition for The automatic movement can be in the roof opening during the 10 seconds; interrupted in any position by pressing automatic closure or a constant

144 Understanding the Vehicle • push the ignition switch to RUN open, then adjust the sunroof opening HomeLink® (optional) position; to minimize the buffeting. HomeLink® replaces up to three • press the right switch onwards and Ignition Off Operation keep it pressed for at least 10 hand-held transmitters operating the seconds after which you should hear The power sunroof controls will automatic devices that open garage the sunroof electric motor mechanic remain active for up to approximately doors and gates, enable/disable the stop; ten minutes after the ignition switch is lighting or security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your • within 5 seconds, press the right in OFF position. Opening either front vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The switch onwards again and keep it door will cancel this feature. The HomeLink® buttons that are located in 3 pressed: the sunroof performs an ignition system timing can be set using the overhead console designate the automatic complete opening and the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ three different HomeLink® channels. closing cycle. Should this not Settings” in section “Dashboard The HomeLink® indicator light is happen, repeat the procedure from Instruments and Controls”). located in front of the buttons. the beginning; Sunroof Maintenance • press the right switch onwards and Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a keep it pressed until the sunroof is soft cloth to clean the glass panel. completely closed: the initialization procedure is then completed. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in NOTE: certain open or partially open HomeLink® is disabled when the positions. This is a normal occurrence vehicle security alarm is active (see and can be minimized. If the buffeting “Vehicle security alarm” in section occurs with the rear windows open, “Before Starting”). then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof

145 Understanding the Vehicle

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the WARNING! radio-frequency signal it is • Your motorized door or gate will recommended that a new battery be open and close while you are placed in the hand-held transmitter of programming the universal the device that is being programmed transceiver. Do not program the to the HomeLink® system. transceiver if people, pets or other Before starting programming it is objects are in the path of the door or necessary to erase the standard codes 3 gate. Only use this transceiver with a memorized on the HomeLink® device garage door opener that has a “stop during the production phase. To erase System with Devices Provided and reverse” feature as required by such codes: Federal safety standards. This with Rolling Codes • place the ignition device in the RUN includes most garage door opener Programming the Hand-held position without starting the engine; models manufactured after 1982. Do Transmitters Manufactured after 1995 • press and hold the two outside not use a garage door opener These devices can be identified by the HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until without these safety features. Call “LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button the indicator light starts flashing toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the located where the hanging antenna is (after approximately 20 seconds); Internet at www.HomeLink.com for attached to the garage door/gate safety information or assistance. • release the buttons. opener. It is NOT the button that is • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon NOTE: normally used to open and close the monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not • Erasing the standard codes should door. run your vehicle in the garage while only be performed when The name and color of the button may programming the transceiver. programming HomeLink® for the vary by manufacturer. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury first time. Do not perform this • Place the ignition device to the RUN or death. operation to program additional position without starting the engine. buttons. • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to Before You Start Programming • If you have any problems, or require ® 3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the HomeLink assistance, please call toll-free HomeLink® button you wish to Be sure that your vehicle is parked 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet program. outside of the garage before you at www.HomeLink.com for begin programming. information or assistance.

146 Understanding the Vehicle

• Simultaneously press the Homelink® • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® button you want to program and setting button of the opening motor. Button the hand-held transmitter button. Firmly press it and then release it. On To reprogram a channel that has been ® • Release immediately the Homelink some garage door openers/devices previously trained, follow these steps: button you want to program. there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device • Place the ignition device to the RUN • Continue holding the hand-held position without starting the engine. transmitter button until the is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. • Press and hold the desired indicator light starts flashing quickly; NOTE: HomeLink® button. then release the button. You have 30 seconds to initiate the 3 The quick flashing light indicates that • Without releasing the button next step after the setting button has the channel with the new frequency proceed with “Programming the been pressed. has been acquired and programmed hand-held transmitters” from second ® step and follow all remaining steps. correctly by the HomeLink system. • Return to the vehicle and press the ® NOTE: programmed HomeLink button for System with Devices Without two seconds and then release it. The distance necessary between the Rolling Code portable hand-held transmitter and • Repeat this operation a second time. Programming the Hand-held the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends If the garage door opening device Transmitters Manufactured before on the system you wish to program. activates, the programming/ 1995 Probably it will be necessary to try synchronization phase is complete. • Turn the ignition device to the RUN several times. Upon every attempt, NOTE: position without starting the engine. keep the setting position for at least If the garage door opening device • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 15 seconds before trying again. does not activate, press the button a 3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to Synchronizing the Rolling Codes third time for two seconds and then release it to complete the program. At the end of the previously-described • Simultaneously press and hold both ® programming/synchronization phase. programming, if the HomeLink has buttons until the indicator light been programmed for a rolling code • To program the remaining two starts flashing quickly; then release system, it will be necessary to HomeLink® buttons, repeat the same both buttons. synchronize it to ensure its correct step for each remaining button. DO The quick flashing light indicates that operation. NOT erase the channels. the channel with the new frequency

147 Understanding the Vehicle

has been acquired and programmed hand-held transmitters” from second • Press the LEARN button on the correctly by the HomeLink® system. step and follow all remaining steps. garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code. NOTE: Using HomeLink® • Did you unplug the device for The distance necessary between the To operate, press and release the programming and forgot to plug it portable hand-held transmitter and programmed HomeLink® button. ® back in? the HomeLink in the vehicle depends Activation will now occur for the If you have any problems, or require on the system you wish to program. programmed device (i.e., garage door assistance, please call toll-free Probably it will be necessary to try opener, gate operator, security system, 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at 3 several times. Upon every attempt, entry door lock, home/office lighting, www.HomeLink.com for information keep the setting position for at least etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the or assistance. 15 seconds before trying again. device may also be used at any time. Radio Frequency Device - • Press and hold the programmed Security Regulatory Information HomeLink® button. It is advisable to erase all channels The “Regulatory Information” for all If the garage door opener/device before you sell or turn in your vehicle. the radio frequency and radar devices activates, programming is complete. To To erase the channels press and hold can be consulted by accessing the program the remaining two the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I "SERVICES" section on the website HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step and III) until the indicator light starts www.maserati.com or by using the for the same remaining button. Do not flashing (after approximately 20 specific tablet or smartphone apps. erase the channels. seconds). Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is Button disabled when the vehicle security To reprogram a channel that has been alarm is active (see “Vehicle security previously trained, follow these steps: alarm” in section “Before Starting”). • Place the ignition device to the RUN Troubleshooting Tips position without starting the engine. If you are having trouble while • Press and hold the desired programming HomeLink®, here are ® HomeLink button. some of the most common solutions: • Without releasing the button • Replace the battery in the original proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitter.

148 Understanding the Vehicle Air Conditioning Distribution

3

A/C Dual-zone

149 Understanding the Vehicle

3

A/C Four-zone

150 Understanding the Vehicle

Adjustable and fixed air vents allow • The fixed vents under the dashboard conditioning flow towards the passengers to achieve the optimal and below the front seats (for bottom of the external rear seats. comfort conditions. dual-zone air conditioning system only) are used to ventilate the lower Fixed Air Vents part of the passenger compartment. • The fixed vents, positioned on the upper part of the dashboard, beneath the windshield and on the windshield side pillars are meant to guarantee the defogging and 3 defrosting of the windshield and the side windows.

A/C Four-zone Adjustable Air Vents The adjustable vents are located at the center of the dashboard, on both sides of the MTC+ display and on the upper surface, and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger compartment. There are also adjustable vents placed at the rear end of the central console. The rotor 1, located near each vent, allows to control the quantity of the air flow A/C Dual-zone from fully closed to fully open, and • When a four-zone air conditioning vice versa. system is installed, there is a fixed air Excluding the adjustable vents on the vent on each side of the rear end of upper surface of the dashboard, the the central console to guide air grill of these vents can be oriented by operating on the central handle 2.

151 Understanding the Vehicle

3 NOTE: In order not to obstruct the air conditioning inlet, the defrosting or the defogging function of the glass surfaces, avoid covering vents with clothing or other items.

152 4 – Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster ...... 154 Infotainment System ...... 179 Audio Controls ...... 186 Audio System ...... 187 MTC+ “Controls” Screen ...... 189 MTC+ Settings ...... 192 Dashboard Compartment ...... 204 Analog Clock ...... 207 Air Conditioning Controls ...... 208 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel ...... 216

153 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster ensure that the odometer is properly Warning and Indicator Lights reset. on Analog Instruments The instrument cluster is divided into Speedometer and tachometer display three main areas displaying the main warning lights (see “Warning Telltales on Speedometer information, signs and text and/or icon and Indicator Lights on Analogue The following telltales are displayed messages. Instruments” in this chapter). on the speedometer, and related A Analogue speedometer. It The other warning and indicator lights messages are visible for 5 seconds on indicates the vehicle speed. are displayed on the TFT display the central sector of the display, unless together with mode and drive otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display: B Tachometer. function indicators (see “TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set C TFT display. In this area the Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions” paragraph in this odometer display shows the Modes/Functions” in this chapter). chapter). total distance covered by the 4 vehicle. NOTE: The image shows the instrument U.S. Federal Regulations requires that cluster before starting the engine. upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. This repair should be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The odometer setting should be maintained following the repair or service. Keep a record of the odometer mileage before any repair or service to

154 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn signals The Malfunction Indicator CAUTION! Light (MIL) is part of an and is controlled by the multifunction onboard diagnostic system • When the ignition switch is in the lever behind the steering wheel. that monitors engine and RUN position and if the indicator If the vehicle electronics sense that the automatic transmission control light does not switch on or if it vehicle drives for more than 1 mile systems. switches on while driving, contact an (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a Under normal conditions, this Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon continuous sound will alert the driver indicator light should switch on when as possible. to turn the signal off. the ignition switch is in RUN position • Prolonged driving with the MIL on If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, and switch off soon after the engine is could cause damage to the engine check for a defective exterior light started (the MIL does not shut off control system. It also could affect bulb. immediately). fuel economy and drivability. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light 4 This is a sign of the indicator light MIL is flashing, severe catalytic This warning light is working properly. If the indicator converter damage and power loss connected to the Tire Pressure remains illuminated or switches on will soon occur. Immediate service is Monitoring System (TPMS). while driving, there is a failure in the required. In addition, the OBDII Under normal conditions, the fuel supply/ignition and emission system incorporates a diagnostic warning light should illuminate when control systems. connector that can be interfaced the ignition switch is in RUN and The failure could cause high exhaust using diagnostic equipment. This should go off once the engine is emissions, loss of performance, poor makes it possible to read the error started. vehicle handling and high codes stored in the control unit, If the warning light remains lit or consumption levels. together with a set of specific illuminates while driving, the pressure Should this occur, proceed with parameters for the engine operation of one or more tires is too low and a caution to your Authorized Maserati diagnostic cycle, for compliance with message will be displayed. Dealer without heavy throttle CARB & EPA OBDII regulations. The TPMS malfunction warning light is application or driving at high speeds. connected to the low tire pressure Obey all applicable local traffic Left Turn Signal Indicator Light monitoring light. regulations. The indicator lights up when When the system detects a The indicator light will go out if the the left turn signals or the malfunction, the monitoring light and problem is no longer present. hazard flashers are turned on. the related message will flash for The error will be registered by the system in any case.

155 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

approximately one minute and then Dealer as soon as possible to restore and the road conditions that caused remain lit. the Anti-Lock brake function. the ESC activation no longer persist. This sequence will continue upon Electronic Stability Control (ESC) subsequent vehicle startups as long as Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF the malfunction lasts. Indicator Light The ESC activation/malfunction When the malfunction warning lights This indicator notifies that the indicator light on the up, the system may not be able to Electronic Stability Control instrument cluster will display detect or signal low tire pressure (ESC) is disabled (OFF); the when the ignition switch is in correctly. linked message will be RUN position. Please refer to “Tire Pressure displayed. It should switch off by starting the Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section engine. Telltales on Tachometer “Driving” for further information. If the light stays on with the engine Following telltales are displayed on Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) 4 running, there is a malfunction in the the tachometer and related messages Malfunction Warning Light ESC system. are visible for 5 seconds on the central This light, and its related If the light still stays on after several sector of the display, unless otherwise message, indicate possible ignition cycles, and the vehicle has indicated (see “TFT Display: malfunctions of the Anti-Lock been driven for several miles at more Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Brake System (ABS). than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed, visit an Modes/Functions” in this chapter). The light will turn on when the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as ignition switch is in RUN position and possible to have the problem may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS diagnosed and serviced. light remains lit or turns on while NOTE: driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and Each time the ignition switch is in RUN: requires service. However, the • The ESC OFF indicator light and conventional brake system will the ESC activation/malfunction continue to operate normally if the indicator light illuminates warning light is switched off. If temporarily. the ABS light turns on while driving, or • When the ESC is functioning, the if it does not switch on when the system will make buzzing or clicking ignition switch is in RUN position, sounds. This is normal. The sounds please visit an Authorized Maserati will stop once ESC becomes inactive

156 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Start&Stop Active Indicator If the brake light illuminates the If a brake failure occurs, visit an This telltale indicates that the parking brake may be engaged, the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as engine has been switched off brake pads have reached wear limit, possible in order to check up the automatically by the the brake fluid level may be low or a brake system. Start&Stop system. problem with the anti-lock brake In the event of an Electronic Brake When the engine starts again, the system (ABS) reservoir may have Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both telltale will switch off. occurred. the brake indicator light and the ABS If the telltale during an automatic In all the above situations, a related light illuminate. engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase message will be displayed. Immediate repair of the ABS system is starts flashing, it will be necessary to If the light still illuminates when the required. restart the engine normally with the parking brake has been disengaged, Functioning of the brake indicator ignition device while holding down and the fluid level is at the full mark light can be checked by turning the the brake pedal. on the master cylinder reservoir, there ignition switch from OFF to RUN 4 See chapter “Normal Starting of the could be a brake hydraulic system position. Engine” in section “Driving” for malfunction or a problem with the The light should illuminate for further information. brake booster detected by the approximately 2 seconds. ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light The light should switch off unless the Rear Fog Light Indicator will remain lit until the problem has parking brake is engaged or a brake This indicator lights up when been solved. fault is detected. If the light does not the rear fog lights are If the problem concerns the brake illuminate, have the light system switched on. booster, the ABS master cylinder will repaired by an Authorized Maserati run when engaging the brake and a Dealer. High Beam Indicator brake pedal pulsation may be felt The light will also switch on when the This indicator lights up when during each stop of the vehicle. parking brake is engaged with the the high beams are switched Inefficiency of one of the dual brake ignition switch in RUN position. on or when blinking. system cycles is indicated by the brake This light only indicates the brake is Brake Indicator Light indicator light, which will turn on engaged but not the clamping force when the brake fluid level in the of the parking brake to the wheels. This light monitors various master cylinder has dropped below a brake functions, including certain level. brake fluid level, brake pads The light will remain lit until the wear and parking brake WARNING! problem has been solved. engagement. Driving a vehicle with the red brake (Continued) 157 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

(Continued) continuous sound will advise the driver light on can be very dangerous and is to turn the signal off. not recommended. Part of the brake If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, system may have failed, resulting in check for a defective outside indicator increased braking distances and the light bulb. risk of an accident. Have the vehicle Seat Belt Reminder Light checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder Air Bag Indicator Light light will light up for a few seconds as a bulb check. This light will illuminate for a See “Supplemental Restraint System few seconds for a bulb check During the bulb check, you will hear (SRS) – Air bags” in section “Before an acoustic signal if one or both front when the ignition switch is in Starting” for further information. 4 RUN. If the light does not seat belts are unbuckled. illuminate while starting the engine, After the bulb check or while driving, stays lit, or switches on while driving, if a seat belt is unbuckled, together have the system checked at an WARNING! with the acoustic signal the seat belt Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as If the warning light remains ON or if it reminder light will light up and a possible. does not illuminate or illuminates message will indicate which belt is not In the latter case, the message will while driving, contact your Authorized fastened. remain displayed: to hide it, press the Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. button on the steering wheel right side. Right Turn Signal Indicator WARNING! This indicator lights up when Maserati urges you to use the seat the right turn signals or the belts correctly fastened and adjusted hazard flashers are switched at all times. Correct use of the seat on. belts can help reduce the risk of The indicator will flash at the same serious injury in the event of an frequency of the turn signals and is accident. Do not pass seat belts over controlled by the turn signal lever. sharp edges: they could tear. Do not If the vehicle electronics sense that the pin anything to the seat belts. This vehicle drives for more than 1 mile (1.6 could reduce their initial strength and km) with either turn signal on, a

158 Dashboard Instruments and Controls cause them to tear in the event of a 1 Main area. 10 Complete Odometer. crash. 2 Selectable information (data, 11 Fuel Gauge. Refer to “Occupants Restraint time, outside temperature, 12 Engine Temperature Gauge. Systems” in section “Before Starting” compass, etc.). When setting the 13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red for further information. “Auto High Beam Assist” feature telltales. (if equipped), in the right TFT Display: Menus and 14* Reconfigurable quadrant for Settings portion of this area is displayed the respective green indicator. amber telltales. When operating, the TFT Display is 3 Main menu titles with scroll 15 Front fog indicator light. divided into sectors including menus arrows (the number and the 16 Low beam headlights/position and sub-menus, running data, main menu title is always visible lights. warning/indicator lights and messages. while scrolling the menu, and for 17 NORMAL, SPORT, I.C.E. and OFF 4 The different sectors of the display the next five seconds). layout are rendered in the following ROAD modes indicator light. picture. 4 Submenu Titles. 18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA 5 Position within the submenus and HAS status. They are and scroll arrows (example: 1 of displayed in the cluster when 5). There can be maximum 9 one (or more) of these systems is displayable submenu positions. enabled and a different menu When the number of submenu from “Drive Assist” is displayed points exceeds 9, the points are in the main area. replaced by a numerical value 19* CC, ACC, HDC status function. within the scroll arrows. 20 Ride height indicator. 6 Menu Instruction (hideable). 21 Electric Parking Brake failure 7 Shift lever positions (P, R, N, D, warning light. M, 1, 2, 3...). 22 Speed Warning indicator 8 Gear shift indicator light and (dynamic text). paddles (if equipped). 9 Hard/Soft suspension indicator light.

159 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

23* Traffic Sign Assist icons: conditioned and unconditioned speed limit and/or supplementary signs (time restriction, etc..). See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in section "Driving" for further details. (*) See “TFT Display: Warning/ Indicator Lights of Set Modes/ Functions” in this chapter. Press and release the multifunction When the driver selects a main menu The display background may change switch in the and arrow page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) 4 according to the type of message directions to scroll upwards and feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is displayed. downwards the main menu titles. set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" The screen area in sector 1 (Main Area) in this section), main menu title, its will be updated and the selected title number and the scroll arrows will will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu disappear after two seconds. Title). When driver selects a main menu, if Press and release the multifunction the TSA feature is set on and a sign switch ( ) to enter the information and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in screens or a submenu. Keep the switch sector 23, only the main menu number ( ) depressed for 2 seconds to restore and the scroll arrows remain displayed the selected/visualized functions. in the sector 3, left side. The selected sub-menu title selected will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu • Blue color: normal conditions. Title). • Yellow color: low-critical warning. • Red color: high-critical warning. Main and Submenu Operate the controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll, modify and program the Main and Submenu.

160 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

4. Driver Assist (if equipped) – Backlighting • Shows the status of any active driver – Ambient Lighting assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and • SCREEN SETUP HAS. Graphics in the main area of – Upper Left TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA – Upper Right and HAS systems – Main Menu: Line 1 • LKA (LaneSense) status – Main Menu: Line 2 5. FUEL ECONOMY – Main Menu: Line 3 • Average, Range, Current gage – MPH km/h Display On/Off – Main Menu Navigation 6. TRIP Within a submenu, press and release – Outline Coloring • Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed the switch in the and arrow – Key-On Display time, Distance directions to scroll the menu. – Key-Off Display 4 Press the button to return to the • Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed – Defaults main menu from an item of interest or time, Distance Messages on Main Display Area from an information screen. 7. START&STOP The main display area also displays Main Menu & Submenu Content • Messages relating to the Start&Stop "pop up" messages. These pop up Overview function messages fall into several categories: 1. MAIN MENU 8. AUDIO • Five-Second Stored Messages • View speed in mph or km/h • Information concerning audio status When the appropriate conditions 2. VEHICLE INFO according to current media source, occur, this type of message appears • Tire Pressure track and station. on the main display area for five • Information on phone incoming call. • Transmission Temperature seconds and then returns to the • Oil Temperature 9. STORED MESSAGES previous screen. Most of the • Oil Pressure 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS messages of this type are then • Battery Voltage • Speed Warning: enables, disables or stored (as long as the condition that • Maintenance sets the speed limit represented in activated them remains active) and the dynamic icon on the TFT display can be reviewed from the "Stored 3. DRIVE MODE • Auto apply Off/On of the Electric Messages" main menu item. • Drive Mode - Ride Height - Torque Parking Brake Example of this message type is the Distribution - Powertrain status - ESC one shown in the picture. status - Suspension stiffness status • Interior Lighting

161 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

message type is the one shown in pop ups will be displayed starting at picture. 437 yd (400 m) from the turning point and the countdown to 0 miles/meters.

• Unstored Messages This message type is displayed until 4 the condition that activated the • Five-Second Unstored Messages message is cleared (see example in When appropriate conditions occur, picture). this type of message appears on the While getting closer to a turn, the main display area for five seconds sections referred to the distance then returns to the previous screen. already traveled will switch off while the ones referred to the distance yet • Navigation Messages to be traveled will remain on. When the navigation menu is enabled on the MTC+, information NOTE: pop-ups will be displayed while • Popup boxes might take up the space changing direction or approaching a normally used to display main menu turning point until the navigation items and relevant submenus. system requires its displaying, or • The distance indicated under the until a command is given via the road name is expressed in the unit of • Unstored Messages with Ignition buttons on the steering wheel. measure set by the user. Switch in RUN On highway, the first pop up will be This message type is displayed until displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from 1. MAIN MENU the ignition switch is in RUN the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile Press and release the multifunction position. An example of this (1.6 km). switch in the or arrow directions While approaching the turn, further until this menu item is displayed.

162 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Pressing and releasing the switch ( ) switch ( ) to display the selected will toggle the unit of measure information. between mph or km/h. • Tire Pressure Indicates the pressure of each single tire (see example below). Please refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section “Driving” for further information.

The gauge fill and telltale (if applicable) are highlighted in red to emphasize that the parameter is at 4 Further to speed, the main area can a critical level. indicate three lines that can be set to the same options and in the top right or top left area. When these three lines are present and turn-by-turn navigation is on, main menu area will • Transmission Temperature automatically show navigation information. For further details, please Displays the current transmission refer to MTC+ guide. temperature level. • Oil Temperature 2. VEHICLE INFO Displays the current engine oil Press and release the switch in the temperature level. or arrow directions until this NOTE: menu item is displayed. This strategy is also applicable in the Press and release the switch ( )to Transmission Temperature and Oil access the submenus. Pressure information screen. Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions to scroll • Oil Pressure through the following information Displays the current engine oil displays pressing and releasing the pressure level.

163 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• Battery Voltage The image will show the following Displays the current battery voltage. parameters: • Maintenance (service) • current ground clearance indicated Displays mileage and days remaining in front of vehicle and on a specific to the execution of scheduled indicator on top right corner; maintenance service. • torque distribution percentage indicated under the arrow in front of the wheels; • selected drive mode (in the example shown: I.C.E.). For any color-coded components, color NOTE: depends on settings of: To set drive parameters according to 4 own needs and path, refer to chapter • ESC: identified by wheel color. “Drive Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in • PowerTrain: identified by engine + section “Driving”. transmission unit color. • Suspension : identified by the Press and release the button to Press and release the button to color of the four shock absorbers. return to the main menu. return to the main menu. 4. DRIVER ASSIST (if equipped) 3. DRIVE MODE Press and release the switch in the Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. menu item is displayed. The screen • Active Driver Assist System graphically shows the Drive Mode The screen graphically shows current (NORMAL, SPORT, I.C.E., and OFF status of driver assist systems: the ROAD) set by the user through the figure shows an example with ACC relevant controls. engaged and HAS set. The display main area will show vehicle image with parameters and For every drive mode, function (ESC, color-coded components affected by PowerTrain and Suspension) and color the selected drive mode. of the components shown are matched as follows:

164 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

NOTE: continue from the last fuel average To set these systems, see chapters reading before the reset. “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, • Fuel Economy Average in mpg (US), “Highway Assist - HAS” and “Lane mpg (UK) or L/100km Keeping Assist - LKA” in section Shows the average fuel economy “Driving”. since the last reset. Press and release the button to Press the multifunction switch ( ) return to the main menu. for 1 second and release it to reset the fuel economy average. 5. FUEL ECONOMY When the fuel economy is reset, the • LKA (LaneSense) Status Press and release the switch in the display will read “Reset” or show Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off or arrow directions until this dashes for two seconds. state set on MTC+ system, page menu item is displayed. Then, the history information will 4 “Controls”. The screen will display the following: be erased, and the averaging will You can enable LKA in the “Visual” • Current Fuel Economy in mpg (US), continue from the last fuel average only or “Visual & Haptic” mode by mpg (UK) or L/100km reading before the reset. turning on the function via MTC+ Shows the current fuel economy. system soft-key and by changing During AutoStop stage performed your selection in the dedicated by the Start&Stop system (see submenu. The setting chosen will “Normal Starting of the Engine” in latch over key cycles. section “Driving”), a dash will be displayed instead of the value. • Range in miles or km Shows the range since the last fuel average reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “Reset” or show Press and release the button to dashes for two seconds. return to the main menu. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will

165 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

6. TRIP increment when the ignition switch 8. AUDIO Press and release the switch in the is in the RUN or START position. Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this Press the multifunction switch ( ) for or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. 1 second and release to reset “Trip A” menu item is displayed. For each of the “Trip A” and “Trip B” or “Trip B”. sub-menus the screen will display the “Trip B” is reset after each key on/key following: off cycle. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 7. START & STOP Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this 4 menu item is displayed. With the ignition device in RUN position, the screen will display the The display will show the audio status status of the function (see example in (source and current audio track) as set picture). To change the status of the on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5 • “Distance” traveled in miles or km. function, please see paragraph lines of 15 alphanumeric characters. “Automatic Start&Stop System” in Shows the total covered distance Displays Audio Statuses are: “Normal Starting of the Engine” of since the last reset. section “Driving”. • AM: Station Number, provided with • “Average” consumption in mpg (US), one line of info (frequency); mpg (UK) or l/100km. • FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info Shows the average fuel lines; consumption since the last reset. • SXM (SiriusXM Satellite radio): • “Average” speed in MPH or km/h. number and station name, artist, Shows the average speed since the song; last reset. • BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album, artist, • “Elapsed Time” song; Shows the total time of travel since • USB (Audio): USB, album, artist, the last reset in “hours:minutes: current track or, if available, previous seconds.” Elapsed Time will track, current track and next track;

166 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• USB: folder, previous track, current (see “MTC+ Settings” in this track and next track; section). On display, said details • SD Card (Audio): album, artist, shall temporarily replace the ones previous track, current track and SD on media source in use. next track; Press and release the button to • SD Card: folder, previous track, return to the main menu. current track and next track; 9. STORED MESSAGES • AUX: name of source, “Device SXM Satellite Radio Press and release the central switch in Connected” text; the or arrow directions until this • No Signal: “No Signal Available” menu item is displayed. text; The system will either display the USB • Mute: symbol “Mute”, the lines number of the stored messages (if any remain those displayed before the available) or “No Stored Messages” as 4 command “Mute”. shown in picture. The different reception modes are • Many signals identified by symbols, shown on the • Signal not available display above the info lines. The chart indicates their meaning.

BTSA

AM App

Press and release the switch in the FM or arrow directions to scroll the Audio mute stored messages. When the number of messages • Phone Call Details exceeds 9, the submenu points will be AUX The display will show the replaced by a numerical value information on incoming call if this indicating the message number. Press feature is checkmarked on MTC+ and release the switch ( ) to view

167 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

the selected message (see example in NOTE: the picture). • In order to modify the status of electric parking brake, please see chapter “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”. • Adjust interior lighting brightness or/and ambient lighting as described in paragraph “Interior Lights” under “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”. Press and release the switch ( ) once Example: How to modify the “Speed again to view the related options: Warning” status 4 Press and release the button to “Off” is the default status. return to the main menu. NOTE: 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS When the vehicle is in motion (above 5 mph – 8 km/h) this function is With ignition switch in RUN position available and displayed in the list of and vehicle stopped, press and release “Vehicle Settings” menu. the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is Scroll with the switch in the or displayed. arrow directions to view the Press and release the switch ( )to selectable items. access the submenus. Press and release the switch ( )to Scroll with the switch in the or select “Speed Warning”. arrow directions to view the Scroll with the switch in the or selectable items: arrow directions to view the selectable options. • Speed Warning Speed values are in loop, keeping the • Electric Parking Brake switch pressed in the or arrow • Interior Lighting directions will increase scroll speed. • Screen Setup Press and release the switch ( )to select the option. A check mark will

168 Dashboard Instruments and Controls remain next to the previously-selected A pop-up message indicating that the In order to enter a function, press the item until a new selection is made. limit has been exceeded will appear switch ( ). on display. The following directory shows the items available in the “Screen Setup” submenu: Upper Left • None • Compass • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time A setting saved notification appears as 4 a popup for 2 seconds and a white The pop-up message and the telltale • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) telltale indicating the set speed limit will be displayed for 5 seconds then • Range to Empty will appear on display. system will return to the previous • Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L) screen. • Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L) SCREEN SETUP • Trip A Distance After having entered the “Vehicle • Trip B Distance Settings” menu, press and release the Upper Right switch in the or arrow directions (example in picture) until this menu item is displayed. • None Press and release the switch ( )to • Compass access the available items for this • Outside Temperature (default: Upper submenu. Right) If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), Then the display will show the last this feature is unavailable and the • Date modified item. main screen shows possible options in • Time When the set speed is exceeded, the grey (not activable). • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) driver is alerted by an acoustic signal Operate this function with the vehicle • Range to Empty and the telltale indicating the speed stopped and transmission in P (Park) • Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L) limit becomes amber. position.

169 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L) Main Menu: Line 3 • Trip A Distance (only displays in Main Menu) • Trip B Distance • Same configurable options as Line 1 MPH km/h Display (instruction line) •On •Off Main Menu Navigation •On •Off Press and release the switch ( )to Outline Coloring select an item. The notification of 4 •On setting saved appears as a popup for 2 •Off seconds, then the display will show the Main Menu: Line 1 last-modified item. (only displays in Main Menu) Key-On Display • None (default status) •On • Compass •Off • Outside Temperature Key-Off Display • Date • On: Trip summary • Time • Off: screen with Maserati logo and • Time/Date trident • Range to Empty Defaults • Average MPG (or L/100km or km/L) • Restore • Current MPG (or L/100km or km/L) • Cancel Scroll with the switch in the or Press and release the button to • Trip A Distance arrow directions to view the return to the “Screen Setup” submenu. • Trip B Distance selectable items (in the example “Screen Setup” submenu parameters • Audio “Time” is selected). A check mark will set by the user as the ones to be Main Menu: Line 2 remain next to the previously-selected displayed are also indicated in the top (only displays in Main Menu) item until a new selection is made. part of the MTC+ (see example in the • Same configurable options as Line 1 figures).

170 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

function is set to "Off", the navigation will show the information concerning information will not be displayed. engine starting sequence. While if it is If the “Outline Coloring” is set to set to “Off” (example shown in “On”, the TFT side edge of engine figure), the display will show the temperature and fuel gauge indicators information displayed before last will change color depending on the vehicle key-off. selected Drive Mode: • Sport: green (example shown in picture); • I.C.E.: light blue; • Off Road: brown. If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive Mode combination is not active and 4 the edges will remain "Normal" Drive Mode color. When engine is started and ignition device is pressed to stop it, it is possible to set “Key-Off Display” to obtain the following display settings: As for the instruction line “MPH km/h • On: Trip Summary screen (Trip B is Display”, you can either select to reset after each key-on/key-off display it in sector 6 or not (“Off” cycle); option). In the latter case, the function • Off: screen with Maserati logo and of changing units remains in any case trident. active. The “Defaults” item of “Screen Setup” “Key-On Display” and “Key-Off If the “Main Menu Navigation” is set submenu allows restoring Maserati Display” items allow user to set display to “On”, navigation information will factory settings. during vehicle key-on and off. be displayed in the main area of the “Key-On Display” is normally set to display only if a destination has been “On”. When entering the vehicle, set on the navigator of the MTC+. If after the welcome screen, the display

171 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Charging System Warning Light charging system. IMMEDIATELY Lights of Set Modes/Functions This warning light shows the contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer status of the electrical to have the vehicle serviced. Display sections indicated in the figure If jump starting is required, refer to show warning/indicator lights charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while “Jump Start Procedures” in section “In concerning all selected driving an Emergency”. functions and all set functions/systems. driving, turn off some of the vehicle's The relevant messages will be non-essential electrical devices or Transmission Temperature Warning indicated within the main area for five increase engine speed (if at idle). If the Light seconds, unless otherwise specified. charging system warning light remains This warning light and the Fault messages will be stored under on, it means that the vehicle is related message indicate that “Stored messages”. experiencing a problem with the the transmission fluid temperature is rising. 4 If this warning light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into P (Park) and run the engine at idle until the temperature drops and the light switches off. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.

CAUTION! Continuous driving with the transmission temperature warning light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or failure.

Engine Temperature Warning Light This warning light notifies when the engine is overheated. If the

172 Dashboard Instruments and Controls temperature reaches critical levels and minutes. In this case, turn the engine Electric Power Steering Failure the gauge displayed in sector 12 turns off immediately and carry out the Warning Light red, this warning light under the necessary checks. This warning light, and the engine temperature gauge indicator Do not operate the vehicle until the related message, illuminate will illuminate in red color combined problem has been corrected. This light when the electric power with the related message on display. does not indicate the oil level. The steering is not operating and When the temperature is reaching the engine oil level must be checked with needs service. set threshold an acoustic signal will be the dipstick located under the hood If the warning light is on, steering heard. (see “Maintenance Procedures” in assistance may be not available. If the warning light switches on while section “Maintenance and Care”). driving, safely pull over and stop the If the problem persists, contact an vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! off. Also, shift the transmission into N Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light After battery disconnection event, the (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the 4 warning light may be on. In this case, temperature does not return to This light indicates that the start the engine and perform a normal, immediately turn the engine engine oil is overheated. The steering wheel stroke end to end. off and contact an Authorized warning light is combined with the related displayed Maserati Dealer. If the problem persists, contact an message. In this case, drive carefully Check “Engine Overheating” in Authorized Maserati Dealer. section “In an Emergency” for more until the temperature drops back to Catalyst Over Temperature Warning information. normal level and the light warning light turns off. Light Low Oil Pressure Warning Light If the problem persists, contact an This warning light, and the Under normal conditions, the Authorized Maserati Dealer. related message, light up if warning light illuminates Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light the engine runs irregularly when the ignition device is with consequent high turned to RUN and goes off as This warning light and the temperature in the exhaust system. soon as the engine is started. related displayed message, If the warning light stays or turns on indicate a low engine oil level. The engine oil level must be while driving, the engine oil pressure WARNING! is too low. The warning light is checked with the dipstick fitted under the hood (see “Maintenance • If the warning light is accompanied combined with a displayed message by the message “Catalyst Temp and an acoustic signal that will last 4 Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”). (Continued)

173 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

(Continued) Liftgate and Hood Ajar Indicators or engine stall and your vehicle may Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the These light indicators will require towing. temperature of the catalytic illuminate to indicate that the Low Fuel Indicator converters is too high. The driver liftgate and/or the hood are must slow down immediately until When the fuel level reaches ajar. the warning light turns off. approximately 4.2 Gallons (16 When the liftgate or the hood • If the message “Catalyst Temp Hot litres) this light under the fuel is open, a related message will gauge indicator will turn on, Stop Safely Wait To Cool” appears be displayed besides the light after decelerating: the temperature and remain on until fuel is added if the vehicle is running at a speed of together with the related message. In in the catalytic converters has 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster. reached a dangerous level and the this condition the color indicating the catalytic converters could be Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the Indicator indicator on display, will go from 4 damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer. This indicator light indicates a white to amber. failure of the Electronic Refer to “Refueling” in section • Maserati declines all responsibility Throttle Control (ETC) system. “Driving” for fuel filling. for whatever damage deriving from If the indicator turns on while non-compliance with the above Windshield and Headlights Washer driving (a torque decrease is possible), mentioned warnings. Low Fluid Indicator have the system checked by an This indicator will illuminate Door Ajar Indicator Authorized Maserati Dealer. for 5 seconds to indicate a low When detecting a failure, the light This indicator illuminates level of the windshield and indicator will illuminate while the headlights washer fluid. A when one or more doors are engine is running. ajar. The indicator will show related message will be displayed. If the indicator remains lit with the See “Maintenance Procedures” in which door is ajar. When one engine running, you can still drive your or more doors are open, a related section “Maintenance and Care” for vehicle. However, contact an fluid filling. message will be displayed if the vehicle Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as is running at a speed of 5 mph (8 possible. Headlight Aiming System Failure km/h) or faster. If the indicator is flashing while the Warning Light engine is running, immediate service is This warning light and the required. You may experience reduced related message indicate a performance, an elevated/rough idle failure of the automatic headlight aiming system

174 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

(horizontal leveling, electromechanical Under such conditions, we recommend Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning swiveling) or of the Advanced using the I.C.E. drive mode (see Light Frontlighting System (AFS). “Automatic Transmission” in section This warning light and related Please contact an Authorized Maserati “Driving”) drive carefully and slow message illuminate when Dealer to check the system. down as the grip of the tires may be there is an EPB system failure. Automatic High Beam Failure Warning significantly reduced. The failure could also Light The indicator light flashes for 5 completely or partially block the seconds and switches off when the This warning light and the vehicle because the parking brake temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or related message illuminate to could remain on even after it has been higher. report a failure of the automatically or manually disengaged automatic high beam Fuel Filler Cap (Gas cap) Open though its controls. headlights. Warning Light If it is still possible to use the vehicle Contact an Authorized Maserati After refueling the car (parking brake not engaged) drive to 4 Dealer as soon as possible. performs a check of the fuel the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer and remember to performing Suspensions Failure Warning Light filler cap and this warning light comes on if it is not each operation/command that the This warning light and the correctly closed, after approximately electric parking brake is not related message turn on while 10 minutes also depending on driving functioning. driving if there is a failure of conditions. Start&Stop Disable Indicator the suspension system. See “Refueling” in section “Driving” This indicator illuminates Please contact an Authorized Maserati for more details. Dealer to check the system. when Start&Stop is turned off through the controls located Ice Hazard Indicator on the right side of the When the external WARNING! steering wheel. See paragraph temperature falls below 38°F Do not drive with this warning light “Automatic Start&Stop System” in (3°C), the temperature value on. Check that the fuel filler cap is chapter “Normal Starting of the blinks for a few seconds, the tightened correctly. Engine” of section “Driving” for indicator light turns on, a message is further information. displayed and an acoustic signal is triggered to warn the driver of the risk of icy roadbed.

175 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Start&Stop Failure Warning Light status of individual ADAS system or Collision Warning - FCW” in section This warning light illuminates the combination of them (see “Driving”). when there is a failure in the examples). General Fault for Driving with a Trailer For further details, refer to Start&Stop system. Switch the The warning light and the engine on or off using the “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, “Lane Keeping Assist - relevant message are displayed normal procedure with the ignition to indicate a fault or failure of device START/STOP and have the LKA” and “Highway Assist - HAS” in section “Driving”. the connection between vehicle checked at an Authorized vehicle and trailer. In these cases Maserati Dealer. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off please contact an Authorized Maserati (If equipped) Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Dealer as soon as possible, and avoid Indicator This warning light informs the using the vehicle with a trailer. driver that Forward Collision This indicator illuminates and AWD Failure Warning Light 4 a message flashes on the Warning (FCW) is disabled. If this light occurs together with This warning light turns on to display for approximately 5 indicate a fault of the AWD seconds after an acoustic other specific messages, take your vehicle to an Authorized Maserati system. Contact an Authorized signal to indicate that the next Maserati Dealer as soon as scheduled maintenance is due or is Dealer for service. This warning light will light even when the activation of possible, and avoid using the vehicle in already overdue. heavy duty conditions. Unless reset, the message will continue another driver assistance feature or to display each time you cycle the drive mode (such as “ -ESC OFF”) Set Passive Speed Limit ignition to the RUN position. disables the FCW. This indicator light indicates To turn off the message temporarily, Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Fault the passive speed limit set via press and release the button on the (If equipped) the controls on the RH side of steering wheel. To reset the service This warning light informs that the steering wheel (for further indicator system, please visit an FCW is in fault state. If this details, refer to “TFT Display: Menus Authorized Maserati Dealer. occurred together with other and Settings” in this chapter). ADAS Status Indicators (If equipped) specific messages, could mean Passive Speed Limit Exceeded that a system fault requiring servicing When you are not viewing the This indicator light informs the at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.Itis “Drive Assist” page, the driver that the speed limit that nevertheless possible to drive the indicators at the top left-hand was set has been exceeded. vehicle without using this function (for side of the display indicate further details, refer to “Forward

176 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator Ride Height Indicator for Vehicle For further information, check This indicator light indicates Setup “Electronic Cruise Control” in section that the stiff suspensions Ride height set through the “Driving”. program (S) is on. For further control on central console is Cruise Control (CC) Set details, refer to “Drive Mode” always displayed in the This green light indicator will in section “Driving”. specific area on the RH side of illuminate with the set speed Set Drive Mode Indicator the TFT display. From the when the CC is set and in “Normal” level (shown in driver override. For further Drive mode set by the driver picture) ride height can be information, check “Electronic Cruise through the controls on lowered at “Aero 1” or “Aero Control” in section “Driving”. central console is displayed 2” levels when using vehicle above the transmission lever on the road. When using the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault indicator. vehicle off road, ride height This warning light on indicates 4 For further details, refer to can be set to a higher that the LKA system is in fault. “Drive Mode” in section position thanks to “Off Road If the warning light and the “Driving”. 1” or “Off Road 2” levels. For relevant message do not go further details, refer to “Drive off after a few manoeuvres and Mode” and "Off-road Drive” eventually a key cycle, contact an in section “Driving”. Authorized Maserati Dealer. The lowest position Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready “Entry/Exit” shown in picture or Canceled is used for entering and This white warning light exiting the vehicle. indicates that the ACC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in This white light indicator will white below). For further details, refer illuminate when the CC is to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in ready to be set (with 3 dashes section “Driving”. below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below).

177 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set details, refer to “Brake and Stability Gear Shift Indicator Light This green warning light with Control System” in section “Driving”. This indicator lights up to below the set speed turns on Hill Descent Control (HDC) Set indicate gear shift change in when the ACC is set (for This green light with below order to optimize fuel further details, refer to the set speed turns on when consumption. “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in the HDC is set. For further See “Drive Mode” in section section “Driving”) and vehicle will details, refer to “Brake and “Driving” for further keep set speed. Stability Control System” in section information. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault “Driving”. Service AWD System Message This warning light turns on Headlight On Indicator The message and the warning light on when ACC is not operating or This indicator will illuminate the TFT display will illuminate when needs servicing, For further all-wheel drive feature requires 4 when the position lights or details, refer to “Adaptive headlights are turned on. service. For further information refer Cruise Control - ACC” in section For further details, see to “All-Wheel Drive” in section “Driving”. “Lights” in section “Understanding the “Driving”. Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure Vehicle”. Warning Light Front Fog lights On Indicator This warning light and related This indicator turns on when message light on to report a the fog lights are on. failure of the BSA system. As consequence, on vehicles equipped with ABSA also this latter Automatic High Beam On Indicator will be not working or malfunctioning. This indicator turns on when Contact an Authorized Maserati the “Auto High Beam Assist” Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to feature is set on MTC+ (see use this system. “MTC+ Settings” in this Hill Descent Control (HDC) Ready section). This white light turns on to indicate that HDC is ready to be set and, once it sets, to turn it off temporarily. For further

178 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Infotainment System The vehicle is provided with a specific add to the owner’s manual, describing The vehicle is equipped with the the MTC+ System features and listing infotainment Maserati Touch Control all warnings and precautions, which Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user are essential for a safe use of the interface which combines innovative system. Maserati advises you to read and exclusive technical features this add carefully and thoroughly. integrating entertainment, user The MTC+ display is positioned in the settings, air conditioning, navigation, central part of the dashboard and the communication and information manual controls and devices for features within a single system. connecting external sources are The MTC+ System features an audio positioned on the central console. system which is acoustically optimized 1. MTC+ touch display. for this specific vehicle. 4 2. Ports for SD card, AUX and USB (for further details, refer to “Interior features” in section WARNING! “Understanding the Vehicle”). The navigation system assists the 3. “Browse” button . driver while driving, providing advice and suggestions, by voice guidance 4. “Back” button . and graphic information, for the best 5. “Enter” button. route to reach the set destination. The 6. Volume control. Manual Controls and Devices suggestions provided by the 7. Tune/scroll control. SD, AUX and USB Ports navigation system do not relieve the When an SD card is inserted into its driver from full responsibility for the housing, the MTC+ is able to read it maneuvers made through traffic while and select multimedia files (music and driving, or from compliance with road images) from the device. regulations and other provisions By using the AUX and USB ports it is regarding road traffic. The person possible to connect external devices to driving the vehicle is always and in the MTC+ (see chapter “Interior any case responsible for safe driving features” in section “Understanding on the road. the Vehicle”).

179 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

After connecting the device, by using selected, or the favorites when the the MTC+ display softkeys, knobs on “Nav (Navigation)” menu is selected. the central console and controls at the Back button steering wheel, user can navigate through the content of the connected Press this button to go back to device and set its playing mode. previous menu or previous screen. Press this button to shift the Multimedia Navigation Controls on navigation one level backwards on Central Console MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held The manual controls located on the for at least 2 seconds, it brings the central console are a further interface cursor back in the lower bar of the for the driver and nearby passenger, Tune/Scroll Control main menus. that adds to the MTC+ display By working this knob in “Radio” or Enter Button 4 softkeys. Using the manual controls, “Media” mode, user can go through the MTC+ display will work as a the radio stations or scroll the tracks To confirm the function or setting graphic display of the inputs from the inside connected external devices and highlighted on MTC+ display. controls. confirm the selection by pressing enter When in “Radio” mode and the ignition switch in RUN position, you Volume Control button. In any other mode of the MTC+, use can save your preset stations. By working this knob in “Radio” or this knob to scroll the list of available “Media” mode, user can adjust the Main Menu Bar on MTC+ options or to manage the cursor volume of the radio or audio files, Display movement in the lower bar of the from minimum to maximum and vice main menus. Then press enter button The softkeys located on the lower part versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase to confirm the function or setting of the MTC+ display represent the the volume, counter-clockwise to highlighted on MTC+ display. main menu modes/functions, which decrease it. The volume status will be are briefly indicated below. indicated in the top part of the MTC+ Browse button display. After selecting a function, using the tune/scroll knob or softkeys on MTC+ display, press this button to see the detail of the items/options of the selected function. This button is also used as shortcut to display the phone book, when the “Phone” menu is

180 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

3. “Controls” softkey Touch one of these soft-keys to access Touch this soft-key to access the the list of functions that users can set. features of some driver assistance Touchscreen Display Warnings system (ADAS) that can be set up (if equipped). Features can be selected and adjusted or turned on/off by CAUTION! touching the related soft-key (see • Do NOT attach any object to the "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this touchscreen, doing so can result in section). damage to the touchscreen. 4. softkey • Do not press the screen with any Main menu bar is set up by Maserati: hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, it can be customized according to Touch this softkey to access Applications / settings screen. jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the personal requirements, as explained in touchscreen surface. 4 “Customizing the Main Menu Bar” in 5. “Climate” softkey • Do not spray any liquid or caustic this chapter. Touch this soft-key to access the air chemicals directly on the screen. Use For further information refer to the conditioning settings. In this screen a clean and dry micro fiber lens dedicated booklet included in the the following controls are also cleaning cloth in order to clean the owner documentation. available: Heated Seats, Heated touchscreen. Steering Wheel and Ventilated 1. “Radio” softkey • If necessary, use a lint-free cloth Seats. See “Air Conditioning Touch this softkey to enter the dampened with a cleaning solution, Controls” in this section for further Radio mode. The different tuner such as isopropyl alcohol, or an details. modes: FM, AM, SXM and “Aha” isopropyl alcohol and water solution App (for countries where it is 6. “Nav” softkey ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the supported) can be selected by Touch this softkey to access the solvent manufacturer’s precautions touching the related softkeys in the Navigation feature. Refer to the and directions. Radio mode. MTC+ instruction manual for 2. “Media” softkey (if connected) further details. Switch OFF Touchscreen Backlight Touch this softkey to access media 7. “Phone” softkey If the screen backlight becomes sources such as: USB Device, AUX, Touch one of these softkey to access annoying when driving, it is possible Bluetooth and SD card as long as the MTC+ Phone feature that can to switch it off. the requested media is present. be set or monitored via MTC+.

181 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Switch off the screen backlight by easily customized to suit user's soft-key. “Android Auto” app needs to touching “Screen OFF” soft-key in the requirements, as follows: be downloaded on your mobile device. “Controls” screen of MTC+ display. • press button to open applications/settings screen; • hold depressed and drag the icon corresponding to the selected function until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar.

4 These applications use the MTC+ Without ADAS display as projector of the functions available on the connected device. “Apple CarPlay” allows the best use of your iPhone® in the car and perfect integration with the MTC + display and with the controls of the car, Once it is set in the menu bar, the new including Siri voice control. You can connection will be immediately make phone calls, access music, send operational. and receive messages, get real-time Use the MTC+ Display as directions on traffic conditions, all Projection Device while staying focused on the road. The “Android Auto” app lets you share With ADAS If your smartphone is properly information while driving and make it Customizing the Main Menu connected to the vehicle via the USB easier to access Google. The interface port, on MTC+ screen in place of Bar is equipped with Google Maps with “Phone” soft-key and in the source list voice guided navigation, traffic The softkeys for the main functions of of “Media” screen you can find the information in real time, on-demand the MTC+ system, indicated at the “Apple CarPlay” (example shown in access to millions of songs in Google bottom of the MTC+ display, can be picture) or the “Android Auto” app Play Music. It also offers the possibility

182 Dashboard Instruments and Controls to make phone calls or send and receive messages without taking your hands off the steering wheel. You can also request Google to make any type of research. Android Auto will give an easier access to applications and content from the MTC+ system display. The following tables show the “Screen” and “Audio” source (of projection device or of MTC+

System MTC+ ) when a smartphone is connected, a session is established and the device (Table A) or the MTC+ System (Table B) is performing an 4 action.

183 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Table A: device is performing an action

MTC+ System MTC+ : Active Mode Action Radio Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec. Screen: Screen: Screen: No App active Screen: Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Start Media Player Audio: + Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Audio: MTC+ MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: 4 Start Navigation Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: + Audio priority + Audio priority + Audio priority

Screen: Start Phone Call Audio: MTC+

Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+ Start VR Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: MTC+

184 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Table B: MTC+ is performing an action

Device : Active Mode

Action MTC+ No App active Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec.

Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Main Audio: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Start Radio Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ + mix Audio: Audio: prompt nav

Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Start Media Player Main Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: + Audio priority 4

Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Main Screen: MTC+ Start Navigation Audio: Audio: Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: MTC+ + Audio priority + Audio priority + Audio priority

Screen: Start Phone Call Audio:

Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+ Cannot start VR Screen: Start VR Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ during Call Audio: MTC+ Audio: + Audio priority + Audio priority

Start Rear Parking Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Camera Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio:

185 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio Controls By pressing the top of the rocker or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to switch you can increase the volume tune station. The vehicle is equipped with audio and by pressing the bottom of the controls that allow both driver and rocker switch you can lower it. Press front passenger to operate the audio the center button to mute the volume. system. These controls can be used to The left-hand control functions adjust audio volume, change radio depend on the current source. To station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc). change source, press the center button. Steering Wheel Audio Controls When in “Radio” mode, pressing the These audio controls are rocker-type top of the switch will “Seek” up for switches with a button in the center the previous listenable station and and are located on the rear side of the pressing the bottom of the switch will 4 steering wheel, right behind the front “Seek” down for the previous For further details, refer to switches. listenable station. “Infotainment System” in this section. When an external source is connected When in App/Settings mode, the to MTC+, a light press on the top of tune/scroll bottom knob and the the switch will play the next track on browse and enter buttons allow the device connected. you to scroll through the menus and Press the bottom of the switch once to change the user’s settings (see “MTC+ go to the beginning of the current Settings” in section “Dashboard track, or to the beginning of the Instruments and Controls”). previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three Press any button to display times, it will play the third one, etc. information on the radio station or track being listened to inside a pop-up Audio Controls on Central for 2 seconds on instrument cluster. Console The right-hand control manages the In “Radio” mode, turn the volume volume. upper knob to set the audio volume,

186 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio System dashboard, one on each front door panel and one on each side wall of The vehicle is equipped with an audio the trunk, above the cover level. system that offers superior sound • Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter quality, higher sound pressure levels Tweeters: one at the base of the and reduced energy consumption. windshield side pillars and one on The system maximizes the amplifier each rear door. and speaker technology delivering • One bass box in the trunk, under the substantially higher components and front part of the floor. system efficiency. • 12-channel amplifier positioned in Basic System the wall of the trunk left side. The basic sound system features 8 speakers and can develop a sound 4 output of 80 W. The basic system includes: • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeters, one at the base of the windshield side pillars and one on Basic System each rear door. Premium System The vehicle can be equipped with a “Premium” sound system which features 14 speakers and can develop a sound output of 900 W. This system includes: • Four 6.3 in (160 mm) diameter Woofers: one on each door. • Five 3.1 in (80 mm) diameter Midrange: one on the top of the

187 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

front door and one on each side wall of the trunk, above the cover level. • Seven 1 in (25 mm) Tweeters: one on center dashboard, one at the base of the windshield side pillars, one on each rear door and one on each side wall of the trunk, above the cover level. • One bass box in the trunk, under the front part of the floor. • 16-channel amplifier positioned in the wall of the trunk left side. 4

Premium System High Premium System High Premium System The vehicle can be equipped with a “High Premium” audio system including 17 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request. The “High Premium” system includes: • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) Woofers: one on each door. • Five 4 in (100 mm) Midranges: one on center dashboard, one on each

188 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+ “Controls” Screen The ADAS features have two soft-keys: the first “soft-key” changes the Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the current setting on or off, the second lower part of the MTC+ display to turn “soft-key” on the side shows the on/off some on-board devices and turn current setting. on/off and adjust some driver assist By touching the second soft-key, you systems (ADAS). will enter the setting page in which all Once you enter the “Controls” screen, feature options are visible and use the touch soft-keys or turn the adjustable. tune/scroll knob to scroll and change NOTE: feature settings of the features and Without ADAS press the enter upper button to • For further details refer also to the confirm the selection. “Maserati Touch Control Plus Some of these devices or systems are (MTC+)” guide. 4 optional or for a specific • All settings must be edited with model/version and may not be ignition device set to RUN position. available on your vehicle. • Some of the Customer The “Controls” screen is specific to the programmable features are optional vehicles that are not equipped with or for a specific model/version and driver assistance systems (Without may not be available on your ADAS Systems) and for those that vehicle. have them (With ADAS Systems). With ADAS Features Common to All Some features can be set only on or Configurations off touching the corresponding soft-key. The blue color of the soft-key • Glove Box outline will confirm the state change. This feature allows you to enter a Other features can have one or more 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock instruction/setting pages that are the glove box in the passenger side accessed by touching the of the dashboard. corresponding soft-key (example: See "Dashboard Compartments" in "Glove Box"). this section for further details.

189 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• Start & Stop Off Features Specific for Vehicle system will attempt to keep the This feature allows you to disable without ADAS vehicle in lane and can apply direct input to electric power steering the Start & Stop when frequent • Blind Spot Assist stops and restarts of the engine may system to change direction of Activating this feature the BSA and become annoying. vehicle. RCP systems assist the driver when The current system setting is shown See "Normal Starting of the Engine" changing lanes, overtaking and in blue on the right side of the LKA in section "Driving" for further when parking, by detecting the soft-key. details. arrival of other vehicles from a side • Auto High Beam Assist or rear blind spot. When this Touching this soft-key the set page By selecting this feature, when the happens, a light signal appears in of LKA system will be displayed (see forward digital camera detects a the external rear-view mirror. picture). vehicle that precedes in the When the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is 4 direction of travel or in the opposite selected, feature can be set to direction, adjust the high beam in “Off”, “Lights” or “Lights + Chime” an automatic way not to dazzle. (default mode). When this feature is See "Lights" in section activated in “Lights” mode, the "Understanding the Vehicle" for system will only show a warning further details. light in the outside mirrors. • Screen OFF When “Lights + Chime” mode is This feature allows you to switch off activated, the system will show a the MTC+ screen backlight if it warning light in the outside mirrors becomes annoying when driving. as well as give an audible alert when Driver warnings can be only “Visual” See "Infotainment System" in this the turn signal is on. When “Off” is or “Visual & Haptic” (default mode). section for further details. selected, the system is deactivated. System response can be set to For description of this system, see • Settings “Early”, “Medium” (default mode) chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in and “Late”. Touch this soft-key you enter the section “Driving”. “Settings” page that displays all user System reaction force can be set to - customizable features: see “MTC+ Features Specific for Vehicles “Low”, “Medium” (default mode) Settings” in this section. with ADAS and “High”. See “Lane Keeping Assist - LKA” in • Lane Keeping Assist section “Driving” for more details. Activating this feature the LKA

190 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• Active Blind Spot Assist “Low”, “Medium” (default mode) set the sensitivity and the aid of the Activating this feature the system and “High”. active braking. will try to prevent collision between See “Active Blind Spot Assist - FCW sensitivity can be set to host vehicle and potential blind ABSA” in section “Driving” for more “Near”, to “Medium” or to “Far”. spot collision hazard. System applies details. The default status of FCW is the direct input to electric power • Forward Collision Warning (with “Medium” setting. Setting it to steering system to change direction active braking) “Far” means the system will warn of vehicle to avoid collision. The FCW feature primarily uses the you of a possible collision with the The current system setting is shown front radar and forward looking vehicle in front of you when you are in blue on the right side of the camera for sensing vehicles ahead, farther away. This gives you the best ABSA soft-key. Touching this and will provide warnings to the reaction time, though could lead to soft-key the set page of ABSA driver and may perform braking some more unwanted warnings. system will be displayed (see maneuvers. “Medium” gives instead a little less 4 time for reacting compared to picture). The current system setting is shown “Far”, but at the same time should in blue on the right side of the FCW lead to less not desired warning. soft-key. To change the setting for more Touching this soft-key the set page dynamic driving, select the “Near” of FCW system will be displayed (see setting. This warns you of a possible picture). collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. FCW with active braking can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Surround View Camera Driver warnings can be only By activating this feature the system “Visual”, “Visual & Acoustic” uses four cameras to monitor the (default mode) or “Visual & Haptic”. area around the vehicle when System response can be set to transmission lever is shifted to P “Early”, “Medium” (default mode) (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position. and “Late”. FCW is always active: it is possible to System reaction force can be set to When activation occurs by pressing the “Surround Camera” button in

191 Dashboard Instruments and Controls the “Controls” screen or moving the with a possible alert when the MTC+ Settings shift lever in R (Reverse) position, vehicle exceeds the speed limit. the initial view will be the default Customer Programmable view (associated with current gear Features state). Image will be displayed with active guidelines while in that gear The MTC+ System uses a combination as long as vehicle speed remains of keys able to access and change the lower than 12 km/h (8 mph). customer programmable features present in the “Settings” and When vehicle is shifted into a “Controls” page (see also “MTC+ different gear, the image will “Controls” Screen” in this section). remain displayed for 10 seconds, or Access programmable features vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until touching “Settings” soft-key in the vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h 4 See “Traffic Sign Assist - TSA” in “Controls” screen page, or using (8 mph), at which point it will section “Driving” for further details. manual controls on central console immediately cancel and return to (refer to “Infotainment System” in this the last-viewed screen. section). The feature can be set to “On” or Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll “Off”. See “Surround View Camera through menus and change settings on System (optional)” in section MTC+ display, touch the enter upper “Understanding the Vehicle” for button to confirm the selection. further details. • Traffic Sign Assist By activating this feature the forward-facing digital camera, with the aid of maps on the navigation system, is able to detect speed limits and traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in snow conditions). Those are displayed by the TSA system on the instrument cluster display together Without ADAS

192 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

To make a selection, and enter the desired function, touch the corresponding soft-key on the menu (the picture shown is “Engine Off Options”).

With ADAS In this mode the MTC+ System allows NOTE: you to access the following • For further details refer to the programmable features (some of them 4 “Maserati Touch Control Plus are optional or for a specific (MTC+)” guide. model/version and may not be available on your vehicle): Display, • All settings must be edited with To scroll through the functions, move Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety ignition device set to RUN position. the cursor up or down, or touch the & Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors & arrow or . Once the desired Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote To display the programmable features mode is entered, press and release the Start, Engine Off Options, Suspension, menu on MTC+, you can also touch touch screen area of the setting that Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM soft-key to view all available you wish to modify. The new setting Setup, Restore Settings and Clear applications and then select will be highlighted with one or more Personal Data. “Settings”. boxes to indicate status or possible NOTE: variants of the function status. A • Only one touch screen area/soft-key check mark in a box indicates the may be selected at a time. current status of the function. Touch • Menu navigation indications refer to the check mark to cancel, or the the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: empty box to insert the check mark, the same operations can be and change the status of the function. performed using the manual controls on central console.

193 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Display (if equipped). The available languages are specific to the target After pressing the “Display” soft-key markets. the following mode settings will be available. • Touchscreen Beep • Display Mode When in this display, you can turn on or shut off the sound activated When in this display you can select by pressure of a touchscreen one of the auto display settings. To soft-key. change mode status, checkmark "Night", “Day” or “Auto”. • Controls Screen Time-Out Once the procedure is completed (for • Display Brightness with Headlights When this mode is selected, the example, Display mode) touch the On (Night) “Controls” screen will remain displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode 4 back arrow soft-key to return to When in this display, you can select is not selected, the screen will the previous menu or touch the upper the brightness with the headlights remain displayed until closed right “X” soft-key, to close the settings on. Adjust the brightness from level manually. screen. Touching the or soft keys 0 to 10 with the “+” and “–” setting and the cursor on the right side of the soft-keys or by selecting any point screen will allow you to scroll up or on the scale between the “+” and down through the available settings. “–” soft-keys. • Display Brightness with Headlights Off (Day) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained for "Night" setting. • Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster • Set Language By selecting this feature, the next When in this display, you can select turn direction will appear on the one language for all display instrument cluster along a descriptions, including the trip programmed route until the desired functions and the navigation system destination is reached (see picture).

194 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

displayed in the TFT Display and in the change the voice response length navigation system. The following settings. To change the voice selectable units of measure are listed response length, touch the “Brief” below: or “Detailed” softkey. • Distance unit: • Show Command List select from: “mi” or “km”. When this feature is selected, it is • Speed unit: possible to select options during a select from: “mph” or “km/h”. voice control session. Options for available controls are: “Always”, • Consumption unit: “w/Help” or “Never”. • AutoShow Smartphone Display select from: “mpg (US)”, “mpg Upon Connection (UK)”, “L/100km” or “km/L”. Clock This feature allows to use the MTC+ • Capacity unit: Time is always visible on the 4 display as a projection device select from: “gal (US)”, “gal (UK)” dashboard analog clock (see “Analog connected via USB port in order to or “L”. Clock” in this section) and in digital browse the Apple CarPlay and • Pressure unit: format on the instrument cluster and Android Auto apps. By setting this select from: “psi”, “kPa” or “bar”. on the MTC+ display. feature, automatic switch from native screen to projection device • Temperature unit: will happen every time you connect select from: “°F” or “°C”. your smartphone. For further details • Power unit: refer to the “Maserati Touch select from: “kW”, “hp (US)” or “hp Control Plus (MTC+)” guide. (UK)”. Units • Torque unit: After pressing the “Units” and then select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm”. “Custom” softkey on the touchscreen Voice Commands you may select between “Imperial” units and “Metric” of measure. Each After pressing “Voice” softkey the unit of measure can be independently following modes will be available. • Voice Response Length When in this display, you can

195 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

you can set the hours manually from 1 to 24. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to adjust the hours. • Set Time Minutes With “Sync Time with GPS” feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the minutes manually from 0 to 59. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys as done for the hours. With this feature it is possible to view • Time Format Safety & Driving Assistant and set the following modes. Touch this soft-key to set the following 4 When in this mode, you can select • Sync Time with GPS the time format display. To change modes. Time is normally automatically the current setting, touch and • ParkSense (Park Assist) synchronised with the radio signal. It release the “12 Hrs” or “24 Hrs” The park assist system will scan for is also possible to set automatic soft-key. objects behind and in front of the synchronisation mode using GPS • Show Time In Status Bar vehicle when the transmission shift signal instead. This feature will allow you to turn lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle on or shut off the digital clock in the speed is less than 7.5 mph (12 km/h). status bar (main menu bar). The system can be enabled with “Sound” only, “Sound+Display”, or • Set Date in Cluster turned “Off”. See “Park Assist When in this mode, you can set the (optional)” in section “Before date manually in the main menu bar Starting” for further information. of the MTC+ and on the instrument cluster display. Touch the “+” or “-” • Front Sensors Active in Drive soft-keys to adjust day, month and If this feature is active, when driver year. takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking • Set Time Hours sensors are activated. If this feature With “Sync Time with GPS” feature is not active, when driver takes shift unchecked and this mode selected, lever from P (park) or N (Neutral) to

196 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

D (Driver), front parking sensors are • Auto Folding Side Mirrors will automatically activate the NOT activated. By selecting this feature the power windshield wipers if the rain sensor • Front ParkSense Volume external mirrors will automatically senses moisture on the windshield. The feature can be set to “On” or When this feature is selected, the fold alfter a lock door request, “Off”. chime volume of front park assist performed by key fob RKE sensors can be set to “Low”, transmitter or by the “Passive • Hill Start Assist “Medium” or “High” level. Entry” system. This feature allows you to disable “Medium” is the default setting. Power external mirrors will the HSA system. The feature can be The system will retain its last known automatically unfold once the set to “On” or “Off”. See “Brake configuration state through ignition ignition device is in ACC or RUN and Stability Control System” in cycles. position, only if the last fold section “Driving” for further details. movement has been automatic. • Rear ParkSense Volume If the mirrors were manually folded Lights 4 When this feature is selected, the by the switch on the driver's door Press the “Lights” soft-key to set the chime volume of rear park assist panel, before a lock action, they will following modes. sensors can be set to “Low”, need to be manually unfold to “Medium” or “High” level. • Headlight Off Delay reactivate the automatic behave. “Medium” is the default setting. By selecting this feature, the driver The system will retain its last known • ParkView Backup Camera Delay can choose to have the headlight configuration state through ignition By selecting this feature, when the off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds cycles. shift lever is moved out of R when the engine is shut off. To • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Reverse), the rear view image with change the current headlight off dynamic grid lines will be displayed delay status, touch and release the By selecting this feature the outside for up to 10 seconds after shifting “0”, “30”, “60” or “90” soft-key to side-view mirrors will tilt downward unless the forward vehicle speed select the desired time range. when the ignition is in RUN position exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), or the and the transmission shift lever is in transmission is shifted into P (Park) R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will or the ignition device is switched to move back to their previous the OFF position. The feature can be position when the transmission is set to “On” or “Off”. shifted out of R (Reverse). The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers By selecting this feature, the system

197 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

“Understanding the Vehicle” for • Auto Door Locks further information. When this feature is selected, all • Headlight Dip (Traffic Changeover) (if doors will automatically lock when equipped) the vehicle is in motion. The feature By selecting this feature, the can be set to “On” or “Off”. headlights will change their light distribution when a left-hand-drive vehicle enter a Country with right-hand-drive system and vice versa. The feature can be set to • Headlight Illumination on Approach “On” or “Off”. By selecting this feature, the driver • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) 4 can choose to have the headlight off By selecting and check-mark this or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when feature, the DRL lights will turn on the doors are unlocked with the key whenever the engine running. The fob RKE transmitter. feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Auto Unlock on Exit • Headlights with Wipers • Steering Directed Headlights By selecting this feature, all doors By selecting this feature, while the will unlock when the vehicle is By selecting this feature, the headlight lever is in “AUTO” stopped, the transmission is in P headlights rotate following the position, the headlight will turn on (Park) or N (Neutral) position and steering wheel direction change and approximately 10 seconds after the the driver's door is open. The change their flux distribution at wipers are activated. The headlight feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. high speeds, when the vehicle enters will also turn off when the wipers an town area and when it's raining. • Flash Lights with Lock deactivate if they were activated in The feature can be set to “On” or By selecting this feature, the the current mode. The feature can “Off”. See “Lights” in section headlights will flash when the doors be set to“On” or “Off”. “Understanding the Vehicle” for are locked or unlocked with the key • Auto Dim High Beams further details. fob RKE transmitter or when using By selecting this feature, the high the Passive Entry feature. The beam headlight will deactivate Doors & Locks feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. automatically under certain Press the “Doors & Locks” soft-key to • Sound Horn with Lock conditions. See “Lights” in section set the following modes. When this feature is selected, the

198 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

horn will sound when the doors are unlock on the first press of the key • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob locked with the key fob RKE fob RKE transmitter button. This selected mode enables to transmitter. You can choose from If the vehicle is programmed on “1st combine the key fob to personal the following options: “Off” (no Press of Key Fob Unlocks”: driver’s position settings. These sound), “1st Press” (sound on the • all doors will unlock no matter settings will be implemented when first press of the button) and which “Passive Entry” equipped pressing the button on the key “2nd Press” (sound on the second door handle is grasped; fob RKE transmitter with ignition press of the button). • only the driver’s door will unlock device in RUN position. • Sound Horn with Remote Start when the driver’s door is grasped; • Power Liftgate Alert When this feature is selected, the • with “Passive Entry”, touching the When this feature is available, if it horn will sound when you use the handle more than once will only selected, further to turn indicators key fob RKE transmitter to start the result in the driver’s door opening. flashing, an acoustic warning will engine. The feature can be set to If driver door first is selected, once also be triggered when opening 4 “On” or “Off”. See “Remote Start the driver door is opened, the and closing the liftgate and also System” in section “Before Starting” interior door lock/unlock switch can when the fully open position of the for further details. be used to unlock all doors (or use liftgate is set by the user. The • Remote Unlock Sequence key fob RKE transmitter). feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. By selecting this feature you may set • Passive Entry • Hands Free Power Liftgate up only the driver's door or all This feature allows you to lock and To prevent the accidental opening doors mode will unlock on the first unlock the vehicle door(s) without of the power liftgate/Hand free press of the key fob RKE transmitter having to push the key fob RKE (optional) with the movement of button. When “Driver Door” is transmitter or buttons. By the foot, it is possible to disable the selected, you must press the key fob selecting this feature, “Passive “Hand Free” function. The feature RKE transmitter button twice to Entry” may be set to “On” or “Off”. can be set to “On” or “Off”. This unlock also the passenger's doors. The default status is “On”. With operation is recommended when When unlocking “All Doors” by first “Passive Entry” deactivated, also the you have to wash the car (for press selection mode, all doors will “Pre-Short Drop” function is further information, refer to disabled (for further information, “Power Liftgate Operation” in refer to “Bodywork Maintenance section “Before Starting”). and Care” in section “Maintenance and Care”).

199 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Auto-On Comfort & Remote and “All Starts” (activation of this Opening of one front doors will Start (If equipped) function when you start the engine cancel this feature. in all modes). The switch-off delay can be • Auto-on Driver Heated/Vented Seat cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose & Steering Engine Off Options from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 This feature allows to activate the This feature allows you to set some minutes. comfort of the driving seat when functions after turning off the engine. starting the engine. • Headlight Off Delay • Easy Exit Seat If equipped, the driver’s By selecting this feature the heated/vented seat and/or heated When this feature is selected, the headlight will stay lit for up to 90 steering wheel will automatically driver's seat will automatically move seconds after turning off the activate by temperatures below 40°F rearward once the engine is shut off engine. (4°C). When temperatures are above for easy exit of the vehicle. The The switch-off delay can be 4 80°F (26°C) the driver vented seat feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to will turn on. 60 or 30 seconds. • Auto Entry/Exit Suspension Select this mode to automatically lower vehicle to minimum ground clearance when driver takes transmission to P (Park) to help entry into and exit from the vehicle and unloading of cargo from the boot compartment. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Engine Off Power Delay (Power Suspension • Remote Start duration after engine shutdown) If the vehicle is equipped with the By selecting this feature, the power This feature allows displaying and remote start system, you can choose window switches, radio, MTC+ setting the following modes of the from the following options: “Off”, Phone System, power sunroof (if pneumatic suspension system. “Remote Start” (activation of this equipped), and power outlets will • Auto Entry/Exit Suspension remain active for up to 10 minutes function when you use the key fob Select this mode to automatically after turning off the engine. RKE transmitter to start the engine) lower vehicle to minimum ground

200 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

clearance when driver takes alignment when servicing Adjust the settings with the “+” and transmission to P (Park) to help suspension and/or steering parts. “–” setting soft-keys or scroll and entry into and exit from the vehicle The feature can be set to “On” or touch the slider in any point on the and unloading of cargo from the “Off”. scale between the “+” and “–” trunk compartment. The feature soft-keys. can be set to “On” or “Off”. Audio • Warning/Suspension Warning This feature enables to view and set Messages Only the available audio modes depending on the type of audio system supplied Select this mode to choose whether on the car. to display only warnings (option The following modes refer to the “On”). The feature can be set to “High Premium” audio system. “On” or “Off”. • Balance/Fade • Tire Change Mode/Stationary Auto 4 Leveling Use this screen to adjust the balance and fade settings. Touch and drag Select this mode to disable the the speaker icon, use the arrows to • Speed Adjusted Volume pneumatic suspension to avoid adjust, or tap the “C” icon to automatic levelling, when vehicle This feature increases or decreases readjust to the centre. must be lifted for changing a wheel volume combined to vehicle speed. or tire. The feature can be set to To change the speed adjusted “On” or “Off”. volume touch the “Off”, “1”, “2” or “3” soft-key. • Transport To Mode Select this mode to lower the pneumatic suspension to minimum ride height and disable system operation to help vehicle loading and transport, for instance on the platform of a tow truck. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Equalizer • Wheel Alignment Mode Use this screen is used to adjust the Select this mode to prevent “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treb” settings. automatic pneumatic suspension

201 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Available settings: “On” and “Off”.

Phone/Bluetooth • Paired Phones Press this soft-key to select and By selecting this feature you will be 4 connect phones and audio sources. notified which phones are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. • Do Not Disturb • Clari-Fi For each option, you can also add a Settings available for this feature: This function improves the audio one or more devices: for further – Auto Reply quality by enhancing digitally information, see the MTC+ guide. To change the mode status, touch compressed source files such as MP3 the “Text”, “Call” or “Both” and AAC files and certain music soft-key. tracks played by radio stations. In – Auto Reply Message case of high-definition source files To change the mode status, touch like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall the “Custom” or “Default” apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi soft-key. intervention is completely – Customize Auto Reply Message automatic. The feature can be set This feature allows you to “On” or “Off”. customise the “Auto Reply • AutoPlay Message”. Text messages are When a portable device is connected limited to 160 characters (key pad via USB port to MTC+ system, it is not available while vehicle is it plays automatically the songs if this motion). feature is set to "On".

202 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

NOTE: would like to skip followed by On the Maserati website, at pressing the arrow soft-key. www.maserati.com, or through an • Subscription Information Authorized Maserati Dealer you may SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires a consult the list of telephones that are user-paid subscription to access compatible with the MTC+, and their these stations. level of compatibility. It will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription SiriusXM Setup Information Screen in order to After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” subscribe. • Paired Audio Sources soft-key the following settings will be Touch the Subscription Info soft key By selecting this feature you will be available. to access your receiver ID number. notified which audio source are Write down the SiriusXM ID 4 • Tune Start combined to the Phone/Bluetooth numbers for your radio. To activate system. “Tune Start” begins playing the SiriusXM service, either call the For each option, you can also add a current song from the beginning number listed on the screen or visit device and change the PIN code of when you tune to a music channel, SiriusXM online at the device you wish to connect. For so you can enjoy the complete song. www.siriusxm.com/subscriptions or further information, see the MTC+ “Tune Start” works in the call the number listed. guide. background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will • Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster miss the experience of joining your When this mode is selected a favorite song with only a few pop-up message will appear in case seconds left to play. of incoming call. Information • Channel Skip associated to call in progress are available by entering to the SiriusXM can be programmed to “Audio” menu using the buttons on designate a group of channels that the steering wheel RH side. are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the channels you

203 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Restore Settings Dashboard Compartment When this feature is selected, it will There is a glove box compartment on reset the “Display”, “Clock”, “Audio”, the passenger side of the dashboard to and “Radio Settings” to their default store small items or documents. settings. Run this feature and a pop-up will appear asking user to confirm default settings resetting. Select “Yes” to WARNING! restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the Do not operate the vehicle with a settings are restored, a pop-up appears glove compartment lid in the open confirming that settings have been position. Cellular phones, music In the compartment there is a location reset to default and then the MTC+ players, and other handheld electronic to hold the Owner’s documentation. 4 will restart. devices should be stowed while Inside the door there are driving. Use of these devices while compartments for storing glasses and Clear Personal Data driving could cause an accident due to small items. When this feature is selected, it will distraction. remove personal data concerning settings and/or options that have been modified compared to factory settings CAUTION! and will also remove from system Do not place objects weighing over memory Bluetooth devices and presets. 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box To remove personal information, select compartment. this feature and a pop-up will appear To open the glove box, pull the handle asking confirmation to delete all as shown in the picture. personal data. Select “OK” to clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data have The compartment is illuminated by a been cleared, a pop up appears courtesy light when open (the light confirming that personal data have will automatically switch off when the been cleared and then the MTC+ will compartment is closed). restart. Under the courtesy light there are two USB inputs for charging the connected source (see “Interior Features” in

204 Dashboard Instruments and Controls section “Understanding the Vehicle” Glove Box Lock for further details). • Open “Controls” screen and touch “Glove Box” softkey.

• Using the keypad, enter the four digits of the PIN and press “OK”. The Glove Box Lock Feature system prompts you re-enter the PIN 4 code to confirm it. The glove box can be equipped with Without ADAS an opening/closing electric actuator that can be locked and unlocked via a feature of the MTC+, by entering a 4-digit PIN code. It is important to memorize and take note of the PIN. If it is lost, you must contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer that will reset this feature. NOTE: “Glove Box” lock feature must be NOTE: activated when the glove box is With ADAS • If you do not enter all PIN digits, a already closed. If you activate the • To open the screen required to enter prompt will indicate that you should glove box lock feature when the the PIN, answer “Yes” to the prompt. do so. “Glove Box” is opened the glove box • In case of an incoming call while will not close properly and will not entering the PIN, the MTC+ system lock. will temporarily stop the release (Continued)

205 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

(Continued) function. As soon as the call is over, the keypad screen will be displayed again so that you can enter the PIN.

• When the next page shown in figure appears, touch “OK”.

Unlock glove box by entering the lock • After removing the molding, take code as previously specified. the screwdriver from the tool kit 4 Glove Box Manual Unlock under trunk mat (see “Tool kit” in section “In an Emergency”). If battery is dead, it is necessary to • Insert screwdriver tip inside the hole manually work the actuator on the LH on LH side of glove box structure: side of the glove box to unlock the push until home against actuator glove box that has been locked using Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ pin. the PIN code. will go back to “Controls” page. • Push down screwdriver tip to release • Proceed carefully and start with the Glove Box Unlock actuator pin and manually unlock central part, indicated by the arrows the glove box. The actuator will To unlock the glove box which was in the figure, and remove the locked with the PIN code, touch remain in this condition until battery dashboard molding beneath and on feed is restored. “Controls” soft-key on the status bar the sides of the climate control and then “Glove Box” soft-key to panel. This molding is fastened by enter this feature. The MTC+ screen means of 10 pins (indicated in the will display the page on which a figure) press-fitted onto clips present message will indicate that system in dashboard structure. operation is reduced and that only “Climate”, “Controls” and “Settings” features are active.

206 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Dealer to have unlock feature via PIN Analog Clock code checked. To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard between the air outlets, use the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section).

4

The time can be displayed also on the MTC+ main menu bar and on the instrument cluster display (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Clock lighting works in the same way Inner Section as instrument and controls • Reinstall the molding ensuring that backlighting (refer to “Lights” in pins match with the clips of section “Understanding the Vehicle”). dashboard structure. • Press on the molding, always starting from the central part until all 10 pins are engaged in their clips and “click” in place. After releasing the glove box by means of this procedure, do not lock glove box using the PIN code and contact an Authorized Maserati

207 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Air Conditioning Controls passengers using the soft-keys on MTC+ display. The vehicle is equipped with an automatic dual-zone air conditioning system that allows to adjust separately CAUTION! the air temperature in the left and in To ensure proper functioning of the the right zone of the passenger solar sensor, do not apply adhesive compartment, according to the parking stickers, etc. in the checking requests of the driver and the front area between the sensor and the passenger. windshield. Therefore, keep the A humidity sensor, positioned on the windshield and the solar sensor clean Front seats and steering wheel comfort inner surface of the windshield, over to prevent accumulation of dust or setting soft-keys are present even the rear view mirror, allows the A/C other impurities. when the A/C is off (see "Front Seats" 4 system to prevent/eliminate fogging of and/or "Steering Wheel Adjustment" the windshield and side windows. Dual Zone Climate Controls in section "Understanding the Vehicle" The best efficacy in preventing This system can be operated by using for further details). fogging is obtained by selecting the the controls of the climate control AUTO function, described later. panel on the dashboard, or the A dual zone solar sensor, positioned on soft-keys on the MTC+ display when the center of the dashboard upper “Climate” mode is selected. surface, helps to achieve the best In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+, comfort in presence of solar radiation. the front seats and steering wheel Upon request, the vehicle can be comfort setting soft-keys may be equipped with an additional present (optional equipments). The automatic dual-zone air conditioning “OFF” state of the front seats and system installed in the central console, steering wheel comfort setting is between the front seats. The shown on their soft-key. additional dual-zone module, can be When the MTC+ System is in any mode operated by the rear passengers (see other than “Climate” (“Radio”, “Four-zone Climate Control “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the driver (optional)” in this chapter), by means and passenger temperature settings of the control panel at the end of will be indicated on the upper part of central console, but also by the front the display.

208 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Description of Controls 1. Climate control on/off 3. Driver temperature control All described functions can be set and Once you enter the screen “Climate”, Provides the driver with independent modified using the climate control press the “ON” soft-key to switch the temperature control. Push the blue panel or the MTC+ display. climate control on/off. softkey for cooler temperature. Push the red softkey for warmer temperature. The driver's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ between the softkey and . The MTC+ display can also be used to adjust the temperature by pressing and sliding the bar towards softkey , to increase temperature, or towards softkeys to decrease it. 4 NOTE: The “OFF” soft-key will appear when In “SYNC” mode, this button will also the A/C is on. automatically and simultaneously NOTE: adjust the passenger temperature. For vehicles equipped with Remote 4. Passenger temperature control Start, the Air Conditioning System will Provides the passenger with not function during Remote Start independent temperature control. operation if the climate control is left Push the softkey for cooler in “OFF”. temperature. Push the softkey for warmer temperature. The passenger's 2. A/C temperature setting will be displayed To adjust driver and passenger side Press to change the current air on the MTC+ screen between the temperature and fan speed, climate conditioning (A/C) setting; the softkeys and . control panel features two-function indicator illuminates when the “A/C” NOTE: controls that can be pushed up to is on. Operating this function will increase temperature/speed, or down cause the automatic feature to switch Pressing the 4 button while in “SYNC” to decrease them. into manual mode and the “AUTO” mode will automatically exit “SYNC”. LED on the button/MTC+ softkey will turn off.

209 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

5. Recirculation 7. AUTO indicator/MTC+ softkey will illuminate Press to change the current setting, This function automatically controls when the rear window defroster and the LED indicator on the button/the the interior temperature by adjusting the heated outside mirrors are on. relevant softkey illuminates to indicate the air flow rate and the air The rear window defroster and the which recirculation function is distribution. Press “AUTO” to switch heated outside mirrors automatically activated. For further details, see the ATC between manual and turn off after 10 minutes. paragraph “Dual zone Climate Control automatic mode. The LED on the Functions” in this chapter. button/the “AUTO” softkey illuminates CAUTION! 6. Blower control when the “AUTO” function is Failure to observe the following Blower control is used to regulate the activated. See “Automatic cautions may cause damage to the rear amount of air forced through the Temperature Control (ATC)” in this windows defroster: climate system. There are seven blower chapter for more information. 4 speeds available. Adjusting the blower 8. FAST defrosting/defogging • Use care when washing the inside of will cause automatic mode to switch to Press the button/MTC+ softkey to the rear window. Do not use abrasive manual. switch the airflow setting to the window cleaners on the interior On the climate control panel, push the windshield and the front side windows surface of the window. Use a soft rocker switch up to increase blower to get a quick defrosting/defogging. cloth and a mild washing solution, speed. Push the rocker switch down to The LED on the button/MTC+ softkey wiping parallel to the heating decrease blower speed. Pushing down illuminates when this feature is elements. Labels can be peeled off the rocker switch when set blower is at activated. Operating this function will after soaking with warm water. the first speed, causes the A/C system cause the ATC to switch into manual • Do not use scrapers, sharp shutdown (OFF condition). mode: so the “AUTO” LED/MTC+ instruments, or abrasive window On the MTC+ display, touch the small softkey will turn off; the fifth blower cleaners on the interior surface of icon of the blower to decrease the speed will be automatically selected, the window. speed, or the big icon to increase it. unless the blower is already set to a • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at Between the two icons, bars will higher speed. If this function is turned a safe distance from the window. appear to show the number of the off the climate system will return to corresponding selected speed. the previous setting. 10. Air flow distribution modes The blower can also be activated/ 9. REAR defrosting/defogging The airflow distribution mode can be regulated by touching the bars Press the button/MTC+ softkey to adjusted so air comes from the between the two blower icons. turn on the rear window defroster and dashboard vents, floor vents, the heated outside mirrors. A LED defog/defrost vents.

210 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

The display contains the relevant • “Floor” mode Dual Zone Climate Control softkeys used to set these modes. The Air comes from the floor vents. A Functions climate control panel features a small portion of the airflow is Air Conditioning (A/C) button : press it several times to directed through the defrost/defog The “A/C” button allows to manually select and set the required airflow vents. activate or deactivate the air distribution mode. • “Mix” mode conditioning system. When the air Available settings are as follows: Air comes from the defrost/defog conditioning system is turned on, cool • “Dashboard” mode vents and from the floor vents. This dehumidified air will flow through the Air flows in from the six adjustable mode is recommended for cold vents into the cabin. For improved fuel vents of the dashboard and the two climates, to improve comfort and economy, press the “A/C” button to positioned at the rear of the central prevent fogging. turn off the air conditioning and console. Each of these vents can be 11. “SYNC” mode manually adjust the blower and singly adjusted. The air grids or Press the “SYNC” softkey on the MTC+ airflow mode settings. 4 vanes of the vents can be moved to to switch the Sync feature on/off. The When the “A/C” and “AUTO” are adjust air flow direction. A setting “SYNC” indicator illuminates when switched off it is not possible to have wheel, placed near each vent, this feature is selected. This function is air at a lower temperature than the allows to regulate or close the air used to synchronize the passenger outside. flow. temperature setting with the driver Recirculation and Air Quality • “Bi-Level” mode temperature setting. Sensor (AQS) Air comes from the dashboard Changing the passenger temperature When outside air contains smoke, vents, the central console adjustable setting while in “SYNC” will odours, or high humidity, or if rapid vents and the fixed floor vents. A automatically exit this feature. cooling is desired, you may wish to small portion of the airflow is 12. MAX A/C recirculate interior air by pressing the directed through the defrost/defog By pressing the “MAX A/C” recirculation control button to vents. button/softkey, the system activate the two different functionalities. NOTE: automatically switches to get the maximum cold air flow. The recirculation function, that allows Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler to open/close the A/C air inlet by air come in the dashboard and rear operating the relevant button on the part of the central console vents and climate control panel/MTC+ softkey, is warmer air from the floor vents. integrated with the Air Quality Sensor.

211 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

This sensor, positioned upstream of the • Third press: the A/C system switches NOTE: A/C filter, in front of the air intake of back to external air. In cold weather, use of recirculation the A/C system, detects the presence of The next press of the recirculation mode may lead to window fogging. polluting substances and submits an button/MTC+ softkey restars the Select the MIX mode and increase electric signal to the A/C control unit, operating cycle just described. the blower speed to prevent fogging. that closes the intake of the external NOTE: air by activating the air recirculation. MAX A/C The recirculation button/MTC+ softkey To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS is When activating this function, the can therefore enable three operating disabled when the external system switches to exit “AUTO”, enter modes, switchable in sequence. temperature falls below 35 °F (2 °C). “A/C” and recirculation. The minimum Starting from the outside air temperature (LO) in both zones, the condition, in which the external air is maximum blower speed and the air 4 aspirated by the A/C system and distribution are also selected. treated to be introduced into the The blower speed can be adjusted and passenger compartment, subsequent the air distribution can be modified actuations of the button/MTC+ softkey without exiting “MAX A/C”. To exit change the state as follows. “MAX A/C” press the relevant MTC+ • First press: the A/C system activates softkey or exit A/C or recirculation. the recirculation, the LED on the button/MTC+ softkey lights up. The A/C system will stay this way up to a new actuation, or until the increased humidity could lead to windshield fogging: in this case the recirculation automatically switches to external air. • Second press: the A/C system activates the automatic recirculation control by using the signal Selecting , “AUTO”, or “OFF”, will transmitted from the AQS. The also exit “MAX A/C”. symbol ‘’A’’ on the recirculation button/MTC+ softkey lights up.

212 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Automatic Temperature Four-Zone Climate Controls Control (ATC) (optional) Automatic operation Air conditioning controls that allow • Press the “AUTO” softkey on the A/C rear passengers to adjust the panel or the softkey button on the temperature in the left and right rear MTC+ screen. part of the passenger compartment are located at the rear end of the • Set the desired temperature central console underneath the adjusting the driver and/or adjustable air outlets. passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once the desired • To provide you with maximum temperature is displayed, the system comfort in the Automatic mode, will achieve and automatically during cold start-ups the blower 4 maintain that comfort level. speed will remain low until the • When the system is set up for your engine warms up. comfort level, it is not necessary to Manual operation change the settings anymore, simply The system allows manual selection of allow the system to function blower speed, air distribution mode, automatically. A/C status and recirculation control. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by using the blower Description of Controls control. In this case the blower will The following functions can be operate at a fixed speed until operated/adjusted by using the rear additional speeds are selected. This climate control panel. allows the front occupants to control 1. Rear climate control on/off the volume of air circulated in the Press the button to switch the rear vehicle and cancel the “AUTO” mode. climate control on/off. The LED on the The user can also select the direction button turns on when the rear A/C is of the airflow by selecting one of the on. available mode settings. A/C operation and recirculation control can also be manually selected.

213 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

temperature value will be displayed in 7. “Floor” mode the area above the buttons. Air comes from the floor vents. 5. Blower control 8. “Torso” mode Blower control is used to regulate the Air comes from the adjustable vents on airflow of the rear climate system. the central console. Each of these There are seven blower speeds vents can be singly adjusted. The air available. Adjusting the blower will grids of the vents can be moved up cause the automatic mode to switch to and down or right and left to adjust manual. air flow direction. A setting wheel, Press the “+“ button to increase placed near each vent, allows to 2. A/C blower speed. regulate the airflow or to close the Press to change the current air Press the “-“ button for lower speed. vent. 4 conditioning (A/C) setting, the “A/C” Airflow distribution modes 9. AUTO symbol on the button illuminates The airflow distribution can be This function automatically controls when the A/C is on. This will cause the adjusted to let air come in from the the interior temperature by adjusting automatic operation to switch into adjustable and fixed central console the air flow rate and the air manual mode and the “AUTO” vents and floor vents. The set mode is distribution. indicator will turn off. recognizable through the lighting of • Press the “AUTO” button: the 3. Left side temperature control the softkey or the LED on the button automatic rear climate control Provides the rear passengers with of the climate control panel. switches from manual to automatic independent temperature control. 6. “Bi-Level” mode mode and vice-versa. The “AUTO” Push the button for cooler Air comes from the adjustable vents on symbol on the button illuminates temperature settings or the button the rear central console and from the when this function is activated. for warmer temperature. The set fixed ones directed to the floor. • Adjust then the temperature you temperature value will be displayed in wish to maintain by regulating the the area above the buttons. NOTE: left and/or right side temperature 4. Right side temperature control The Bi-Level mode is designed to control buttons. Once the desired Provides the rear seats passengers with provide comfort by sending cooler air temperature is set, the system will independent temperature control. out of the central console vents and achieve and automatically maintain Push the button for cooler warmer air from the floor vents. that comfort level. temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set

214 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

• When the system is set up for your sufficient heating. If side window comfort level, it is not necessary to fogging becomes a problem increase change the settings anymore: simply blower speed. allow the system to function NOTE: automatically. To provide you with maximum • Recirculation mode without A/C comfort in the Automatic mode, should not be used for long periods during cold start-ups the blower speed of time, as fogging may occur. will remain low until the engine • If inside the passenger compartment warms up. there are conditions of high Four-Zone Climate Control by the temperature and humidity, when the Driver A/C compressor is switched on (A/C softkey illuminated on MTC+ display By operating the MTC+ display or LED on climate control panel A/C 4 controls the driver can adjust the button ON) there may be some cold settings of the rear climate zones steam at ventilation port outlet: this controlled by rear passengers. situation is normal and does not By touching the following MTC+ indicate air conditioning system screen keys, the driver is able to: malfunction. 1. View and change the settings of • Automatic Temperature Controls the rear climate. (ATC) will automatically adjust the 2. Block the settings of the rear Operating Tips climate control settings to reduce or climate. • Continuous use of the air eliminate window fogging on the 3. Return to the front climate recirculation in winter, in rainy front windshield. control display. weather or humid climate is not • Make sure the external air intake, recommended because it may cause 4. Synchronize the temperature of located directly in front of the window fogging. the front passenger side and the windshield, is free of obstructions one set by the rear passengers • Interior fogging on the windshield such as leaves or other objects. with the driver's side. can be quickly removed by fast Leaves collected in the air intake 5. Turn OFF the rear climate. defrosting/defogging. The “Mix” may reduce airflow, and if they enter mode can be used to maintain a 6. Turn ON the rear climate. the plenum, they could plug the clear windshield and provide water drains. In winter make sure

215 Dashboard Instruments and Controls the air intake is clear of ice, slush, Phone and Voice Controls The voice command communication and snow. on Steering Wheel system is fully integrated with the • The temperature can be displayed in vehicle's audio system. U.S. or Metric units by selecting the The commands on the right side of the The volume can be adjusted from the “Units” customer programmable steering wheel activate/deactivate the upper knob on the central console (see feature. See “MTC+ Settings” in this phone mode ( ) and the Voice “Infotainment System” in this section section. Recognition ( ) controls functions. or from the steering wheel radio • Any time you store your vehicle or controls (see “Audio Controls” in this keep it stationary (i.e., during section). vacation) for two weeks or more, run The system will automatically mute the the air conditioning system at idle radio when using the phone mode. for about five minutes in the fresh When activating the phone mode 4 air by high blower setting. This will using voice commands with ensure adequate system lubrication speakerphone, you should talk quietly and minimize the possibility of in a normal conversational tone by compressor damage when the system keeping the driving position and is started again. turning to the microphone of the voice command system located inside of the A/C Filter These functions are only available internal rear-view mirror. ® The climate control system filters when one or more Bluetooth The ability of the system voice control outside air containing dust, pollen and compatible mobile phones are paired to recognize the user's voice some odors. Strong odors cannot be with the MTC+ System connection: to commands can be invalidated when totally removed by A/C filter at the pair a phone and to learn all available speaking too quickly or too loudly. entrance of the air climate system. See functions refer to the MTC+ guide. “Maintenance Procedures” in section NOTE: “Maintenance and Care” for filter WARNING! On the Maserati website, at replacement instructions. Any voice-controlled system should be www.maserati.com, or through an used only in safe driving conditions Authorized Maserati Dealer you may following all applicable regulations. consult the list of telephones that are Full attention should be kept on compatible with the MTC+, and their driving. level of compatibility.

216 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Phone Mode Voice Commands By using the phone button on the By using voice commands, after steering wheel it is possible to: pressing the VR button on the activate the phone mode, start a call, steering wheel, it is possible to control show recent incoming and outgoing the AM, FM radio, SiriusXM satellite calls, show contacts list, etc. radio and all devices connected and managed by the “Media” mode (i.e. SD card, USB/iPod player). When pressing the VR button an acoustic signal will invite to give a When pressing the phone button voice command. an audible sound will invite you to impart a command. NOTE: 4 Information on incoming call is For further details refer to the indicated in a pop-up on instrument Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) cluster display main area if this feature guide. is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Said Siri Smart Personal Assistant information will stay displayed until a control is executed (e.g.: answer, When a compatible iPhone or iPad reject, etc.) for the incoming call. that supports Siri voice recognition is ® The screen will only display the phone paired to the vehicle via Bluetooth , number or name of caller (if available) a long press of the VR button as long as this complies with system activates the Siri Smart Personal specifications in terms of font and Assistant. number of characters. When you use MTC+ display as Call details can be displayed at any projection device (mirroring function) time through “Audio” submenu item, a short press is sufficient. All these functions can also be reached then “Phone: call details” using the Siri requires mobile internet access by using the touch screen commands buttons on steering wheel RH side. On and its functionality might change on the MTC+ display in “Phone” display, said details shall temporarily depending on the geographical area. mode. replace the ones on media source in Through simple voice commands, use. without taking your eyes off the road,

217 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

it may be possible to send messages, make phone calls, create notes and reminders, etc.

4

218 5 – Driving

Normal Starting of the Engine ...... 220 Automatic Transmission ...... 225 All-Wheel Drive ...... 231 Drive Mode ...... 232 Off-Road Drive ...... 246 Parking Brake ...... 250 Parking ...... 253 Brake and Stability Control System ...... 255 Using the Brakes ...... 262 Use of the Engine ...... 263 Electronic Cruise Control ...... 264 Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC (optional) ...... 268 Forward Collision Warning – FCW (optional, with ACC only) ...... 278 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) ...... 281 Blind Spot Assist – BSA (without ACC) ...... 286 Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) ...... 291 Highway Assist – HAS (optional, with ACC only) ...... 294 Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (optional) ...... 300 Tires - General Information ...... 301 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 309 Fuel Requirements ...... 313 Refueling ...... 315 Driving Conditions ...... 318 Trailer Towing ...... 320

219 Driving Normal Starting of the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle Engine CAUTION! When doors are opened, the • Before starting the engine, switch off instrument cluster displays the the electrical devices with a high WARNING! Maserati Logo in the center and the power consumption (air-conditioning It is dangerous to run the engine in an complete odometer plus the open and heating system, heated rear enclosed area. The engine consumes doors indicator in the lower part of window, headlights, etc.). the cluster. oxygen and discharges carbon • Do not start the engine if the fuel dioxide, carbon monoxide and other level in the tank is low. toxic gases in the atmosphere. The keyless ignition allows the driver to operate the ignition switch by pushing the center button, as long as WARNING! the key fob RKE transmitter is within California Proposition 65 the passenger compartment (check 5 Operating, servicing and maintaining “Keys” in section “Before Starting” for a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle further information). can expose you to chemicals including By pressing the brake pedal and such as, engine exhaust, carbon pushing the START/STOP button the Before starting the engine, close the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that engine starts. Instrument cluster doors, adjust your seat, the inside and which are know to the State of displays the initial sequence with outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt California to cause cancer and birth indicator light and analog instruments and instruct all other occupants to defects or other reproductive harm. To test routine and switch-on of the buckle their seat belts. minimize exposure, avoid breathing engine temperature indicators and The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N exhaust, do not idle the engine except fuel level. This happens if option “On” (Neutral) position before you can start as necessary, service your vehicle in a was set in screen settings for display the engine. Apply the brakes before well-ventilated area and wear gloves switch-on (see chapter “Instrument shifting into any driving gear (see or wash your hands frequently when cluster” in section “Dashboard “Automatic Transmission” in this servicing your vehicle. For more Instruments and Controls”). section). information go to:

220 Driving

NOTE: NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a If the ignition switch is left in the ACC warm engine is obtained without or RUN (engine not running) position pumping or pressing the accelerator and the transmission is in P (Park), the pedal. system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the If the driver only pushes the ignition will switch to the OFF START/STOP button but does not press position. the brake pedal, the ignition switch cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” After starting the engine, the idle in section “Before Starting”) and the speed is controlled automatically and The current display subsequently sets instrument cluster displays the latest will decrease as the engine warms up. up with the latest screenshot. screenshot. At the second press of the Engine Start Failure START/STOP button, the ignition device switches to RUN position (see “Keys” in section “Before Starting”) WARNING! 5 and the instrument cluster displays the • Do not attempt to push or tow your latest screenshot. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles At the third press of the START/STOP equipped with an automatic button the ignition switch returns to transmission cannot be started this OFF position and the display powers way. down. • If the vehicle battery is dead, If the engine fails to start, the starter At the fourth press of the START/STOP booster cables may be used to will disengage automatically after 10 button the screen will display the obtain a start from a booster battery seconds. If you wish to stop the message that invites you to press the or the battery in another vehicle. cranking of the engine prior to brake pedal and push the START/STOP This type of start can be dangerous starting it, press the button again. button to start the engine. if done improperly. See “Auxiliary Jump Start Procedure” in section “In an Emergency” for further information.

221 Driving

Starting with a Cold Engine NOTE: feature helps reduce fuel Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden If the ignition switch is left in the ACC consumption. During the “Stop acceleration and rev the engine up at or RUN (engine not running) position (AutoStop)” phase the ignition is still low medium speeds. High- and the transmission is in P (Park), the on and all security features are performance driving should be system will automatically time out available. avoided until the engine temperature after 30 minutes of inactivity and the In order for the Start&Stop to activate, reaches 149-158°F (65-70°C). ignition will switch to OFF position. the vehicle must be stationary and the brake pedal adequately pressed. Engine Turn-Off Engine Turn Off when in Automatic NOTE: • With the shift lever in P (Park), D Start&Stop (Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see When the engine has been turned off If the brake pedal is not sufficiently “Automatic Transmission” in this by the Start&Stop system, press and pressed the Start&Stop may not section) and vehicle standstill, press release the START/STOP button. The function even if the vehicle is stopped. and release the START/STOP button ignition switch will return to the OFF When the Start&Stop switches off the to switch off the engine. A burst on position and the vehicle is off. engine, the related light the accelerator pedal before turning “Panic Stop” Strategy illuminates on the instrument 5 off the engine has no purpose and cluster. increases fuel consumption. In panic conditions, if driver stops As soon as the brake pedal is released, • If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and engine in any non-standard manner the engine turns on. the START/STOP button is pressed while driving at a speed over 5 mph While the vehicle is stopped, the shift once, the instrument cluster will (8 km/h), the “Panic Stop” strategy can lever can be placed in P (Park). display a “Vehicle Not in Park” manage the situation by checking In this case it is possible to release the message and the engine will remain gearchange condition upon engine brake pedal and the vehicle will running. cutting, driver’s action on brakes, road remain in “AutoStop” with engine off. condition (flat or slope) so as to set Pressing the brake pedal and shifting gearchange to the most suitable transmission into D (Drive) or R WARNING! condition. (Reverse) will deactivate the Never leave a vehicle out of the P Automatic Start&Stop System “AutoStop” condition and restart the (Park) position, as it could move. engine. The Maserati Start&Stop system allows the engine to automatically switch off when the vehicle stops and to restart when the driver intends to drive. This

222 Driving

Start&Stop Not Active • When the front and rear “defroster” For keeping driving safety, interior function is activated. comfort and a correct functioning of • When the engine coolant and the engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop engine oil temperature are not on function does not activate under the proper functioning level. following conditions: • When the external temperature is • When the driver’s seat belt is too cold. unbuckled (see example in picture). • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the previous stop had just Start&Stop Deactivated happened (few seconds) and the Start&Stop function is deactivated minimum speed has not yet been under the following conditions: achieved. • When SPORT drive mode is activated. • Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set • When (ESC OFF) drive mode is or when driving under a certain activated. speed level. 5 • When ride height is set to Off Road 1 • When the hood is open. or Off Road 2. • The sensors managing the • If it has been disabled through the • When the driver door is open. Start&Stop have been damaged. main menu item “Start & Stop” via • When the fuel level is too low. • Start&Stop system faults are present. the controls on the right side of the • When the vehicle is stopped on a • When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) steering wheel (see chapter very steep road. and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system “Instrument cluster” in section • When the vehicle is stopped with are engaged. “Dashboard Instruments and steered wheels (over 135° of steering Automatic Restarting of the Engine Controls”) or via the MTC+ in the wheel angle for each part). “Controls” page (see “MTC+ The engine may automatically restart, • When the vehicle is maneuvering: "Controls" Screen” in section before the brake pedal has been shift lever in R (Reverse). “Dashboard Instruments and released, when one of the following Controls”). • When the temperature conditions conditions occurs: inside the vehicle do not correspond • The SPORT drive mode or (ESC to the air conditioning setting. OFF) drive mode is being activated.

223 Driving

• If the Start&Stop function has been • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt and the vehicle’s surrounding area. disabled through the main menu and releases the brake pedal. Never leave the vehicle unattended voice “Start & Stop” (see chapter • The driver opens the door and with the engine running; doing so “Instrument cluster” in section releases the brake pedal. poses a risk of danger. It is a good “Dashboard Instruments and • The driver unbuckles the seat belt practice to always ensure to set the Controls”). and opens the door. parking brake and place the transmission gear selector lever into • If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). • The driver opens the hood. the P (Park) position, thereby • If the steering wheel is moved to All the above-mentioned conditions ensuring the vehicle will not move, steer the wheels. deactivate the Start&Stop function when performing any vehicle checks, • When the temperature conditions (the “AutoStart” is deactivated and maintenance and/or service inside the vehicle do not correspond the engine remains off) and the shift procedures on the vehicle. to the air conditioning setting. lever moves automatically in P (Park). • When changing the temperature The telltale will flash to indicate Start&Stop Function Disabling setting on the air conditioning. the Start&Stop function disabling. To restart the engine it is necessary to Under certain driving conditions, when • When the defroster function is being frequent stops and restarts of the activated. press the brake pedal and push the 5 START/STOP button. engine may become annoying, it is • When the battery charge is below Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to possible to turn off the Start&Stop safety value. drive away. function. • When the accelerator pedal is being Use the controls located on the right pressed (together with the brake side of the steering wheel (see pedal). instructions in chapter “Instrument WARNING! • If a long time has passed since the Cluster” in section “Dashboard • Even when the vehicle is stopped in last automatic stop of the engine. Instruments and Controls”) and select the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, the “Start & Stop” main menu item which Occupants Safety Function driver is responsible for the vehicle displays the status of the function: To enhance occupants safety, the and the occupants and shall take Start & Stop enabled is the default Start&Stop system monitors if the care of what happens inside and status. driver is present and does not allow outside the vehicle. Hold the switch ( ) to change the automatic restarting of the engine if • Even when the vehicle is stopped status of the function. one of the following maneuvers is within the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, When the Start&Stop function is being performed while in “AutoStop” the vehicle driver is responsible for turned off, in addition to the related condition: the vehicle, the vehicle’s occupants message the amber indicator

224 Driving indicated in the picture will turn Automatic Transmission on. The electronic shift lever replaces the conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by the CAN network. The lever itself With ADAS represents a mere user interface. Gear positions are simulated by solenoids • Touch a second time the same inside the lever body, which are soft-key to re-enable the function. Another way to disable the Start & computer-controlled and enable or Stop is via the MTC+. NOTE: disable certain positions of the lever. • Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the The highlighted soft-key indicates the The solenoids inside the shift lever lower part of MTC+ display. disabled status of Start & Stop system prevent the movement of the lever 5 • Touch the "Start & Stop Off" and vice versa. towards invalid positions. soft-key to disable the function. The electronically-controlled Start&Stop System Failure transmission provides a precise shift schedule. When the indicator light and the related message illuminate on the TFT display (see chapter “Instrument CAUTION! Cluster” in section “Dashboard In order to properly use the automatic Instruments and Controls”) there is a transmission, it is essential that you malfunction in the Start&Stop system read through the whole chapter, so and the engine cannot be switched off that you can understand right from and restarted automatically. To switch the start what the correct and off or restart the engine it is necessary permitted operations are. to push the START/STOP. Have the Without ADAS Damage to the transmission may occur vehicle checked at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. (Continued)

225 Driving

(Continued) is running. Before exiting a vehicle, • N (Neutral); if the following precautions are not always apply the electronic parking • D (Drive) automatic forward speed (8 observed: brake, shift the transmission into P speeds); (Park), and turn the engine off. • Shift into P (Park) only after the • -/+ to downshift or upshift when vehicle has come to a complete stop. • When leaving the vehicle, always manual mode in D (Drive) status, or This is the default position of the remove the key fob and lock your set to M (Manual) mode (see “Drive lever and should be used every time vehicle. Mode” in this section). the ignition switch is cycled to OFF. • Do not leave the key fob in or near • Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only the vehicle. after the vehicle has come to a This vehicle is equipped with a feature complete stop and the engine is at which requires the shift lever to be idle speed. placed in P (Park) before the engine • Do not shift between P (Park), R can be turned off. This prevents the (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) driver from inadvertently leaving the when the engine is above idle speed vehicle without having placed the 5 • To effect any change from vehicle transmission in P (Park). This system stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or also locks the shift lever in P (Park) 2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the whenever the ignition switch is in the Transmission status is visible on the brake pedal fully depressed. OFF position. lever and on the lower part of the Instrument cluster display. Automatic Transmission Lever Automatic transmission is operated by WARNING! a selection lever with unlock button • It is dangerous to move the shift located on the central console. lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if By using the selection lever it is the engine speed is higher than idle possible to select the following speed. Only shift into gear when the positions, indicated on the top of the engine is idling normally and when lever: the selected position will your foot is firmly pressing on the illuminate in white light. brake pedal. • P (Park); • As with all vehicles, you should • R (Reverse); never exit a vehicle while the engine

226 Driving

By pressing the release button on the position is indicated beside the lever You must also press the brake pedal to lever, the gear position field is status, on the lower part of the shift the transmission out of P (Park) displayed: if you release the button display. position. without moving the lever, the field Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R disappears after 2 seconds. By (Reverse) should be done only after operating instead the lever, the new the accelerator pedal is released and range will be indicated in the field the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep and in the lower part of the display. your foot pressed on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range. Automatic Transmission Range P (Park) Use this position to park the vehicle. 5 The transmission can be shifted from P (Park) position only with the brake pedal pressed. To move the shift lever from P (Park) position to any other position, the engine must be switched on. The engine can be regularly started in P (Park) range. Never In normal conditions, the shift lever is attempt to use P (Park) while the always unlocked. When in D (Drive) vehicle is in motion. When parking on mode it is possible to upshift or a level surface, you may place the shift downshift the changing gears by lever in the P (Park) position first, and automatically temporarily setting in M then apply the electronic parking If the vehicle is temporarily in the (Manual) mode. brake by pulling the trigger upwards. manual drive mode, D (Drive) status, or in M (Manual) drive mode, the gear

227 Driving

loading/unloading of baggage, the system automatically lowers the height WARNING! from the floor. Automatic lowering of • Never use the P (Park) position as a the vehicle into “Entry/Exit” mode can substitute for the electronic parking be disabled through the MTC+ (refer brake. Always apply the parking to “MTC+ Settings” in section brake fully when parked to prevent “Dashboard Instruments and vehicle movement and possible Controls”). injury or damage. R (Reverse) • Make sure the transmission is in P This range is used to move the vehicle (Park) before leaving the vehicle. The Instrument cluster will display the backward. related indicator light and the We recommend to shift into R message for 5 seconds. (Reverse) only after the vehicle has CAUTION! come to a complete stop. • DO NOT race the engine when • Vehicle halted: switching between P shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) 5 into another gear range, as this can (Park), R (Reverse) and D (Drive) damage the drivetrain. requires pressing the unlock button • The following indicators should be on the lever and brake pedal: N used to ensure that you have (Neutral) is reached only by pressing engaged the shift lever into the P the unlock button on the lever. (Park) position: • Vehicle moving: the driver can switch – when shifting into P (Park), press from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral), or the unlock button on the shift vice versa, by pressing the unlock When parking on a hill, apply the lever and push the lever all the button on the shift lever. parking brake before placing the shift way forward until it stops. N (Neutral) lever in P (Park). – with the brake pedal released, • Vehicle halted and engine started: For enhanced security, turn the front verify that P (Park) position is switching from N (Neutral) to R wheels toward the kerb on a downhill illuminated on the shift lever. and away from the kerb on an uphill (Reverse), P (Park) and/or D (Drive) grade. When moving the shift lever in P (Park) requires brake pedal and unlock position, to facilitate the entry and button pressed. exit from the vehicle and the

228 Driving

• Vehicle moving: switching from N vice versa, by pressing the reset (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D button on the gear shift lever. CAUTION! (Drive) requires pressing the unlock • Vehicle moving: switching to N button. Switching to R (Reverse) Towing the vehicle, coasting, or (Neutral) from D (Drive) requires the starting from N (Neutral) is only driving for any other reason with the unlock button on the shift lever possible if the vehicle is moving transmission in N (Neutral) can result pressed. in transmission damage. Refer to backwards, while switching to D • From D (Drive) selected mode it is “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is always possible to switch to M 6 for further information. only possible if the vehicle is moving (Manual), by pressing the M forwards. D (Drive) (Manual) button: the Led indicator Set the parking brake and shift the beside the button will light up; to transmission into P (Park) if you must This range should be used for most return to D (Drive) position, the leave the vehicle. city and highway driving. It provides same action should be performed as the smoothest upshifts and downshifts NOTE: the LED will turn off. and the best fuel economy. The • When in D (Drive) mode, moving the To move the car into tunnel washers, transmission automatically shifts up shift lever forward or backwards to or to generally move with engine off, and down through all gears. The D the next step without pressing the 5 if foreseen use the “Car Wash” mode (Drive) position provides optimum unlock button on the lever will cause (see “Bodywork Maintenance and driving characteristics under all normal the system to enter a temporary Cure” chapter in section operating conditions of the vehicle. “Maintenance and Care”). function and enable the manual • Vehicle stationary: switching from D shift mode. This range is indicated (Drive) to R (Reverse) and/or to P with the symbols “-/+” on the left (Park) requires brake pedal and and right sides of the “D” letter on WARNING! unlock button pressed: reaching N the gear range field of the display. Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is The system will then switch back to never turn off the ignition to coast allowed by only pressing the unlock automatic mode according to time downhill. These are unsafe practices button on the shift lever. elapsed in “temporary” mode and that limit driver’s response to • To enable special operations while driving conditions. changing traffic or road conditions. the car is moving at a low speed, At extremely cold temperatures such as getting out of marsh or (-23°F/-30°C or below), transmission snow, it is possible to run quickly may be affected by the low from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and temperature of the engine and

229 Driving

transmission. Normal operation will In the event of a momentary problem, resume once the transmission the transmission can be reset to regain temperature has risen to a normal all forward gears by performing the level. following steps. Transmission Malfunction and • Stop the vehicle. Overheating Conditions • Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible. Transmission Emergency Control • Turn the engine off. Transmission function is electronically monitored to detect abnormal • Wait approximately 30 seconds. conditions. If a condition that could In this case, slow down until • Restart the engine. result in transmission damage is temperature returns to normal level • Shift the transmission into D (Drive) detected, Transmission Limp Home (the light will turn off). and then into the desired gear Mode will be activated. In this If this is not sufficient, we recommend range. If the problem is no longer situation, the transmission may to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to detected, the transmission will return operate only in certain gears, or may position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and to normal operation. 5 not shift at all. In some situations, the keep the engine idle until the NOTE: transmission system may not temperature red warning light re-engage if the engine is turned off turns off and the message Even if the transmission can be reset, and restarted. disappears from the display. Resume we recommend that you visit an A message in the instrument cluster driving without demanding high Authorized Maserati Dealer at your will inform the driver about the more engine performance. If the red earliest possible convenience, which serious transmission conditions, and warning light and the related has diagnostic equipment to indicate what actions may be message turns on again, it is advisable determine if the problem could recur. necessary. to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine Transmission Manual Release of P Transmission Oil Overtemperature and wait for the engine/transmission (Park) Position If the transmission oil temperature assembly to fully cool down. See chapter “Transmission Manual exceeds the operating limit, the red If the instrument cluster message Release of P (Park) Position” in section warning light illuminates on the indicates that the transmission may “In an Emergency”. instrument cluster. not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform the following procedure preferably at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.

230 Driving All-Wheel Drive The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive WARNING! (AWD) system provides available There may be a slight delay for AWD optimum traction for a wide variety of engagement after a wheel slip road and off-road surface and driving condition occurs. conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximize fuel economy, the AWD system automatically disengages torque distribution on front axle when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require 5 increased levels of road traction, the NOTE: AWD system automatically distributes the torque between front and rear If the AWD system service warning axle in order to grant the best driving light and message appears after experience. Torque distribution is engine start up, or during driving, it displayed on the TFT in the “Drive means that the AWD system is not Mode” main menu. Refer to functioning properly. If the warning paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and light and message are often activated, Settings” in chapter “Instrument it is recommended to have the vehicle Cluster” of section “Dashboard serviced at an Authorized Maserati Instruments and Controls” for further Dealer. information.

231 Driving Drive Mode • M (Manual): to switch from mode” menu using the buttons on automatic to manual drive mode. steering wheel. Controls Preview • I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive When changing the drive mode between NORMAL, I.C.E., SPORT and Drive modes and ride heights to use mode to ensure increased control on OFF ROAD, engine temperature and with the vehicle on and off road can slippery surfaces as well as higher fuel level indicators inner edge will be set using the buttons and vehicle energy efficiency. change color if “Outline Coloring” of height selector on central console. • SPORT and (Suspension): to activate/deactivate a sportier drive submenu “Screen Setup” is set to “On” mode and to switch between the (see example in the figure). Refer to CAUTION! two Sport suspensions setting modes chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “NORMAL” is the default drive mode, (Normal, Firm). In this mode, the “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” optimized for the best balance vehicle has a faster throttle response for further information. between performance, fuel and ESC sport calibration (not consumption and emissions in the recommended on wet/slippery standard conditions use of the car. surfaces). Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. 5 • OFF ROAD: to activate/deactivate the specific driving mode for off road conditions (uphill/downhill, cobblestone, mud, grass and sand). In this mode, the vehicle has a specific ESC/ASR calibration and shock absorbers skyhook damping curve. Setting the Drive Mode Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. Drive modes can be set using the By selecting one of these drive modes, buttons on central console. the LED beside the button illuminates Keys (buttons) only have two statuses: Buttons on the central console have OFF and ON. The OFF status (button following functions: and the vehicle configuration obtained is graphically displayed on instrument released) is the standard function • (ESC OFF): to disable/reactivate cluster. The same screen is also mode. The ON status is activated by the ESC system. obtained when selecting the “Drive pressing the button, the dedicated LED will illuminate. It is necessary to press

232 Driving the (ESC OFF) button for at least 3 The tables below summarize the seconds. adjustment of transmission and The table shows the different drive engine parameters according to set modes according to the status of the drive mode/s. (ESC OFF) is the only buttons. mode that does not depend on the activation or deactivation of the other Button OFF – Button released ON – Button pressed (LED ON) modes. The tables show the two Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC configurations with: activated. partially deactivated. • (ESC OFF) button NOT pressed; M Autoshift Mode (Auto). Manual shift mode (Manual) ON. • (ESC OFF) button pressed. I.C.E. Increased Control and Increased Control and Efficiency Efficiency mode OFF. mode ON (*). • Button pressed first time (first LED ON): sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON and Sport-Normal suspension setting. 5 Normal drive mode (NORMAL) • Button pressed second time (first ON and Soft suspensions and second LED ON): sportier setting. drive mode (SPORT) ON and Sport-Firm suspension setting (S). • When button is pressed third time, it returns to OFF-button released. OFF OFF ROAD drive mode OFF. OFF ROAD drive mode ON. ROAD (*) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampening vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low-grip surfaces.

233 Driving

(ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed

Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M M Button not pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. OFF SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD Setup Off Road + Normal + Auto Normal + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto + Auto + Off + Soft Manual + Soft Soft Soft Hard Road suspensions suspensions suspensions suspensions suspensions suspension 5 Active with Stability control Active Active Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*) specific tuning Electric Power Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm Off Road Steering (EPS) Suspensions Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm Off Road setup Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Normal Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Overboost Low (Rev. Low (Rev. Close to 5000 Exhaust sound Always High Always High Normal Threshold) Threshold) rpm Gear shifting Normal - Comfort Performance Performance Off Road point Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Yes

234 Driving

Button pressed: LED ON M M M M M M Button not pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. OFF SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD Upshift rev. Yes (No, when Yes (No, when Yes Yes Yes Yes limiter in M) in M) Performance Performance Normal (Anti - Automatic Normal Anti - Stall Normal (Anti - Stall, (Anti - Stall, Stall, when in downshift when in M) when in M) M) Sport (Quick - Sport (Quick - 5 Shifting timing Normal Quick - Normal Comfort Sport, when in Sport, when in Normal M) M)

(*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate Sport mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed).

235 Driving

(ESC OFF) Button pressed

Button pressed: LED ON Button not M M M M M M pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD Setup Off Road + Normal + Auto Normal + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto + Auto + Off + Soft Manual + Soft Soft Hard Soft suspensions Road suspensions suspensions suspensions suspensions suspension 5 Stability control OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Electric Power Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm Off Road Steering (EPS) Suspensions Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm Off Road setup Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Normal Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Overboost Low (Rev. Low (Rev. Close to 5000 Exhaust sound Always High Always High Normal Threshold) Threshold) rpm Gear Normal - Comfort Performance Performance Off Road shifting point Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Yes Upshift rev. Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when Yes Yes Yes Yes limiter M) in M)

236 Driving

Button pressed: LED ON Button not M M M M M M pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD ROAD Performance Performance Normal (Anti - Automatic Normal Anti - Stall Normal (Anti - Stall, (Anti - Stall, Stall, when in downshift when in M) when in M) M) Sport (Quick - Sport (Quick - Shifting timing Normal Quick - Normal Comfort Sport, when in Sport, when in Normal M) M) 5

NOTE: A different drive mode can be set even with engine running and vehicle in motion. To activate a drive mode, press briefly the corresponding button. The LED beside the button will light up and set drive mode screen will be displayed (example in the figure: I.C.E.) for 5 seconds.

237 Driving

Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive Mode To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds.

To disable the SPORT mode, press the A Ride height same button once again: the two LEDs will turn off. B Powertrain Monitoring Settings on Display C ESC By gaining access to “Drive mode” D Torque distribution 5 To deactivate the drive mode, press menu through the buttons on steering E Suspension stiffness the same button again: the display will wheel right-hand side, it is possible to show the message indicating that monitor the settings for driving on and Press (Suspension) button, the (ESC OFF) drive mode is off and ESC off road. icon with "S" beside will light up on system is active. The list and figure show vehicle the upper right side of the TFT display. Activate/Deactivate SPORT / Drive parameters referred to each drive Mode mode. Driving mode and its parameters are identified by a To activate SPORT drive mode, press different color (example in the figure: the corresponding button once: the I.C.E.). LED beside the symbol “SPORT” will turn on. Remaining in SPORT mode, Sport-Firm suspension setting can be activated by pressing again the same button: also the LED beside the symbol will turn on.

238 Driving

The table below specifies the default, ride height and relevant commands that can be set, for each drive mode.

Drive Mode Default Condition Possible Ride Height / Command • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector ESC Normal according to current speed. • Aero1/Viadedicated drive height selector Normal according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height Normal selector according to current speed.

• Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector ESC I.C.E. according to current speed. • Aero1/Viadedicated drive height selector 5 Normal according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height Normal selector according to current speed.

• Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector ESC Sport according to current speed. • Aero1/Viadedicated drive height selector Sport-Normal according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height Normal selector according to current speed.

239 Driving

Drive Mode Default Condition Possible Ride Height / Command • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector ESC Sport according to current speed. • Aero1/Viadedicated drive height selector Sport-Firm according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height Aero 1 selector according to current speed.

• OffRoad1/Viadedicated drive height ESC Off Road selector according to current speed. • OffRoad2/Viadedicated drive height Off Road selector according to current speed.

5 Off Road 1

Automatic Selection of Drive Mode M (Manual) Drive Mode unlock button. The current upon Ignition In this mode, the transmission interacts transmission gear is displayed on the If ride height was set to “Off Road 1” with the driver in order to allow instrument cluster beside “M”. or “Off Road 2” before switching off manual shift and increase driver the vehicle, this setting will be applied interaction. The current mode allows upon the following activation of the the transmission system to optimize ignition device. the engine brake action, remove While if any other ride height/drive undesired shifting into higher and mode is set, “NORMAL” ride lower gears and improve the overall height/drive mode will be set performance of the vehicle. automatically upon re-ignition. This mode allows you to move the shift lever step by step forward (-) or backward (+) without pressing the

240 Driving

transmission remains in the engaged gear until the driver shifts into another higher or lower gear, except in the following cases. • Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation. The transmission will also upshift automatically once maximum engine speed is reached. • If in SPORT mode, the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is 5 selected, even by full stroke pedal press. • If in M (Manual) or in SPORT mode, Using the shift paddles behind the Manual mode can be activated at any the transmission will automatically steering wheel (if equipped), the time, with no need to release the downshift as the vehicle slows to corresponding icon will be displayed brake pedal. halt (to prevent engine lagging) and beside the “M” indication and current Even if the release button is pressed the current gear will be displayed on shifted gear. and gear is shifted in R (Reverse), P the instrument cluster. Shifting the Pull the right shift paddle (+) towards (Park) or N (Neutral), the selected shift lever backward (+) or moving the steering wheel and release it to manual mode will be maintained. the right shift paddle (+) towards engage the higher gear; do the same In Manual mode, the transmission will the steering wheel when stationary, operation with the left shift paddle (-) shift up or down (+/-) if manually will cause the vehicle to start in to engage the lower gear. selected by the driver by using the second gear. If the vehicle speed is shift lever, or shift paddles on the too low, the system will ignore steering wheel (if present). The further upshifts. Avoid using speed

241 Driving

control when the M (Manual) mode the button for two seconds (ESC is engaged. OFF). Gear Shift Indicator Light Setting Ride Height In order to improve fuel economy, we The pneumatic suspension system recommend that you shift gears when ensures vehicle continuous automatic the system prompts you to do so. This leveling and allows setting ground will help reduce fuel consumption clearance by simply moving the ride without significantly affecting vehicle height selector. performance. The selector can be moved forward The indicator beside the displayed ( ) and backward ( )byone gear will light up just before reaching When the new gear is engaged, the position at a time in order to set six the required speed to downshift or indicator turns off. If the shift runs late different heights. Every position is upshift (example in the figure). or is not performed at all, the indicator remains lit for a few seconds then identified by the switch-on of the turns off. As soon as new conditions corresponding LED at the left side of requiring further gear change occur, the selector and in the dedicated area 5 the indicator light will illuminate at top right of the display. again. The table below shows the possible selector positions and the relevant NOTE: symbols. The gearshift indicator will only work when the transmission is set in M (Manual) mode. Off Road 2 I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC To release the vehicle in low grip conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, Off Road 1 sand, etc), it is possible to shift the transmission in the specific driving mode as required for these situations, by pressing the I.C.E. button and to Normal exclude completely the yaw and spinning control system, by pressing

242 Driving

position is reached. The new position When lowering the vehicle, the front will be displayed on the dedicated will move down first and then the area at top right of the display and rear. Aero 1 the indicator will turn off after After the engine is turned off, it may approximately 2 seconds. be noticed that the pneumatic suspension system operates briefly, Aero 2 this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle with little suspension movements to ensure a proper appearance. Entry/Exit Display Messages After shifting selector to change position, a pop-up message will indicate for 5 seconds when set position has been reached (after The system requires that the engine pneumatic suspension system be running for all changes. When intervention that might last up to 30 5 lowering the vehicle, all of the doors, seconds). including the liftgate, must be closed. This type of message will be displayed If a door is opened at any time while only if the option to view all the vehicle is lowering, the change pneumatic suspension system will not be completed until the open messages was set (For further details, During transition from one position to door/s is/are closed. refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section another, the instrument cluster display The pneumatic suspension system of “Dashboard Instruments and will show a pop-up indicator (above this vehicle uses a lifting and lowering Controls”). the coolant temperature indicator) pattern preventing the headlights which reproduces the ride height from incorrectly shining into symbols. On this indicator, the LED for oncoming traffic. the new position, set by means of the When raising the vehicle, the rear of selector on central console, will flash the vehicle will move up first and then while the LEDs of intermediate the front. positions will turn on when set

243 Driving

• High speed: decrease speed to set NOTE: new height. The indications below explain as a • Pneumatic suspension system general rule which selector position overheat: wait for the system to cool has to be used in certain situations and down before changing height. which are the speed thresholds at • Door(s) and/or liftgate open: close which it is possible to set the available door(s) and liftgate to lower the ride height and when system vehicle. automatically switches to a different • Pneumatic suspension system height. In any case, the driver must temporarily disabled or in fault: wait always assess and set the ride height Set ride height and drive mode can be a few minutes and repeat the and drive mode most suitable to the monitored on instrument cluster operation or contact an Authorized conditions of the current driving path display via “Drive mode” menu, using Maserati Dealer. on a case by case basis. buttons on the right-hand side of the • Low battery: start the engine to steering wheel (see chapter recharge battery and change ride • Normal: normal ground clearance. “Instrument Cluster” in section height. This is the standard height position 5 “Dashboard Instruments and of the pneumatic suspension and is • Entry/Exit position not available: Controls”). meant for normal road conditions. check the cause preventing this The change from one position to In this ride height position driver can control. another can occur only if the following set the “NORMAL” and “I.C.E. drive requirements are met. Using the Ride Height Positions and modes. speed Thresholds • Lifting: engine running, speed lower • Off Road 1: raises the vehicle by than preset limit, etc. The different ride heights that can be approx. 1 in (25 mm). set with the selector allow user to • Lowering: engine running, speed This is the height suitable for most drive the vehicle on and off road, lower than preset limit, doors closed, off road driving conditions until the using the available drive modes and etc. other “OFF ROAD” option is needed. functions. Ride height change can be temporarily This ride height can be set only in suspended or disabled under the “OFF ROAD” drive mode. Select this following conditions, as indicated in height while the vehicle speed is the pop-up messages on instrument below 50 mph (80 km/h). When in cluster display. the “Off Road 1” height, if the vehicle speed remains between

244 Driving

50 mph (80 km/h) and 56 mph when speed remains between • Easy/Entry: lowers the vehicle by (90 km/h) for over 30 seconds or if 74 mph (120 km/h) and 80 mph approx. 1.8 in (45 mm). vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (130 km/h) for over 15 seconds or if This mode lowers the vehicle for (90 km/h), the vehicle will be the vehicle speed exceeds 80 mph easier passenger entry and exit as automatically lowered to “Normal” (130 km/h). The system will return to well as lowering the rear of the height. For further details, refer to “NORMAL” height when the vehicle vehicle for easier loading and "Off-road Drive" in this section. speed remains between 62 mph unloading of cargo from the trunk. • Off Road 2: raises the vehicle by (100 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for This ride height can be set only in approx. 1.5 in (40 mm). over 15 seconds or if the vehicle “NORMAL”, “SPORT “ or “I.C.E.” This height is intended for off-road speed falls below 56 mph (90 km/h). After selecting this height, once the use only where maximum ground The vehicle will enter “Aero 1” vehicle speed goes below 15 mph clearance is required. This ride height, regardless of vehicle speed if (24 km/h), the vehicle height will height can be set only in “OFF the “SPORT” mode is set. begin to lower. To exit “Entry/Exit” ROAD” drive mode. • Aero 2: lowers the vehicle by approx. mode, move selector to another Select this height while the vehicle 1.4 in (35 mm). position or drive the vehicle over speed is below 18 mph (30 km/h). It is the height ensuring excellent 15 mph (24 km/h). Automatic When in the “Off Road 2” height, if aerodynamics for top performance lowering of the vehicle into 5 the vehicle speed remains between by further lowering the vehicle. This “Entry/Exit” mode can be enabled 18 mph (30 km/h) and 25 mph ride height is available in through the MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ (40 km/h) for over 30 seconds or if “NORMAL”, “SPORT “ or “I.C.E.” Settings” in section “Dashboard vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph drive mode. Instruments and Controls”). If this (40 km/h), the vehicle will be System automatically lowers the feature is enabled, the vehicle will automatically lowered to “Off Road vehicle when speed exceeds 105 mph only lower if the gearshift lever is in 1” height. For further details, refer (170 km/h) or when it remains P (Park), the engine is running, doors to "Off-road Drive" in this section. between 105 mph (170 km/h) and and liftgate are closed and the • Aero 1: lowers the vehicle by approx. 115 mph (185 km/h) for over 15 Pneumatic Suspension System should 0.8 in (20 mm). seconds. The system will return to be either in “NORMAL” or “Aero”. This height provides improved Aero 1 height when the vehicle The Vehicle will not automatically aerodynamics by lowering the speed remains between 96 mph lower if the pneumatic suspension vehicle. This ride height is available (155 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h) system is in “Off Road 2” or “Off in “NORMAL”, “SPORT “or for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle Road 1” mode. The lowering will be “I.C.E.” drive mode. System speed falls below 87 mph (140 km/h). suppressed when the ignition is automatically lowers the vehicle

245 Driving switched off and a door is opened to Off-Road Drive prevent setting the alarm off. WARNING! This vehicle is equipped with a specific Lowering Vehicle Height for Inactivity After a long period of vehicle “Off Road” driving mode which allows Lowering of vehicle ground clearance inactivity, drive only when vehicle to drive through various terrain after a long period of inactivity should reaches set ride height to prevent any conditions (rock, mud, sand), also be considered normal since it is due to problems of the pneumatic suspension uphill and downhill, eventually in a drop of pressure in the pneumatic system from limiting occupants' condition of lateral inclination. suspension system. safety. To set the "OFF-ROAD" drive mode, Approximately, after one week of please see the paragraphs “Setting the inactivity, vehicle ground clearance will Drive Mode” and “Setting Ride lower by 0.4 in (10 mm). To set off the Height” of chapter “Drive Mode” in drop of pressure due to inactivity, it is this section. necessary to start the engine and allow In order to enhance this specific some time until system reaches performance, the "OFF-ROAD" drive operating pressure and lifts the vehicle mode modifies the setting of: to set ride height. A message on 5 instrument cluster display will warn • Ride height; driver when set ride height is reached. • Engine, transmission calibration; • Suspensions. When “OFF ROAD” is selected, ride height is set to “Off Road 1” (vehicle is higher by approx. 1 in / 25 mm). It is possible to select ride height “Off Road 2” (vehicle is raised by approx. 1.5 in / 40 mm) using the ride height selector. “OFF ROAD” drive mode is limited up to a max speed of 56 mph (90 km/h). In case the vehicle speed should exceed Driving vehicle before the set riding this limit, the drive mode will be height is reached is not safe and could de-selected automatically and the damage suspension components. driving mode will return to normal.

246 Driving

“Off Road 2” ride height is limited lower than 19 in (50 cm) and crossing precautions must be considered instead up to a max speed of 25 mph speed lower than 5 mph (8 km/h). before entering the water. (40 km/h). In case the vehicle speed In “OFF ROAD” drive mode, also NOTE: should exceed this limit, ride height engine, transmission settings are will be put automatically to “Off Road Your vehicle is capable of water changed in order to provide the most 1” while driving mode will remain fording to a maximum of 19 in (50 cm) suitable level of torque and selected “OFF ROAD”. of water. To maintain optimal gear to improve traction on An advantage of the higher ground performance of your vehicle’s heating low-adherence condition and uphill clearance is a better view of the road, and ventilation system it is climbing. allowing you to anticipate problems. recommended to switch the system A higher clearance and the longer into recirculation mode during water travel of the suspension might allow fording. the vehicle to overcome some WARNING! obstacles. In case of downhill, the use of the Hill A higher ground clearance means a Descent Control (HDC) is CAUTION! higher center of gravity. If at all recommended, especially for relevant When driving through water, do not possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt slope and in case of low-adherence exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check 5 maneuvers. Failure to operate this conditions. water depth before entering, as a vehicle correctly may result in loss of Also suspensions (Skyhook Continuous precaution. Check all fluids control or vehicle rollover. Damping Control) are set to a specific afterwards: driving through water Although the pneumatic suspension calibration in “OFF ROAD” driving may cause damage to engine and system contributes to limiting these mode, in order to obtain the right driveline that may not be covered by risks by setting precautionary speed damping force provided by the shock the new vehicle limited warranty. thresholds, the driver must always pay absorbers, combined with the utmost attention and drive carefully. Driving through water more than a increased ride heights “Off Road 1” few inches/centimeters deep will and “Off Road 2”. require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If WARNING! Driving Through Water you must drive through water, try to “Off Road 2” ride height must always Set maximum ride height “Off Road determine the depth and the bottom be selected in case of water fording. 2” before driving through water. condition (and location of any Please remember water fording limits: Although your vehicle is capable of obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed max depth of the water must be driving through water, a number with caution and maintain a steady

247 Driving

controlled speed lower than 5 mph Maintenance manufacturer’s advice on tire (8 km/h) while in water to minimize After driving through water, have your pressure. wave effects that might cause serious vehicle fluids and lubricants inspected • When driving in sand, adopt lowest damage to all components, especially at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to gear possible. the engine. assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Hill Climbing Before climbing a hill, determine the WARNING! Driving in Snow and Wet Grass conditions at the crest and/or on the Avoid driving through flowing or In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or other side and shift the transmission to standing water. Doing so can be for additional control at slower speeds, a lower gear. highly dangerous and can be very set “I.C.E.” drive mode. See “Drive The vehicle is equipped with Hill Start difficult to determine the depth of the Mode” in this section for further Assist (HSA) that helps the driver to water you are driving through. If details. Do not shift to a lower gear manage the brake intervention in driving through water cannot be than necessary to maintain forward acceleration when driving uphill (for avoided, and after driving through it, motion. Over-revving the engine can further details, refer to “Brake and apply the brakes lightly to ensure the spin the wheels and traction will be Stability Control System” in this 5 brakes are operating correctly. lost. section). Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or Flowing Water slippery roads, because engine braking If the water is swift flowing and rising may cause skidding and loss of control. WARNING! (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing Follow these instructions even when If you lose forward motion, or cannot until the water level recedes and/or driving through a path section covered make it to the top of a hill or grade, the flow rate is reduced. If you must with wet grass. never attempt to turn around. Always cross flowing water avoid depths in Driving in Mud and Sand back carefully straight down a hill in R excess of 9 in (25 cm). (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill In general, when driving in mud and Standing Water in N (Neutral) using only the brake. sand, if your wheels spin, always Do not drive in standing water deeper reduce the throttle in order to slow Remember, never drive diagonally than 19 in (50 cm), and reduce speed the tires and regain traction. across a hill; always drive straight up or appropriately to minimize wave down. • When driving in mud, avoid using effects. low gear that could cause wheel spin. Follow the tire and vehicle

248 Driving

Traction Downhill Always consider these tips further to your experience gained in off-road When descending mountains or hills, driving. WARNING! use Hill Descent Control (HDC) to Abrasive material in any part of the avoid repeated heavy braking (for After Driving Off-road brakes may cause excessive wear or further details, refer to “Brake and Off-road operation puts more stress unpredictable braking operation. Do Stability Control System” in this on your vehicle than does most not drive if braking system is not section). on-road driving. After going off-road, efficient: get your brakes checked and When descending mountains or hills, it is always a good idea to check for cleaned as necessary by an repeated braking can cause brake damage. That way you can get any Authorized Maserati Dealer. fade with loss of braking power. Avoid problems taken care of right away and repeated heavy braking and have your vehicle ready when you • If you experience unusual vibration downshift the transmission whenever need it. after driving in mud, slush or similar possible in order to cool down the conditions, check the wheels and brakes. • Completely inspect the underbody of suspension linkages for impacted your vehicle. Check tires, body Warnings and Tips for Off-road material. Impacted material can structure, steering, suspension, and cause wheel imbalance and affect Driving exhaust system for damage. suspension response. Removing it 5 When driving off-road, using the “OFF • Inspect the radiator for mud and will correct the situation. ROAD” drive mode which is specific debris that might decrease sinking for this use. effect and clean as required. Before driving, always make sure that • Check for accumulations of plants or the vehicle reached the ride height set brush in underbody. These things through the selector. could be a fire hazard if they get in When driving, always: contact with the exhaust system. • limit driving speed as much as • After extended operation in mud, possible to tackle bends, bumpy sand, water, or similar dirty sections and slopes; conditions, have all parts that got in • increase visual control in front and contact with mud, sand and water on the sides of the vehicle to quickly inspected and cleaned as soon as spot any obstacles in your path possible. (potholes, branches, etc.);

249 Driving Parking Brake raising the lever located behind the shift lever. The vehicle is equipped with an When the parking brake is applied, the electric automatic parking brake, also warning light lights up on the called EPB (Electric Parking Brake). tachometer and the related message The braking action is ensured by a will be displayed for 5 seconds on the power actuator directly working on instrument cluster. the brake pad inside each caliper of If you attempt to engage/disengage the rear brake system. the parking brake without having It can be automatically engaged when pressed the brake pedal, a message the engine is turned off and During engagement and will be displayed, warning you to press disengaged with engine running, disengagement procedures, the the brake pedal. driver seatbelt latched and driver door warning light flashes until the If the engine was turned off when the closed, while pressing the brake pedal parking brake has reached its automatic engagement device was and operating the shift lever. maximum activation force and is deactivated (see “Deactivating Furthermore, EPB can be automatically respectively fully released. Automatic Operation” in this chapter) engaged above a slope threshold with 5 In the above-mentioned conditions, it is possible to shift the parking brake gearshift in park to avoid damage to the automatic engagement function simply by pulling the lever upward the vehicle. EPB can be disengaged can be deactivated/activated by within 3 minutes after turning off. before turning off the vehicle. selecting the menu item “Vehicle When the parking brake is applied, the settings” on the main menu (refer to warning light lights up on the paragraph “Deactivating Automatic tachometer display and the related Operation” in this chapter). message is displayed on the instrument cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument Manual Engagement/ Cluster” in section “Dashboard Disengagement Instruments and Controls”). The parking brake can also be manually engaged or disengaged when the engine is running or the ignition switch is in the RUN position, by pressing the brake pedal and

250 Driving

• It is advisable to keep the "Auto • Auto Apply On (recommended Apply" function always active (On) setting); CAUTION! so that the vehicle is properly • Auto Apply Off. The main function of the EPB is to secured with electric parking brake. allow safe parking of the vehicle, therefore it must only be applied Deactivating Automatic when the vehicle is already stationary. Operation If the EPB is used while the vehicle is moving and decelerating until a speed The automatic engagement function lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in can be deactivated/reactivated by particular, until complete stop selecting the menu item “Vehicle (typically in a sudden brake), it is settings” through the switch on the necessary to have the EPB system right side of the steering wheel (refer checked by an Authorized Maserati to “Instrument Cluster” in section Dealer. “Dashboard Instruments and Scroll with the switch toward the Controls”). arrow or through the Press and release the switch toward programmable options. the arrow ( ) to select “Electric Park Press and release the switch toward 5 WARNING! Brake”. the arrow ( ) to set the selected • Always hold the brake pedal pressed option. A check mark will remain next during engagement or to the selected item until a new disengagement of the parking selection is made. brake. • The EPB command activation while running generates a deceleration of the vehicle with strong deceleration (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore recommended to use this feature only in case of emergency. The stability of the car is guaranteed by Press and release the switch once the action of the activated ESC again toward the arrow ( )to system. visualize the options connected to this function.

251 Driving

“Setting Saved” Selection notification on the TFT display, please contact an on the instrument cluster display the appears as a popup for 2 seconds then Authorized Maserati Dealer. warning light will be illuminated. the display will show again the To initialize the EPB system, lift, modified function. Failure Indication release and lift again the lever located behind the shift lever. In the event of electric parking brake system failure, the warning light Emergency Disengagement on the display will light up and the In case of brake lock with complete related message will show for 5 electrical system failure, it is necessary seconds. to force the electric actuator on the rear calipers (see “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” chapter in section “In an Emergency”). WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take EPB Operation with your vehicle to the nearest Authorized Overheated Brakes In order to disable the automatic Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. operation follow the same procedures Driving on mountain roads with steep 5 and select the other option. slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system components. In these conditions the CAUTION! parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might • Under certain conditions when the not be sufficient to ensure vehicle battery voltage is low, the electric braking, especially on a slope. automatic parking brake system may Drive normally without braking to temporarily be deactivated for safety allow the brakes to cool down a few reasons. Therefore, typically upon minutes before stopping. In this way, starting the engine, when the the automatic or manual activation of battery voltage drops, a message Initialize the EPB System after the parking brake will ensure vehicle may temporarily be displayed, Re-connecting the Vehicle Battery braking. indicating that automatic operation After the detachment and the is temporarily disabled. subsequent connection of the battery, • In case of repetitive requests to reset the EPB through the messages shown

252 Driving Parking avoid any contact of the bottom of the car with the protrusions of the Before leaving the vehicle, make sure ground. that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the P (Park) When parking on hill roads, it is position. important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! Apply the parking brake before • Always check that the vehicle is placing the shift lever in P (Park), locked before leaving it. otherwise the load on the • Never leave children unattended in transmission locking mechanism may the vehicle. make it difficult to move the shift • Do not park the vehicle on paper, lever out of P (Park). grass, dry leaves or other flammable In certain conditions, it is however materials. advisable to disengage the parking brake manually and slightly apply the 5 • Do not leave the engine running service brake for starting off. This is while the vehicle is unattended. advisable when there are obstacles very close to the vehicle in the direction in which you intend to move. CAUTION! • When you need to park the vehicle on a steep slope, both with the engine on or off, it is recommended not only to engage the parking brake, but also to shift the shift lever to P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. • When parking on uneven surfaces (rocks, sidewalks, etc..) do not activate the Entry/Exit ride height to

253 Driving

“Drive Away Inhibit” strategy “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy alerts The table shows the vehicle condition the driver with messages on the and the action that the system runs to In order to avoid a dangerous instrument cluster display and exit the dangerous condition. condition resulting from leaving the sounding chimes, then puts the vehicle “not braked” with running transmission in P (Park). engine and without driver on board,

Vehicle condition Action of the driver • Engine running and speed lower than 1.8 mph (3 km/h). • Transmission in any position other P The driver releases the brake pedal to (Park). get out of the vehicle. • Driver safety belt unlocked. • Driver door opened. The system puts the • Brake pedal pressed. transmission in P (Park) position. Warnings Warnings 5 • Slow continuous chime. • Fast chime. • The condition of the vehicle not in P • A message which invites to engage (Park) position will be signaled by a the parking brake to prevent vehicle message on the display. movement will be displayed on the display.

254 Driving Brake and Stability natural laws of physics from Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, affecting the vehicle, nor can they the ESC system detects the driver’s Control System increase traction, braking or steering chosen direction comparing it to the The vehicle is equipped with an efficiency beyond that afforded by one maintained while running. In case Electronic Stability Control System the condition of the vehicle brakes of discrepancy between the required (ESC), which helps to maintain and tires. trajectory and the current one, the directional control in the event of loss • These systems cannot prevent ESC system brakes the appropriate of grip of the tires. The system is able collisions, including those resulting wheel to counteract over or under to detect potentially dangerous from excessive speed in turns, steering. situations for the stability of the following another vehicle too • Oversteer - when the vehicle is vehicle and automatically sets the closely, or hydroplaning. turning more than appropriate for brakes on all four wheels in a • The capabilities of a vehicle the steering wheel position. differentiated manner, in order to equipped with these systems must • Understeer - when the vehicle is provide a torque settlement of the never be exploited in a reckless or turning less than appropriate for the vehicle. dangerous manner that could steering wheel position. ESC includes the following subsystems: jeopardize the driver’s and the The ESC system has two available • ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); passenger’s safety or the safety of operating modes: 5 • EBD (Electronic Brake-force others. ESC on Distribution); This is the normal ESC operating • TCS (Traction Control System); Electronic Stability Control mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, • BAS (Brake Assist System); (ESC) the ESC system is set in this mode and should be used for most driving • BTO (Brake Throttle Override); This system enhances directional conditions. The ESC should only be • HSA (Hill Start Assist); control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The turned off for specific reasons as • ROM (Roll-Over Mitigation); ESC corrects over steering and under pointed out in the following • TSM (Trailer Sway Mitigation); steering of the vehicle by applying the paragraphs. • HDC (Hill Descent Control). brake to the appropriate wheel. ESC off Engine power may also be reduced to The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a assist in counteracting the conditions more spirited driving experience but WARNING! of instability and maintain the right also purposeful for driving in sand, or • These systems cannot prevent the direction. The system is also able to gravel. The current mode disables the reduce the engine power. TCS portion of the ESC and raises the

255 Driving

threshold for ESC activation, allowing pressing the (ESC OFF) button and in front of yours and reduce your higher wheel spin than normally remain in this operational mode no speed when entering a curve. granted by the ESC system. The (ESC longer than needed. Once the OFF) button is fitted beside the gear situation requiring “ESC off” mode is NOTE: shift lever: to deactivate the system see overcome, turn the ESC on again by • When the vehicle's speed is higher “Drive Mode” in this section. pressing the (ESC OFF) button. This than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear may also be performed while in a slight clicking sound as well as motion. other motor noises. The system is WARNING! performing a self-check cycle to In SPORT mode the ESC control Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ensure that the ABS is working thresholds are higher for maximum and Electronic Brake-force properly. performance on dry road surface. To Distribution (EBD) • This self-check occurs each time the ensure maximum security of the ESC, The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) vehicle is started and accelerated it is recommended not to activate provides increased vehicle stability and past 7 mph (11 km/h). SPORT mode on surfaces with brake performance under most medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet, ABS is activated during braking under braking conditions. The system 5 snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system certain road or stopping conditions. automatically “pumps” the brakes active ( (ESC OFF) button not ABS-inducing conditions can include during severe braking to prevent pressed). ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad wheel lock-up. tracks, loose debris. The Electronic Brake-force Distribution NOTE: You may also experience the following (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from when the brake system goes into Anti- • When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS over-braking and provides greater Lock: functionality of ESC is deactivated control of available braking forces (except for the limited slip feature applied to the rear axle. • The ABS motor running (it may described in the TCS paragraph of continue to run for a short time after this chapter). All other stability the vehicle stops). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. features of ESC function regularly. WARNING! • To improve the vehicle's traction The ABS helps prevent the wheels • Brake pedal pulsations. when driving with snow chains, or from locking, but it does not increase • A slight drop or fall away of the when starting off in deep snow, the physical grip limits between the brake pedal at the end of the stop. sand, or gravel, it may be desirable tires and the road. Therefore, always These are all normal characteristics of to switch to the “ESC off” mode by keep a safe distance from the vehicle ABS functioning.

256 Driving

Traction Control System (TCS) vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure earlier than The current device is an integral part WARNING! required. Once the brake pedal is of the ESC system. It operates • The ABS contains sophisticated released, the BAS is deactivated. electronic equipment that may be automatically by reducing the power susceptible to interference caused transmitted by the engine in case of Brake Throttle Override (BTO) slipping, loss of grip on wet floor by improperly installed or high To complete the range of systems that (aquaplaning), acceleration on output radio transmitting assist braking, the vehicle is equipped slippery snow-covered or frozen equipment. This interference can with BTO, which is designed to stop surfaces, etc. cause possible loss of anti-lock the vehicle even when it is during Activating under slip conditions braking capability. Installation of acceleration. If the brake pedal is different control systems: such equipment should be depressed together with the performed by qualified Maserati • if slippage affects both drive wheels, accelerator, the system does not personnel. it reduces the power transmitted by consider as “conflict” the sequence • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will the engine; “brake-first-then-accelerator” of pedal diminish their effectiveness. • if slippage only affects one drive application and it will not engage the Pumping brakes makes the stopping wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel BTO. When the system recognizes that 5 distance longer. Just press firmly on automatically. the accelerator pedal is stuck pressed your brake pedal when you need to and the sequence “accelerator-first- slow down or stop. Brake Assist System (BAS) then-brake-pressed” (this sequence is • The ABS installed to this vehicle This system completes the ABS system recognized as a “conflict”), the engine does not control trailer braking by optimizing the vehicle braking power will be automatically reduced system. Pay utmost attention when capacity during emergency brake and, if the driver continues to depress driving on slippery ground since the maneuvers. The system detects an the accelerator and the brake pedal, trailer traction might get poorer. emergency braking situation by the system can make the vehicle come sensing the rate and amount of brake to a complete stop. • Do not modify the vehicle braking application and then applies optimum Additionally, if the brake pedal is system to control the trailer brakes. pressure to the brakes in order to help released when the accelerator is still The hydraulic system controlling reduce braking distances. stuck pressed, the corresponding vehicle braking must remain The quick brake coupling is optimal engine torque increase gradually to a independent from trailer braking for BAS performances. In order to fully safe value. system. exploit the system, apply continuous During this event, the ETC light brake pedal pressure during the entire indicator will illuminate. The system

257 Driving

exits from this strategy when the The system will not activate if the occur. ROM cannot prevent all wheel accelerator pedal is completely transmission is placed in N (Neutral) or lift or roll-overs, especially those that unstuck. P (Park). involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The Hill Start Assist (HSA) Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM) capabilities of a ROM-equipped The HSA system is designed to assist This system anticipates the potential vehicle must never be exploited in a the driver when starting a vehicle for wheel lift by monitoring the reckless or dangerous manner, which uphill. HSA will maintain the level of driver's steering wheel input and the could jeopardize the user’s safety or brake pressure applied for a short speed of the vehicle. When ROM the safety of others. period of time also after releasing the determines that the rate of change of brake pedal. the steering wheel angle and vehicle's Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM) If the driver does not apply the speed are sufficient to potentially TSM uses sensors in the vehicle to throttle during this short period of cause wheel lift, it then applies the recognize an excessively swaying time, the system will release brake appropriate brake and may also trailer and will take the appropriate pressure and the vehicle will start reduce engine power to lessen the actions to attempt to stop the sway. sloping down. The system will release chance that wheel lift will occur. The system may reduce engine power brake pressure proportionally to the ROM will only intervene during very 5 and apply the brake of the amount of throttle/torque applied as severe or evasive driving maneuvers. appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the the vehicle starts to move in the ROM can only reduce the chance of sway of the trailer. TSM will become chosen direction. wheel lift occurring during severe or active automatically once an evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot HSA Activation Criteria excessively swaying trailer is prevent wheel lift due to other factors, recognized. The following criteria must be met in such as road and off-road conditions, TSM cannot stop all trailers from order for HSA to activate: leaving the roadway, or striking swaying. Always use caution when • vehicle is stationary; objects or other vehicles. towing a trailer and follow the trailer • gear selection matches vehicle uphill tongue weight recommendations. direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this in forward gear; vehicle backing WARNING! section for further information. When uphill is in reverse gear). Many factors, such as vehicle loading, TSM is functioning, the “ESC HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all road and off-road conditions, and Activation/Malfunction Indicator forward gears when the activation driving conditions, influence the Light” will flash (see “Instrument criteria have been met. chance that wheel lift or rollover may Cluster” in section “Dashboard

258 Driving

Instruments and Controls”), the • Active: feature is enabled and The following conditions must also be engine power may be reduced and actively controlling vehicle speed. met to enable HDC: you may feel the brakes being applied Enabling and Activating the HDC • Maximum activation speed: 18 mph to individual wheels to attempt to (30 km/h). stop the trailer from swaying. HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC • Parking brake is released. TSM is disabled when the ESC system is switch on LH side of steering wheel. partially deactivated (button • Driver door is closed. pressed, LED on). HDC enabling is indicated by the white light with below 3 dashes on instrument cluster display coming steady on. The light remains white WARNING! while the driver operates the pedal If TSM activates while driving, slow unit to change the speed, or when the vehicle down, stop at the nearest driving on a flat stretch of road safe location, and adjust the trailer between two descents, or when the load to eliminate trailer sway. descent is over. Failed enabling is indicated by a Standard Configuration Hill Descent Control (HDC) message on display. 5 HDC maintains vehicle speed while Once enabled, when driving the descending hills during various driving system automatically activates HDC. situations, by actively controlling the When the vehicle exceeds 2.5 mph brakes. (4 km/h) and a defined threshold of HDC is part of the ESC system and has slope, the light turns green and the three possible states: current speed appears below it until the default speed value set to 5 mph • Off: feature is not enabled and will (8 km/h). Therefore, the vehicle speed not activate. is increased or decreased until it • Enabled: feature is enabled and reaches the default value. ready but activation conditions are Optional Configuration not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle NOTE: application. The figures only show the Standard Configuration.

259 Driving

Or: HDC Cancelled • Push down (SET -) multifunction If the driver press down (CANC) switch to decrease the speed up to multifunction switch or presses the 1.8 mph (3 km/h) : pressing the brake brake pedal, the light turns white to pedal up to default speed of 5 mph indicate that HDC feature is (8 km/h). The set value appears under temporarily cancelled. the green light on the display.

The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the pedal unit or the multifunction control on steering wheel, which is the same used to set the Cruise Control (see “Electronic 5 Cruise Control” or “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in this section). Driver Override • Push up (RES +) multifunction switch If the driver pushes the accelerator and • If the driver brakes, the speed goes to increase speed until the required the vehicle speed exceeds the set below the default value: when s/he value is displayed below the green speed, the green light will stay on releases the brake pedal, the speed light on display. and a pop-up message on display will goes back to 3 mph (4 km/h). warn driver. • If the driver accelerates without exceeding the maximum limit value of 18 mph (30 km/h), when s/he releases the accelerator pedal HDC will set to the speed reached by vehicle in that moment. The set value appears under the green light on the display.

260 Driving

Brake Overheating with HDC manner that could jeopardize the The icon on instrument cluster display driver’s safety or the safety of and the LED on steering wheel button others. will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again WARNING! once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including • HDC will be deactivated but remain WARNING! available when driver pushes the such as, engine exhaust, carbon • HDC is only intended to assist the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that accelerator steadily, without driver in controlling vehicle speed exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h). A which are know to the State of when descending hills. The driver California to cause cancer and birth pop-up message and the green must remain attentive to the driving light will stay on. defects or other reproductive harm. To conditions and is responsible for minimize exposure, avoid breathing • When the vehicle speed exceeds 5 maintaining a safe vehicle speed. exhaust, do not idle the engine except 18 mph (30 km/h) but is lower than • Prolonged use of the system might as necessary, service your vehicle in a 31 mph (50 km/h) this function turns overheat the brakes. In case of well-ventilated area and wear gloves to stand-by mode, the light with brake overheating, the HDC, if or wash your hands frequently when below the set speed turns white. In active, will be progressively servicing your vehicle. For more this case, to reset the function it is deactivated after warning the driver information go to: necessary to push up (RES +) (switch-off of LED on button); www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- multifunction switch. feature can be reactivated only after vehicle • While, if speed exceeds 31 mph brake temperature will have (50 km/h), or when driving beyond decreased sufficiently. Distance that 18 mph (30 km/h) for over 70 can be traveled depends on brake seconds, system will immediately temperature, load and vehicle disable the feature and the light speed. will turn off. • The performance of a vehicle equipped with HDC must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

261 Driving Using the Brakes abnormally high brake temperatures, whenever the brake pads and/or brake excessive lining wear, and possible discs are replaced. brake damage. In an emergency full Brake Overheating CAUTION! braking capacity may be impaired. To obtain a good performance by Driving on mountain roads with steep brake pads and discs, avoid sudden Brake Pads and Brake Discs slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system braking during the first 190 mi Wear on the brake pads and brake components. In these conditions, the (300 km). discs depends to a great extent on the parking brake must not be used since driving style and the conditions of use the push of the power actuator might The pad wear limit is indicated by the and therefore cannot be expressed in not be sufficient to ensure vehicle illumination of the warning light actual miles driven on the road. braking, especially on a slope. and by a message on the The brake system is designed for Drive normally without braking to instrument cluster. optimal braking effect at all speeds allow the brakes to cool down a few In this event, please contact an and temperatures. minutes before stopping. The Authorized Maserati Dealer. Certain speeds, braking forces and automatic or manual activation of the ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, parking brake will ensure vehicle 5 humidity and long outdoor stopping braking. periods) can therefore cause the Brake overheating could also cause brakes to "squeal". This is normal and “squeals” and “vibrations”. will cease after a few brakings. New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs New brake pads have to be “bed in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundreds of miles. WARNING! During this break-in period, the Riding the brakes can lead to brake slightly reduced braking ability must failure and possibly an accident. be compensated for by pressing the Driving with your foot resting or brake pedal harder. This applies riding on the brake pedal can result in

262 Driving Use of the Engine of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of malfunction. Breaking-In Specific Requirements Today's most modern production Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first methods are designed to provide 620 mi trip (1000 km). extremely precise construction and After starting the vehicle, do not assembly of components. However, exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has moving parts do undergo a settling warmed up sufficiently (coolant process, basically in the first hours of temperature: 149-158°F /65 70°). vehicle operation. Trailer Towing Do not drive keeping at a constant Ensure proper operation of different high speed rate for a prolonged time. During the first 620 mi (1000 km) of a devices checking their respective While cruising, brief full-throttle new vehicle it is advisable not to tow a control telltales. acceleration within the limits of local trailer. This allows to limit the load on traffic laws contributes to a good the engine and on the other parts of CAUTION! break-in. Wide-open throttle the vehicle. acceleration in low gear can be • Under normal conditions, all red 5 While Driving warning lights on the instrument detrimental and should be avoided. cluster display should be off. When The engine oil installed in the engine Never travel with the tachometer indicator approaching the peak rpm, they come on, they indicate a at the factory is a high-quality energy malfunction. Refer to “Instrument not even downhill. When the conserving type lubricant. Oil changes Cluster” in section “Dashboard should be consistent with anticipated tachometer indicator is approaching Instruments and Controls”. the peak rpm (red colored zone), take climate conditions under which vehicle • Continuing to drive when a red operations will occur. For the precautions to avoid exceeding that warning light is on could cause recommended viscosity and quality limit. serious damage to the vehicle and grades, see “Refillings” in section affect its performance. “Features and Specifications”. A new engine may consume some oil Onboard Diagnostic System during its first few thousand Your vehicle is equipped with a miles/kilometers of operation. This sophisticated onboard diagnostic should be considered as a normal part system. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine,

263 Driving and automatic transmission control Electronic Cruise Control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will CAUTION! The electronic Cruise Control (CC) provide excellent performance and • Prolonged driving with the enables the driver to maintain the fuel economy, as well as engine Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) desired vehicle speed without pressing emissions well within current local on could cause further damage to the accelerator pedal, reducing driving regulations of various countries. the emissions control system. It could fatigue on highways, especially long If any of these systems require service, also affect fuel economy and trips, as the set speed is automatically the system will turn on the drivability. The vehicle must be maintained. A firm press on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). serviced before any emissions tests accelerator pedal or the braking pedal It will also store diagnostic codes and can be performed. will temporarily deactivate the cruise control function. other information, which your •Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Authorized Maserati Dealer will use to Light (MIL) is flashing while the service your vehicle. Although the engine is running, severe catalytic CAUTION! vehicle will still be driveable and not converter damage and power loss need towing, contact an Authorized The device can only be switched on at will soon occur. Immediate service is speeds exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h) 5 Maserati Dealer for service as soon as required at an Authorized Maserati possible. and it switches off automatically when Dealer. the brake pedal or the accelerator • After the problem has been solved, pedal is pressed. the Authorized Maserati Dealer personnel will perform specific tests for a complete check of the system and, if necessary, road tests. WARNING! The Cruise Control function must only be activated when traffic and the route permit a constant speed to be maintained safely for a sufficiently long distance.

264 Driving

Controls Shared by All Configurations The electronic Cruise Control controls Multifunction switch: are located on the left hand side of • Press up (indication RES the steering wheel. +): increase speed, set Control configuration depends on current speed or resume which driver assist systems are previously set speed installed to the vehicle. when system is in In the standard configuration there is “cancelled” status; a specific button to enable and disable • Pushed (indication the CC. CANC): deletes the set Optional Configuration speed; Control buttons have the following • Press down (indication functions: SET -): set speed/decrease Standard Configuration speed. ON/OFF button to NOTE: engage/disengage CC • The figures only show the Standard 5 system. Configuration. Optional Configuration • In order to ensure proper operation, the CC system has been designed to Standard Configuration Press ACC Gap button and shut down if multiple systems are hold it down for 2 seconds In the optional configuration, there is operated at the same time (example: to enable the CC system. no specific button to enable and ACC and FCW). When conditions so allow, the CC system can be disable the CC, since driver uses the Press ACC button to disable reactivated by pushing the CC ACC control buttons. the CC system. “ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap button (in the Optional Configuration) and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

265 Driving

Displayed Information CC conditions are displayed on the WARNING! instrument cluster after selecting Never leave the electronic Cruise “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph Control system on when not in use. “TFT Display: Menus and Settings" You could accidentally set the system under “Instrument Cluster” in section or cause it to go faster than you want. “Dashboard Instruments and Always leave the system off when you Controls”). are not using it. Displayed information depends on system status: ready, disabled, cancelled or set. To turn the system off, push the Speed Range of Use Apart from the pop-up messages at ON/OFF button a second time or Speed mph (km/h) the centre of the display, CC system the ACC button (in the Optional status is represented by icons at the Configuration). The white light will Minimum 18 (30) top left. These icons remain displayed turn off. Engaged/activated 18 (30) even when you exit the "Driver Assist" Maximum 130 (210) 5 screen. The CC screen can be displayed any time the driver changes system status Setting Desired Speed or settings. After 5 seconds of CC Turn on the CC function. When the inactivity, the display goes back to last vehicle has reached the desired speed screen. (in the example: 60 mph), push downward the multifunction switch Activation (SET -) and release. To turn the system on, push the The green light below the desired ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap speed will illuminate on the button for 2 seconds (in the Optional NOTE: instrument cluster display. Configuration).The white light with The CC system must be turned off below 3 dashes on the instrument when not in use. cluster display will illuminate.

266 Driving

will be visualized below the green light. To decrease speed, push downward the multifunction switch (SET -). Keeping the switch pushed in the downward position, the set speed will continue to decrease by 5 units at a time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the switch is released. Release the switch when the desired speed is reached, Release the accelerator and the and the new set speed will be Driver Override vehicle will operate at the selected visualized below the green light. If the driver presses the accelerator speed. Pushing the multifunction switch upward (RES +) or downward (SET -) pedal while the CC is on, such as to NOTE: once will enable to increase or overtake another vehicle, and exceeds The vehicle should be traveling at a decrease the set speed by one unit the set speed limit, the system will temporarily deactivate the CC. During steady speed and on level ground (1 mph or 1 km/h). 5 before pushing the switch downward. Each subsequent tap of the the event, the speed indication below multifunction switch will increase or the green light will be blinking. Pressing the “ON/OFF” button or decrease the speed by 1 mph or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in 1 km/h. the Optional Configuration) or moving the ignition switch in OFF Temporary Deactivation position erases the set speed memory. A soft tap on the brake pedal, Changing Speed Setting pressing the multifunction switch (CANC), or normal brake pressure When the CC is set, you can increase while slowing the vehicle will cruise speed by pushing upward the temporarily deactivate the CC without multifunction switch (RES +). Keeping erasing the set speed memory. The the switch pressed, the set speed will white light will appear on the When the accelerator pedal is continue to increase by 5 units at a display. time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the released, the vehicle will return to the switch is released. The new set speed set speed and the green light with

267 Driving below the set speed with steady light Adaptive Cruise Control - on the front grille behind the trident, will be displayed. and the forward-facing camera behind ACC (optional) the internal rear-view mirror to detect Resume Speed the presence of a vehicle ahead at a To resume a previously set speed, push ADAS Equipments close distance and moving in the same upward the multifunction switch (RES The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is direction. +) and release. The green light with part of ADAS equipments together below the set speed will illuminate on with: the instrument cluster. Resume can be • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) used at any speed above 18 mph • Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) (30 km/h). • Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) Using Electronic Cruise Control • Highway Assist (HAS) on Hills • Traffic Sign Assist (TSA). The transmission may be downshifted NOTE: on hills to maintain the vehicle set 5 speed. The CC system maintains set FCW, LKA ABSA, HAS and TSA are speed up and down hills. A slight described in the relevant chapters of This vehicle, in this chapter, will be speed change on moderate hills is this section. indicated as "target vehicle" or normal. On steep slopes it is "vehicle ahead". recommended to drive without CC. ACC Preview NOTE: The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • If the sensor detects no vehicle further increases the drive comfort ahead, the ACC system will maintain WARNING! ensured by the Cruise Control when set steady speed. Electronic Cruise Control can be driving on highways and freeways. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle dangerous where the system cannot Always consider that ACC is not a ahead, the ACC system automatically maintain a constant speed. Do not use safety system and is not designed to kicks in by slightly accelerating or electronic Cruise Control in heavy prevent accidents. braking (to avoid exceeding the traffic or on winding, icy, The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise initially set speed) so that the vehicle snow-covered or slippery roads. Control active in limited or moderate keeps present distance, trying to traffic conditions with no need to adapt to the speed of the detected constantly restore the Cruise Control. vehicle ahead. The ACC uses a radar sensor, located

268 Driving

• ACC system can decelerate only with similar complex situations such as limited braking, it cannot execute highway construction zones. WARNING! emergency braking. • When entering a junction lane or a • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is The ACC system: slip road to leave the highway; when designed to increase vehicle driving driving on narrow, icy, snowy, comfort. It must not be considered • Does not activate/react in the slippery roads, or on uphill and as a means of replacing the required presence of pedestrians, bicycles, downhill roads. attention of the driver. The driver is incoming traffic from opposite • When circumstances do not allow to always required to drive carefully. direction and steady objects such as drive safely at constant speed. The driver is always required to pay a vehicle stuck in a traffic jam. utmost attention to driving • Is meant for the use on highways Displayed information conditions (road, traffic, weather) and well-built roads, not for city Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and style (speed, distance from traffic or mountain roads. condition, as well as the LKA and HAS sensed vehicle ahead, brake use). • May not have enough time to react status, is displayed on instrument Driver has the full responsibility of and/or decelerate sufficiently on cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” the vehicle therefore his attention is vehicles when lane is changed too menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: crucial to keeping vehicle control, in quickly or the relative speed is too Menus and Settings” under 5 particular when approaching curves high. In such cases the driver has to “Instrument Cluster” in section and situations with heavy traffic. react appropriately and without any “Dashboard Instruments and Failure to follow these warnings can acoustic/visual warning. Controls”). result in a collision and death or Displayed information depends on serious personal injury • Cannot consider road, traffic and weather conditions and might prove system status: ready, set, temporarily • In some driving scenarios, the ACC limited when visibility is poor. cancelled or override. could have detection problems. In • Does not always fully recognize Apart from the image at the center of such cases, the ACC could kick in late complex driving conditions and this the display, CC, ACC, LKA and HAS or unexpectedly. The driver must be could cause an incorrect assessment systems status is represented by icons careful since his/her intervention of the required safety distance. at the top left and right. These icons could be necessary. It is recommended to disable the ACC remain displayed even when exiting • It is always the driver’s responsibility system in the following instances: the “Driver Assist” screen. to obey speed limits and to keep The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars minimum legal distance to the • When driving in the fog, heavy rain, represent the ACC status as ready preceding vehicle. heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and (white) or with sensed vehicle ahead

269 Driving

(green); the white, grey or yellow lines NOTE: 1 Multifunction control shared by all represent the LKA and HAS systems. driver assist functions/systems: Any change made to tire dimensions The ACC screen can be displayed any • Press up (indication “RES +”): affects performance of Adaptive Cruise time driver changes system status or increase speed, set current speed Control and Front Collision Warning settings. After 5 seconds of ACC or resume previously set speed (FCW), if equipped. inactivity, the display goes back to last when system is in “cancelled” screen. The ACC is not activated in the status. following conditions: ACC Controls and Activation • Pushed (indication “CANC”): • When braking. Conditions cancel the function if it was in “set” status, going in a ready • When parking brake is activated. The buttons on the RH side of the condition but remembering the • When automatic transmission is in P steering wheel control the ACC previous set speed. (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). operations and the other • Press down (indication “SET -”): functions/driver assist systems installed • When vehicle speed is out of preset set speed/decrease speed. to this vehicle. speed range. 2 Two functions button with ACC • When brakes are overheated. 5 activated: • When driver door is open. • ACC Gap: pressed and released; • When the driver’s seat belt is set the distance to sensed vehicle unbuckled. ahead as horizontal bars (setting cycle starts to 3 bars). • When the road is particularly steep • CC On: pressed for 2 seconds (both uphill and downhill) at low activates the CC system. speed. • Press it to switch from CC to • When drive mode (ESC OFF) is ACC. selected. 3 ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, • When the door is opened at low pressing this button will disable CC. speed. 4 HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set • When there has been an ESC event in only. See "Highway Assist - HAS" in the last 5 seconds, or is still active. this section for further details. • When there is an object too close in front of the vehicle. It is possible that more than one system is active at the same time such

270 Driving as ACC and ABSA just to mention some. While activation of ACC and CC at the same time is impossible. Speed Range of Use

Speed mph (km/h) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated 18 (30) Maximum 130 (210) Driver Assist Page Push the ON/OFF button a second time and release to turn the system off. A Activation/Deactivation pop-up message is displayed for 2 seconds to indicate that ACC was NOTE: disabled. Pictures show status of ACC and LKA systems. 5

Press and release ON/OFF button to activate the ACC. The display will show the white symbol with below 3 dashes will illuminate indicating that Non-Driver Assist Page system is ready to be set. If a vehicle is detected as being too close, the display will show a message for 5 seconds and trigger a signal to warn the driver that current conditions do not allow enabling of the ACC. At any rate, system will WARNING! remain in the ready status. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally (Continued) 271 Driving

(Continued) with ACC engaged, the set speed automatically slow down the vehicle. activate the system or cause it to go below the green light will blink and • The ACC system applies the brake faster than you want. Always leave the time gap bars will vanish to down to a full stop when following a the system off when you are not using indicate that in this condition the target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle it. system cannot control the distance follows a target vehicle to a between vehicle and sensed vehicle standstill, after a two or three second Setting the Speed ahead. Vehicle speed will be delay, the system will not be able to determined only by the accelerator When the vehicle reaches the required resume driving the car pedal position. speed, press down and release the autonomously. At this point it is multifunction control (SET -). The Changing Speed Setting necessary for the driver to manually display will show set speed reengage the system by either using Once speed is set, driver can increase corresponding to vehicle current one. the multifunction control (press SET- or decrease it by respectively pressing Speed value will be indicated below or RES+) or by pressing the multifunction control up (RES +) or the green symbol and above the accelerator pedal (see “ACC down (SET -). Speed can be increased distance bars, in the center of the Operation Before and During Stop” or decreased in two ways: display. in this chapter). 5 • Pressing control once, set speed will • The ACC system maintains set speed increase or decrease by one unit when driving up hill and down hill. corresponding to 1 mph (1 km/h). However, a slight speed change on • Hold the control to increase or moderate hills is normal. In addition, decrease set speed by 5 mph downshifting may occur while (10 km/h) at a time. climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation NOTE: and necessary to maintain set speed. • When pressing the multifunction When driving uphill and downhill, control up (RES +) or down (SET -), the ACC system will cancel if the the new set speed will be the current braking temperature exceeds normal Remove foot from accelerator pedal speed of the vehicle. range. and vehicle will continue at set speed. • When using (SET -) control to decelerate, if the engine braking Temporary Deactivation Driver Override power does not slow down the If driver accelerates beyond the set vehicle sufficiently to reach the set A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing speed or faster than the car would do speed, the brake system will the multifunction control (CANC), or

272 Driving normal brake pressure while slowing Resuming Speed If system does not detect the presence the vehicle will temporarily deactivate of any vehicles ahead, only the bars If a speed setting is stored in system the ACC without erasing the set speed referred to set distance will be memory, press the multifunction memory. The white light will appear displayed. control (RES +) up and take foot off on the display with below the set When system detects the presence of a the accelerator pedal. The last set speed. vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front speed will be displayed. of the bars (see example in the figure). Conditions for Disabling and Deactivation Besides the cases specified in the WARNING! previous paragraph, the following The resume function should be used conditions will disable the system: only when road and traffic conditions allow it. Resuming a too high or too • Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in. low speed for current traffic and road • Transmission lever is not in D (Drive). conditions could cause a harsh vehicle • The Electronic Stability Control and acceleration or deceleration which the Traction Control System could increase the risk of collisions 5 (ESC/TCS) activate. and death or serious injury. • Vehicle parking brake is operated. Driver Assist Page • The driver safety belt is unbuckled at Setting the ACC Gap low speed. The specified ACC gap can be set by • The driver door is ajar at low speed. varying the distance setting among • The driver disabled the ESC using the the four possible options identified by (ESC OFF) button on central the number of horizontal bars: console. • Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars. • The road is too steep both uphill and • Long distance: 3 bars (default downhill at low speed. distance). The system is deactivated and set • Medium distance: 2 bars. speed is deleted from system memory, if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or • Short distance: 1 bar. Non-Driver Assist Page if ignition device is turned to OFF. Using this distance setting and the To increase or decrease the number of vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets bars, corresponding to the gap from the gap to the vehicle ahead.

273 Driving

vehicle ahead, press and release the • The vehicle ahead moves out of the NOTE: distance setting button. lane or view of the sensor. The displayed warning is a warning for • The distance setting is changed. the driver to take action and does not • The driver disables the system. necessarily mean that the Forward The maximum braking applied by ACC Collision Warning (FCW) system is is limited; however, the driver can applying the brakes autonomously. always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. Any time the ACC system Overtake Aid automatically operates the brakes, the When driving with ACC engaged and brake lights will turn on as if the driver following a target vehicle, the system was braking. will provide an additional acceleration A Proximity Warning on display will to assist in passing vehicles in front. alert the driver if ACC predicts that its Each press and release of the button This additional acceleration is maximum braking level is not changes the gap starting from 3 bars triggered when the driver utilizes the sufficient to maintain the set distance. (default distance) and moving in a left turn signal to start overtaking. In If this occurs, a visual alert will flash on sequential way towards the minimum locations with left hand drive traffic, 5 the display and a chime will sound distance: 3→2→1→4→3→2→1→4 and so overtake aid is active only when while ACC continues to apply its on. passing on the left hand side of the maximum braking capacity. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle target vehicle. will maintain the set speed. If a slower When a vehicle goes from a location moving vehicle is detected in the same with left hand drive traffic to a lane, the system displays the target location with right hand drive traffic, vehicle icon before the bars. From that the ACC system will automatically moment, the system adjusts the vehicle detect traffic direction. In this speed automatically to maintain the condition, overtake aid is active only distance setting, regardless of the set when passing on the right side of the speed. target vehicle. This additional The vehicle will then maintain the set acceleration is triggered when the distance until: driver utilizes the right turn signal to • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a start overtaking. In this condition the speed above the set speed. ACC system will no longer provide overtake aid on the left side until it

274 Driving determines that the vehicle has moved the ACC system shall be cancelled reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The back to a location with left hand when the EPB is applied. ACC and FCW systems will recover drive. operation after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, ACC Operation Before and when the radar is not tracking any During Stop WARNING! When the ACC system is resumed, the vehicles or objects in its path this If an ACC host vehicle follows a target driver must ensure that there are no warning may temporarily occur. vehicle to a standstill, after two or pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the If weather conditions are not a factor, three seconds the system will not be path of the vehicle. Failure to follow the driver should examine the sensor. able to resume driving the car these warnings can result in a It may require cleaning or removal of autonomously. In this condition, TFT collision and death or serious personal an obstruction. The sensor is located in displays an instruction message pop injury. the center of the front grille, behind up for 5 seconds. the Maserati trident. To keep the ACC System operating When the ACC system brings the Display Warnings and vehicle to a standstill while following properly, it is important to note the a target vehicle, the brakes are Maintenance of ACC and FCW following maintenance items: Systems released after two or three seconds • Always keep the sensor clean. 5 after the stop and at the same time Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a the system inserts the parking brake. This warning will display and also a soft cloth. Be cautious not to When parking brake engages the ACC chime will indicate when conditions damage it. deactivates going to ready state. temporarily limit system performance • Do not remove any screws from the At this point the driver must reengage due to sensor poor or failed signal sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC the system acting on the multifunction reception. This most often occurs at system malfunction or failure and control (RES + or SET -) or alternatively times of poor visibility, such as in snow require a sensor realignment. on the accelerator pedal. While ACC or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW • If the sensor or front end of the with Stop is holding your vehicle at a systems may also become temporarily vehicle is damaged due to a collision, standstill, if the driver unbuckles the blinded due to obstructions, such as see your authorized dealer for seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In service. system will activate the EPB. During these cases, the system will be standstill, ACC system monitors the disabled. • Do not attach or install any occupant detection signals: if the This message can sometimes be accessories near the sensor, including driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled, displayed while driving in highly transparent material or aftermarket reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC

275 Driving

system failure or malfunction. When when the camera is not tracking any problem persists, contact an the condition that deactivated the vehicles or objects in its path this Authorized Maserati Dealer. system is no longer present, the warning may temporarily occur. system will return to the “Adaptive If weather conditions are not a factor, Cruise Control Off” state and will the driver should examine the resume function by simply windshield and the camera. They may reactivating it. require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. NOTE: When the condition that created If the radar sensor wipe warning limited functionality is no longer message occurs frequently (e.g. more present, the ACC and FCW systems will than once on every trip) without any return to full functionality. snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an NOTE: Precautions while Driving with Authorized Maserati Dealer. If the windshield wiper warning ACC message occurs frequently (e.g. more Offset Driving Clean Front Windshield Warning than once on every trip) without any ACC may not detect a vehicle in the 5 The warning will display and a signal snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, same lane that is offset from your will indicate when conditions have the windshield and forward- direct line of travel, or a vehicle temporarily limit system performance facing camera inspected at an merging in from a side lane. There due to failed signal reception. This Authorized Maserati Dealer. most often occurs at times of poor may not be sufficient distance to the visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain Service ACC/FCW Warning vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may and fog. The ACC and FCW systems If the ACC and FCW systems turn off, move in and out of the line of travel, may also become temporarily blinded and the system displays a service which can cause your vehicle to brake due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, warning, there may be an internal or accelerate unexpectedly. or ice on windshield and fog on the system fault or a temporary inside of glass or when driving in bad malfunction that limits functionality. weather. In these cases, the system will Although the vehicle is still driveable have degraded performance. under normal conditions, ACC and The ACC and FCW systems will recover FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If operation after the vehicle has left this occurs, try activating ACC and FCW these areas. Under rare conditions, again later, following a key cycle. If the

276 Driving

In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane and it may not detect the vehicle until it is too late for the driver to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Turns and Bends Using ACC on Hills When driving on a curve with ACC When driving on steep hills, ACC may engaged, the system may decrease the not detect a vehicle in your lane when vehicle speed and acceleration for the vehicle reaches the crest. stability reasons, with no target Depending on the speed, vehicle load, vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is traffic conditions, and the steepness of out of the curve the system will the hills, ACC performance may be 5 resume your original Set Speed. This is limited. a part of normal ACC system functionality. Moreover, the radar sensor might detect a vehicle on a Narrow Vehicles nearby lane or no longer detect the Some narrow vehicles (like target vehicle. motorcycles) traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling.

277 Driving Radar Device - Regulatory Forward Collision Warning Information – FCW (optional, with ACC The “Regulatory Information” for all only) the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the Operation "SERVICES" section on the website www.maserati.com or by using the The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) specific tablet or smartphone apps. system with braking action interacts with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), uses the same parts for sensing Stationary Objects and Vehicles vehicle ahead (hereinafter “target ACC does not react to stationary vehicle”) as well as part of the objects and stationary vehicles. For warnings/messages on system example, ACC will not react in condition and activation status. For situations where the vehicle you are further details, refer to “Adaptive following exits your lane and the Cruise Control - ACC” in this section. 5 vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Full performance can be reached only Always be attentive and ready to apply when both the sensing parts have the brakes if necessary. detected the object, the difference between full and reduced performance is not visible for the driver. The FCW provides audible and visual warnings when a potential collision is detected. Brake actuation and limited braking may also be applied depending on the specific scenario. NOTE: FCW system is not intended for towing: this could lead the system to malfunctions and/or to late reaction.

278 Driving

When the system determines a the brake actuation too. collision with the vehicle in front of • FCW will automatically deactivated you is no longer probable, the when (ESC OFF) button is pressed warning messages will be deactivated. (LED light up). NOTE: • Bad weather conditions, like heavy rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced WARNING! system performance. Under these • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is conditions relevant objects will not not intended to avoid a collision on be detected or detected late by the its own, nor can FCW detect every FCW monitors the information from system. the forward looking radar sensor as type of potential collision. The • FCW is designed to react in specific well as the Electronic Brake Controller driver has the responsibility to avoid situations in typical traffic scenarios (EBC), to calculate the probability of a a collision by controlling the vehicle with objects in the same lane driving forward collision. When the system via braking and steering. Failure to in the same direction, but under determines that a forward collision is follow this warning could lead to certain conditions it can also react probable, the driver will be provided serious injury or death. The driver is on stationary objects in the same 5 with audible and visual warnings and always in charge to safely drive and lane. It is not designed to react to may provide a warning brake to avoid critical situations, and not oncoming traffic or crossing traffic. actuation. If the driver does not take rely on the support of the FCW action based upon these progressive • The FCW alerts may be triggered on system. Driver has to keep in mind warnings, then the system will provide objects other than vehicles such as that the system and therefore its a limited level of active braking to guard rails or sign posts based on intervention is always subject to the help slow down the vehicle and the course prediction. This is prevailing physical limits. expected and is a part of normal mitigate the potential forward • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is FCW activation and functionality. collision. If the driver reacts to the not intended either to warn or to warnings by braking and the system • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. apply any brake aid/brake determines that the driver intends to To prevent such misuse of the intervention in the event of avoid the collision by braking but has system, after four Active Braking collisions with pedestrians or not applied sufficient brake force, the events within a key cycle, the Active bicycles. system will compensate and provide Braking portion of FCW will be additional brake force as required. deactivated until the next key cycle. The limit of four events applies to

279 Driving

Speed Range of Use NOTE: The FCW system setting is kept in Speed mph (km/h) memory from one key cycle to the Minimum 0 (0) next. Engaged/activated 1.12 (1.8) Maximum 155 (250) Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking When the speed is outside the The default status of FCW Sensitivity is specified limits, the system the “Medium” setting. When the automatically disables without turning active braking function (“Forward Setting options are described in the on the corresponding warning light on Collision Warning Active Braking”) following paragraph. the instrument cluster. setting is on, the system warns you of When FCW status for some reason a possible collision with the vehicle in changes to off, the corresponding FCW Status front of you when you are farther amber warning light on instrument The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity or away and it applies limited braking. cluster will light on. 5 enable/disable the brake actuation This gives you the most reaction time with the other emergency brakings by to help avoid a possible collision. touching "Controls" soft-key on MTC+ Changing the sensitivity status to the display. The current setting is indicated “Near” setting, allows the system to beside to the "Forward Collision warn you of a possible collision with Warning" soft-key. If you want to the vehicle in front of you when you change the setting, touch the soft-key are much closer. This setting provides on the side to enter FCW page. less reaction time than the “Far” sensitivity setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. “Medium” is the intermediate status This warning light informs the driver between the two described above. that FCW is disabled. This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (example: (ESC OFF)) disables the FCW.

280 Driving or additional brake support if the Lane Keeping Assist - LKA driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. (optional, with ACC only) In this state the system disables the This system was designed especially brake jerk. for highway or freeway driving, to Limited Operation and Service reduce the risk that the vehicle, under Warning particular circumstances, accidentally departs from the lane in use. When The messages indicating on display the this happens, graphic instructions on limited functionality or service at an instrument cluster display together NOTE: Authorized Maserati Dealer required with steering torque application and • The default values shall appear at are the same as for the ACC system. steering wheel vibration (depending every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = For further details, refer to “Adaptive on the distance to the line) warn the “Medium” and Active Braking = on. Cruise Control – ACC” in this section. driver that the vehicle is going out of • FCW may not react to irrelevant Radar Device - Regulatory the lane and initiate a steering maneuver to try to prevent the lane objects such as objects not in the Information path of the car, stationary objects exit. 5 that are far away, oncoming traffic, The “Regulatory Information” for all To detect lane lines, the system uses on cross traffic vehicles, or leading the radio frequency and radar devices the forward-facing camera behind of vehicles with the same or higher rate can be consulted by accessing the the rear-view mirror, which is the same of speed. "SERVICES" section on the website one used also by the lighting system www.maserati.com or by using the • The active braking (autonomous to manage the automatic high beams. specific tablet or smartphone apps. braking/braking aid) will not The logic core is in the front radar. provided in case of potential LKA system remembers the condition collision with static object such as it was in before turning off the guard rails, walls, etc..). vehicle. Refer to “MTC+ "Controls" Screen” in • FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer section “Dashboard Instruments and to chapter “Adaptive Cruise Control Controls” for further information. - ACC” in this section. Changing the active braking status to “Off” prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking

281 Driving

NOTE: System response can be set to "Early", • "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the In case of wet road or raining "Medium" (default mode) or "Late". distance to the lane boundary where conditions the function could be System reaction force can be set to the system will start to apply steering disabled by the system in order to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or torque. minimize the risks. "High". • "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering torque value to have a stronger or Speed Range of Use weaker trajectory correction/ deviation. Speed mph (km/h) Minimum 37 (60) WARNING! Engaged/activated 37 (60) In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist Maximum 112 (180) (LKA) may make an inappropriate steering torque application. LKA may Customized Settings be interrupted at any time counter LKA is configurable by the driver in Meanings of Settings steering. Lack of attention may lead to 5 serious injury or death. order to maximize its efficiency based • "Visual" only: the system will not on the driver driving style and the request any steering torque/vibration expectation of the system, reducing at to correct the car trajectory. The System Availability the same time the possible system will only show on the TFT The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW invasiveness. display when the vehicle is passing and HAS) help the driver while driving. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ the lane. These systems can be set and display the driver can see the current • "Visual & Haptic": the system will monitored simultaneously on the setting beside the "Lane Keeping apply steering torque when lane display, after opening “Driver Assist” Assist" soft-key. departure is detected while showing menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: Touching “Lane Keeping Assist” at the same time the proper cluster Menus and Settings” under soft-key can disable or enable the indication, adding to this steering “Instrument Cluster” in section system. vibration when the departure is very “Dashboard Instruments and Touching the soft-key on the side the imminent. Controls”). driver can change the setting. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and LKA is designed for an attentive driver; Driver warnings can be only "Visual" LKA is enabled then the following therefore the system is available only or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). menu will be used by the system. when his/her hands are on the steering

282 Driving wheel or with hands off only for a NOTE: if set applying steering torque and very limited amount of time. When • In case of wet road or raining vibration. Whenever the system is the system is enabled it will trigger conditions the function could be enable there will be graphic on the cluster warning in case at least one disabled by the system in order to dedicated screen in the driver assist hand is not detected on the steering minimize the risks. page and for the others it will be wheel. available in the left top corner of the • With lane boundaries it is mainly The torque application as well as the cluster screen. The graphic which referred to painted lines, vibration are suppressed/inhibited in intent is to represent at the glance the nevertheless the system in good case of: high driver torque in the system knowledge of the lane in front conditions might properly recognize steering wheel, high lateral of the car, the system suppression as valid lane boundaries also other acceleration, trailer connected to the status and warning. types (for example road edges, proper control module, hands not on For this a simple colour code has been curbs, etc..). the steering wheel detected for more adopted for each line (of the two than a certain time. Being this function used to prevent presented): High dynamic driving behaviors, unintentional lane change/lane drift, • Both grey lines means system is driving on the lane boundary or it will be temporary suppressed/ enabled, not able to operate driving off course will prevent the inhibited by a turn indicator (suppression condition present or 5 function from working. FCW braking activation, therefore, graphic warning, lane detection system not able to and stability system interventions (ESC, steering torque application and estimate properly the lane); ABS) will also prevent the system from vibration will be terminated. In this • Left/right grey line: the lane operating. Changing lane results in condition in case of a vehicle detected detection system is not able to system inhibition for a certain time. In by the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system detect that specific lane boundary; addition, the driver must respect some in the covered area on the proper road characteristics such as side, there can be the transition from • Yellow line: there is a steering minimum-maximum width, lanes LKA to Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) torque intervention in progress that clearly defined by two lane (if this latter is on and properly tries to prevent a departure on that boundaries and for a limited time, the configured). side, in this situation the warning presence of at least one lane should increase the driver attention boundary. Function Description and requiring him to properly handle the Operating Mode situation; Intent of the function is to prevent the • Yellow flashing line: the graphic is lane departure by warning the driver shown whenever the system detects through indication on the cluster and a very imminent lane departure, at

283 Driving

this can be added torque and steering vibration if configured by the customer. The white lines (one or both) indicates that the corresponding lane boundary is detected and the system is capable to intervene on it. An example of this screen, with only LKA system activated and with LKA and ACC systems activated, can be found in the following figures: A: with only LKA system activated, steering torque in progress to correct the trajectory towards the lane center; B: with LKA and ACC systems 5 activated, car is crossing the lane boundary, steering torque and vibration if configured are in progress when this graphic is shown. Driver Assist Page Non-Driver Assist Page The icons that represent the status of System Limitations the ADAS systems remain displayed Because of physical limits, in order to even when you exit the “Driver Assist” properly operate, the system needs screen. good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, etc.).

284 Driving

NOTE: • The presence of the hands on the WARNING! steering wheel is detected by a logic If the driver fails to adapt his/her combination of a capacitive sensor driving style, Lane Keeping Assist installed in the steering wheel and (LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an the measured applied torque at the accident nor override the laws of steering column. This leads to a physics. It cannot take into account more robust hands detection when road, weather or traffic conditions. hands are actually on the steering Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is wheel (at least one). always responsible for the distance to If message suggestion does not allow • The sensors are not able to detect the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, fixing the fault, do not use the system the presence of the hands on the for braking in good time and for and have the vehicle inspected at the steering wheel areas covered in staying in lane. wood, plastic bezels or carbon Authorized Maserati Dealer. inserts (where present). System in Fault Radar Device - Regulatory Sharp turns, slopes and change in When the LKA cannot properly Information 5 slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well operate due to a fault of its The “Regulatory Information” for all as construction areas and all the components or because the the radio frequency and radar devices scenario described in this paragraph windshield in front of the forward can be consulted by accessing the may challenge the system, therefore facing camera is dirty, the amber light "SERVICES" section on the website be always ready to prevent any and/or the corresponding message will www.maserati.com or by using the unexpected behaviour of the car. be displayed. specific tablet or smartphone apps. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as fault, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention.

285 Driving Blind Spot Assist – BSA vehicle is in any forward gear and The BSA system monitors the detection enters standby mode when the zones on both sides of the vehicle (without ACC) transmission is in (P) Park. when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or BSA System Operation higher and will alert the driver of The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses vehicles in these areas. two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (cars, WARNING! buses, motorbikes, etc.) that enter the • The BSA system does NOT alert the blind spot zones from the driver about rapidly approaching rear/front/side of the vehicle. vehicles that are outside the The example shown in the figure detection zones. highlights the blind spots on either side of the vehicle when oncoming The BSA detection zone shown in • The BSA might alert the driver too traffic is approaching from behind. figure covers approximately one lane late especially in case of rapidly on both sides of the vehicle approaching vehicles. 5 (approximately 11 ft or 3.3 m). The blind spot area extends from immediately behind the exterior rear-view mirrors up to about 23 ft (7 WARNING! m) behind the rear bumper. Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist (BSA). BSA does not detect/react to the following: • Overtaking vehicles close on the side, placing them in the blind spot When the vehicle is started, the BSA area. As a result, BSA may neither warning light will momentarily give warnings nor intervene in such illuminate in both outside rear view situations. mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational and on. The BSA system sensors operate when the

286 Driving

• Always pay attention to the traffic “BSA and RCP Setting” in this chapter Entering from the Rear situation and maintain a safe for further information. The alert will turn on when the distance at the side of the vehicle. The BSA system monitors the vehicles that come up from behind detection zone from three different your vehicle on either side and enter NOTE: entry points (side, rear, overtaking the rear detection zone with a relative If your vehicle has experienced any traffic) while driving to see if an alert speed of more than 27 mph (43 km/h). damage in the area where the sensor is necessary. The BSA system will issue is located, even if the fascia is not an alert whenever a vehicle enters any damaged, the sensor may have one detection zone as outlined below. become misaligned. Take your vehicle Speed Range of Use at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a Speed mph (km/h) sensor that is misaligned will result in Minimum 6 (10) the BSA not operating to specification. Engaged/activated 6 (10) The area on the rear bumper fascia Maximum – (–) where the radar sensors are located 5 must remain free of snow, ice, and Entering from the Side Overtaking Traffic dirt/road contamination so that the Vehicles that move into your adjacent The figures show the vehicle BSA system can function properly. Do lanes from either side of the vehicle. approaching (A) and passing (O) not cover or block the area of the rear another vehicle in the overtaking lane. bumper fascia where the radar sensors If you pass another vehicle slowly, the are located with foreign objects vehicle remains in the blind spot for (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle approximately 2 seconds, the BSA racks, etc.). warning light in the outside mirror The BSA system notifies the driver of will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. vehicles or objects in the detection If the difference in speed between the zones by illuminating the BSA warning two vehicles is greater, the warning light located in the outside mirrors in light will not illuminate. addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume (if the radio is on). Refer to

287 Driving

detect pedestrians, cyclists, or animals. • Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check your vehicle’s outside and rearview mirrors for any vehicles approaching from behind or overtaking. • Use your turn signal before changing lanes.

The BSA system will not alert you of RCP - Rear Cross Path objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is adjacent lanes. intended to aid the drivers when gear in reverse of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may 5 be blocked. The RCP system monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle. Using sensors located on either side of the rear bumper, it detects any Other Cases vehicles or objects that are moving The BSA system is not designed to toward the side of the vehicle with a issue an alert on stationary objects minimum speed of approximately 1 to such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h) to a heaps, berms, etc. However, maximum of approximately 10 mph occasionally the system may alert on (16 km/h), such as in parking lot such objects. This is normal operation WARNING! situations. and your vehicle does not require • The BSA system is only an aid to service. help detect vehicles in the blind spot zones. • The BSA system is not designed to

288 Driving

NOTE: specifically, it is intended to be used BSA in Visual Mode In a parking lot situation, oncoming to help a driver detect an oncoming When operating in “Visual” mode, the vehicles can be obscured by vehicles vehicle in a parking lot situation. BSA system will provide a visual alert parked on either side. If the sensors Drivers must be careful when backing in the appropriate side view mirror are blocked by other structures or up, even when using RCP. Always when it detects a vehicle or an object vehicles, the system will not be able to check carefully behind your vehicle, in the detection areas monitored by its alert the driver. look behind you, and be sure to check sensors: depending on the status of for pedestrians, animals, other the relative turn indicator, the Proceed slowly and cautiously out of vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots warning light can be fixed or flashing. the parking space until the rear end of before backing up. Failure to do so However, when the system is the vehicle is moderately exposed. can result in serious injury or death. operating in RCP mode, it will respond The RCP system will then have a clear with both visual and audible alerts view of the cross traffic. If an BSA and RCP Setting when an oncoming vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP object approaching the rear end side system will alert the driver using both Setting modes can be selected from of the vehicle is detected. the visual and audible alarms. If the the MTC+ System. Whenever an audible alert is radio is on, it will also reduce the Touch “Controls” soft-key and then requested, the radio is muted (if the 5 radio volume. “Blind Spot Assist” soft-key to enter the setting page. radio is on). BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode When operating in “Visual & Acoustic” mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected vehicle or object.

Refer to chapter “MTC+ “Controls” Screen” in section “Dashboard WARNING! Instruments and Controls” for further RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More information.

289 Driving

an audible alert is requested, the radio System is Faulty (if on) is also muted. The BSA system cannot properly Right/left turn/hazard signal status is operate due to a fault of its ignored; the RCP status always components, or because the area on requests the chime. the rear bumper fascia where the Blind Spot Assist Off radar sensors are located is dirty. In When this function is turned off from these cases the amber warning light the MTC+, there will be no visual or and the related message will be audible alerts from either the BSA or displayed on the instrument cluster. RCP subsystems. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on NOTE: that side of the vehicle, an audible The BSA system will store the current chime will also be sounded: in the operating mode when the vehicle is same moment the warning light will shut off. Each time the vehicle is start flashing. started, the previously-stored mode 5 Whenever a turn signal and detected will be recalled and used. vehicle or object are present on the same side at the same time, both the System Temporarily Unavailable visual and audio alerts will be issued. The blind spot system will become In these cases avoid using the system In addition to the audible alert, the temporarily unavailable and the radio volume will be reduced (if the and have the vehicle inspected at an instrument cluster display will show Authorized Maserati Dealer. radio is on). the message “Blind Spot Alert NOTE: Temporarily Unavailable” when the Radar Device - Regulatory vehicle enters a radio quite zone If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA Information (example the areas around radio system will issue the appropriate visual The “Regulatory Information” for all telescopes). alert only. the radio frequency and radar devices The warning light on the outside can be consulted by accessing the rear-view mirrors will be lit up and stay When the system is in RCP mode, the "SERVICES" section on the website lit until the vehicle exits the zone. system shall respond with both visual www.maserati.com or by using the and audible alerts when a detected specific tablet or smartphone apps. vehicle or object is present. Whenever

290 Driving Active Blind Spot Assist - available in the 37 - 112 mph (60 - Highly dynamic behaviours, driving on 180 km/h) speed interval. All the speed the lane boundary, off course will ABSA (optional, with ACC thresholds related to the BSA remain prevent the function from working. only) still valid, since ABSA as mentioned is FCW braking and stability system BSA extension. interventions (ESC, ABS) will also ABSA system is only available on ABSA is intended as a “hands-on” prevent the system from operating. vehicles equipped with ACC system function meaning that the driver is Changing lane results in system and represents an addition to the BSA required to stay engaged in the inhibition for a certain time. previously described (see chapter driving all the time with his/her hands In addition the road must respect "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" of this on the steering wheel, in case hands some characteristics such as minimum- section). are not on the steering wheel for a maximum width, lane clearly defined ABSA adds to the BSA the possibility in certain time there cannot be any by two lane boundaries and only in certain circumstances to avoid and or steering torque application vibration limited case for a limited time at least mitigate side collisions with vehicles included. one. proceeding in the adjacent lanes by changing the car trajectory in order to System Availability NOTE: try to keep it inside the detected/ ABSA is designed for an attentive • In case of wet road or raining 5 estimated lane. A steering wheel driver therefore the system is available conditions the function could be vibration is used as further feedback only when his/her hands are on the disabled by the system in order to to warn the driver that the lane steering wheel or with hands off for a minimize the risks. change is not safe. very limited amount of time. When • With lane boundaries it is mainly The main logic core is the front radar, the system is enabled, it will trigger referred to painted lines, whereas the sense inputs are the cluster warning in case at least one nevertheless the system in good radars on the rear bumper fascia used hand is not detected on the steering conditions might properly recognise for sensing the presence of vehicle in wheel. as valid lane boundaries also other the blind spot areas and the forward The torque application as well as the types (for example road edges, facing camera placed behind the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in curbs, etc..). internal rear-view mirror that instead case of: high driver torque in the is used for lane detection and steering wheel, high lateral estimation. acceleration, hands not on the ABSA is designed to help the driver to steering wheel detected for more than avoid mitigate a collision. Torque and a certain time. vibration application is however

291 Driving

Speed Range of Use ABSA Setting System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or ABSA is configurable by the customer Speed mph (km/h) "High". in order to maximize its efficiency Minimum 37 (60) based on the driver driving style and Engaged/activated 37 (60) his/her expectation of the system, Maximum 112 (180) reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Setting modes can be selected from System Limitation the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ Because of physical limits the system to "Controls" Screen" in section properly operate needs good visibility "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" (it might not work or not properly for further information). operate in case of heavy rain, snow, Touch "Controls" soft-key to display wet roads, fog, direct sun on the the current status of the ABSA system, NOTE: camera, dirty windshield, low if it was in the on state. The ABSA system will store the current illumination etc.) operating mode when the vehicle is 5 Sharp turns, slopes and change in shut off. Each time the vehicle is slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well started, the previously-stored mode as construction areas and all the will be recalled and used. scenarios described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore Meanings of Settings be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and Damaged front bumper, windshield of course ABSA is enabled, then two replaced without proper technical following menus will be used by the intervention may also lead to system system. malfunction or system unavailability. To change status, touch the "Active • "ABSA Sensitivity": it tunes the Other conditions such as faults, but Blind Spot Assist" soft-key. distance to the lane boundary where not explicitly indicated here may also To change the system setting, touch the system will start to apply steering prevent/interrupt the system the soft-key on the side. torque. Driver warnings can be only "Visual", intervention. • "ABSA Strength": it tunes the "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or steering torque value to have a "Visual & Haptic".

292 Driving

stronger or weaker trajectory • The presence of the hands on the When ABSA is turned off from MTC+ correction/deviation. steering wheel is detected by a logic "Controls" page, there will be no Blind Spot Assist in "Visual & Haptic" combination of a capacitive sensor visual or audible alerts from RCP Mode installed in the steering wheel and subsystem. the measured applied torque at the When ABSA is turned on with any When the system is on and configured steering column. This leads to a setting,RCP subsystem shall respond “Visual & Haptic” then the ABSA is more robust hands detection. with both visual and audible alerts enabled and to the conventional when a detected vehicle or object is visual warnings is added the steering present. Whenever an audible alert is torque and vibration. requested, the radio (if on) is also When operating in this mode, the WARNING! muted. system will provide a visual alert in the • Risk of accident despite steering Right/left turn/hazard signal status is appropriate outside rear-view mirror torque application of Active Blind ignored; the RCP status always when it detects a vehicle or an object Spot Assist (ABSA). requests the chime. in the detection areas monitored by its sensors. In case of turn indicator • A course-correcting steering torque System Temporarily application cannot always prevent a activation on the appropriate side, the Unavailable system will react with a torque on the collision. 5 The blind spot system will become steering wheel to try to prevent the • The driver is always required to temporarily unavailable and the lane change and therefore to steer, brake or accelerate themself, instrument cluster display will show avoid/mitigate the collision. The especially if ABSA warns or makes a the message “Blind Spot Alert torque on the steering is applied course correcting steer intervention. Temporarily Unavailable” when the when the car is very close to the lane • Always maintain a safe distance at vehicle enters a radio quite zone boundary as a further feedback to the sides. (example the areas around radio warn the driver of the unsafe • Steering torque application may be telescopes). maneuver. interrupted at any time by counter The warning light on the outside NOTE: steering by the driver. rear-view mirrors will be lit up and • The steering torque is not supplied if stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. RCP - Rear Cross Path the system is not able to estimate a System in Fault lane and if the turn indicator from Operation the appropriate side is not inserted. RCP operation is the same as described The ABSA system cannot properly in chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA". operate either due to a fault of its components, or because the area on

293 Driving windshield where the forward-facing Highway Assist – HAS vibrate and a graphic will display on camera is located or on the rear the instrument cluster. bumper fascia where the radar sensors (optional, with ACC only) are located is dirty. In these cases the The Highway Assist (HAS) is a level 2 amber warning light and the related Autonomy system (in reference to WARNING! message will be displayed on the NHTSA standards) that is designed to • In case the vehicle approaches a instrument cluster. aid the driver in the steering, curve that is too tight in relation to acceleration, and braking functions of the current speed the system will the vehicle. disengage, therefore the driver must HAS is designed to only function on be prepared to take over control of highways or limited access freeways. the vehicle immediately at any time. HAS centers the vehicle by controlling To avoid this situation it is important the EPS system based off of lane line that the vehicle speed is not set information from the forward-facing higher than the current speed limit camera and data from the front radar of the road. sensor. • Highway Assist (HAS) is a hands-on 5 feature! You must keep your hands In these cases do not use the system on the steering wheel at all times. and have the vehicle inspected at an The HAS system will disengage and Authorized Maserati Dealer. ACC will cancel if your hands are removed from the steering wheels Radar Device - Regulatory for a set amount of time. Information • HAS is intended for use only on The “Regulatory Information” for all highways or limited access freeways the radio frequency and radar devices with a fully attentive driver. When can be consulted by accessing the using HAS, hold the steering wheel "SERVICES" section on the website HAS combines ACC and LKA to and be aware of surrounding traffic www.maserati.com or by using the manage the steering and speed of the and road conditions. Always be specific tablet or smartphone apps. vehicle under specific conditions. The prepared to immediately take over conditions to engage HAS are listed in control of the vehicle from the HAS the next paragraph. If a lane line cross system. Failure to follow these is imminent, the steering wheel will

294 Driving

instructions could result in serious • Wet roads, roads covered or partially • Vehicle speed must be between 0 to injury or death. covered by snow. 90 mph (0 and 145 km/h). • The following list does not fully • Construction zones. • No faults in the forward facing represent all situations in which HAS camera, radar, EPS, or MTC+. HAS Operation may not function as intended. Do • Lane width between 3 to 4.6 yd (2.8 NOT solely rely on the HAS system With ACC set (see “Adaptive Cruise and 4.2 m). to control the vehicle. It is the Crontrol – ACC” in this section), HAS • Turn signal not activated. driver’s responsibility to stay alert system activates by simply pressing the • No faults related to this system. and safely control the vehicle at all button on the steering wheel. times. Once the conditions are met, HAS will Speed Range of Use • If the windshield is replaced, you engage. must have the forward-facing Speed mph (km/h) camera remounted and aligned by CAUTION! Minimum 0 (0) an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The Highway Assist (HAS) system may Engaged/activated 0 (0) Many factors can impact the take up to 5 seconds to engage once (with ACC engaged) performance of HAS causing the all conditions are met. Engaged/activated 18 (30) 5 system to be unable to function as (with ACC not The conditions for HAS to engage are intended. These include (but are not engaged) as follows: limited to): Maximum 90 (145) • HAS must be turned on or enabled. • Narrow, winding or curvy roads. • Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, NOTE: • If set above the maximum speed, snow, fog, etc.). In case of wet road or raining HAS will not function after the • Bright light (oncoming headlights or conditions the function could be vehicle speed will reach the direct sunlight) or shadows. disabled by the system in order to maximum speed. • Damage or obstruction caused by minimize the risks. • If set below the maximum speed and mud, ice, snow, etc. the ACC target speed is increased, • The vehicle must be on the highway HAS will function up to the • A damaged or misaligned bumper. or limited access freeway. maximum speed and then the system • Interference from other equipment • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must will turn off automatically. that generates electromagnetic be engaged. • When the ACC target speed is waves. • Left and right visible lane lines. reduce and speed is lower than the

295 Driving

maximum speed, the system will start automatically. • If the ACC target speed is set under the maximum speed, HAS is active and vehicle speed increases above the maximum speed due to slope, HAS will continue to function. HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster HAS and the other ADAS systems Driver Assist Page Driver Assist Page conditions can be monitored on When exiting the “Driver Assist” page, instrument cluster display by accessing the attention level colour will always the “Driver Assist” page with the be displayed until the system is buttons on the steering wheel (see disabled by pressing the button on “Instrument Cluster” in section the steering wheel. 5 “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The symbol in grey indicates that the HAS system is active, but not engaged and is shown at the centre of the TFT display when the “Driver Assist” page is displayed. When exiting Non-Driver Assist Page the "Driver Assist" page, on TFT In addition to these symbols, on the display top left corner, the grey TFT top and bottom edge a coloured symbol will appear in the multiple glow may appear (further referred to light of active ADAS systems. as "attention level colour"). Attention level colour together with the outline Non-Driver Assist Page of the symbol represent a further The HAS system uses sensors in the indication of the system status. steering wheel outer crown to detect if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel. If the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering

296 Driving wheel, the instrument cluster will In order to be able to use the HAS display a series of warnings to alert system, place your hands around the the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel outer crown. steering wheel. There will also be NOTE: audible chimes. After a set amount of time, HAS will cancel if the driver’s • The presence of the hands on the hands are not returned to the steering steering wheel is detected by a logic wheel. combination of a capacitive sensor When the system does not sense the installed in the steering wheel and hands on the steering wheel for a few the measured applied torque at the steering column. This leads to a seconds (3 – 5 seconds) or more (up to The yellow attention level colour more robust hands detection when 10 seconds), it tries to draw the appears when the driver removes hands are actually on the steering attention of the driver by showing, his/her hands from the steering wheel wheel (at least one). even when the display is not in the for 3 to 5 seconds and the symbol "Driver Assist" page, the symbol • The sensors are not able to detect with the figure of the hands will with the figure of the hands in the the presence of the hands on the occupy the whole central area of the centre of the display. According to steering wheel areas covered in display. 5 such time frames, the system will wood, plastic bezels or carbon change the attention level colour, inserts (where present). silence the audio in the vehicle (if it is HAS is deactivated if the steering active) and emit audible chimes to wheel is no longer being touched. invite the driver to take the control of the vehicle again. This is the only way System Statuses to reengage the system. The active status of the HAS system is Hands Detection on Steering indicated by the green attention level Wheel colour which is maintained even if the driver releases his/her grip from the The sensors in the steering wheel steering wheel up to 3 seconds. outer crown are able to detect the Driver Assist Page presence of the hands on the steering wheel.

297 Driving

Non-Driver Assist Page Non-Driver Assist Page If the driver keeps his/her hands away The red attention level colour appears The red attention level colour remains from the steering wheel (for more when the driver releases his/her grip even when the steering wheel is than 8 to 10 seconds), also the ACC from the steering wheel for 5 and up released for more than 8 to 10 system is deactivated ( white ACC to 10 seconds: in this case a single seconds. In this case, if you are symbol on the display) and will have to audible chime is repeated until he/she traveling at a speed above 25 mph be reset. The aid of LKA system will be 5 will take the control of the vehicle (40 km/h) a sequences of 3 audible disabled as well. In these cases the again. chimes will be emitted after 8 seconds display will not show the attention and a message will inform the driver level colour anymore and the vehicle that the HAS system has been will be controlled by the driver only. disengaged, inviting him/her to grip the steering wheel again. The same HAS Disengage will happen after 10 seconds if you To disengage HAS you can do any of travel at a speed below 25 mph the following actions: (40 km/h). Then the symbol on TFT • Press the HAS enable button on display will become grey. the steering wheel. • Begin steering manually. • Press brake pedal. Driver Assist Page • Turn off ACC. • Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt.

298 Driving

• Press ACC Gap button for two • The presence of the hands on the the drivers responsibility to keep seconds to enable CC system. steering wheel is detected by a logic control of the vehicle at all times. • Shift out of the (D) Drive gear. combination of a capacitive sensor • Enter an Autonomous Emergency installed in the steering wheel and Radar Device - Regulatory Braking (AEB) event (See chapter the measured applied torque at the Information "Forward Collision Warning - FCW" steering column. This leads to a more robust hands detection. The “Regulatory Information” for all in this section). the radio frequency and radar devices • Turn signal activated. can be consulted by accessing the System Limitations "SERVICES" section on the website System Cancellation HAS is unable to guide the vehicle www.maserati.com or by using the The HAS system will cancel (without when the following conditions occur. specific tablet or smartphone apps. driver intervention) if either of the • Lane markings are not clear or following actions occur: visibility is poor (i.e. heavy rain, • Curve that is too tight. snow, fog, etc.). • When leaving the grip of the hands • Obstructed, covered or damaged on the steering wheel. forward-facing camera or sensor. 5 • Vehicle exits the highway or limited • When driving on hills or sharp access freeway. curves. • Lane line markers aren’t detected by • When approaching toll booths. the forward facing camera. • When the highway entrance or exit • Any ADAS system faults. is wider than 20 ft (6 meters). • ACC cancellation. • Bright light (ex. direct sunlight or • Vehicle speed exceeds the maximum glare) facing the forward camera. limit. • Lateral accelerations exceeds the limits. WARNING! Many unforeseen conditions can occur NOTE: that can affect the performance of • When HAS cancels, the symbol Highway Assist (HAS). Always keep will turn red then grey. this in mind and drive attentively. It is

299 Driving

• The performance of TSA depends on Traffic Sign Assist – TSA 1 Conditioned speed limit area. the update degree of navigation (optional) system’s maps. 2 Unconditioned speed limit area. TSA detects traffic signs through the use of a forward-facing digital camera Setting and Signs Monitoring mounted on windshield, behind the on Instrument Cluster rear-view mirror. TSA assists the driver To set TSA feature touch “Controls” by displaying on the instrument cluster soft-key on MTC+ display and then detected speed limits and traffic signs “Traffic Sign Assist” soft-key. The blue with a restriction indicated by an color of the soft-key outline will additional sign (e.g. in snow indicate that the feature is set. conditions). TSA also uses the data of the navigation system, in order to provide information to the driver in all cases in which the camera is not able NOTE: to detect the traffic signs that are Overtaking restriction signs are not present on the road where the car is 5 displayed by the TSA system. travelling. Some examples of these are: due to When the visual warning is provided low visibility, light reflection, damaged only the unconditioned speed limit (in traffic signs, traffic signs in wrong sector 2) will start blinking if the position like rotated or fallen poles. vehicle speed is greater than 1 mph Touch the soft-key again to turn off - km/h. If the vehicle speed stays above NOTE: TSA feature. the unconditioned speed limit of • Overtaking restriction signs are not If TSA feature is set and a signs or a 1 mph - km/h for several seconds the displayed by the TSA system. speed limit is detected, the related unconditioned speed limit sign will • TSA provides a visual warning to the icons are displayed in the upper area stop blinking because the maneuver is driver when he/she unintentionally of the instrument cluster beside of the evaluated as intentional. If the TSA is exceeds the maximum speed allowed main menu number and scroll arrows. not able to determine any kind of by 2 mph - km/h. The display area is divided in two valid speed limit neither from camera different sectors: nor from digital maps the following image will be shown in sector 2.

300 Driving Since TSA also uses the data provided • If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. Tires - General by the navigation system, it can traffic signs on construction sites or update the sector 2 of the display in in adjacent lanes. Information the following situations without • When passing buses or trucks with a Tire Safety Information detecting traffic signs: speed sticker. • When the vehicle changes road. Tire Markings • Highway enter/exit. • Urban area stored in the digital map enter/exit. System Limitations TSA may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade 5 conditions or in rain, snow or fog. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming 1. U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code traffic, direct sunlight or reflections (TIN). from other vehicles. 2. Size Designation. • If the windshield in the area of the 3. Service Description. camera is dirty, or if the camera is 4. Maximum Pressure and Maximum fogged up, damaged or covered. Load. • If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because 5. Treadwear, Traction and they are covered or because of Temperature Grades (see insufficient lighting. “Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades” in • If the information in the navigation this section). system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.

301 Driving

Tire Sizing Chart Service Description: EXAMPLE: P265/50 ZR19 (100Y) XL or 265/50 ZR19 (Y100) XL 100 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum Size Designation: load a tire can carry P = Passenger car tire size based on Y = Speed Symbol — A symbol U.S. design standards indicating the range of speeds at “...blank...” = Passenger car tire which a tire can carry a load based on European design standards corresponding to its load index 265 = Section width in millimeters under certain operating conditions. (mm) The maximum speed corresponding Tire Identification Number (TIN) to the speed symbol should only be The TIN may be found on one or both 50 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — achieved under specified operating sides of the tire, however the date Ratio of section height to section conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle code may only be on one side. Tires width of tire loading, road conditions, and posted with white sidewalls will have the full ZR = Construction Code speed limits) TIN, including the date code, located • Z: means a tire usable at speeds 5 on the white sidewall side of the tire. greater than 150 mph (240 km/h) Look for the TIN on the outboard side • R: means radial construction Load Identification: of black sidewall tires as mounted on “...blank...” = Absence of any text on 19 = Rim diameter in inches (in) the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the sidewall of the tire indicates a the outboard side, then you will find it Standard Load (SL) tire on the inboard side of the tire. XL = Extra Load (or reinforced) tire LL = Light Load tire

302 Driving

Loading EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0313 The vehicle maximum load on the tire DOT = Department of Transportation must not exceed the load carrying — This symbol certifies that the tire capacity of the tire on your vehicle. is in compliance with the U.S. You will not exceed the tire's load Department of Transportation tire carrying capacity if you adhere to the safety standards and is approved for loading conditions, tire size, and cold highway use. tire inflation pressures specified on MA = Code representing the tire the “Tire and Loading Information manufacturing location (two digits). Label” and in the “Features and L9 = Code representing the tire size Tire Information Label Specifications” section. (two digits). NOTE: ABCD = Code used by the tire Under a maximum loaded vehicle manufacturer (one to four digits). condition, gross axle weight ratings 03 = Number representing the week (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles in which the tire was manufactured must not be exceeded. 5 (two digits). In this case, 03 means the 3rd week. Tires 13 = Number representing the year Driving over rough or damaged road in which the tire was manufactured surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and (two digits). In this case, 13 means other obstacles can cause serious the year 2013. Loading Information Label damage to wheels, tires, and The labels tells you important suspension parts. Tire and Loading Information Label information about the: This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less • Cold tire inflation pressures for the The proper cold tire inflation pressure cushioning between the wheel and front, rear, and spare tires. and the loading information are listed the road. in two labels on the driver's side rear • Number of people that can be Be careful to avoid road hazards and door pillar. carried in the vehicle. reduce your speed, especially if your • Total weight the vehicle can carry. vehicle is equipped with low profile • Tire size designed for the vehicle. tires.

303 Driving

relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high upon the actual conditions of their temperature can cause the material of WARNING! use, however, and may depart the tire to degenerate and reduce tire Overloading of your tires is significantly from the norm due to life, and excessive temperature can dangerous. Overloading can cause tire variations in driving habits, service lead to sudden tire failure. The grade failure, affect vehicle handling, and practices, and differences in road C corresponds to a level of increase the stopping distance. Use characteristics and climate. performance, which all passenger car tires of the recommended load Traction Grades tires must meet under the Federal capacity for your vehicle. Never Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. overload them. The Traction grades, from highest to 109. Grades B and A represent higher lowest, are AAA, A, B, and C. These levels of performance on the Department of Transportation grades represent the tire's ability to laboratory test wheel, than the Uniform Tire Quality Grades stop on wet pavement, as measured minimum required by law. under controlled conditions on The following tire grading categories specified government test surfaces of were established by the National asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C Highway Traffic Safety Administration. may have poor traction performance. WARNING! 5 The specific grade rating assigned by The temperature grade for this tire is the tire's manufacturer in each established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive category is shown on the sidewall of WARNING! the tires on your vehicle. speed, under-inflation, or excessive The traction grade assigned to this tire All passenger car tires must conform to loading, either separately or in is based on straight-ahead braking Federal safety requirements in combination, can cause heat buildup traction tests, and does not include addition to these grades. and possible tire failure. acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, Treadwear or peak traction characteristics. Tire Pressure The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the Temperature Grades Proper tire inflation pressure is tire when tested under controlled The temperature grades are A (the essential for safety and best conditions on a specified government highest), B, and C, representing the performance of your vehicle. The tire test course. For example, a tire graded tire's resistance to the generation of pressure monitoring system “TPMS” 150 would wear one and one-half heat and its ability to dissipate heat, setup on the vehicle (see “Tire Pressure times as well on the government when tested under controlled Monitoring System” in this section) course as a tire graded 100. The conditions on a specified indoor may alert the driver about insufficient

304 Driving tire pressure even though the driver is the vehicle to drift to the right or after the vehicle has not been driven responsible for regularly checking the left. for at least three hours, or driven less tire pressure. • Always drive with each tire inflated than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may to the recommended cold tire period. look properly inflated even when they inflation pressure. Check tire pressures more often in actually are under inflated. Do not case of significant outside make a visual judgment when Economy temperature changes, as tire pressure determining proper inflation. Improper inflation pressures may varies according to temperature Three primary driving aspects are cause uneven wear patterns to changes. affected by improper tire pressure: develop across the tire tread. These The pressure should be checked and if Safety abnormal wear patterns will reduce necessary adjusted; tire wear and tread life resulting in a need for overall conditions should also be earlier tire replacement. Under- checked monthly. Tire pressures inflation also increases tire rolling change by approximately 1 PSI (0.07 WARNING! resistance resulting in higher fuel bar) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature • Improperly inflated tires can be consumption. change. Keep this in mind when dangerous. checking tire pressure inside a garage, Ride comfort and vehicle stability 5 • Under-inflation increases tire flexing especially in winter. Proper tire inflation contributes to a and can result in tire overheating. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F comfortable ride. Over-inflation (20°C) and the outside temperature = • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability produces a jarring and uncomfortable 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation to cushion shock. Objects on the ride. road and potholes can cause pressure should be increased by 3 PSI damage that results in tire failure. Tire Pressure Checkup (0.21 bar) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires The proper cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 can affect vehicle handling and can is indicated on the driver's side rear PSI (0.13 to 0.4 bar) during operation. fail suddenly, resulting in loss of door pillar and on the table “Tire DO NOT reduce this normal pressure vehicle control. Inflation Pressure” in section build-up or your tire pressure will be • Unequal tire pressures can cause “Features and Specifications”. too low. After inspecting or adjusting steering problems. Inflation pressure specified on the the tire pressure, always reinstall the table always refers to “cold tire • Unequal tire pressures from one side valve stem cap. This will prevent inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation of the vehicle to the other can cause moisture and dirt from entering the pressure is defined as the tire pressure valve stem, which could damage the

305 Driving

valve stem and the TPMS sensor NOTE: connected to it. Maserati recommends Maserati WARNING! Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” Tread Wear Indicators Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) logo specifically designed for its should be replaced after six years, Tread wear indicators are in the models. original equipment tires to help you regardless of the remaining tread. determine when your tires should be Failure to follow this warning could It is recommended to replace the two replaced. result in tire failure. front tires or two rear tires as a pair. These indicators are molded into the Replacing just one tire can seriously bottom of the tread grooves. Replacement Tires affect your vehicle’s handling. When the tread is worn to one of the If you ever replace a wheel assembly, NOTE: tread wear indicators, the tire should make sure that the wheel’s be replaced. In order to maintain high performance specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and and safety level under all driving tire) match those of the original conditions, Maserati strongly wheels. Failure to use equivalent recommends to use tires equivalent to replacement tires may adversely affect WARNING! the originals in size, quality and the safety, handling, and ride of your 5 The wet performance (aquaplaning performance when replacement is vehicle. resistance) will decrease needed. Your Authorized Maserati Dealer is proportionally to the thickness of the available to provide suggestions as to tread. For the size designation of your tire the types of tires most suited to the see the label on the driver's side rear use foreseen by the Customer. Tires Durability door pillar or see table “Wheels” in The service life of a tire depends on section “Features and Specifications”. various factors including, but not The “Load Index” and “Speed Symbol” WARNING! limited to: for your tire will be found on the • Do not use a tire, wheel size or original equipment tire sidewall. • driving style; rating other than that specified for • tire pressure; your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may • distance driven. change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in altered steering,

306 Driving

handling, and braking operations of Winter Tires NOTE: the vehicle. This can cause These tires are specially designed for Snow tires should have the same load unpredictable handling and stress to driving on snow and ice and are fitted capacity as original equipment tires steering and suspension to replace the ones supplied with the and should be mounted on all four components. Use only the tire and vehicle. Winter or all-season tires can wheels. wheel sizes with load ratings be identified by the M+S (Mud & appointed for your vehicle. Snow) or 3PMSF (3 Peaks Mountain Snow Chains • Never use a tire with a smaller load Snow Flake) designation on the tire index or capacity, other than what Maserati approved traction devices (or sidewall. snow chains) may be used to improve was originally equipped on your Before mounting winter tires, contact vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller traction on compacted snow in heavy an Authorized Maserati Dealer to snow conditions. load index could result in tire receive the technical information overloading and failure. They should not be used in off-road necessary to advise you on wheel and conditions where there is no • Always check the maximum speed tire compatibility. compacted snow. rating on the tire sidewall on any As to the type of tires to use, inflation Maserati tested and recommends to tire on the vehicle. pressures and winter tires use traction devices with air 5 • Never exceed the maximum speed specifications, carefully follow the suspension system in “Off Road 1” or rating of the tires. Risk of accident indications as reported in the “Off Road 2” ride height in order to and serious personal injury due to “Technical Data” and “Tire Inflation increase wheel clearance. excessive speed. Pressure” chapters in section “Features In any case do not exceed 30 mph and Specifications”. • Failure to equip your vehicle with (50 km/h). tires having adequate speed Please contact an Authorized Maserati capability can result in tire failure. Dealer for further information. WARNING! The chains may be fitted only on rear The standard tires profile and rubber wheel tires. mixture are optimized for wet and dry Check the snow chain tension after CAUTION! driving conditions. Standard tires may driving for a distance of about 55 yd Replacing original tires with tires of a not prove favorable for snow (50 m) with the chains fitted. different size may result in false conditions. With the snow chains fitted, it is speedometer and odometer readings. advisable to deactivate the ESC system (see chapter “Drive Mode” in this section).

307 Driving

used when vehicle must be lifted to Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle change one or several wheels/tires. handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as CAUTION! This mode temporarily disables possible the original equipment tire • The use of non-recommended snow pneumatic suspension automatic and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not chains may damage the vehicle. leveling. install more than one compact spare • Broken snow chains can cause serious To activate this mode, scroll user tire and wheel on the vehicle at a damage. Stop the vehicle settings on MTC+ and select “Wheel time. immediately if noise occurs that Replacement Mode” in submenu could indicate snow chain breakage. “Suspension”. The tick next to selected Replace the damaged parts of the item will indicate that this mode is WARNING! snow chain before further use. active and system is disabled (for With these compact spare tires, do not further details, refer to chapter “MTC+ • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Settings” in section “Dashboard • Drive cautiously and avoid severe Temporary use spares have limited Instruments and Controls”). tread life. turns and large bumps, especially After servicing, restore original with a loaded vehicle. conditions and eliminate the tick next 5 • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive to selected mode: in this way the over steps or sidewalks and do not pneumatic suspension system will go drive on long stretches without back to normal operation. snow. This will prevent damage to the vehicle and the roadbed. Compact Spare Tire The limited-use spare tire, or compact NOTE: spare tire, is for temporary emergency The Authorized Maserati Dealer can use only. provide you with all information about This tire is identified by a label the Maserati Snow Chains, available in indicating the driving speed limitations the "Genuine Accessories" range. to comply with when using the spare tire. Pneumatic Suspension Mode Inflate the spare tire to the cold for Wheel Change inflation pressure listed on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section The pneumatic suspension system is “Features and Specifications”. equipped with a specific mode to be

308 Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring off until the tire pressure is equal or above the recommended cold System (TPMS) inflation pressure. Once the low tire The Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure warning light illuminates, (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low you must increase the tire pressure to tire pressure according to the vehicle the recommended cold inflation recommended cold pressure indicated pressure in order for the TPMS light on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” to turn off. The system will in section “Features and automatically update and the TPMS Specifications” and on the label light will turn off once the system applied on the driver's side rear door acquires the correct tire pressure. pillar. The vehicle may need to be driven for Tire pressure should always be set up to 20 minutes above 15 mph WARNING! based on cold inflation tire pressure. (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to The TPMS warns the driver that the The cold tire inflation pressure must acquire and process the updated tire pressure has decreased. This not exceed the maximum inflation setting. warning does not exempt the driver pressure molded into the tire sidewall. from periodically checking the tires 5 Check “Tires – General Information” in and from complying with the section “Driving” for information on prescribed tire pressure levels. how to properly inflate the tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal CAUTION! and there is no adjustment required • The TPMS has been optimized for when this occurs. the original equipment tires and The TPMS will warn the driver of a low wheels. TPMS pressures and tire pressure if the tire pressure falls warning have been established for below the low-pressure warning limit the tire size equipped on your for any reason, including low vehicle. Undesirable system temperature effects and natural operation or sensor damage may pressure loss of the tire. occur when using replacement equipment that is not of the same The TPMS will continue to warn the size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn (Continued)

309 Driving

(Continued) • Seasonal temperature changes will wheels can cause sensor damage. Do affect tire pressure, and the TPMS not use aftermarket tire sealants or will monitor the actual tire pressure balance beads if your vehicle is in the tire. equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • The system can temporarily Premium System experience radio-electric The TPMS system uses wireless interference emitted by devices technology with wheel rim mounted using similar frequencies. electronic sensors to monitor tire • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to pressure, always reinstall the valve each wheel as part of the valve stem The instrument cluster will also display stem cap. This will prevent moisture transmit tire pressure readings to the a screenshot reporting the pressure and dirt from entering the valve receiver module. values of each tire with flashing low stem and damage the TPMS internal pressure value. sensor. The TPMS consists of the following components: 5 NOTE: • receiver module; • Driving on a significantly • four TPMS sensors; underinflated tire causes the tire to • various TPMS messages, which overheat and may lead to tire failure. display on the instrument cluster; Under-inflation also reduces fuel • warning light . efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and Tire Pressure Low Warning stopping ability. The TPMS light will illuminate in • The TPMS is not a substitute for the instrument cluster and an acoustic proper tire maintenance, and it is the signal will notify that tire pressure is Should this occur, you should stop as driver’s responsibility to maintain low in one or more of the four tires. soon as possible and inflate the tire/s correct tire pressure using an with the low pressure (the one/s accurate tire pressure gage, even if flashing in the instrument cluster under-inflation has not reached the graphic) to the recommended cold level to trigger illumination of the pressure inflation value. Once the TPMS light . system receives the updated tire pressure value, the system will

310 Driving automatically update, the graphic emitting the same radio frequencies display in the instrument cluster will as the TPMS sensors. stop flashing, and the TPMS light • Installing aftermarket window will turn off. The vehicle may need tinting that contains materials that to be driven for up to 20 minutes may block radio wave signals. above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for • Accumulation of snow or ice around the TPMS to acquire and process the the wheels or wheel housings. updated information. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. Tire Pressure System Fault • Using wheels/tires not equipped If a system fault is detected, the TPMS with TPMS sensors. light will flash for 75 seconds and The instrument cluster will also display then remain lit followed by a beeping a "Service Tire Pressure System" sound. Therewith, the instrument message for a minimum of five cluster will display a "Service Tire seconds when a system fault related to Pressure System" message for a an incorrect sensor location fault is minimum of five seconds and then detected. In this case, the "Service Tire display dashes (--) in place of the Pressure System" message is then 5 pressure value to indicate which followed by a graphic display with sensor is ineffective. pressure values still shown. This If the ignition switch is cycled, the indicates that the pressure values are sequence will repeat, in case the still being received from the TPMS Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire system fault still persists. If the system sensors but they may not be located in fault no longer exists, the TPMS light the correct vehicle position. The • The compact spare tire does not will no longer flash, and the system still needs to be serviced as have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the "Service Tire Pressure System" long as the "Service Tire Pressure TPMS will not monitor the pressure message will no longer be displayed, System" message is displayed. of the compact spare tire. and a pressure value will be displayed • If you replace a tire having pressure in place of the dashes. below the low-pressure warning A system fault can occur due to any of limit, with the compact spare tire, on the following: the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS light will illuminate • Signal interference due to electronic followed by a beeping sound. In devices or driving next to facilities

311 Driving

addition, the graphic in the dashes (--) in place of the pressure assemblies. After replacing all four instrument cluster will still display a value. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) flashing pressure value with tires not equipped with Tire corresponding to the compact tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors, position. drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next • Once you repair, replace or reinstall a ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no tire with the compact spare tire, the longer chime or display the “Service TPMS will update automatically. The Tire Pressure System” message in the TPMS light will turn OFF and the 5 • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 instrument cluster but dashes (--) will minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the graphic in the instrument cluster will remain in place of the pressure values. TPMS light will flash for 75 display a new pressure value instead seconds and then remain lit. The of dashes (--), as long as no tire instrument cluster will then display a pressure is below the low-pressure "Service Tire Pressure System" warning limit in any of the four tires. message for a minimum of five The vehicle may need to be driven seconds and then display dashes (--) for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph in place of the pressure value. (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to • Each subsequent ignition switch cycle acquire and process the updated will be followed by a beeping sound, information. the TPMS light will flash for 75 TPMS Deactivation seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a The TPMS can be deactivated if To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four "Service Tire Pressure System" replacing all four tire rims with wheel wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) message for a minimum of five and tire assemblies not using of TPMS with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. seconds and subsequently displays sensors, such as winter wheel and tire Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

312 Driving minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The Fuel Requirements TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then The engines are designed to meet all CAUTION! turn off. The instrument cluster will environmental regulations and • Maserati strongly recommends the then display the “Service Tire Pressure provide excellent fuel economy and use of Premium unleaded fuel ONLY. System” message. performance when using unleaded Use of lesser grade fuel (other than premium gasoline with an AKI octane Premium) will lead to reduced rating of 91 or above. AKI (Anti Knock engine performance, and poor fuel Index) is an average on the Research economy and can lead to the Octane Number, RON, and the Motor Malfunction Indicator Light Octane Number, MON (RON + MON/2 illuminating on the instrument gives you the AKI). cluster. Continued use of lesser grade For vehicle top performance, use fuel (other than Premium fuel) can unleaded premium gasoline with no lead to engine misfire problems and less than 93 minimum AKI octane possible catalytic converter damage. rating. • The anti-pollution devices of the Poor quality gasoline can cause vehicle require unleaded fuel to be 5 The instrument cluster will also display problems such as hard starting, used at all times. Under no pressure values in place of the dashes stalling, and hesitations. If you circumstance, not even in an (--). On the next ignition switch cycle experience these symptoms, try emergency, should leaded fuel be the “Service Tire Pressure System” another brand of gasoline before supplied to the fuel tank, not even a message will no longer be displayed as considering service for the vehicle at minimum quantity. This would long as no system fault exists. an Authorized Maserati Dealer. irreparably damage the catalytic Besides using unleaded gasoline with Radio Frequency Device - converters. An inefficient catalytic the proper octane rating, gasoline Regulatory Information converter results in noxious exhaust that contain detergents, anti-corrosion emissions which damage the The “Regulatory Information” for all and stability additives are environment. the radio frequency and radar devices recommended. Using gasoline that can be consulted by accessing the have these additives may help improve "SERVICES" section on the website fuel economy, reduce emissions, and Reformulated Gasoline www.maserati.com or by using the maintain vehicle performance. Many areas of the country require the specific tablet or smartphone apps. use of cleaner burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated

313 Driving

Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline Problems that result from using Materials Added to Fuel contains oxygenates and are gasoline containing Methanol or All gasoline sold in the United States is specifically blended to reduce vehicle gasoline containing more than 10% required to contain effective emissions and improve air quality. Ethanol are not the responsibility of detergent additives. Use of additional Maserati supports the use of Maserati and may not be covered detergents or other additives is not reformulated gasoline. Properly under warranty. needed under normal conditions and blended reformulated gasoline will they would result in additional cost. provide excellent performance and MMT in Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add durability of engine and fuel system MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl anything to the fuel. components. Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic Fuel System Warnings Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends additive that is blended into some Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline to increase octane. gasoline with oxygenates such as Gasoline blended with MMT provides WARNING! Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates no performance advantage beyond Follow these guidelines to maintain may be used in your vehicle. gasoline of the same octane number your vehicle's performance: 5 without MMT. Maserati recommends gasoline • The use of leaded gasoline is CAUTION! without MMT to be used in your prohibited by Federal and Provincial DO NOT use gasoline containing vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline law. Using leaded gasoline can Methanol or gasoline containing more may not be indicated on the gasoline impair engine performance and than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends pump; therefore, you should ask the damage the emissions control may result in starting and driveability gasoline station operator whether or system. problems, damage critical fuel system not the gasoline contains MMT. • The use of fuel additives, which are components, cause emissions to exceed It is even more important to look for now being sold as octane enhancers, the applicable standard, and/or cause gasoline without MMT in Canada, is not recommended. Most of these the Malfunction Indicator Light to because MMT can be used at levels products contain high concentrations illuminate (see “Instrument Cluster” in higher than those allowed in the of methanol. Fuel system damage or section “Dashboard Instruments and United States. MMT is prohibited in vehicle performance problems Controls”. Pump labels should clearly Federal and California reformulated resulting from the use of such fuels communicate if a fuel contains greater gasoline. or additives is not the responsibility than 10% Ethanol. of Maserati.

314 Driving NOTE: abnormal conditions repaired Refueling Intentional tampering with the promptly. Until repaired, drive with emissions control system can result in all side windows fully open. Fuel Filler Neck Access civil penalties civil penalties and could To access the fuel filler neck, the filler void the vehicle warranty. door must be unlocked. From outside WARNING! the vehicle, this can only be done by Carbon Monoxide Warnings California Proposition 65 pressing the unlock or the lock Operating, servicing and maintaining button on the key fob RKE a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle transmitter, in the same way as if WARNING! can expose you to chemicals including opening or closing the doors. If any of Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust such as, engine exhaust, carbon the door lock controls is pressed from gases is deadly. Follow the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that inside the vehicle, the filler door will precautions below to prevent carbon which are know to the State of still remain open to allow refueling. monoxide poisoning: California to cause cancer and birth • Press the indicated area on the filler • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They defects or other reproductive harm. To door, which is located on the rear contain carbon monoxide, a minimize exposure, avoid breathing left side of the vehicle: the filler 5 colorless and odorless gas, which exhaust, do not idle the engine except door will open completely. can kill. Never run the engine in a as necessary, service your vehicle in a closed area, such as a garage, and well-ventilated area and wear gloves never sit in a parked vehicle with or wash your hands frequently when the engine running for an extended servicing your vehicle. For more period. If the vehicle is stopped in information go to: an open area with the engine www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- running for more than a short vehicle period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide Refill the Tank with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time The fuel filler neck is provided with the vehicle is raised. Have any external cap.

315 Driving

• Rotate counterclockwise and remove • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the clicks. After the two additional clicks, the fuel filler cap. The cap hermetic filler. the amount of fuel allowed by the seal may result in a slight pressure system is very low, we recommend increase inside the tank. Any hissing therefore not to persist further. noise while the cap is being opened WARNING! • Wait approximately 10 seconds is therefore completely normal. The • To avoid the risk of fire, do not before removing the fuel nozzle in cap is linked to the filler neck with a approach the filler with open flames order to ensure completed supply of strap, to prevent it from being lost or cigarettes! residual fuel and restrict the risk of while refueling. fouling the fuel filler door area. • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the • Remove the fuel nozzle. fuel filler door, when opened. • Insert the cap on the fuel filler neck. • Never have any smoking materials lit • Tighten the cap, turning it clockwise in or near the vehicle when the fuel until it stops. filler door is open or the tank is • Close the fuel filler door. being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is 5 CAUTION! running. This violates most To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, fire-prevention regulations and may do not “top off” the fuel tank after cause the Malfunction Indicator • When refueling, place the cap in the filling. Light to turn on (see “Instrument proper seat on the filler door hinge. Cluster” in section “Dashboard Emergency Refueling Funnel Instruments and Controls”). A funnel is provided (in the trunk in the tool box container) for emergency • Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank refueling with a gas can. capacity is indicated in the “Refillings” table in section “Features and Specifications”. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is possible to further ensure refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until two

316 Driving

Fuel Filler Cap Open Warning Light After refueling the car performs a check of the fuel filler cap and the amber warning light on the TFT display comes on if it is not correctly closed, after approximately 10 minutes also depending on driving conditions. If the problem is in the fuel system, the Malfunction Indicator Light • Pull the release cable moderately to also comes on. avoid its possible break. It's not If the fuel filler cap is locked and the possible to feel or hear the issue remains in the system, at the unlocking of the fuel filler door next engine start only the Malfunction actuator. Indicator Light comes on. In this case, contact an Authorized Maserati 5 Dealer. Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to unlock the fuel WARNING! filler door using the key fob RKE A fire may result if fuel is pumped transmitter, use the fuel filler door into a portable container that is inside emergency release located in the of a vehicle. You could be burned. trunk. • Then open normally the fuel filler Always place gas containers outside • Open the power liftgate (see “Power door. the vehicle while filling. Liftgate Operation” in section “Before Starting”). • Lift the access cover on the left side of the trunk.

317 Driving Driving Conditions from moving forward in case of • Reduce your speed, especially on sudden stops; roads with no streetlights. Before the Trip • avoid heavy meals before a trip. A • Stop at early signs of drowsiness. light snack helps keep your reflexes Continuing to drive would be a risk Check the following at regular sharp. In particular, avoid drinking for yourself and for others. Have a intervals and always before long trips: alcohol. rest before continuing your trip. • tire pressure and condition; • Keep the vehicle at a greater • levels of fluids and lubricants; distance from vehicles in front of you • conditions of the windshield wiper WARNING! than you would during the day: it is blades; Passengers must only travel seated in difficult to assess the speed of other • clean the glass on the external light the vehicle seats, with the seat belts vehicles when you only see the lights. and all other glass surfaces; fastened. Always check that the driver • Use the high beams only outside of • proper operation of the indicator and all passengers have the seat belts densely-populated areas and when lights and of the external lights. correctly fastened. you are sure that they will not disturb other drivers. Safe Driving • When another vehicle is 5 CAUTION! approaching, switch from high Although the vehicle is equipped with It is however advisable to perform beams (if on) to low beams. active and passive safety devices, the these checks at least every 600 mi • Keep lights and headlights clean. (1000 km) and always following the driver's conduct is always a decisive • Outside of densely-populated areas, maintenance schedule reported in factor for road safety. beware of animals crossing the road. section “Maintenance and Care”. Some simple rules for traveling safely in different conditions are listed Driving in the Rain Before you drive: below. Some of them will probably already sound familiar but, in any case, Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On • adjust seat position, steering wheel, a wet road all maneuvers are more adjustable pedals (if equipped with) it would be useful to read them carefully. difficult since wheel grip on the road is and rearview mirrors in order to have significantly reduced. This means that the best driving position; Driving at Night braking distances increase considerably • ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) The main guidelines to follow when and road grip decreases. is obstructing the pedals movement; driving at night are set out below. Some advices for driving in the rain are • carefully arrange and secure any listed below. • Drive carefully. Night conditions objects in the trunk, to prevent them demand more focus and attention.

318 Driving

• Reduce your speed and keep a Driving in Fog greater safety distance from the If the fog is dense, avoid traveling if CAUTION! vehicles in front of you. High speed possible. Be aware that rear fog lights can may result in a loss of vehicle When driving in mist, blanket fog or bother the drivers following your control. when there is the possibility of banks vehicle: when visibility is back to • When driving on wet or slushy roads, of fog, please consider some advices normal, turn off these lights. it is possible for a wedge of water to listed below. build up between the tire and road • Keep a moderate speed. Driving in the Mountains surface. This is known as aquaplaning and may cause partial • Even in daytime, turn on the low Mountain roads usually have many or complete loss of vehicle control beams and front and rear fog lights. narrow turns and curves, tunnels and and stopping ability. To reduce this Do not use the high beams. steep uphill or downhill slopes: please possibility: slow down if the road has • Remember that fog creates consider some advices listed below. standing water or puddles. dampness on the asphalt and thus • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid • Heavy rain substantially reduces any type of maneuver is more “cutting” corners. difficult and braking distances are visibility. In these circumstances, even • When driving inside a tunnel in extended. during the day, turn on the low daylight turn on the low beams in 5 beams, to be more visible to other • Keep a safe distance from the advance; avoid high beams and be drivers. vehicle in front of you. aware of the rapid brightness • Set the air conditioning and heating • Avoid sudden changes in speed as change. Avoid abrupt maneuvers system controls on the defogging much as possible. that could be dangerous for the function, in order to avoid any • Whenever possible, avoid following vehicle. visibility problem. overtaking. • Never coast downhill with the • Periodically check the conditions of • If you are forced to stop the vehicle engine off or in neutral. the windshield wiper blades. (breakdowns, impossibility of • Remember that passing other • In low grip conditions use “I.C.E.” proceeding due to poor visibility, vehicles when driving uphill is slower driving mode (see chapters “Drive etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the and thus requires more free distance Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in this travel lane. Then turn on the hazard on the road. If you are being section). warning flashers and, if possible, the overtaken on a hill, slow down and low beams. allow the other vehicle to pass.

319 Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Trailer Towing (GAWR) and the mass that the vehicle Please consider some general advice is rated to tow (GTW) specified on the In this section you will find safety tips for driving in these conditions, listed nameplate located on the rear of the and information on limits to the type below. drivers door opening. of towing you can reasonably do with • Maintain a very moderate speed. your vehicle. • Fit snow chains or specific tires if the NOTE: WARNING! road is covered with snow: see the • Using original Maserati equipment It is important that you do not exceed paragraphs “Tires – General offers an advantage, in terms of the maximum allowed overall GVWR Information” in this section. driving safety and utilizing the and GTW. A dangerous driving • We recommend you to activate the vehicle potential under all condition can result if either rating is “I.C.E.” mode (see chapters “Drive conditions, especially considering exceeded. Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in this that ESC and AWD systems feature If you use aftermarket Kit for towing, section). specific settings for trailer towing. the maximum trailer load must not • During the winter season, even Further to this, if vehicle use exceed 6000 lb (2700 kg). apparently dry roads can have icy conditions so allow, the original 5 sections. Be careful when crossing trailer tongue allows use of the Arranging Load on Trailer bridges, viaducts and roads that have driver assist systems present on Arrange load at the bottom and as little exposure to the sun and are board. close as possible to trailer wheel axle. bordered by trees and rocks. They • To maintain the new vehicle limited may be icy. In this way the trailer center of gravity warranty coverage, follow the will be lower, thereby increasing the • Keep an ample safe distance from requirements and recommendations driving safety of the vehicle-trailer the vehicles in front of you. in this chapter. assembly. Always load a trailer with 60% of the Trailer Tongue Weight weight in the front of the trailer. Loads WARNING! Maximum load of tow vehicle is bearing more on wheel axle, or Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces reduced by the trailer tongue weight heavier in the rear of the trailer, can is dangerous. Accelerate slowly and and the load on the same due to the cause the trailer to sway severely carefully whenever there is likely to be trailer. Trailer tongue weight increases side-to-side which could cause loss of poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, vehicle weight. control of vehicle and trailer. loose sand, etc.). Do not exceed the maximum GVWR of the tow vehicle, the one for each axle

320 Driving

the instructions under chapter “Tire • Side marker lights (for trailer width Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” over 6.8 ft/2.1 m). WARNING! in this section. The power input of the trailer lights Failure to load trailers heavier in front must not exceed the values in the is the cause of many trailer accidents. Field of Vision of External following list. Never exceed the maximum tongue Rearview Mirrors • Position lights, side marker lights weight stamped on your trailer hitch. Law provisions require the field of and license plate lights:6x5Wper vision of external rearview mirrors to side. Tire Pressure Adjustment include the rear trailer corners. • Rear fog lights:2x21W If vehicle external rearview mirrors Proper tire inflation pressures of your • Turn signals:2x21W vehicle and trailer are essential to the cannot cover the required field of • Stop lights:4x21W safe and satisfactory operation of your vision, it is possible to install vehicle while driving and in additional rearview mirrors sticking • Reverse lights:2x21W maneuvers. further out at the sides. Minimum detectable current of Trailer Check for signs of tire wear or visible The Authorized Maserati Dealer can Tow Module (TTM): 100mA. tire damage on trailer and vehicle provide you with information about Trailer Wiring Harness before towing a trailer. towing a trailer and about the Vehicle trailer tongue includes a 4-pin 5 For more information on vehicle tires, approved components available in the sealed connector powered at 12VDC see “Tires – General Information” in "Genuine Accessories" range. for connection of the corresponding this section. Trailer Lights trailer wiring connector. When a trailer must be towed, inflate In addition to the electrical branches, vehicle tires to full load recommended Law provisions require trailers to be the vehicle electrical system can only pressure (FLC) indicated in chapter equipped with an electrical lighting be connected to the supply cable for “Tire pressure” in section “Features system that must include the an electric brake and to the cable for and Specifications”. following lights: an internal light for the trailer, not For pressure of trailer tires, follow the • Turn signals; exceeding 15W. instructions given by the trailer • Position lights; manufacturer. • Stop lights; After adjusting vehicle tire pressure CAUTION! and connecting and disconnecting the • Rear fog lights; Do not cut or splice wiring into the trailer, initialize the Tire Pressure • Reverse lights; vehicle wiring harness. Do not change Monitoring System (TPMS) following • License plate lights; cable connections on connectors. The (Continued) 321 Driving

(Continued) If the hooking and/or the electrical table below indicates the function and connection between vehicle and trailer section of wire corresponding to every is faulty, the warning light and the connector pin as shown in the figure. relevant message are displayed on instrument cluster display (see example in the figure).

5 Pin N. Function Wire section (mm2) In these cases please contact an 1 Lights ground (Lights GND) 1.5 Authorized Maserati Dealer and avoid using the vehicle with a trailer. Position light, side marker lights and license 1 2 plate light Removing the Access Cover 3 Left turn signal and stop light 1 Before fitting the trailer tongue, the 4 Right turn signal and stop light 1 access cover on the bottom part of the rear bumper must be removed. The cover is engaged in the bumper. • Release cover inner side from bumper, using the tip of a tool or screwdriver at the points indicated by the arrows.

322 Driving

match the hole (A) on the trailer tongue with the one on the cross member support.

• Slide cover downward to disengage Connect the Electrical System the two projecting elements of the Trailer indicated in the figure from bumper. • For connection, remove the • Insert the pin (1) into the hole (A) protective cover from the car and push it until it stops. connector which is found on the • Install the split pin (2) at the left-hand side of trailer tongue seat. 5 opposite end of the pin (1).

• Store cover in the luggage compartment. Install the Trailer Tongue • Engage the trailer male connector • Pull out the trailer tongue which is into the car female connector. housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the trunk. • Push trailer connector fully home and engage the safety lock, if any. • Push the trailer tongue in the seat on the cross member of the car up to

323 Driving

• Refit the access cover making sure to stop lights to ensure you do not engage the two projecting elements jeopardize other road users' safety. indicated by the arrow fully home • Make certain that the load is secured into the bumper. in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle Remove the Trailer Tongue or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, damage to brakes, When trailer tongue is no longer driveline, steering, suspension or necessary, disconnect electrical tires. connections and remove it from its seat as described below. • Push cover lower end toward • Safety metal wire must always be bumper until the two retainers click used between your vehicle and • Remove the split pin (2). 5 in place. trailer. Always connect the wire to • Grip the trailer tongue firmly and the hook retainers of the trailer and pull out the pin (1). vehicle hitch. Cross the wire under • Remove the trailer tongue from its the trailer tongue and allow enough seat. slack for turning corners. • Clean the trailer tongue and remove • Comply with local applicable speed all residues, especially on the ends. limits. • Install the ball protection. • Towing any trailer will increase your • Insert the pin (1) in the trailer tongue stopping distance. When towing, you hole and install the split pin (2). should allow for additional space • Set trailer tongue in its seat inside between your vehicle and the vehicle the trunk. in front of you. Failure to do so could Towing Tips result in an accident. • Refit the protective cover on the car • Before setting out on a trip, check connector. • For towing use “Normal” ride height. operation of trailer rear lights and • Do not exceed maximum specified pressure for vehicle and trailer tires.

324 Driving

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a steep grade. When parking, put the tow vehicle transmission in P (Park) and apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. • Do not use electronic Cruise Control (CC and/or ACC) when driving on slopes or when carrying heavy loads. • The D (Drive) gear must be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in D (Drive), if provided, you can use the 5 paddle shift switches to manually select a lower gear. • Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.

325 Driving

326 6 – In an Emergency

ToolKit...... 328 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 330 In the Event of an Accident ...... 330 In case of a Punctured Tire ...... 331 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake ...... 336 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position ...... 336 Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure ...... 337 Towing a Disabled Vehicle ...... 340

327 In an Emergency Tool Kit Remove the storage box. The tools are located in the trunk inside a preformed container. To access the tools, lift the rear part of the trunk cargo floor, by acting on the handle.

It is possible to maintain the cargo floor in the lifted position when trunk 6 cover is not hooked to liftgate (figure 1), is hooked to liftgate (figure 2)oris removed (figure 3). The straps for fastening the cargo floor can be found at the ends and along the band fastened by means of Velcro inserts on the floor back side. Once cargo floor is lifted, release the strap and fasten it at the positions shown in the figures below.

328 In an Emergency

The tools inserted in the trunk Once these operations are completed, container are the following: stretch band and fasten it at the back of cargo floor, making sure to match Ref. Description the Velcro inserts. Lower the cargo 1 Double torx + cross-head screwdriver floor. 2 Emergency tow hook 3 Funnel for emergency supply 4 Electric compressor complete with pressure gage for inflating the compact spare wheel (if equipped) 5 Extended wrench with rubber-coated handle for unscrewing/tightening the wheel nuts 6 Adapter for wheel extended wrench 7 Jack set 8 Trailer tongue (optional). If equipped, is housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the trunk.

6

329 In an Emergency Hazard Warning Flashers flashers will continue to operate even In the Event of an though the ignition is placed in the The hazard warning flashers switch is OFF position. Accident located in the center of the central It is important always to keep calm. console, behind the multimedia navigation controls. CAUTION! • If not directly involved, stop at a safe • When the hazard warning flashers distance of at least ten yards (meters) are activated, the turn signals away from the accident area. control is disabled. • If on a highway, stop without • The extended use of the hazard obstructing the emergency lane and warning flashers may wear down be especially careful if you need to your battery. exit the vehicle. • Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard warning flashers. • At night, illuminate the accident area with the headlights. Press the switch to turn on the hazard • Always act with caution to avoid the warning flashers to warn oncoming risk of being crashed into by other traffic of an emergency. When these drivers. 6 lights illuminate, the turn signals, the • Indicate that an accident has related indicator lights on the occurred by placing the emergency instrument cluster and the button start triangle (if equipped) in a well visible flashing. position and at the prescribed Press the switch a second time to turn distance. off the hazard warning flashers. • Call the emergency services, This is an emergency warning system providing as much information as and it should not be used when the possible. On the highway, use the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your special call boxes. vehicle is disabled and it is creating a • Remove the ignition key (if present) safety hazard for other motorists. from the vehicles involved. When you must leave the vehicle to • If fuel or other chemical products can seek assistance, the hazard warning be smelled, do not smoke and ask

330 In an Emergency people around you to put their defects or other reproductive harm. To In case of a Punctured Tire cigarettes out. minimize exposure, avoid breathing • To extinguish fires, even small ones, exhaust, do not idle the engine except The vehicle is equipped with a use a fire extinguisher, blankets, as necessary, service your vehicle in a compact spare wheel. sand or earth. Never use water. well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when Using the Compact Spare • In multiple accidents occurred on Wheel highways, particularly where servicing your vehicle. For more visibility is poor, there is a high risk information go to: The automatic leveling of pneumatic of being involved in other collisions. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- suspensions might create problems Leave the vehicle immediately and vehicle when it is necessary to lift the vehicle move away from the area. to replace the wheel featuring punctured tire with the emergency In case of Injured Persons wheel supplied or with another wheel. • Never leave the injured person alone. Persons not directly involved CAUTION! in the accident are also required to Before mounting the compact spare give assistance. wheel it is necessary to disable the • Do not crowd around injured suspension system by scrolling the user persons. settings on MTC+ and selecting “Wheel • Reassure the injured person that Replacement Mode” in “Suspensions” 6 help is on the way. submenu. The tick next to selected item will indicate that this mode is active and pneumatic suspension system is disabled WARNING! (for further details, refer to “MTC+ California Proposition 65 Settings” chapter in section “Dashboard Operating, servicing and maintaining Instruments and Controls”). After a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle servicing, restore original conditions and can expose you to chemicals including eliminate the tick next to selected mode: such as, engine exhaust, carbon in this way the pneumatic suspension monoxide, phthalates and lead, that system will go back to normal operation. which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth

331 In an Emergency

NOTE: no person should remain in a vehicle • Take the container, the compressor The compact spare wheel is supplied in that is being jacked. and the compact spare wheel out of aluminum or steel: the pictures show • If the vehicle has been stopped on a the trunk. the one in aluminum. slope or an uneven surface, place chocks or other suitable items in The compact spare wheel is stored in front of or behind the wheels to the trunk and is supplied deflated in stop the vehicle from moving. order to limit the amount of space occupied. An electric compressor is also • Never start or run the engine with provided for inflating. In the event of the vehicle on a jack. a tire puncture, proceed as follows. • No person should place any portion • Stop the vehicle in a place that does of their body under a vehicle that is not constitute a danger to traffic and supported by a jack. where the wheel can be changed • Lift the ground coverage of the • Remove from the compressor case safely. The vehicle must be level and trunk (see chapter “Tool Kit” in this the inflation hose and the cable with on firm ground. section). a plug for the power outlet. • Select the P (Park) mode and then • Take the tools (indicated in picture) • Unscrew the valve cap of the engage manually the electric parking for changing the wheel from the compact spare wheel and screw the brake and move the ignition switch container. fitting of the inflation hose onto the to OFF position. 6 valve. • If necessary, turn the hazard warning • Insert the plug in one of the flashers on and place the warning available power outlets fitted in the triangle (if equipped) at the required trunk or passenger compartment. distance. • Set the ignition device on ACC or RUN position. WARNING! • Turn the compressor on by pressing the switch. • The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible. • Stop the compressor pressing switch again, when the pressure indicated • It is recommended that the wheels • Unscrew and pull out the locking by the gauge reaches the of the vehicle be chocked, and that wheel knob. recommended level (see “Tire

332 In an Emergency

Inflation Pressure” in section wheels; do not use it to inflate air • Never use the jack to carry out “Features and Specifications”) and mattresses, dinghies etc. maintenance or repairs under the screw the cap on the compact spare vehicle. wheel valve. • Remove the center cover of the wheel rim (if provided) levering into • Insert the extension levers in the the provided groove on the outer jack. edge of the cover. • Turn clockwise the extension lever of • Fit the adapter on the wrench. the jack until the wheel is raised a Extend the wrench as shown, then few centimeters off the ground. loosen by approximately one turn, the five bolts on the wheel to be changed.

WARNING! • In order to obtain a more accurate reading, the compressor should be switched off when checking the tire • Completely unscrew the five bolts 6 pressure of the compact spare wheel and remove the wheel. In case a on the pressure gauge. wheel security stud bolt is installed, • Place the jack near the wheel to be • Do not run the compressor for more it can only be removed by using the changed as illustrated. than 20 minutes: there is a risk it specific fitting wrench provided with could overheat. Also, prolonged • Make sure that the head of the jack the “Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit”, power absorption may discharge the is correctly inserted in one of the available in the “Genuine battery, subsequently preventing slots beneath the rocker panel. Accessories” range. the engine from starting. • Fit the compact spare wheel with the valve stem facing outward, securing • The compressor has been designed WARNING! exclusively to inflate compact spare it with the five bolts previously • Never position yourself under a removed. jacked vehicle.

333 In an Emergency

• Turn counterclockwise the extension (72 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 98 ± 10 Nm). lever of the jack to lower the vehicle • FOR STEEL SPARE WHEEL and remove the jack. Observe the tightening torque for • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately the bolts securing the spare wheel tightening diametrically opposite. (63 ± 7 lbf·ft/ 86 ± 10 Nm). • To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel WARNING! bolts fully until the vehicle has been • FOR ALUMINIUM SPARE WHEEL lowered. Failure to follow this warning Observe the tightening torque for may result in personal injury. the bolts securing the spare wheel WARNING! • The spare wheel is narrower than standard wheels and must only be used to travel the distance required to reach a service station, where the punctured tire can be repaired or replaced. • Do not exceed a maximum speed of 6 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road holding and braking of the vehicle will be compromised. Avoid accelerating to full speed, heavy braking and fast cornering. • The compact spare wheel must be inflated to the recommended tire pressure (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”).

334 In an Emergency

• For safety reasons, it is absolutely forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle. • Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel. • The spare wheel can travel a maximum of 1,800 mi (3.000 km).

To Refit the Standard Wheel with Repaired or Replaced Tire • place the extension levers, the jack, the spanner and the adapter in the • Following the procedure and the WARNING! caution described above, raise the container inside the compact spare Observe the tightening torque for the vehicle and remove the compact wheel; bolts securing the wheels (72 ± 7 lbf·ft spare wheel reusing the supplied / 98 ± 10 Nm). wrench with adapter, suitably extended. • Reassemble the center cover (if • Fit the standard wheel with repaired provided) on the wheel rim. or replaced tire. • Tighten the original bolts on the Once finished: 6 wheel. • completely deflate the compact spare wheel by pressing on the valve • Lower the vehicle and remove the with the overhang of the valve cap; jack. • wrap the power cable and the • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately inflation hose inside the compressor • reposition the other tools and the tightening diametrically opposite. case and place it in the trunk seat; accessories storage box; • place the compact spare wheel and • lower the ground coverage at the tool container in the trunk; bottom of the trunk. • fix everything in place with the locking knob;

335 In an Emergency Emergency Release of the vehicle towing see "Towing a Disabled Transmission Manual Parking Brake Vehicle" chapter in this section. Release of P (Park) In the event the electric parking brake Position locks due to a system failure (see The manual disengagement of the “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”), shift from P (Park) has the purpose to it is not possible to move the vehicle, allow towing the vehicle if not since the actuator that operates on the normally possible using the shift lever brake pad inside each rear caliper will (such as inability to start the engine). lock the rear wheels. This procedure is exclusively intended After verifying that the battery is for emergency situations, only! sufficiently charged (otherwise use an external power source connected to the vehicle electric system to operate the EPB control lever and try to unlock WARNING! the parking brake), for moving the Always secure your vehicle by fully vehicle it is necessary to force the applying the parking brake, before actuator to release the rear brake activating the manual park release. discs. Contact the Authorized Maserati Activating the manual park release Dealer to carry out this operation. could allow your vehicle to roll away 6 if it is not secured by the parking brake. Activating the manual park release on an unsecured vehicle could WARNING! lead to serious injury or death for If the parking brake has been those in or around the vehicle. activated in manual or automatic mode and it is not possible to release The cover that allows the emergency it by operating on the lever of the manual park release is located on the central console, do not move the left part of the driver’s foot well. vehicle since rear brake calipers might • Lift the mat on the driver side to be damaged. For more information on access the cover. • Slip the cover from its seat.

336 In an Emergency Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure CAUTION! If your vehicle has a discharged • To jump start a vehicle do not use a battery it can be jump-started using a portable battery, a booster pack or set of jumper cables and a battery of any other booster source with a another vehicle or by using a portable system voltage greater than 14 Volts battery booster. It is necessary to have or damage to the battery, starter proper jumper cables in order to motor, alternator or electrical system connect the booster battery to the of the vehicle with the discharged • Take strap out of its seat. remote posts of the discharged battery may occur. • With the tip of a screwdriver press battery. Booster cables have positive • Do not use a battery charger for the clip shown in the picture box and negative terminal clamps and are emergency starting under any and lift the strap up to release the identified by the sheath color (red = circumstances. You could damage transmission from the P (Park) positive, black = negative). the electronic systems, particularly the control units managing the position. The new position will allow NOTE: vehicle moving and towing. ignition and fuel supply functions. An Authorized Maserati Dealer can • Release the parking brake only when • If the battery is completely provide you with information about the vehicle is securely connected to a discharged when the windows are the “Maserati Jumper Cables Kit”, tow vehicle. fully raised, open the door with the available in the “Genuine Accessories” 6 utmost care; do not close the door range. again until it is possible to lower the Jump-starting can be dangerous if window. done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: WARNING! When using a portable battery • Always perform jump-starting booster pack, follow the battery operations with appropriate tools manufacturer’s operating instructions and environmental conditions, and precautions. taking all necessary precautions. (Continued)

337 In an Emergency

(Continued) www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- It can start anytime the ignition • Do not attempt jump-starting if the vehicle switch is on. You could be injured by discharged battery is frozen. the moving fan blades. • To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, Battery Remote Posts Position • Remove any metal jewelry such as do not approach the battery with For easier operation, remote battery watch bands or bracelets that might open flames or cigarettes that could posts for jump-starting are located in make an inadvertent electrical generate sparks. the engine compartment while the contact. You could be seriously battery is stored in the trunk. injured. NOTE: After lifting the hood (see “Hood • Do not allow the vehicles involved in If you need to disconnect the battery Operation” in section “Before the jumpstarting operation to touch from the vehicle electrical system, see Starting”) the positive remote post (+) each other as this could establish a “Maintenance — Free Battery” in and the negative remote post (-) are ground connection and cause section “Maintenance and Care”). shown in the picture and are easily personal injury. recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module. • Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. WARNING! • Set the parking brake, shift the California Proposition 65 automatic transmission into P (Park) Operating, servicing and maintaining and turn the ignition to OFF. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • If using another vehicle to jumpstart 6 can expose you to chemicals including the battery, park the vehicle within such as, engine exhaust, carbon the jumper cables reach and set the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that parking brake and make sure the which are know to the State of ignition is off. California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To • Connect one terminal clamp of the minimize exposure, avoid breathing Jump-Start Procedure positive jumper cable to the positive exhaust, do not idle the engine except (+) remote post of the vehicle with as necessary, service your vehicle in a the discharged battery after lifting well-ventilated area and wear gloves the protection cap of the cable WARNING! or wash your hands frequently when indicated on the external side of the • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan servicing your vehicle. For more integrated power module. whenever the engine hood is raised. information go to:

338 In an Emergency

• Connect the opposite terminal clamp Once the engine is started, remove the can expose you to chemicals including of the positive (+) jumper cable to jumper cables in the reverse sequence. such as, engine exhaust, carbon the positive (+) post of the booster • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that battery. negative (-) jumper cable from the which are know to the State of • Connect one terminal clamp of the remote negative (-) post of the California to cause cancer and birth negative jumper cable to the vehicle with the discharged battery. defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing negative (-) post of the booster • Disconnect the opposite terminal exhaust, do not idle the engine except battery. clamp of the negative jumper cable as necessary, service your vehicle in a • Connect the opposite terminal clamp from the negative (-) post of the well-ventilated area and wear gloves of the negative (-) jumper cable to booster battery. the remote negative (-) post of the or wash your hands frequently when • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the servicing your vehicle. For more vehicle with the discharged battery positive (+) jumper cable from the as rendered. information go to: positive (+) post of the booster www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- battery. vehicle • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. NOTE: 6 If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system • Start the engine in the vehicle that inspected at an Authorized Maserati has the booster battery, let the Dealer. engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a WARNING! portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, California Proposition 65 before starting the booster vehicle. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

339 In an Emergency Towing a Disabled Vehicle Vehicle Towing Conditions suspension system will be disabled to help vehicle loading on the tow truck. Maserati only allows vehicle towing Proper towing or lifting equipment is The tow hook is contained in the tool with all four wheels off the ground. required to prevent damage to your kit (see “Tool Kit” chapter in this vehicle. section) and must be screwed in the seat located on the front and rear WARNING! bumper. CAUTION! Single axle towing or use of a tow • To access the front tow hook seat on Any improper maneuver and use of dolly is not allowed since it will the front bumper, remove the cover unsuitable equipment for recovering severely damage vehicle components. vehicle in an emergency from off road on the right side of the bumper lower grid. location could seriously damage the Use the Tow Hook Included in vehicle. Contact an Authorized the Tool Kit Maserati Dealer.

Manual Release of Transmission CAUTION! with Low Battery The tow hook should only be used for In order to push or tow the vehicle if towing the car on flat roads. Do not unable to shift the transmission out of use the tow hook to remove the car P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), that is stuck on off road stretches. 6 a manual park release is available. In The tow hook is also used to tow the this case it is necessary to manually vehicle on the platform of a tow truck. release the shift lever and release the • To access the rear tow hook seat, Before carrying out this operation, if parking brake if inserted (see remove the external cap on the right the battery of the vehicle still works, “Emergency Release of the Parking side of the rear bumper. set "Transport Mode" on MTC+ in Brake” in this section). "Suspensions" submenu (see "MTC+ Follow the steps as indicated in Settings" chapter in section “Transmission Manual Release of P “Dashboard Instruments and (Park) Position” in this section to Controls”). With this mode activated, manually disengage the transmission. the ride height will be lowered to the minimum value and the pneumatic

340 In an Emergency

• Carefully clean the threaded seat before screwing the hook. • Screw the tow hook into its seat for at least 11 turns. NOTE: Maximum work angle of towing cable: 15°.

6

341 In an Emergency

342 7 – Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance Service ...... 344 Scheduled Service Plan ...... 345 Maintenance Procedures ...... 350 Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 359 Fuse Replacement ...... 363 Bulb Replacement ...... 370 A/C System Maintenance ...... 372 Wheels Maintenance ...... 373 Bodywork Maintenance and Care ...... 375 Interior Maintenance and Care ...... 378 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods ...... 379 Restarting the Vehicle ...... 379 Battery Statement ...... 380

343 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance NOTE: • Change your engine oil more often if Service CAUTION! you drive your vehicle off-road for an The Scheduled Maintenance services Correct maintenance is clearly the best extended period of time or short are prescribed by the Manufacturer. way to guarantee vehicle performance trips without reaching operating Failure to have the services carried out and safety features, ensure respect for temperatures. Even the use of the can affect your warranty. the environment and low operating vehicle with extremely hot or cold costs. The Scheduled Maintenance service is ambient temperatures and with provided by an Authorized Maserati trailer tow may make more frequent NOTE: Dealer. In the event that, when a engine oil changes necessary. Also remember that the observance of service is performed, further • Under no circumstances should oil the maintenance procedures is replacements or repairs are found to change intervals exceed essential for keeping your vehicle be necessary in addition to the mileage/years reported on the operating properly. Not adhering to scheduled operations, these can be “Scheduled Service Plan” in this the “Scheduled Service Plan” can carried out only with the specific section. impact your vehicle’s warranty. consent of the Customer.

Interval Running Coupons CAUTION! CAUTION! Maserati has therefore provided for a Failure to perform the required You are advised to notify the series of checks and maintenance maintenance items may result in Authorized Maserati Dealer of any operations involving the 1st service and damage to the vehicle. minor operating problem, without subsequent when the vehicle reaches waiting for the next scheduled service. mileage/years reported on the Scheduled Maintenance 7 “Scheduled Service Plan” in this (Service) Indicator section. After the last service, maintenance The service indicator system will must be restarted with the operations remind you the deadline for the scheduled for the 1st,2nd and 3rd maintenance program. service. The indicator light on the instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5 seconds displaying the message backed by a beeping sound, indicating that the next scheduled maintenance is due

344 Maintenance and Care or has already overdue (see paragraph Have your vehicle serviced as soon as Scheduled Service Plan ”TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights possible. of the Set Modes/ Functions” in The Scheduled Maintenance services NOTE: chapter “Instrument Cluster” of listed in this manual must be done section “Dashboard Instruments and The service indicator will not monitor within the times or mileages specified Controls” for more details). the time elapsed from the last to protect your vehicle warranty and scheduled maintenance. ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. An Authorized Maserati Dealer will More frequent maintenance may be reset the service indicator message needed for vehicles in operating after completing the scheduled conditions, such as dusty areas, maintenance operations. extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Maserati recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to factory-approved information, genuine Maserati parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical 7 tools that can help prevent future costly repairs. The service indicator and message will illuminate approximately from 620 mi (1000 km) or 30 days to the next scheduled maintenance.

345 Maintenance and Care

Main Operations/Service Coupons

Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° Available Pre-Paid Maintenance 5° 6° Main operations Program Vehicle road test III Check with Maserati Diagnosi IIIIII Engine oil and filter RRRRRR Engine coolant level IIIIII Engine check for leaks IIIIII Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) III Air filter R IIIRII Belt for alternator (1) Replace every time the part is removed IIIRII Belt for water pump and air conditioning compressor Replace every time the part is removed Spark plugs RR Intercooler check for leaks IIIIII 7 IIIIII Brake fluid Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster IIIIII warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check IIIIII Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear III under-chassis

346 Maintenance and Care

Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° Available Pre-Paid Maintenance 5° 6° Main operations Program Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts IIIIII Pollen filter RRR Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer and headlight IIIIII cleaner Headlight leveling IIIIII Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, III engine compartment lid and luggage compartment Condition of leather interiors III (1) In case of heavy-duty use of the vehicle, highlighted by the presence of mud and dust in the engine compartment, proceed to the preventive replacement of the alternator belt. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation. R = Replace.

Periodic Maintenance • operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, Every 600 mi (1,000 km) or before hazard warning flashers, etc.); WARNING! long journeys California Proposition 65 7 Check: • operation of windshield washer/wiper system and wear of Operating, servicing and maintaining • engine coolant; windshield wiper blades. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle • brake fluid; can expose you to chemicals including Every 1,900 mi (3,000 km) such as, engine exhaust, carbon • windshield washer fluid level; Check and top up, if required, the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that • tire inflation pressure and condition; engine oil level. which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth (Continued)

347 Maintenance and Care

(Continued) • check cleanliness of hood and trunk contact an Authorized Maserati defects or other reproductive harm. To locks, cleanliness and lubrication of Dealer. minimize exposure, avoid breathing linkage; exhaust, do not idle the engine except • visually inspect conditions of: engine, On Board Diagnostic System as necessary, service your vehicle in a transmission, pipes and hoses Your vehicle is equipped with a well-ventilated area and wear gloves (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and or wash your hands frequently when sophisticated on board diagnostic rubber elements (boots - sleeves - system called OBD II. This system servicing your vehicle. For more bushes - etc.); information go to: monitors the performance of the • check battery charge; www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- emissions, engine, and automatic vehicle • visually inspect condition of the transmission control systems. When accessory drive belts; these systems are operating properly, Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use • check and, if necessary, change your vehicle will provide excellent engine oil and replace oil filter; performance and fuel economy, as If the car is mainly used under one of • check and, if necessary, replace well as engine emissions suited to the following conditions: pollen filter of the A/C system; current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, • towing a trailer; • check and, if necessary, replace air the OBD II system will turn on the • off-road; cleaner filter. Malfunction Indicator Light on the • short, repeated journeys (less than instrument cluster display (refer to 4–5 mi/7-8 km) at sub-zero outside “Instrument Cluster” in section temperatures; CAUTION! “Dashboard Instruments and • engine often idling or driving long All maintenance operations for the vehicle must be carried out by an Controls”). The system stores as well distances at low speeds or long diagnostic codes and other periods of idleness; Authorized Maserati Dealer. For 7 routine and minor maintenance information to assist your service you should perform the following technician by performing repairs. inspections more frequently than operations which you can carry out yourself, make sure that you have the Although the vehicle will be driveable recommended on the “Scheduled and will not need towing, contact an Service Plan”: necessary experience and always use suitable equipment, original Maserati Authorized Maserati Dealer for service • check front disc brake pad conditions spare parts and the prescribed fluids. as soon as possible. and wear; Shall this not be the case, do not carry any operation on your own and

348 Maintenance and Care

ready if your vehicle was recently If your OBD II system is not ready, you serviced, recently had a dead battery should see an Authorized Maserati CAUTION! or a battery replacement. If the OBD II Dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle • Prolonged driving with the MIL system should be determined not was recently serviced or had a battery on could cause further damage to ready for the I/M test, your vehicle failure or replacement, you may need the emissions control system. It could may fail the test. to do nothing more than drive your also affect fuel economy and To check if your vehicle's OBD II system vehicle as you normally would in order driveability. The vehicle must be is ready, you must do the following: for your OBD II system to update. A serviced before any emissions tests 1. Press the ignition device to the recheck with the above test routine can be performed. RUN position, but do not crank or may then indicate that the system is • If the MIL is flashing while the start the engine. now ready. engine is running, severe catalytic Regardless of whether your vehicle's 2. As soon as you press the ignition OBD II system is ready or not, if the converter damage and power loss device to turn the engine On, you will soon occur. Immediate service at MIL is illuminated during normal will see the MIL remain vehicle operation you should have an Authorized Maserati Dealer is illuminated for 15 seconds, this is a required. your vehicle serviced before going to normal bulb check. the I/M station. The I/M station can fail 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, your vehicle because the MIL is on Emissions Inspection and one of two things will happen: with the engine running. Maintenance Programs • The MIL will remain Spare Parts In some localities, it may be a legal illuminated and a message error Use of genuine Maserati parts for requirement to pass an inspection of will appear on your instrument normal or scheduled maintenance and your vehicle's emissions control cluster. This means that your repairs is highly recommended to system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle's OBD II system is not ensure excellent performance. 7 vehicle registration. For states that ready and you should not Damage or failures caused by require an Inspection and proceed to the I/M station. non-genuine spare parts used for Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies • the “Malfunction Indicator Light ” The MIL will turn Off. This maintenance and repairs will not be is functioning and is not on when the means that your vehicle's OBD II covered by the manufacturer's engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready and you can warranty. system is ready for testing. proceed to the I/M station. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be

349 Maintenance and Care Dealer Service California to cause cancer and birth Maintenance Procedures defects or other reproductive harm. To An Authorized Maserati Dealer has the minimize exposure, avoid breathing The following pages contain the qualified service personnel, special exhaust, do not idle the engine except “required” maintenance standards tools, and equipment to perform all as necessary, service your vehicle in a determined by Maserati engineers. service operations in an expert well-ventilated area and wear gloves Besides those maintenance items manner. Service Manuals are available or wash your hands frequently when specified in the “Scheduled Service which include detailed service servicing your vehicle. For more Plan”, there are other components information for your vehicle. Refer to information go to: which may require service or these Service Manuals before www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- replacement in the future. attempting any procedure yourself. vehicle To perform most of the services, it is Intentional tampering with emissions necessary to open the hood (see control systems may void your “Hood Operation” in section “Before warranty and could result in civil Starting”). penalties. The following images show the position of the components involved in the maintenance service. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on CAUTION! or around a motor vehicle. Take your vehicle to an Authorized Maserati • Failure to properly maintain your Dealer. vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other 7 components or negatively impact WARNING! vehicle performance. Immediately California Proposition 65 have potential malfunctions Operating, servicing and maintaining examined by an Authorized Maserati a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle Dealer or a qualified repair center. can expose you to chemicals including • Your vehicle has been equipped with such as, engine exhaust, carbon improved fluids that protect the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that performance and durability of your which are know to the State of

350 Maintenance and Care

vehicle and also allow extended Level Checks the used oil and fluids in compliance maintenance intervals. Do not use with the regulations in force and in chemical flushes for washing as the an environment-friendly manner. chemicals can damage your engine, ENVIRONMENTAL! • All equipment used for fluids transmission, power steering or air • The engine oils and fluids used replacement (gloves, cloths, conditioning. Such damages are not contain substances that are containers, etc) must be disposed of covered by the New Vehicle Limited dangerous to the environment. For in compliance with the regulations Warranty. If a flush is needed replacement you are advised to in force. because of component malfunction, contact the Authorized Maserati use only the specified fluid for the Dealer, where all the necessary flushing procedure. equipment is available to dispose of

Maintenance Service Components

1 Engine oil dipstick. 2 Engine oil filler neck. 3 Air cleaner filters. 4 Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5 Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6 Windshield/headlight washer 7 fluid reservoir cap. 7 Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. 9 Integrated power module (fuses).

351 Maintenance and Care

Engine Coolant Level Check The coolant bottle provides a quick Your vehicle has been equipped with visual method to determine that the an improved engine coolant coolant level is adequate. As long as (antifreeze) that offers high protection the engine operating temperature is against corrosion, freezing and allows satisfactory, the coolant bottle only extended maintenance intervals. To needs to be checked once a month. prevent reducing extended With the engine off and cold, the level maintenance periods, it is important to of the coolant in the bottle on the left use original engine coolant side of the engine compartment (antifreeze) when adding coolant should be between the ranges throughout the life of your vehicle. indicated on the bottle and inside the • When additional engine coolant When adding engine coolant filler neck. (antifreeze) is needed to maintain (antifreeze) use pure water only, such the proper level, it should be added as distilled or deionized water when to the coolant bottle after removing mixing the water/engine coolant the cap. Do not overfill. (antifreeze) solution. The use of • Once the desired level is reached, impure water will reduce the amount reassemble and firmly close cap of of corrosion protection in the engine the bottle. cooling system. • If frequent engine coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% (antifreeze) additions are required, engine coolant (antifreeze) and or if the level in the coolant recovery distilled water. Use higher bottle does not drop when the concentrations (do not exceed 70%) engine cools, the cooling system 7 if temperatures below −35°F (−37°C) should be tested by an Authorized are forecast. Maserati Dealer. Please note that it is the owner's • Keep the front of the radiator and responsibility to maintain the proper the condenser clean. level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the WARNING! vehicle. • Never add engine coolant

352 Maintenance and Care

(antifreeze) when the engine is hot. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Do not loosen or remove the cap of vehicle the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to Brake Fluid Level Check build up in the cooling system. To Check the fluid level immediately if prevent scalding or injury, do not the brake system warning light remove the pressure cap while the and the related message turn system is hot or under pressure. on indicating a low level of brake • When adding coolant do not use a fluid. pressure cap other than the one • Remove the brake fluid reservoir specified for your vehicle. Personal access cover. Normal brake pad wear could cause injury or engine damage may result. the fluid level to fall. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak too, and requires accurate checkup of the braking system. WARNING! California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining CAUTION! a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle The symbol on the tank cap can expose you to chemicals including identifies the synthetic type of brake such as, engine exhaust, carbon fluid, distinguishing it from the monoxide, phthalates and lead, that mineral type. Using mineral fluids which are know to the State of • Clean the top of the master cylinder damages the special rubber linings of the brake system irreparably. California to cause cancer and birth reservoir before removing the cap. 7 defects or other reproductive harm. To • Add fluid to bring the level up to the minimize exposure, avoid breathing “MAX” mark on the side of the exhaust, do not idle the engine except master cylinder reservoir. Use only WARNING! as necessary, service your vehicle in a manufacturer's recommended brake • To avoid contamination from foreign well-ventilated area and wear gloves fluid (see “Refillings” in section materials or moisture, use only new or wash your hands frequently when “Features and Specifications”). servicing your vehicle. For more brake fluid or fluid that has been in • Once the correct level is reached, information go to: a tightly closed container. Keep the firmly close the cap. (Continued)

353 Maintenance and Care

(Continued) • Remove the reservoir cap in the a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper master cylinder reservoir cap secured engine compartment and lift the blades clean. This will help blade at all times. filler neck. performance. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir To prevent freeze-up of your can result in spilling brake fluid. windshield/headlight washer system in Brake fluid can also damage painted cold weather, select a solution or and vinyl surfaces, make sure it does mixture that meets or exceeds the not spill over these surfaces. temperature range of your climate. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid This rating information can be found to contaminate the brake fluid. on most washer fluid containers. Brake seal components could be NOTE: damaged. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about Adding Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid the Maserati recommended “Windshield Washer Fluid” with The reservoir on the left side of the antifreeze, available in the “Genuine engine compartment contains the fluid Accessories” catalog. to wash the windshield, the window liftgate and headlights (if equipped). During scheduled services or when the message of low level of the washer WARNING! fluid appears together with the • Commercially available windshield related telltale add more fluid as washer solvents are flammable. They 7 soon as possible. could ignite and burn you. Care must Depending on the system installed in • Fill the reservoir with windshield be exercised when filling or when the vehicle, the fluid reservoir may washer solvent (refer to “Refillings” working around the windshield/ contain nearly 5.3 Quarts (5 liters) of in section “Features and headlight washer system. windshield/headlight washer fluid or Specifications”) and operate the • Do not drive with the windshield/ nearly 3.7 Quarts (3.5 liters) of washer system for a few seconds to flush out headlight washer reservoir empty: fluid. the residual water. the action of the washer is essential • When refilling the washer fluid for improving visibility when reservoir, apply some washer fluid to driving.

354 Maintenance and Care

Service” in this section) it is necessary • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil. Engine WARNING! to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil oil is an engineered product, and its California Proposition 65 level is about five minutes after a fully performance may be impaired by Operating, servicing and maintaining warmed up engine is shut off or supplemental additives. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle before starting the engine after it has can expose you to chemicals including • Remove the dipstick and clean it sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle such as, engine exhaust, carbon with a dry and clean cloth. should be parked on level ground to monoxide, phthalates and lead, that improve the accuracy of the oil level which are know to the State of readings. California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing CAUTION! exhaust, do not idle the engine except • Do not top up with oil with different as necessary, service your vehicle in a characteristics than the engine one well-ventilated area and wear gloves (refer to “Refillings” in section or wash your hands frequently when “Features and Specifications”). servicing your vehicle. For more • Overfilling or underfilling the oil pan information go to: will cause aeration or loss of oil • Re-insert the dipstick completely and www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- pressure. This could damage your vehicle engine. remove: the oil level should maintain between the “MIN” and “MAX” Engine Oil Level Check reference ranges (SAFE range). To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must 7 be maintained at the correct level. If the warning light illuminates and the related message of low oil level displays, or during scheduled services (see “Scheduled Maintenance

355 Maintenance and Care

• If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the Fluid Level Check for Coolant the passenger side of the vehicle, next filler neck cap. Transmission System to the windshield wipers. The coolant contained in the bottle of To replace the filter during the this system is the same as the one used scheduled maintenance services or for the cooling system of the engine. after the vehicle has been heavily used For the preparation of the mixture of on dusty roads, proceed as follows: water and antifreeze and for the • Remove the access door in the cowl control of the level, proceed as shown screen by pressing the retaining clips in the “Engine Coolant Level Check” of indicated. this chapter.

• Adding 1 Quart (1 liter) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the oil pan. • Check the level again. • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter Engine Oil Filter Replacement Engine Air Filters Replacement retaining cover. The engine oil filter should be Contact an Authorized Maserati 7 replaced with a new filter at every oil Dealer to have the air filters replaced. change. A/C Air Filter Replacement Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to perform this service. This filter performs mechanic/ electrostatic air filtering, provided that Automatic Transmission Oil Check windows and doors are closed. Contact the Authorized Maserati The filter is located under the hood in Dealer for the oil level check. the external A/C system air inlet, on

356 Maintenance and Care

• Remove the used filter slipping it off use the “Service” position for any from within the air intake. intervention on the windshield wiper CAUTION! blades. Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the air Windshield Wiper Maintenance conditioning and heating system Life expectancy of wiper blades varies efficiency. depending on the geographical area’s weather conditions where the car is Wiper Maintenance and Blades used and frequency of use. Poor Replacement performance of blades may be present Windshield Wiper Arms Lifting with chattering, marks on the glass, water lines or wet spots. If any of When the windshield wiper arms are these conditions are present, clean the • Install the new filter with arrows in rest position it is not possible to wiper blades or replace if necessary. pointing in the direction of airflow, check or replace the blades as they Clean the rubber edges of the wiper which is toward the rear of the remain under the engine hood. blades and the windshield/rear vehicle (text and arrows on the filter To service the blades it is necessary to window glasses periodically with a will indicate this). move the wiper arms in “Service” sponge or soft cloth and a mild position (see chapter “Wipers and nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove Washers” in section “Understanding accumulations of salt or road film. the Vehicle”). In this way it is possible Operation of the wipers on dry glass to lift the arms for cleaning or for long periods may cause replacing the wiper blades. deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from 7 WARNING! a dry windshield. It is dangerous to operate or service Avoid using the wiper blades to the wiper blades with the windshield remove frost or ice from the • Close the filter retaining cover and wipers in an active position (any windshield. Keep the blade rubber out reinstall the access door. position different from “OFF”) and of contact with petroleum products with the ignition switch in the RUN such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. position. The rain sensors may suddenly activate the wipers. Always

357 Maintenance and Care

Spray nozzles the Vehicle”) and move the ignition If the jet does not work, first check switch to the RUN position: the wiper that there is fluid in the tank (see arms will return to the resting paragraph “Level checks” in this position. section) then check that the nozzles NOTE: are not clogged. Due to the difficulty of this operation, Windshield Wiper Blades Replacement we recommend that you contact an • Move the wiper arms into “Service” Authorized Maserati Dealer for position, (see chapter “Windshield replacement of the blades. Wipers and Washers” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”) and lift Rear Window Blade Replacement • Replace the blade. • Insert the pivot, present inside the them. • To replace the rear window wiper blade central support, in the • Press the indicated button, slip off blade on the liftgate, lift the wiper fork-shaped end of the arm until the blade support from the arm and arm with blade up to the stop hearing the click indicating that it is replace it. position. engaged.

7

• Return the blade to its original • Turn the blade to the position Stretch the arm and put the blade position on the windshield. indicated in the figure. back in contact with the liftgate • Turn the multifunction lever to one • Hold the arm steady and pull the window. of the automatic settings (see blade, by holding it from the central chapter “Windshield Wipers and support, until it is removed. Washers” in section “Understanding

358 Maintenance and Care Maintenance-Free Battery same type (vented).

This vehicle is equipped with a sealed NOTE: WARNING! type maintenance-free battery. You California Proposition 65 Remote battery terminals for starting will never have to add water, nor is Operating, servicing and maintaining are located in the engine periodic maintenance required. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle compartment for jump-starting to be can expose you to chemicals including used with an auxiliary battery or a such as, engine exhaust, carbon battery from another vehicle (see monoxide, phthalates and lead, that WARNING! “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” which are know to the State of • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid chapter in section “In an Emergency”). California to cause cancer and birth solution and can burn or damage defects or other reproductive harm. To the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid To Disconnect the Battery minimize exposure, avoid breathing to contact your eyes, skin, or exhaust, do not idle the engine except clothing. If acid splashes in eyes or The battery is located on the inner as necessary, service your vehicle in a on skin, flush the area immediately right side of the trunk compartment. well-ventilated area and wear gloves with large amounts of water. To access the battery it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the trunk or wash your hands frequently when • Battery gas is flammable and compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” servicing your vehicle. For more explosive. Keep flame or sparks in section “In an Emergency”) and information go to: away from the battery. Do not use a remove the storage box. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- booster battery or any other booster vehicle source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. CAUTION! • Battery posts, terminals, and related 7 accessories contain lead and lead • Before disconnecting the battery, compounds. Wash hands after open the trunk and lower the handling the battery. windows a few centimeters, to avoid damaging the seal when opening • The battery in this vehicle has a vent and closing the door. When the hose that should not be battery is connected, the lowering of disconnected and should only be the window is performed replaced with a component of the (Continued)

359 Maintenance and Care

(Continued) terminal posts and free of corrosion. automatically when the door is opened and closed. The trunk lid After the battery has been must remain open and the windows disconnected and re-connected and lowered until the charged battery is before starting the engine it is reconnected. necessary to proceed as follows: • Never disconnect the battery from • Unlock and lock the doors using one the electrical system when the more time the Key fob RKE engine is running. Transmitter. • To temporarily disconnect the vehicle • Close manually the liftgate unlock it electrical system from the battery, lid with the key fob RKE transmitter simply remove the cable end with and then lock it manually on more quick coupling from the negative time. If the vehicle is equipped with post (-) of the battery. power liftgate, manually perform the • If the battery needs to be removed complete closure. Then move the lid from its compartment, you must first automatically, using the buttons on detach the terminal clamp to the the outer edge of the left trunk, negative post (-) and then the other performing a complete cycle of terminal clamp to the positive post opening and closing. (+), after removing the protective • Initialize the climate control system cover. Battery posts are marked by activating the system and pressing positive (+) and negative (-) and are To Reconnect the Battery the “AUTO” control as described in identified on the battery case. chapter “Air Conditioning Controls” 7 in section “Dashboard Instruments CAUTION! and Controls”. • It is essential when replacing the • Turn on the MTC+ and set the date cables on the battery that the and time (see “MTC+ Settings” in positive cable is attached to the positive post (+) and the negative section “Dashboard Instruments and cable is attached to the negative Controls”). post (–). • Lift, release and lift again the lever • Cable clamps should be tight on the on the central console to initialize the electric parking brake. Following

360 Maintenance and Care

this operation the warning light flash for about 10 seconds and then When the engine is turned off, do not on the instrument cluster will turn go off. keep the connected devices switched off. on for a long time (such as radio, • For correct activation of the hazard warning flashers, fan, etc.). approach lights on the external mirrors, press at least once the tilt WARNING! CAUTION! button on the driver's door panel so California Proposition 65 that the door mode recognizes the Operating, servicing and maintaining If the battery charge remains below mirrors position. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle 50% for a long period of time, it will can expose you to chemicals including be damaged due to sulfation; its • If the car is equipped with power such as, engine exhaust, carbon performance and starting power will sunshades on rear door windows, monoxide, phthalates and lead, that be reduced and it will be more subject carry out the teach mode cycle which are know to the State of to freezing. described on chapter “Power California to cause cancer and birth Sunshades on Rear Door Windows” We recommend you to have the defects or other reproductive harm. To in section “Before Starting”. battery charge condition checked, minimize exposure, avoid breathing preferably at the beginning of the exhaust, do not idle the engine except cold season, to prevent the electrolyte as necessary, service your vehicle in a CAUTION! from freezing. well-ventilated area and wear gloves This check should be carried out more • Every time the battery is or wash your hands frequently when frequently if the vehicle is used mainly reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds servicing your vehicle. For more for short trips or if it is equipped with with the ignition switch turned to information go to: power-absorbing devices that remain RUN before starting the engine, in www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- permanently on even when the order to allow the electronic system vehicle that manages the motor-driven ignition switch is off. This applies 7 throttles to run a self-learning cycle. above all if these devices have been At the same time, you can run the Useful Advice to Extend retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). date and time set up procedure for Battery Life If the vehicle is not used for long the MTC+. When parking the vehicle, make sure periods of time, please see “Vehicle • Every time the battery is that the doors, hood, liftgate and Stored for Long Periods” in this reconnected the warning light flaps are properly closed. All interior section. lights should be off.

361 Maintenance and Care

Battery Recharge It is possible to recharge the battery currents and to calculate the state of without disconnecting the cables of charge and state of health of the the vehicle electrical system. battery. This sensor is located at the negative post (-) of the battery. WARNING! • To access the battery lift the ground For a successful charge/recharge The process of charging or recharging coverage of the trunk compartment operation, the charging current must the battery produces hydrogen, a (see chapter “Tool Kit” section “In an flow through the IBS sensor as shown flammable gas that can explode and Emergency”) and remove the storage in the picture. cause serious injuries. When charging box. or recharging the battery, follow the • Remove the protection cover and recommended precautions at all times. connect the terminal clamp of the • Before using a charger device always charger positive cable (typically in check that this tool is suitable for the red) to the positive post (+) of the installed battery, with constant battery. voltage (lower than 14.0 V) and low • Connect the terminal clamp of the amperage (maximum limit 15 A). charger negative cable (typically in • Recharge the battery in a black) to the nut located by the well-ventilated environment. negative post (-) on the battery, indicated in the picture. • Never charge or recharge a frozen • Turn the charger on and follow the battery. instructions on its user manual to • Ensure that any sparks or open completely recharge the battery. flames are kept well away from the • When the battery is recharged, turn battery while it is charging. off the battery charger before 7 • Before using a charger to charge or disconnecting it from the battery. maintain the battery charge status, • Disconnect first the terminal clamp carefully follow the instructions of the charger black cable from the provided to ensure the charger is battery and then the terminal clamp connected to the battery safely and of the red cable. correctly. The vehicle is equipped with an IBS • Reassemble the protection cover on (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able the battery positive post and the to measure charging and discharging other parts removed for this operation.

362 Maintenance and Care Fuse Replacement using appropriate forceps added in the integrated power module and WARNING! Used Fuses Characteristics inside the cover of the rear power California Proposition 65 distribution center. Operating, servicing and maintaining When an electrical device is not a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle functioning, check that the can expose you to chemicals including corresponding fuse is in proper such as, engine exhaust, carbon working order (intact). monoxide, phthalates and lead, that A Fuse intact which are know to the State of B Fuse blown California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves The color identifies the value of the or wash your hands frequently when fuses in amperes which is also servicing your vehicle. For more reported on them. information go to: The table shows the match between www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- color and amperage of mini and maxi vehicle fuses. Type The vehicle mainly uses mini-and maxi-fuses with blade engagement. Mini Fuse Maxi Fuse Besides these there are other types of Beige - 5 Yellow - 20 7 fuses provided with holes for Brown - 7,5 Green - 30 attaching to the cable connection terminals. Red - 10 Orange - 40 For the replacement of these fuses Blue-15 Red-50 contact an Authorized Maserati Yellow - 20 Blue - 60 Dealer. White - 25 Replace the faulty fuse with a new one featuring the same rating, by Green - 30

363 Maintenance and Care

CAUTION! • Never replace a blown fuse with anything other than a new and suitable fuse (same rating). • After replacing a fuse, if the fault recurs, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • on the fuse and relay box located in The table points out the position as Position of Fuses a covered area, under the dashboard featured in the figure, the type and The fuses are located in three parts of left side. function of the fuses included in the integrated power module. the vehicle, namely: Integrated Power Module • inside the integrated power module, • To access the module it is necessary on the right hand side of the engine to lift the hood (see “Hood CAUTION! compartment; Operation” in section “Before • After replacement, refit the Starting”). protective cover of the module. • To access the fuses remove the • If you need to wash the engine module cover unhooking the lateral compartment, do not direct the water for too long directly on the locks as shown in the picture. module. 7 Ref. Type Function 2–– 3–– Starter motor • inside the rear power distribution 4 Maxi – 30A relay input center, behind the battery, on the ABS-ESP pump right hand side of the trunk 5 Maxi – 40A compartment; feed

364 Maintenance and Care

Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function 6 Maxi – 30A AWD module AC compressor Enable cooling 12 Mini – 10A 7–– relay input fan relay input 16 Mini – 10A and enable ABS-ESP valve 13 – – 8 Maxi – 40A cooling oil pump feed 14 Mini – 7,5A Alarm siren relay input 9–– Washer heated 18 – – 10 – – 15 Mini – 5A nozzles relay input Headlamp 11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input 19 Maxi – 30A washer relay input Wiper motor 20 Maxi – 30A relay output LH low beam 21 Maxi – 20A relay input RH low beam 22 Maxi – 20A relay input 23 – – 24 – – IPC Instrument 28 Mini – 7,5A Panel Control Primary load to 29 Mini – 10A 7 PCM module ORC- Air bag 30 Mini – 5A module 31 Mini – 5A ABS-ESP module SCCU, AWD 32 Mini – 5A module, EPS and AQS

365 Maintenance and Care

Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function HDLP LED Starter solenoid Headlights (All signal for PCM 33 Mini – 10A 52 Mini – 5A Xenon version and voltage AFLS) stabilizer Primary load to 53 Mini – 10A AWD module 34 Mini – 15A engine harness LH side Rear Power Distribution Center Primary load to • To access the center it is necessary to 35 Mini – 15A engine harness The table points out the position as lift the ground coverage of the trunk RH side featured in the figure, the type and compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” function of the fuses on the rear area PCM module in section “In an Emergency”) and 36 Mini – 30A distribution control unit. primary load remove the storage box. Engine secondary Ref. Type Function 37 Mini – 15A • To access the fuses, release the cover load latch shown in picture. 2 Maxi – 40A BCM module 38 Mini – 15A Lambda sensor 3 Maxi – 40A BCM module Flow meters, 4 Maxi – 30A BCM module tank lackage, 39 Mini – 7,5A Canister, exhaust 5 Maxi – 30A BCM module by-pass valve and 6 Maxi – 20A Trailer harness relay coil Driver door 7 Maxi – 30A 7 48 – – module Pedal brake Passenger door 8 Maxi – 30A 49 Mini – 10A switch-TCM module module Start&Stop: • Press the release latch and lift the lid 50 Mini – 15A +30 PCM module 9 Maxi – 40A voltage stabilizer, from this side. Fuel pump relay dashboard 51 Mini – 30A • Push the lid toward the right side to input release the indicated latches on the unit.

366 Maintenance and Care

Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Start&Stop: HVAC front Rear RH door 15 Maxi – 40A 18 Maxi – 30A 10 Maxi – 40A voltage stabilizer, blower relay coil module body Rear window Power liftgate 19 Maxi – 25A High Premium 16 Maxi – 40A defrost relay coil module Maxi – 40A stereo amplifier (HVAC module) Premium stereo 20 Maxi – 20A 11 unit Rear LH door amplifier unit (2) 17 Maxi – 30A Premium stereo module Maxi – 20A 21 – – amplifier unit Rear HVAC 22 Mini – 7,5A module Fuel door relay, 23 Mini – 10A RF Hub module, ELSD ITM module, ceiling light units 24 Mini – 10A (front and rear), rain/lights sensor 25 Mini – 25A Sunroof module 26 – – 27 – – LH front seat 31 Mini – 30A 7 movement Trailer module 32 Mini – 15A LH side Trailer module 33 Mini – 15A RH side Soft Door Close 34 Mini – 20A latch

367 Maintenance and Care

Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function Rear doors 50 – – Rear HVAC 35 Mini – 20A 64 Mini – 7,5A sunshade Rear seat and module Transmission 51 Mini – 25A steering wheel Intelligent 65 Mini – 10A lever, TPMS heater module battery sensor 36 Mini – 10A module, Navtrak, Trunk power Rear Seat 52 Mini – 20A Hands Free access outlet 66 Mini – 10A Entertainment module 53 – – (RSE) 37 Mini – 25A ASCM module Blind Spot 67 Mini – 10A Sunroof RH front seat 54 Mini – 7,5A 38 Mini – 30A module Power outlet on movement 55 – – 68 Mini – 20A central console 40 – – rear side Blower front ASCM motor 56 Mini – 10A Rear console 41 Maxi – 40A HVAC coil relay supply 69 Mini – 25A power outlet and Blower rear 57 Mini – 10A cigar lighter 42 – – HVAC coil relay Front HVAC Seat passenger 58 Mini – 10A Trailer harness 43 Mini – 20A module, Parking heater module 70 Mini – 10A USB charger, Aid Module PAM, 44 – – transmission ASCM 45 – – 59 Mini – 10A lever, ASBM, rear 46 Mini – 5A Rear camera tunnel stack switch Fuse Box under the Dashboard 7 47 Mini – 5A Navtrak 60 – – This box is located in an internal area 48 Mini – 5A Surround view under the dashboard left side. Rear window Internal 61 Mini – 15A Considering the complexity of this wiper relay temperature operation, we recommend having the sensor, umidity Front HVAC fuses replaced by an Authorized 49 Mini – 10A 62 Mini – 7,5A sensor, internal module Maserati Dealer. mirror, rain/lights Blower rear 63 Mini – 20A sensor, HALF HVAC

368 Maintenance and Care

The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses in the box under the dashboard.

Ref. Type Function Cluster module, 1 Mini – 7,5A CSS, SGW, DSRC - Japan version Cluster module, 2 Mini – 15A clock DSRC, DTV 3 Mini – 10A system (Japan version only) 4 Mini – 5A E-call 5 Mini – 7,5A Security Gateway 6 Mini – 15A Radio Column software 7 Mini – 10A module, CSS Start & Stop 8 Mini – 10A switch, diagnostic outlet 7

369 Maintenance and Care

Bulb Replacement 6 Front fog light LED. The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, license plate light, reverse light and brake light) is communicated to the instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and with a text message which light is faulty (see example in the figure).

CAUTION! The lights of the rear clusters are Due to the complexity of the arranged as follows: operation, for the replacement of the light cluster bulbs/LEDs, we 1 Position light guide LED. recommend that you contact an 2 Stop light LED. Authorized Maserati Dealer. 3 Turn signal LED. 4 Reverse light LED. Lights Cluster 5 Rear fog light LED. WARNING! The lights of the front clusters are 6 Side reflex-reflector. The Bi-Xenon bulbare a type of high arranged as follows: voltage discharge tube. High voltage 7 1 Bi-Xenon low-beam/high-beam can remain in the circuit even with the bulb (25W-No AFS, 35W-With ignition switch off. Because of this, AFS). you should not attempt to replace a Bi-Xenon bulb yourself, but take the 2 Position and DRL light LED. vehicle to an Authorized Maserati 3 Turn signal LED. Dealer for service. 4 Side-marker light LED. 5 Side reflex-reflector.

370 Maintenance and Care

Besides the light clusters, a third LED License Plate Lights stop light is present on the rear side of License plate lights are LED powered: the liftgate. contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to replace them. Passenger Compartment Interior Lights

CAUTION! Before replacing a bulb, ensure that • remove the light from its seat and the matching fuse is intact. For open the two parts to access the replacement, use only original new bulb; light bulbs having the same rating as Light Clusters Bulbs the old one. Replacement Most of the lamps in the front light Lamps inside the glove box clusters, all those of the rear light compartment of the dashboard, lamps clusters, those integrated in the under the sun visors and those located exterior mirrors and those of the stop next to the passenger handholds for light on the liftgate are LED powered the external rear seats are LED and cannot be replaced individually. powered and cannot be replaced by The only exceptions are the front fog the owner. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to replace them. light bulbs. 7 Contact an Authorized Maserati Courtesy Lights (below Door) • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; • refit the light inserting first the Dealer to locate the correct parts and To replace the bulb (W5W): replace them. electrical connector side and then • use a screwdriver positioned at the pressing on the other side to hook Front Light Bulb Replacement indicated point to lever out the light up the clip. Contact an Authorized Maserati fixing frame; Dealer to replace them. Trunk Compartment Light The lights inside the trunk compartment and on the liftgate are

371 Maintenance and Care LED powered: contact an Authorized A/C System Maintenance California to cause cancer and birth Maserati Dealer to replace them. defects or other reproductive harm. To For the best performance, the air minimize exposure, avoid breathing conditioning system should be checked exhaust, do not idle the engine except and serviced by an Authorized as necessary, service your vehicle in a Maserati Dealer at the beginning of well-ventilated area and wear gloves the warm season. or wash your hands frequently when This service should include cleaning of servicing your vehicle. For more the condenser, check of the drive belt information go to: tension and a performance test. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- During the winter, the air conditioning vehicle system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes.

WARNING! CAUTION! • Use only refrigerants and compressor Do not use chemical flushes in your air lubricants approved by the conditioning system as the chemicals manufacturer for your air conditioning can damage your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants components. Such damage is not are flammable and can explode, covered by the New Vehicle Limited causing injuries. Other unapproved Warranty. refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. 7 • The air conditioning system contains WARNING! refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or California Proposition 65 damage to the system, adding Operating, servicing and maintaining refrigerant or any repair requiring a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle lines to be disconnected should be can expose you to chemicals including done by an Authorized Maserati such as, engine exhaust, carbon Dealer. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of

372 Maintenance and Care Periodically remove any leaves and Wheels Maintenance Insufficient tire inflating pressure can insects that may build up and obstruct cause tire overheating and possible the inlet of external air in the air Tires Maintenance internal damage. conditioning system through the grille present underneath the rear part of the hood. CAUTION! CAUTION! To access the grille, lift the hood as To obtain the best performances and After inspecting or adjusting the tire described in “Hood Operation” in the longest mileage from the tires, pressure, always reinstall the valve section “Before Starting”. take the following precautions during stem cap. This will prevent moisture the first 310 mi (500 km): and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage it. • do not drive at the vehicle’s maximum speed; Impacts with curbs, holes, and obstacles in the road, and prolonged • drive at low speed on curves; trips on rough roads or off-road trails • avoid sudden steering; can cause tire damage which may not • avoid sudden braking; be visible to the naked eye. • avoid sudden acceleration; Check your tires regularly for any signs • do not drive at high speeds for too of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks, long. bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate the tires, they can cause structural The tires inflation pressure must damage which is only visible when the correspond to the prescribed values tire is removed. (see the chapter “Tire Inflation In any case, any possible damage must Pressure” in section “Features and be inspected by an experienced 7 Specifications”) and should be technician, as it may seriously reduce checked only when the tires have the tire life. cooled down. In fact, the pressure Remember that tires deteriorate with increases as the tire temperature time, even if used little or not at all. progressively increases. Cracks in the tire tread and sides, Never reduce the pressure if tires are alongside possible bulging, are a sign hot (see “Tires – General Information” of deterioration. chapter in section “Driving”).

373 Maintenance and Care

the greater is the risk of skidding. Wheel Rims Maintenance • Drive carefully on wet roads to WARNING! All wheel trims should be cleaned decrease the risk of aquaplaning. • Check the inflating pressure of the regularly with a mild soap and water. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive tires when cold, at least every two Winter Tires weeks and before long trips. brake dust, use a nonabrasive, These tires are specially designed for non-acidic cleaner. • Have old tires inspected by an driving on snow and ice and are fitted Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a experienced technician, to make sure to replace the ones supplied with the bristle brush, or metal polishes. they can still be used safely. If the vehicle. Do not use oven cleaner that may same tire has been on your vehicle The specific features of the winter tires affect and damage the brake calipers. for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected lead to lower performance under Avoid automatic car washes that use anyway by an experienced normal environmental conditions or acidic solutions or harsh brushes that technician. on long highway trips, compared to may damage the wheel rim protective • Never fit tires of uncertain origin. the standard tires. finish. • “Directional” tires have an arrow on Therefore, their use should be limited their side showing the rolling to the situations and performance for direction. To keep the best which they have been type-approved. performance when replacing a tire, The Authorized Maserati Dealer can make sure that the rolling direction provide all necessary information about corresponds to the one shown by fitting winter tires on the vehicle. the arrow. NOTE: • During the tire life, the rolling • We recommend fitting winter tires on direction used for the first fitting the vehicle at temperatures below 45 7 should always be observed, also in °F (7°C) since the driving performance case of “nondirectional” tires. of summer tires is reduced at low • Check the depth of the tire tread at temperatures. Summer tires may be regular intervals. The minimum permanently damaged at extremely allowed value is 0.06 in (1.6 mm) at low temperatures. that point the wear indicators on the • Comply with all state and local laws tire will be visible (see “Tires – governing snow tire and tread depth General Information” in section requirements. “Driving”). The thinner is the tread,

374 Maintenance and Care Bodywork Maintenance wax products having high protective and Care power; • spraying of plastic materials, with a Protection from Atmospheric protective function, in the most Agents exposed points: underneath the doors, inside part of the mud guards, The main causes of corrosion are: edges, etc.; • atmospheric pollution; • use of ventilated box sections, • salinity and humidity in the coated with protective wax products, atmosphere (marine areas or a damp to avoid condensation and trapped climate); water which could encourage the Normal paint maintenance consists in formation of internal rust. washing, the frequency of which • seasonal environmental conditions; depends on the conditions of use and • salt scattered on the roadbed to Useful Advice to Keep the of the environment. For example, if melt ice and snow. Bodywork in Good Condition driving the vehicle in areas where The abrasive action of wind-carried Paint there is high atmospheric pollution or atmospheric dust and sand, mud and the roads are spread with anti-freeze The paintwork does not only have an stones should not be underestimated. salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle aesthetic function but also protects On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted more frequently. the best technological solutions to the underlying metal sheets. In the protect the bodywork from corrosion. event of abrasions or deep scratches, The main measures are: we recommend to have the necessary ENVIRONMENTAL! touch-ups made immediately, to avoid • paint products and systems that give Detergents pollute water. Therefore any rust formation. Touch-ups do not the vehicle particular resistance to the vehicle should be washed in areas feature particular difficulties, even on 7 corrosion and abrasion; equipped for the collection and metallic finishes. purification of the fluids used for • use of galvanized (or pre-treated) For all paint touch-ups, use only washing. metal sheets which are highly original products indicated on the resistant to corrosion in the most plate applied on the lower left side of exposed parts; the hood. • spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, insides of wheel housings, and other structures with

375 Maintenance and Care

NOTE: External plastic parts must be cleaned Glass Surfaces The use of alcohol-based products for with the same procedure followed for All glass surfaces should be cleaned on cleaning the metal surfaces in the the normal washing of the bodywork. a regular basis with any commercial engine compartment and/or the trunk Avoid, as far as possible, parking the household-type glass cleaner. may deteriorate the protective paint. It vehicle under trees; the resinous Never use an abrasive type cleaner. is recommended to use water-based substances that very often drop from Use caution when cleaning the inside products. the trees give the paint a dull rear window on the liftgate equipped appearance and increase the possibility with electric defrosters. Do not use Car Wash of originating corrosive processes. scrapers or other sharp instrument that It is important that the drain holes in For correct washing: may scratch the elements. the lower sides of the doors, rocker When cleaning the rearview mirror, • wet the bodywork with a low panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear spray cleaner on the towel or rag that pressure water jet; and open. you are using. Do not spray cleaner • pass a sponge with a light detergent directly on the mirror. solution over the bodywork, Labels can be peeled off after soaking CAUTION! frequently rinsing the sponge; with warm water. • rinse well with water and dry with an • Bird droppings must be washed off When cleaning is performed, keep all air jet or chamois leather. immediately and thoroughly, since metal objects at a safe distance from When drying, take particular care with their acidity is particularly corrosive. the window. the parts that are less visible, such as • To provide better protection for the Cleaning Headlights the door, liftgate and lid bays, paint, polish the vehicle at intervals Your vehicle has plastic headlights that headlight edges, in which water can with a suitable product leaving a are lighter and less susceptible to be trapped more easily. protective film on the paint. You are recommended not to take the stone breakage than glass headlights. 7 • If the vehicle is washed using Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as vehicle immediately into an enclosed high-pressure water jets or cleaners, environment, but leave it in the open glass and therefore different lens it is important that the nozzle of the cleaning procedures must be followed. air so as to allow the water to jet be kept at a distance of at least evaporate. To minimize the possibility of 16 in (40 cm) from the bodywork to scratching the lenses and reducing Do not wash the vehicle after it has avoid damaging it. been left in the sun or when the hood light output, avoid wiping with a dry is hot: the paint gloss could be cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with affected. a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

376 Maintenance and Care

Do not use abrasive cleaning any other equipment such as In order to prevent water from components, solvents, steel wool or brushes, steel wool, abrasives or any entering the vehicle between the other aggressive material to clean the other equipment for cleaning. upper edge of the glass window and lenses. • After cleaning, please rinse the the door outline on the bodywork, Condensation and Fogging on the aluminum trim with a lot of clear while the car is being washed, it is Light Clusters water. advisable to disable the “Passive Entry” from the MTC+ System, for With cold or humid climates, after a • While cleaning in the car, please further information refer to chapter driving rain or after cleaning the car, make sure that the moldings and “MTC+ Settings” in section the surface of the front and rear light aluminum trims only get in contact “Dashboard Instruments and clusters could fog and/or form with soft brushes or textiles. controls”. When deactivating the condensate drops on the inside. This is Engine Compartment “Passive Entry”, also the “Pre-Short a natural phenomenon due to the At the end of each winter season, Drop” function will be disabled. temperature and humidity differences carefully wash the engine between the lens internal and compartment, remembering to avoid external surface, which nevertheless directing the jet of water for too long does not indicate a fault and does not on the electric parts. compromise the regular operation of To perform this operation, you must the lights. The fogging/condensate contact an Authorized Maserati disappears when switching on the Dealer. lights, starting from the centre of the diffuser and gradually going to the Pre-Short Drop Function edges. When in a car wash, if the driver keeps Moldings and Aluminum Trims the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, • For cleaning moldings and aluminum or in any place outside the vehicle 7 trims, avoid the use of acidic or within 3.3 ft (1 m) distance, the front alkaline cleaning agents that can windows will perform a pre-short destroy the protecting surface drop. This is a shorter drop compared treatment. to the normal short drop performed • After washing aluminum trim with by the “Passive Entry” function when warm water, apply the cleaning you grab the door handle to enter the agent with a clean tissue or a soft vehicle. sponge on the surface. Do not use

377 Maintenance and Care Interior Maintenance and transparent dome, the MTC+ display, which are know to the State of the analog clock and the leather California to cause cancer and birth Care upholstery. We recommended the use defects or other reproductive harm. To Interior trim should be cleaned of “Car Care” products approved by minimize exposure, avoid breathing starting with a damp cloth. Do not use Maserati for the maintenance and care exhaust, do not idle the engine except harsh cleaners. of the interior. as necessary, service your vehicle in a The leather upholstery can be best well-ventilated area and wear gloves preserved by regular cleaning with a Leather Upholstery Treatment or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Have the leather upholstery only information go to: can act as an abrasive and damage the treated, as provided in the Scheduled www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- leather upholstery and should be Service Plan, by an Authorized vehicle removed promptly with a damp cloth. Maserati Dealer which has the Stubborn soils stains can be removed required specific products. easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking Parts in Premium Quality Wood the leather upholstery with any liquid. Remove any dirt with a damp cloth. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or NOTE: ammonia-based cleaners to clean your The Authorized Maserati Dealer can leather upholstery. provide you with any information Application of a leather conditioner is about the Maserati approved “Car not required to maintain the original Care” products, available in the condition. “Genuine Accessories” range. 7 Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to WARNING! oxidize. California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle CAUTION! can expose you to chemicals including Do not use alcohol, petrol or solvents such as, engine exhaust, carbon to clean the instrument cluster's monoxide, phthalates and lead, that

378 Maintenance and Care Vehicle Stored for Long • Clean and protect polished metal Restarting the Vehicle parts with special products available Periods on the market. Before restarting the vehicle after a If the vehicle is going to be stored for • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth long period of inactivity, we long periods of time, follow the below in breathable fabric (available from recommend that you carry out the precautions: an Authorized Maserati Dealer). Do following operations. not use thick plastic sheets, which do • Wash and dry the vehicle • Check the tires for pressure and for not allow the humidity on the thoroughly. any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is vehicle surface to evaporate. the case, have them replaced. • Store the vehicle on a level surface in • Inflate the tires up to a pressure a covered, dry and, if possible, • Do not dry-rub the external surface which must be 14.5 psi (1 bar) higher ventilated area. of the vehicle: use a damp cloth. than the normally prescribed one, • Visually inspect if there are any fluid • Select P (Park) and turn off the and check it at regular intervals. engine. leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.). • Disconnect the battery (refer NOTE: “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this The Authorized Maserati Dealer can • Have the engine oil and filter section) or connect a battery charger provide you with any information replaced. (refer to paragraph “Maintaining about the available “Indoor and • Check the fluid levels in the brake Battery Charge” of chapter “Battery Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the system, as well as the engine coolant Statement” in this section). “Genuine Accessories” range. level. • Check the battery charge status. • Check the air filters and have them During parking, this check must be replaced if necessary. carried out every three weeks. • Reconnect the battery after checking WARNING! Recharge the battery if the open the charge status (refer to 7 circuit voltage is lower than 12.2 V. The tire pressure must be brought “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this back to the prescribed value before • Check that the parking brake is NOT section) and perform the initializing reusing the vehicle (see “Tire Inflation engaged. procedure if applicable. Pressure” in section “Features and • With the transmission in N (Neutral), • Do not empty the engine cooling Specifications”). system. let the engine idle for several • Clean and protect the painted parts minutes. applying protective wax. In this way, the pneumatic suspension system will be able to reach the

379 Maintenance and Care operating pressure and lift the car to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Battery Statement the Entry/Exit height (for further vehicle details, see “Drive Modes” in section Battery Statement Status of “Driving”). Charge To avoid problems with ignition and/or the electrical system in general when WARNING! you are driving, the battery charge The engine idle must be performed status is constantly maintained and outdoors. Exhaust gases contain guaranteed by the vehicle's recharge carbon monoxide which is strongly circuit; the main component of which toxic and potentially lethal. is the alternator. This circuit is only able to supply voltage to the battery when the vehicle is traveling. The warning light on the WARNING! instrument cluster, will indicate any California Proposition 65 malfunctions in the recharge circuit or Operating, servicing and maintaining an insufficient battery charge status a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle (example in figure). can expose you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth 7 defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more The vehicle contains advanced information go to: electronic systems, such as, for example, the alarm system and various electronic control modules, which

380 Maintenance and Care consume power even when the short daily trips (approximately 10 battery in a well-ventilated ignition switch is in the OFF position miles/16 km) which correspond to an environment; and the vehicle is not being used. annual total of 4000 miles/6000 km. • never charge or recharge a battery Therefore, it is fundamental that the Please note that allowing the battery that has frozen; battery is properly charged to ensure to go dead repeatedly can cause • ensure that any sparks or open that the engine starts properly and premature wear on the internal cells flames are nowhere near the battery that all the electrical/electronic and greatly reduce their life, leading while it is charging; systems in the vehicle work efficiently. to problems with the ignition system and other electrical/electronic systems. • before using a charger to charge or Maintaining Battery Charge The Authorized Maserati Dealer is maintain the battery charge status, If you perform short daily trips available to advise you on how to carefully follow the instructions (approximately 10 miles/16 km), which recharge your battery correctly and provided to ensure the charger is correspond to an annual total of 4000 give you useful information on battery connected to the battery safely and miles/6000 km, or when the vehicle is care and maintenance. correctly. not going to be used for one week or NOTE: more, Maserati recommends connecting the vehicle to a battery The Authorized Maserati Dealer can charger, to save you the trouble of provide you with any information having to recharge the battery. The about the Maserati approved “Battery battery charger will keep the battery Charger and Conditioner”, available in charged properly and at the correct the “Genuine Accessories” range. voltage levels required by the systems and devices in the vehicle. Before using and/or connecting the WARNING! battery charger, carefully follow the 7 instructions provided. The process of charging or recharging If you do not use a battery charger to the battery produces hydrogen, a prevent the battery from going dead dangerous gas that can explode and when you are not going to use the cause serious injuries. When charging vehicle for long periods of time, you or recharging the battery, follow the need to check and recharge the recommended precautions at all battery at least once every three times: weeks. Make this check if you perform • always charge or recharge the

381 Maintenance and Care

382 8 – Features and Specifications

Refillings ...... 384 Fuel Consumption ...... 386 Technical Data ...... 388 Tire Inflation Pressure ...... 395

383 Features and Specifications Refillings

NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification.

CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and maintain performance level always use genuine parts approved and recommended by Maserati.

Refillings and Recommended Products

Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Fuel tank 21 Gallons/80 liters (including Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 91 CLC or AKI (95 4.2 Gallons/16 liters of RON/85 MON). reserve) Engine 8.8 Quarts/8.3 liters (max) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 10W-60 that meet API MIN – MAX difference: 1.1 SN/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Quarts/1 liter Recommended oil: PENNZOIL Platinum Maserati 10W-60 (1). Windshield and headlight 5.3 Quarts/5 liters Mix of water and solvent, in the proportions indicated on washer fluid tank the product package. If the temperature is below –4°F Windshield washer fluid 3.7 Quarts/3.5 liters (–20°C), use pure solvent. tank Solvent: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1. 8

384 Features and Specifications

Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications Engine cooling circuit 9.7 Quarts/9.2 liters (for Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. dual-zone air conditioning Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene system) glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with 10.56 Quarts/10 liters (for regulations: four-zone air conditioning • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 system) • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 Automatic transmission 2.64 Quarts/2.5 liters • SAE J 1034 cooling circuit • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu Up 50/50. (2) Automatic transmission 8 Quarts/7.6 liters SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. (2) Differential 0.95 Quarts/0.9 liters Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. (2) Front differential 0.47 Quarts/0.45 liters SHELL TF 0951B. (2) Transfer case 0.65 Quarts/0.62 liters SHELL TF 0870. Braking system 0.84 Quarts/0.8 liters +/- 4% Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 - DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer.

Air conditioning system dual-zone: 24.7 oz +/-0.7 oz Refrigerant: r134a. (700 g +/-20 g) four-zone: 30 oz +/-0.7 oz (850 g +/-20 g) 8 (1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil “PENNZOIL Platinum 10W-60”. (2) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance.

385 Features and Specifications Engine Oil Identification Fuel Consumption Symbol WARNING! NOTE: California Proposition 65 This symbol means that the oil • The technical data, values and Operating, servicing and maintaining has been certified by the specifications in this Owner’s Manual a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle American Petroleum Institute are provided as guidance only. The can expose you to chemicals including (API). Maserati only vehicle specific data can deviate from such as, engine exhaust, carbon recommends API Certified engine oils. the information provided, for monoxide, phthalates and lead, that example, as a result of optional or which are know to the State of CAUTION! special equipment ordered with the California to cause cancer and birth Do not use chemical flushes in your vehicle, vehicle loads, and country defects or other reproductive harm. To engine oil as the chemicals can specific measurement methods. minimize exposure, avoid breathing damage your engine. Damage caused exhaust, do not idle the engine except • The specifications described below by use of non-approved chemicals is as necessary, service your vehicle in a can change without prior not covered by the new Vehicle well-ventilated area and wear gloves notification. Limited Warranty. or wash your hands frequently when • Actual mileage will vary depending servicing your vehicle. For more upon driving style, vehicle load, road information go to: Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE conditions and ambient temperature. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Grade) vehicle SAE 10W-60 engine oil is The fuel consumption values shown recommended for all operating (Miles Per Gallon - MPG) are temperatures. established using EPA test guidelines. The engine oil filler cap also shows the Levante S Levante recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on City 14 MPG 14 MPG engine oil filler cap location, refer to Highway 19 MPG 20 MPG chapter “Maintenance Procedures” in Combined 16 MPG 16 MPG 8 section “Maintenance and Care”. Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

386 Features and Specifications

CAUTION! • Actual fuel economy results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. • The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones.

8

387 Features and Specifications Technical Data

NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can vary from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Engine Data

Data Levante S Levante Cylinder number and position 6 - 60° V 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 Bore x stroke 86.5 x 84.5 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm Total displacement 2979 cu.cm 2979 cu.cm Compression ratio 9.7 : 1 9.7 : 1 Maximum power output (EC) 316 kW – 424 hp (*) 257 kW – 345 hp - corresponding RPM 5750 rpm 5750 rpm Peak and overboost torque (EC) 428 lb-ft (580 N-m) 369 lb-ft (500 N-m) - corresponding RPM 2000 – 4750 rpm 1750 – 4750 rpm (*) Values obtained in SPORT mode with 98 RON unleaded gasoline.

Engine Properties

Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator. 8 Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Over-supplied with turbocharger and related intercooler for each bank. Injection – Ignition High-pressure (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU.

388 Features and Specifications

Brakes Steering Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four Electric Power Steering (EPS) system, wheels. The Electric Parking Brake axis parallel type. (EPB) acts on the rear wheels. Steering diameter = 13.72 yd (12.55 m). No. of steering wheel turns = 1.41 (to Levante S Levante the left and right). Front disc diameter Drilled disc: 15 in (380 mm) 13.6 in (345 mm) Rear disc diameter Drilled disc: 13 in (330 mm) 13 in (330 mm) Transmission Automatic transmission with 8 speeds, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. TRANSAXLE-type transmission. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential. Suspension Front suspensions with double wishbone independent wheels. Multilink system rear suspensions on independent wheels. The air suspension system features air spring units at both axles and a closed 8 air supply unit.

389 Features and Specifications

Wheels NOTE: • Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. • In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size. • Optionally tires may have "ZR" in the size description combined with speed index (e.g. 265/45 ZR20 104Y). • In case of staggered tires, front and rear rims cannot be swapped. • Only 19” rear tires can be equipped with special chain with front anchorage. Snow chains cannot be used (all tires).

WARNING! • The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations in force in the Country you are driving in. • Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident!

Standard Wheel Dimension

Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W 265/45 R20 104W - Rear tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W 265/45 R20 104W Spare rim 18” x 6B - Spare tire 195/75 R18 8

390 Features and Specifications

Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) 19” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 9J (front) Light alloy rims 19” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W 265/45 R20 104W - Rear tires - All season 295/45 R19 113W 295/40 R20 106W Spare rim 18” x 6B - Spare tire 195/75 R18

Optional Wheel Dimension

Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 18” x 8J (front and rear) - Front tires 255/60 R18 108W - Rear tires 255/60 R18 108W - Front tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W - Rear tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 265/50 R19 110Y - Front tires - All season (Standard tire) - Rear tires - All season (Standard tire) Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/45 R20 104Y 265/45 R20 104Y 8 - Rear tires 265/45 R20 104Y 265/45 R20 104Y - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W (Standard tire) - Rear tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W (Standard tire)

391 Features and Specifications

Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/40 R21 101Y 265/40 R21 101Y - Rear tires 265/40 R21 101Y 265/40 R21 101Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W 265/40 R21 105W - Rear tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W 265/40 R21 105W

Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) 19” x 8,5J (front) Light alloy rims 19” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 295/45 R19 113Y - Front tires - All season (Standard tire) - Rear tires - All season (Standard tire) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 9J (front) Light alloy rims 20” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/45 R20 104Y 265/45 R20 104Y - Rear tires 295/40 R20 106Y 295/40 R20 106Y - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W (Standard tire) - Rear tires - All season 295/40 R20 106W (Standard tire) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 9J (front) Light alloy rims 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 8 - Front tires 265/40 R21 101Y 265/40 R21 101Y - Rear tires 295/35 R21 103Y 295/35 R21 103Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W 265/40 R21 105W - Rear tires - All season 295/35 R21 107W 295/35 R21 107W

392 Features and Specifications

Performance NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.

Levante S Levante Maximum speed (*) 164 mph (264 km/h) 156 mph (251 km/h) Accelerations from 0 to 60 mph 5.0 seconds 5.8 seconds (*) Values obtained in SPORT mode with 98 RON unleaded gasoline.

Weights NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification.

Unladen vehicle weight with tank and reservoirs filled, tools and 4994 lb / 2265 kg (2540 lb/1152 kg front axle - accessories (*) 2454 lb/1113 kg rear axle) Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6116 lb / 2780 kg (2827 lb / 1285 kg front axle – 3289 lb / 1495 kg rear axle) Maximum load on the roof rails 176 lb (80 kg) (*) Base configuration without options.

8

393 Features and Specifications

Trailer Towing Weights NOTE: Follow trailer manufacturer recommendations, never exceed trailer tow weights provided.

Towable loads: trailer with brakes 5952 lb (2700 kg ) Towable loads: trailer without brakes 1500 lb (680 kg ) Maximum load on tow hitch 474 lb (215 kg)

Dimensions

Wheel base 118.2 in (3004 mm ) Overall length 197 in (5003 mm) Overall width without mirrors 77.5 in (1968 mm) Overall width with mirrors 85 in (2158 mm) Front track 63.9 in (1624 mm) Rear track 65.9 in (1676 mm) Front overhang 38 in (966 mm) Rear overhang 40.6 in (1033 mm) Overall height (*) 66.1 in (1679 mm) Ground clearance (*) 8 in (205 mm) Trunk compartment volume 14.9 cu.ft. (422 l ) Cargo area length 41 in (1040 mm) 8 Cargo area length with rear seatbacks folded down 79.8-71 in (2027-1803 mm) Cargo area width 46.7-39.5 in (1186-1002 mm) (*) In “Normal” ride height and with standard rims and tires.

394 Features and Specifications Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: • PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage. • FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage. • CC (Comfort Condition) : not more than 80 mph (130 km/h).

Wheel Pressure PLC CC FLC/High speed Tire Type Rim Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear 18” - 19” - 250 kPa - 36 psi 270 kPa - 39 psi 20” (2.5 bar) (2.7 bar) Summer 270 kPa - 39 psi 310 kPa - 45 psi 21” (2.7 bar) (3.1 bar) 250 kPa - 36 psi 290 kPa - 42 psi 18” (2.5 bar) (2.9 bar) (265/50) 290 kPa - 42 psi 230 kPa - 250 kPa - 200 kPa - 220 kPa - 250 kPa - 36 psi (2.9 bar) 19” 2.3 bar - 33 2.5 bar - 36 2.0 bar - 29 2.2 bar - 32 psi psi psi psi (2.5 bar) (295/45) 270 kPa - 39 psi All Season (2.7 bar) (265/45) 310 kPa - 45 psi 270 kPa - 39 psi (3.1 bar) 20” (2.7 bar) (295/40) 8 290 kPa - 42 psi (2.9 bar)

395 Features and Specifications

NOTE: • For more information about the pressure check methods, see “Tires – General Information” in section “Driving”. • Tire inflation pressure values are also indicated on the information label applied to the driver's side rear door pillar.

WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes can cause damage that results in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

8

396 9 – Index

397 Index

Abbreviations ...... 8 Alarm, Vehicle Security ...... 27 Bluetooth, Customer settings .....202 Accessories ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor). .63 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . .376 Aftermarket Parts and Accessories Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Pre-Short Drop Function ...... 378 Statement ...... 13 Electronic Brake-force Distribution Protection from Atmospheric Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA . . . .291 (EBD) ...... 256 Agents ...... 376 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . .268 Assistance ...... 11 Useful Advice to Keep the Activation/Deactivation ...... 271 Assistance, if you need ...... 11 Bodywork in Good Condition . . .376 Display Warnings and ATC (Automatic Temperature Brakes Maintenance ...... 275 Control) ...... 213 Brake and Stability Control System Precautions while Driving with Audio Controls...... 186 (ESC) ...... 255 ACC...... 276 Audio Controls on Central Brake Overheating ...... 262 Setting the Following Distance . .273 Console ...... 186 Brake System ...... 255 Setting the Speed ...... 272 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .186 Manual Release of Parking Airbag...... 65 Audio, setting ...... 201 Brake ...... 336 Advanced Front Air Bag Audio System...... 187 Parking Brake...... 250 Properties ...... 66 Automatic Transmission Using the Brakes ...... 262 Air Bag Deployment Result .....70 Manual Release of Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Transmission...... 340 Capacity/Refillings ...... 384 Controls ...... 15 AUX, USB and SD Memory Card Cargo Area ...... 134 Air Bag System Components.....66 Ports...... 131 Accessories Compartment .....137 Front Air Bag Inflator Units .....69 AWD, All-Wheel Drive...... 231 Cargo Area Extension ...... 138 Passenger Air bag Labels ...... 20 Installing the Cargo Net ...... 139 Supplemental Restraint System BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 257 Loading with Rear Seatbacks (SRS) ...... 65 Battery ...... 359 Folded Down ...... 136 Supplemental Seat-mounted Side Battery Recharge ...... 362 Luggage Fasteners and Air Bags (SAB) ...... 67 Battery Remote Posts Position. . .338 Retainers ...... 135 Supplemental Side Air Bag Maintaining Battery Charge . . . .382 Ski and Snowboard Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) ...... 68 To Disconnect the Battery .....360 Compartment...... 137 Transport of persons with To Reconnect the Battery ...... 361 Trunk Compartment Cover .....138 disability ...... 72 Blind Spot Alert ...... 286 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .134 Air Conditioning (A/C) System . . . .208 Blind Spot Alert (BSA) Child Restraint Systems ...... 73 9 A/C Distribution ...... 149 BSA System ...... 286 Children too large for Booster Four-zone Climate Controls . . . .213 RCP - Rear Cross Path...... 288 Seats...... 74

398 Index

Infants and Child Restraints .....73 Doors Manual Lock...... 39 Engine Installing Child Restraint Systems Front Doors Components ...... 96 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .352 using the Vehicle Seat Belt Lock/Unlock Door Flashlight ....34 Engine Oil Level Check ...... 356 equipped with ALR...... 75 Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . .40 Hood ...... 56 Lower Anchors and Tether for Rear Doors Components ...... 97 Normal Starting of the Engine . .220 Children (LATCH) ...... 76 Soft Door Close System ...... 41 Use of the Engine ...... 263 Older Children and Child Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Entry/Exit, lights on ...... 30 Restraints ...... 74 Key fob 1st Press ...... 34 EPB (Electric Parking Brake)...... 250 Tips on getting the most out of Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob. .33 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) . .255 your child restraint ...... 75 DPF System Climate Control ...... 208 DPF Filter Replacement ...... 356 Filters Clock, analog ...... 195 “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy . . . .254 A/C System Air Filter Console Drive Mode, controls ...... 232 Replacement ...... 357 Central Console Components ....95 Setting Ride Height ...... 242 Engine Air Filter Replacement . .357 Front Dome Console Setting the Drive Mode ...... 232 Forward Collision Warning (FCW). .278 Components ...... 96 Driving Conditions ...... 318 Fuel Controls Screen ...... 189 Before the Trip...... 318 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . .315 Cruise Control Driving at Night ...... 318 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Cruise Control Adaptive (ACC) . .268 Driving in Fog ...... 319 Release ...... 317 Electronic Cruise Control (CC) . . .264 Driving in Snow and Wet Grass. .248 Emissions Inspection and Cupholders ...... 130 Driving in the Mountains...... 319 Maintenance Programs ...... 349 Front Passengers Cupholders . . .130 Driving in the Rain ...... 318 Fuel Consumption ...... 386 Rear Passengers Cupholders . . . .131 Driving on Snow or Ice ...... 320 Fuel Filter Service ...... 356 Safe Driving...... 318 Fuel Requirements ...... 313 Dashboard Compartment ...... 204 DRL (Daytime Running Light) . . . .114 Fuel System Warnings ...... 314 Glove Box Lock Feature Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . .314 (if equipped) ...... 205 EDR (Event Data Recorder) ...... 72 Low Fuel Indicator ...... 174 Dashboard Components ...... 94 Electronic Cruise Control...... 264 Materials Added to Fuel ...... 314 Defroster ...... 90 Emergency ...... 5 MMT in Gasoline ...... 314 Doors Hazard Warning Lights ...... 123 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 313 Child Protection Door Lock In the Event of an Accident . . . .330 Fuses ...... 364 System ...... 40 Jump Starting ...... 337 Fuses Position ...... 364 9 Doors Locking ...... 39 Use the Vehicle Tow Hook .....340

399 Index

Fuses Replacement ...... 364 Personalized the Main Menu Liftgate Bar...... 182 Automatic Opening and Closing Glove Box Lock Feature ...... 205 Instrument Cluster ...... 154 Movement of the Power Handholds and Cloth Hooks . . . .133 Interior Components ...... 94 Liftgate ...... 51 Interior Maintenance and Care. . . .379 Liftgate and Hood Ajar Hazard Warning Flashers...... 330 Interiors Features ...... 128 Indicators...... 174 Head Restraints ...... 98 iPad Holder ...... 134 Power Liftgate Emergency Highway Assist - HAS ...... 294 iPod Connection...... 132 Release ...... 55 Hill Descend Control (HDC) ...... 259 Power Liftgate Operation ...... 50 HomeLink ...... 145 Jump Start Procedure ...... 338 Unlatch the Liftgate ...... 34 Security ...... 148 Lights ...... 111 Troubleshooting Tips ...... 148 KeyFob...... 25 Automatic Headlights ...... 113 Using HomeLink ...... 148 Key fob Battery Replacement ....35 Automatic Headlights Leveling . .121 Hood Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Automatic High Beam ...... 116 Open and Close the Hood ...... 56 key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Bi-Xenon Headlight...... 114 Hood Operation ...... 56 Vehicle ...... 43 Bulb Replacement ...... 371 HSA (Hill Start Assist) ...... 258 Replacement ...... 27 Cargo Lamps ...... 123 Requiring and setting Additional Dome Lights...... 121 Identification Labels ...... 19 Key Fobs ...... 34 DRL, Daytime Running Lights . . .114 Illuminated Entry/Exit ...... 30 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . .33 Fog Lights ...... 118 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 26 Keys ...... 24 Headlight Time Delay ...... 113 Indicator Lights/Warning Lights Headlight with AFS ...... 115 Air Bag Warning Light...... 90 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . .281 High Beam and Flashing ...... 119 TFT Display: Menus and Level Checks ...... 352 Interior Lights...... 120 Settings ...... 159 Brake Fluid Level Check ...... 354 Light Switch ...... 111 TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .352 Multifunction Lever...... 119 Lights of Set Modes/Functions. . .172 Engine Oil Level Check...... 352 SmartBeam System ...... 113 Warning and Indicator Lights on Fluid Level Check for Coolant Turn Signals ...... 119 Analog Instrument ...... 154 Transmission System ...... 357 Loading the Vehicle Infotainment System...... 179 Transmission Oil Check...... 356 Loading with Rear Seatbacks Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Washer/Headlight Fluid, Down ...... 136 9 Display ...... 180 adding ...... 354 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .134 Manual Controls and Devices . . .179

400 Index

Main- and Submenu...... 160 Clear Personal Data ...... 204 Phone/Bluetooth, Customer Maintenance ...... 5 Clock & Date ...... 195 settings ...... 202 A/C System Maintenance ...... 373 Display ...... 194 Power Outlets ...... 128 Air Bag System Maintenance ....71 Doors & Locks ...... 198 Power Outlet Inside the Central Bodywork Maintenance and Engine Off Options...... 200 Console...... 129 Care ...... 376 Lights ...... 197 Power Outlet Inside the Emissions Inspection and Pneumatic Suspension...... 200 Cupholder ...... 128 Maintenance Programs ...... 349 Restore Settings ...... 204 Power Outlet Inside the Trunk . .129 Interior Maintenance and Care. .379 Safety and Driving Assistance . . .196 Rear Power Outlets...... 129 Maintenance Procedures ...... 350 Voice Commands ...... 195 Power Sunshades on Rear Door Periodic Maintenance ...... 347 Windows ...... 48 Scheduled Maintenance Service .344 Occupant Restraint System ...... 57 Scheduled Service Plan ...... 345 Off-road Drive...... 246 Rear Parking Camera ...... 84 Wheels Maintenance ...... 374 After Driving Off-road...... 249 Refueling ...... 315 Maserati Roadside Assistance Driving in Snow and Wet Grass. .248 Fuel Filler Neck Access ...... 315 Program...... 17 Driving Through Water ...... 247 Remote Start System ...... 37 Mesh Pockets ...... 134 Traction Downhill ...... 249 Restarting the Vehicle ...... 380 Messages on Main Display Area . . .159 On Board Diagnostics ...... 263 Restraint System ...... 65 MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light). .155 ORC (Occupant Restraint Child Restraint Systems ...... 73 Mirrors ...... 108 Controller) ...... 68 RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) External Mirrors ...... 108 Transmitter...... 24 Folding Mirrors ...... 110 Park Assist ...... 79 Roadside Assistance Program .....17 Integrated External Rearview Enabling and Disabling Park Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM)...... 258 Mirror Lights ...... 123 Assist ...... 82 Roll-Over Warning...... 15 Internal Rearview Mirror ...... 110 Parking ...... 253 Roof Rails ...... 142 Mirrors Positioning ...... 109 Parking Brake ...... 250 Rearview Mirrors ...... 108 Passive Entry System ...... 42 Safety Tilt Mirrors in Reverse ...... 109 Pedals, adjustable ...... 107 Child Restraint Systems ...... 73 MTC+ “Controls” Screen ...... 189 Pets, transporting ...... 78 Reporting Safety Defects...... 12 MTC+ Settings - Customer Phone and Voice Controls on Safety Net for Cargo Area ...... 139 Programmable Features ...... 192 Steering Wheel ...... 216 Safety Tips ...... 57 Auto-On Comfort & Remote Phone Mode ...... 217 Scheduled Maintenance Service . . .344 9 Start ...... 200

401 Index

Scheduled Service Plan Seat Adjustment...... 98 Sunroof Maintenance ...... 145 Scheduled Maintenance Service ...... 10 Venting Sunroof ...... 144 Indicator ...... 344 Siri Smart Personal Assistant .....217 Sunshades...... 48 Seat Belt ...... 57 SmartBeam System ...... 113 Sun Visors ...... 132 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Smoking Kit...... 133 Surround View Camera System ....86 Mode ...... 63 Snow Chains ...... 307 Symbols ...... 14 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder Spare parts service Danger Symbols ...... 14 System (SBR) ...... 64 Genuine Parts ...... 13 Symbols of Prohibitions and Passenger Seat Belts ...... 61 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 13 Compulsory Measures ...... 14 Seat Belt Reminder Light ...... 158 Spare Parts Service ...... 13 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women. .64 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Tank fuel refill ...... 315 Seat Belts Pretensioners...... 63 System)...... 65 TCS (Traction Control System).....257 Three-Point Seat Belts ...... 58 Start&Stop System ...... 222 Technical Data ...... 388 Three-Point Seat Belts Height Occupant Safety Function .....224 Telltales Adjustment ...... 60 Start&Stop Active Indicator . . . .157 Telltales on Speedometer ...... 154 Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting Start&Stop Disable Indicator. . . .175 Telltales on Tachometer ...... 156 Procedure ...... 61 Start&Stop Failure Indicator Tires Three-Point Seat Belts Use Light ...... 176 Change a Tire ...... 331 Instructions ...... 59 Start&Stop Function Disabling Compact spare tire ...... 308 Using the Seat Belt in Automatic Indicator ...... 224 Department of Transportation Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) . . .63 Start&Stop Menu ...... 166 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . .304 Seats ...... 97 Start&Stop System Failure .....225 General Information ...... 301 Driver Memory Seat ...... 101 Start the Engine Inflation Pressure ...... 395 Easy Entry/Exit Seats ...... 102 Engine Start Failure...... 221 Pneumatic Suspension Mode for Front Heated Seats ...... 99 Engine Turn Off ...... 222 Wheel Change ...... 308 Front Power Seats...... 97 Steering Wheel ...... 106 Punctured Tire, use ...... 331 Front Ventilated Seats ...... 100 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 106 Replacement Tires...... 306 Power Lumbar Seats ...... 98 Phone and Voice Controls on Tire Pressure...... 304 Rear Armrest ...... 104 Steering Wheel...... 216 Tire Pressure Checkup ...... 305 Rear Head Restraints ...... 104 Sunroof Tire Safety Information ...... 301 Rear Seat Folding Seatback . . . .103 Initialization Procedure ...... 144 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring 9 Rear Seats ...... 103 Pinch Protect Feature ...... 144 System...... 309 Rear Side Heated Seats ...... 105 Slide Opening Sunroof...... 144 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 306

402 Index

Winter Tires ...... 307 Vehicle Identification Number Windshield Washer and Headlight ToolKit...... 328 (VIN) ...... 19 Washers ...... 126 Towing Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . .380 Windshield Wipers ...... 124 Towing a Disabled Vehicle .....340 Voice Commands ...... 217 Wiper Blade Maintenance .....126 Towing the Vehicle ...... 340 Use the Vehicle Tow Hook .....340 Warning icons...... 8 Vehicle Towing Conditions.....340 Warning Lights/Indicator Lights TPMS System ...... 309 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 90 Tire Pressure Low Warning.....310 TFT Display: Menus and TPMS Deactivation ...... 312 Settings...... 159 Traffic Sign Assist - TSA ...... 300 TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM) . . . .258 Lights of Set Modes/Functions . .172 Trailer Towing ...... 320 Warning and Indicator Lights on Arranging Load on Trailer .....320 Analog Instrument ...... 154 Tire Pressure Adjustment ...... 321 Warnings when Driving ...... 15 Towing Tips ...... 324 Warranty ...... 10 Trailer Light ...... 321 Accessories ...... 10 Trailer Towing Weight...... 320 Warranty Information...... 12 Transmission, Automatic ...... 225 Wheels ...... 374 Automatic Transmission Lever . .226 Wheels Maintenance ...... 374 Automatic Transmission Range . .227 Windows ...... 46 Malfunction and Overheating Auto Down/Auto Up Feature ....46 Conditions...... 230 Open the Windows with RKE Transmission Manual Release of Transmitter and Ignition Off ....47 P (Park) Position ...... 336 Reset Auto-Up/Down ...... 47 Transmitter, Key fob RKE Window and Sunshade Lockout Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Button ...... 47 Key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Wipers and Washers...... 124 Vehicle ...... 43 Headlight On with Windshield Wipers ...... 126 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . .33 Rain Sensing Windshield Updating ...... 9 Wipers ...... 125 9 Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . .127

403 Maserati S.p.A. & Maserati North America, Inc. reserve the right to make changes and/or modifications to the content and all technical information and specifications without prior notification.

Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print.

© 2018. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved.

Publication n. 910042176 - 1st Edition - 01/2018 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A. *1662050* *1662050*

Owner’s manual

Owner’s manual MODENA 41121 - I

·

2 2 3

COM , . I T NOTTI E M MASERA RO . I C

WWW VIALE

·

A P S TI A MASER

*910042176* *910042176*